JP2021166893A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing a player's interest in a game.SOLUTION: First identification information indicating a determination result of a first determination and second identification information indicating a determination result of a second determination are displayed in display means. While dynamic display of the second identification information is executed by second dynamic display execution means is executed, second ball entry information acquired by ball entry information acquisition means on the basis of the fact that a game ball newly enters a second ball entry means is stored in second ball entry information storage means at least until second determination means executes a second determination. As a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the first identification information which is executed by the first dynamic display execution means, on the basis of at least the number of pieces of second ball entry information stored in the second ball entry information storage means, one dynamic display period is selected from a plurality of predetermined periods by period selection means. Thereby, a player's interest in a game can be enhanced.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

For gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a ball entering the starting port installed in the game area is detected, a variable display of a special symbol is executed on the display device, which is advantageous when a predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed. Some are given a hit state. Some of these conventional gaming machines are provided with a plurality of starting ports in the gaming area, and the starting ports that are easy to enter are different depending on the launching direction of the ball to improve the interest.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2005-30493

However, further improvement of interest is required.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's interest in playing a game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a first ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, a second entry means different from the first entry means, and the first entry means. The first ball entry information is acquired based on the game ball entering the ball means, and the second entry information is acquired based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means. Obtained by the ball information acquisition means, the first determination means that executes the first determination based on the first ball entry information acquired before the ball entry information acquisition means, and the ball entry information acquisition means. The second discrimination means for executing the second discrimination based on the second ball entry information, the first identification information indicating the discrimination result of the first discrimination, and the discrimination result of the second discrimination are shown. A display means capable of displaying the second identification information, a first dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying the first identification information by the display means, and a dynamic display means for the second identification information. While the second dynamic display executing means for executing the display and the second dynamic display executing means are executing the dynamic display of the second identification information, a game ball is newly sent to the second entering means. The second entry information acquired by the entry information acquisition means based on the entry of the ball has been stored at least until the second determination by the second determination means is executed. The second ball information storage means stored in the second ball information storage means as a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the ball information storage means and the first identification information executed by the first dynamic display execution means. A period selection means for selecting one dynamic display period from a plurality of predetermined periods based on at least the number of stored ball entry information is provided.

The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the first dynamic display executing means is the second identification information when the dynamic display of the second identification information is executed. The dynamic display of the first identification information can be executed while the dynamic display of the first identification information is executed.

The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein at least one second entry information is stored in the second entry information storage means in the period selection means. When the second ball entry information is not stored in the second ball entry information storage means, the ratio of selecting an advantageous dynamic display period advantageous to the player is higher than in the case where the second ball entry information is stored.

The gaming machine according to claim 4 is based on the fact that the gaming machine according to claim 3 has a specific determination result predetermined in the first determination or the second determination. As the type of the privilege game execution means for executing the advantageous privilege game and the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, the first privilege game and the second privilege more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game are used. A selection means capable of selecting one type of the privileged game from a plurality of types including a game is provided, and the selection means is more than a case where the specific determination result is obtained in the first determination. When a specific determination result is obtained in the second determination, the ratio of selecting the second privilege game is increased.

The gaming machine according to claim 5 is the first gaming machine according to claim 4, wherein the first determination is more likely to be executed than the second determination as the gaming state after the privileged game is completed. A gaming state setting means capable of setting at least a state and a second gaming state in which the second determination is more likely to be executed than the first gaming state is provided, and the period setting means is said to be in the first gaming state. When the second ball entry information is not stored in the second ball entry information storage means, the setting ratio of the advantageous dynamic display period becomes high.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, the first ball entry information is acquired by the ball entry information acquisition means based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means, while the second ball entry means. The second ball entry information is acquired based on the fact that the game ball has entered the means. Based on the first ball entry information acquired by the ball entry information acquisition means, the first discrimination is executed by the first discrimination means by the first discrimination means, and the second discrimination means is executed based on the second ball entry information. The second determination is performed. The first identification information indicating the determination result of the first determination and the second identification information indicating the determination result of the second determination are displayed on the display means. In the display means, the dynamic display of the first identification information is executed by the first dynamic display execution means, and the dynamic display of the second identification information is executed by the second dynamic display execution means. While the second dynamic display of the identification information is being executed by the second dynamic low display executing means, it is acquired by the ball entry information acquisition means based on the fact that the game ball newly enters the second ball entry means. The second ball entry information is stored at least until the second ball entry information storage means executes the second determination by the second determination means. The dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the first identification information executed by the first dynamic display execution means is based on at least the number of stored second ball entry information stored in the second ball entry information storage means. , One dynamic display period is selected from a plurality of predetermined periods by the period selection means.

This has the effect of improving the interest of the player in the game.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to claim 1, when the dynamic display of the second identification information is executed, the dynamic display of the second identification information is performed. Since the dynamic display of the first identification information can be executed by the first dynamic display executing means while the above is executed, the first discrimination by the first discriminating means and the second discriminating by the second discriminating means are performed. There is an effect that discrimination can be performed more efficiently.

According to the game machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effect of the game machine according to claim 1 or 2, at least one second ball entry information is stored in the second ball entry information storage means. When the second ball entry information is not stored in the second ball entry information storage means, the ratio of selecting the advantageous dynamic display period advantageous to the player by the period selection means is higher than that of the second ball entry information storage means. 2 There is an effect that the game can be performed so that the ball entry information storage means does not store the second ball entry information.

According to the gaming machine of claim 4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of claim 3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the result of a specific determination predetermined in the first determination or the second determination, the privilege game execution means executes the privilege game advantageous to the player. As the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, one is selected from a plurality of types including the first privilege game and the second privilege game which is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game. The type of award game is selected. The rate at which the second privilege game is selected by the selection means is higher when the specific determination result is obtained in the second determination than when the specific determination result is obtained in the first determination.

As a result, the second discriminating means can be used to play the game with the expectation that a specific discriminating result will be obtained, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

According to the gaming machine of claim 5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of claim 4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the game state after the privilege game is completed, the first game state in which the first determination is more likely to be executed than the second determination and the second determination in which the second determination is more likely to be executed than the first game state. The game state is configured to be configurable at least by the game state setting means. In the first game state, when the second ball entry information is not stored in the second ball entry information storage means, the ratio of setting the advantageous dynamic display period by the period setting means increases.

This has the effect of suppressing anomalous gaming methods that intentionally attempt to execute the second determination in the first gaming state in which the first determination is likely to be executed.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is an exploded perspective view of the variable winning device. (A) is a cross-sectional view of a variable winning device having a La-La cross section, (b) is a cross-sectional view of Lb-Lb, and (c) is a top view of the variable winning device. (A) to (b) are the rear view of a part of the variable winning apparatus. It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the operation of the flow path solenoid and the operation of an opening / closing plate in one round of a jackpot. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the reach effect, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the special super reach effect, which is one aspect of the reach effect. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display content at the time of entering the chance mode A, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content at the end of the chance mode A. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the structure of the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a first hit random number counter C1 in the first embodiment and a jackpot determination value in a special symbol. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship, and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter C2 in the first embodiment and the jackpot type in the special symbol. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second hit random number counter C4 in the first embodiment and the hit in the ordinary symbol, and (b) is a small hit type counter in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between C5 and the small hit type in the special symbol. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal table in the first embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the table for consecutive villas / chance B in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the table for chance A in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of the RAM of the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the transition method of the game state in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the ROM configuration of the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the RAM configuration of the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. be. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of a display control device. (A) to (c) are explanatory views for explaining the image at the time of power-on. (A) is an explanatory view for explaining the back surface A, and (b) is an explanatory view for explaining the back surfaces B to D. (A) to (c) are explanatory views explaining the back surface E. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the transfer data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a drawing list schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the 1st special symbol variation start processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the game state update process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which showed the 1st special symbol jackpot determination processing executed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart which showed the 1st special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the 1st special symbol fluctuation stop processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the chance mode setting process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the 2nd special symbol change start processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination processing executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which showed the 2nd special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the 2nd special symbol fluctuation stop processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol variation processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the thru gate passing process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation monitoring process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the fraud monitoring process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control processing executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process which is executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the abnormality processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation pattern selection process executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. (A) is a flowchart showing the opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the round number command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. .. It is a flowchart which showed the ending command processing executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the rear image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the warning image setting process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the pointer update process executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the drawing process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table in the modified example of the first embodiment, and (b) is for normal use (when special figure 2 is held) in the modified example of the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the table schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the table for consecutive villa / chance B (second half) in the modified example of the first embodiment, and (b) is the chance in the modified example of the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the table for A (the latter half) schematically. It is a flowchart which showed the 1st special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the modification of 1st Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing the chance A time selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the modified example of the first embodiment, and (b) is the main control in the modified example of the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the normal time selection process executed by the MPU in the apparatus. It is a flowchart which showed the continuous villa time selection process executed by MPU in the main control device in the modification of 1st Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the structure of the ROM of the main control unit in the second embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern scenario table in the second embodiment. be. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of the RAM of the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the game state update process 3 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the 1st special symbol variation pattern selection process 3 executed by MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot end processing 3 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the structure of the ROM of the main control device in the third embodiment, and (b) is the first hit random number counter C1 in the third embodiment and the jackpot determination value in the special symbol. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship, and FIG. 3C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter C2 in the third embodiment and the jackpot type in the special symbol. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the small hit type counter C5 in the third embodiment and the small hit determination value in the special symbol, and (b) is a variation pattern in the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the scenario table schematically. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of the RAM of the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot control process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot end processing 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the small hit control process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. (A) and (b) are front views of the sorting unit according to the fourth embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the structure of the ROM of the main control device in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 in the fourth embodiment and the jackpot type in the special symbol. It is a schematic diagram which shows the relationship schematically, and (c) is the schematic diagram which schematically showed the correspondence relation between the 2nd hit random number counter C4 in 4th Embodiment, and the hit in a normal symbol. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern table in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal table in the fourth embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the table for probabilistic variation in the fourth embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the variation pattern scenario table in the fourth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fall lottery table in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main control device in the fourth embodiment. .. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically an example of the game state after the end of a big hit in 4th Embodiment, and the transition of the reference variation pattern table. It is a flowchart which showed the 1st special symbol variation start processing 5 executed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the 1st special symbol variation stop processing 5 executed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the 2nd special symbol change start processing 5 executed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination process 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the 2nd special symbol change stop process 5 executed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the normal symbol variation processing 5 executed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot end processing 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and entry ports 64, 640, 67 and the like is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 11) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the front frame with the side on which the hinge 19 is provided as an opening / closing axis. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two sheets of glass is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when the effect or background displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which will be described later, is changed.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the area around the illumination portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and driving of the ball launch unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Touch sensor 51a for this purpose, push-button type stop switch 51b that stops firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and variable resistor that detects the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 by the change in electrical resistance. (Not shown) and is built-in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the operation amount, depending on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

In the present embodiment, the configuration is not limited to the above, but the configuration is such that the main control device 110 and other control devices detect the game ball launched by the ball launching unit 112a, and the solenoid of the ball launching unit 112a. May be configured to detect that has fired a game ball. Further, the number of detected game balls may be counted and stored until a process such as RAM clear is executed.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower portion of the front surface of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "dollar box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails and windmills for ball guidance and rails 61, 62, a general winning opening 63, and a first. The ball entry port 64, the second ball entry port 640, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled and configured, and the peripheral edge portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first entry opening 64, the second entry opening 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are arranged in the game board. It is fixed from the front side of 13 by a wood screw or the like. Further, the front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a starting port or the like is arranged and the launched ball is arranged) formed on the front surface of the game board 13 by being divided by two rails 61 and 62 and an arc member 70. The area where it flows down). Further, the game area includes all areas in which the game ball that has passed through the return ball prevention member 68 flows down before passing through the out port 66 and the winning port.

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center. Further, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is used as a base between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60.

In this pachinko machine 10, when a ball enters either the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640, a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, and the ball is a normal entry opening. When 67 is passed, a lottery of ordinary symbols (second symbol) is performed. In the special symbol lottery performed for entering the ball into the first ball opening 64 or the second ball opening 640, it is determined whether the special symbol is a big hit or not, and it is judged as a special symbol big hit. If so, the jackpot type is also determined. When the jackpot of the special symbol is reached, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state, and the special winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed, or until 10 balls are won. ) It is released, and the opening is repeated the number of times (number of rounds) according to the jackpot type. As a result, a large number of balls are won in the specific winning opening 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in the normal case. There are 6 types of special symbols, "Big hit A" to "Big hit F", and after the end of the special game state, as added value after the end of the big hit, the game according to the result of the big hit game Value (game value) is given to the player. The four types of "big hits A to D" are jackpot types that can be determined when a big hit is obtained in a lottery executed when the ball enters the first entrance 64. The two types of "big hits E and F" are jackpot types that can be determined when a big hit is obtained in a lottery executed when the ball enters the second entrance 640. Hereinafter, for the sake of simplification of the explanation, the lottery executed when the ball enters the first entry port 64 is referred to as the "first special symbol lottery", and the ball enters the second entry. The lottery that is executed when the ball enters the mouth 640 is called a "second special symbol lottery".

When a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, the first symbol display device 37 starts variable display of the special symbol, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds to 60 seconds) has elapsed, the lottery result is obtained. The special symbol indicating is stopped and displayed. When a ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entry times is determined for each type of entry opening. Each is held up to four times, and the number of held balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display is completed in the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first entry port 64 or the second entry port 640 remains, the next special symbol lottery is performed and the lottery is performed. , The variable display according to the lottery is started.

On the other hand, in the lottery of the normal symbol performed for the passage of the ball at the normal entrance 67, whether or not the normal symbol is a hit is determined. When it hits a normal symbol, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is changed to the open position for a predetermined time (for example, 0.9 seconds or 1 second), so that the second entrance 640 is opened. Be released. In the normal state, since the electric accessory 640a is arranged at the closed position, the second entry port 640 is closed. Therefore, when the ball hits the normal symbol, the ball can easily enter the second entrance 640, and as a result, the special symbol can be easily drawn.

Further, when the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed, the variable display of the normal symbol is started on the second symbol display device 83, and the lottery result is shown after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed. The normal symbol is stopped and displayed. If a ball passes through the normal entry port 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passes is suspended up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is held by the first symbol display device 37. Along with being displayed, it is also shown on the second symbol hold lamp 84. When the variable display is completed in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal entry port 67 remains, the next normal symbol lottery is performed and the variable display according to the lottery is displayed. It will be started.

As described above, as the jackpot type of the special symbol, six types of "big hit A" to "big hit F" are provided. When "Big hit A" and "Big hit E" are reached, the number of rounds is 16 rounds in a special gaming state (16 rounds big hit). On the other hand, when it becomes "big hit B" and "big hit C", the number of rounds becomes a special game state of 12 rounds (12 rounds big hit), and when it becomes "big hit D" and "big hit F", the number of rounds is both. Becomes a special game state for 4 rounds (4 rounds jackpot). Further, when a specific condition is satisfied during the jackpot game (when the ball passes the V winning switch 65e3 described later), the game shifts to a high probability state of the special symbol (during the probability change of the special symbol) after the jackpot ends. When a high-probability state of a special symbol is given, the high-probability state of the special symbol continues from the end of the jackpot until the change of the special symbol ends 100 times (until the 101st change starts). .. Although the details will be described later, the jackpots A and B and the jackpots E and F are configured so that the ball can easily pass through the V winning switch 65e3 during the jackpot game. On the other hand, in the jackpots C and D, it is difficult for the ball to pass through the V winning switch 65e3 during the jackpot game. Therefore, rather than the lottery of the first special symbol in which the jackpot C and D can be determined, the second special symbol in which either the jackpot E or F (that is, the jackpot in which the ball easily passes through the V winning switch 65e3) is determined). The lottery is more advantageous for the player.

In addition, after the jackpots other than "Big hit D" are completed among the above jackpots, as an added value after the jackpot ends, the hit probability of the normal symbol increases after the jackpot ends, and the second special symbol changes. The time is shortened. The state in which the hit probability of the normal symbol is increased continues from the end of the big hit until the change of the special symbol ends 100 times (until the 101st change starts). As a result, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second entry port 640, so that the lottery of the second special symbol, which is advantageous for the player, becomes easy to be executed. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player. In the normal state of the normal symbol, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol (10 minutes) is basically extremely longer than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol (7 seconds to 90 seconds). Therefore, if the game is played aiming at the second entry port 640 in the normal state of the normal symbol, the game efficiency is significantly lowered, so that the game can be played aiming at the first entry port 64.

Here, the "high probability state of the special symbol" means a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased, that is, a so-called "high probability state of the special symbol" (probability change state of the special symbol), in other words, a special gaming state. It is a state of the game in which it is easy to shift to (big hit). On the other hand, the case where it is not the "high probability state of the special symbol" is called the "low probability state of the special symbol", which means that the jackpot probability is lower than the probability variation state of the special symbol, that is, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is normal. Indicates a state (normal state of a special symbol). In addition, in the "normal symbol time saving state" (normal symbol high probability state), the winning probability of the normal symbol increases and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol becomes shorter, and the lottery of the second special symbol is executed. It refers to an easy game state. On the other hand, when it is not the "normal symbol time saving state", it is called the "normal symbol normal state" (normal symbol low probability state), which means that the normal symbol hit probability is higher than the normal state, that is, during the time saving. Indicates a state in which the probability of hitting is low.

Hereinafter, the period during which the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot of the special symbol is referred to as the probability variation period of the special symbol. Further, the period during which the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state after the end of the special symbol jackpot is referred to as the normal symbol time reduction period.

As described above, in the jackpot of the special symbol in the present embodiment, the number of rounds at the time of jackpot is different depending on the type of jackpot. On the other hand, the number of rounds may be the same for all jackpot types (for example, all 8 rounds). Further, for example, the period during which the "normal symbol is shortened" may be changed according to the type of jackpot. In addition, instead of changing the period during which the "normal symbol time is shortened", the time for opening the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 or the electric accessory is released by hitting one ordinary symbol. The number of times may be changed. Further, in the present embodiment, when the ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3 during the jackpot, it is in the "high probability state of the special symbol" from the end of the jackpot to the end of the fluctuation of the special symbol 100 times. , The probability change period of the special symbol is not limited to 100 times, and may be arbitrarily determined. In addition, the high probability state of the special symbol may be continued until the next big hit.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the initial setting is performed by turning on the power or the like, the pachinko machine 10 is always set to the "low probability state of the special symbol". After that, it becomes a big hit other than the big hit D, and when the ball does not pass through the V winning switch 65e3 during the big hit, it shifts from the "normal state of the normal symbol" to the "time saving state of the normal symbol". In this case, the set "time saving state of the normal symbol" is continued from the end of the jackpot until the variation display of the special symbol is completed 100 times. After becoming a big hit of a special symbol, if it does not become a big hit of a new special symbol by the end of the lottery of 100 special symbols, it returns to the "normal state of the normal symbol". The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to simultaneously execute the variation display based on the lottery of the first special symbol and the variation display based on the lottery of the second special symbol (using the simultaneous variation method). There is). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the lottery of the other special symbol may be executed and the variation display may be started while the 100th variation display of the special symbol in the time saving state is being executed. In this case, the time saving state is configured to end when the lottery condition for the 101st special symbol is satisfied after the time saving state is set. As a result, when a relatively long fluctuation time (for example, 90 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation time of the 100th fluctuation display, the short fluctuation time is continuously selected in the lottery of the other special symbol. It is possible to prevent (suppress) a problem in which the number of time reductions is substantially increased.

If a new jackpot type other than jackpot D is selected while the "normal symbol time saving state" is being continued, the "normal symbol time saving state" will be further changed to 100 special symbols after the end of the new jackpot. It continues until the fluctuation display ends.

The same applies to the probability variation state of the special symbol, and if the 101st special symbol lottery condition is satisfied during the execution of the variation display based on the 100th special symbol lottery out of the 100 probability variation states. At that point, the probability change state is terminated and the special symbol is set to the low probability state. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the 101st special symbol lottery from becoming a high probability.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in a part of the case where the lottery result of the special symbol is missed, the specific winning opening 65a is won for a predetermined time (for example, until 3 seconds elapse, or 10 balls are won. There is a small hit that is open (until you do). Since this small hit is a kind of loss, the game state is not changed, but after the small hit is completed, the second special symbol is displayed over a predetermined number of times (10 times, 20 times, or 100 times). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display due to the lottery becomes shorter (to 3 seconds). As described above, in the normal state of the normal symbol, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol becomes extremely long (600 seconds), so if the ball is continuously launched aiming at the second entry port 640, the game efficiency is extremely deteriorated. , It is disadvantageous for the player. On the other hand, after the small hit is completed, the fluctuation time is shortened over the fluctuation display of a predetermined number of times, and the ball is launched aiming at the second entry port 640 during the predetermined number of times, so that the second special The lottery of symbols can be easily executed. That is, it is in an advantageous state for the player for a predetermined number of times. Therefore, in the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol), which is the game state in which the player stays for the longest time in the game, the game can be performed with the expectation of a small hit. In addition, since it is possible to shift to an advantageous state without going through a big hit, it is possible to give a sharp impression to the game in the normal state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. In the following description, the state in which the lottery of the second special symbol set a predetermined number of times is easily executed after the small hit is referred to as "chance mode A". On the other hand, among the states in which "chance mode A" is not set, the low-probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol are the "normal mode", the low-probability state of the special symbol, and The time-saving state of the normal symbol is called "chance mode B", and the high-probability state of the special symbol and the time-saving state of the normal symbol is called "renso mode".

A first symbol provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right side in FIG. 2). A display device 37 is arranged. The first symbol display device 37 displays according to each control performed by the main control device 110, which will be described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a display or fluctuate by indicating whether or not a lottery of special symbols performed in association with entering the first ball opening 64 (starting winning) is being executed by the lighting state. As a stop symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is shown by a lighting state, or a ball entered in the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640. Of these, the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) whose fluctuation has not been executed, is indicated by the lighting state.

When a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 while the special symbol (first symbol) is variablely displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the ball enters the ball. The number of times is reserved up to 4 times, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640 are each held up to a maximum of four times, but the maximum number of times of holding is limited to four times. It may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during the jackpot, an error display, and the like. The LED 37a is configured so that the emission color (for example, red, green, blue) of each LED is different, and depending on the combination of the emission colors, various gaming states (high probability state of a special symbol) of the pachinko machine 10 are used with a small number of LEDs. Or, it is possible to display (such as during the time reduction of ordinary symbols). Further, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a jackpot, the jackpot type (special symbol according to the jackpots A to D). (1st symbol) is shown.

Further, in the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. .. In the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 (starting prize), the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 with this as a trigger. Will be executed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of an 8-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbol rows of left, middle, and right can be displayed. Is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the game state displayed by the control of the main control device 110 is displayed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 displays the first symbol display device 37. A decorative display is made accordingly. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 to 10. FIG. 8 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 8A is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 8B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

The third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols with numbers from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is composed of a rear symbol consisting of a wooden box with numbers from "0" to "9", of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1,3,5,7,9) are , A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached symbols that imitate characters such as furoshiki and helmets, which are almost full on the front of the wooden box. Even numbers are added to the lower right side of the attached symbol so that they are small in green and displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 11) described later is a big hit, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. , The jackpot is configured to occur after the fluctuation display is finished. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbol is not aligned.

As shown in FIG. 8A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower halves, and the lower two-thirds are the main display area Dm for variable display of the third symbol, and the rest. The upper 1/3 of is a sub-display area Ds for displaying the advance notice effect, the character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, middle, and right, and three symbol columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are periodically scrolled from top to bottom to perform variable display. In particular, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of this main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. This stop display state is held for at least 1 second. By displaying the stopped 3rd symbol for a certain period of time (1 second or more) in this way, whether or not the player is a combination of the 3rd symbols corresponding to the jackpot (the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot). It is possible to prevent overlooking (whether or not there is). Further, if a combination of jackpot symbols (in the present embodiment, a combination of the same main symbols) is aligned on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot moving image (opening effect) is displayed as a jackpot.

Further, if the combination of the third symbols displayed as stopped is a combination corresponding to the detachment and there is a reserved ball, the variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the reserved ball is started after the stop display for 1 second. .. If there are a plurality of reserved balls, the lottery is executed based on the reserved balls corresponding to the oldest incoming balls in time.

On the other hand, when the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the deviation of the special symbol is stopped and displayed for 1 second in the state where the holding ball does not exist, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses or a new ball enters either the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640. Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed, a demo effect indicating that the game has not been executed is displayed. It is rare that the player does not enter the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 even though the player has continuously fired the ball for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds). In most cases, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) because the player has quit the game, and the pachinko machine 10 has not played the game at all. to cause. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed from the stop display of the third symbol, it is determined that the player is not playing the game, and the demonstration effect is started. do. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily determine whether or not the game is being performed based on the presence or absence of the display of the demonstration effect. On the other hand, if a new ball enters the first entry port 64 and the second entry opening 640 before the predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses, the ball corresponds to the new entry. The variable display of the third symbol is executed.

The sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is further divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Of these, the small area Ds1 displays the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the balls that have been entered into the first entry port 64 and the second entry opening 640. The small areas Ds2 and Ds3 are areas for displaying the advance notice effect image. Further, the third symbol is displayed in the small area Ds3. Although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10, the types of special symbols (either the first special symbol or the second special symbol) in which the lottery is easily executed are configured differently depending on the game state. In the main display area Dm, a variable display is displayed when a lottery of a special symbol that is easy to execute in the current gaming state is executed. On the other hand, in the small area Ds3, a variable display is displayed when a lottery of a special symbol that is difficult to execute in the current gaming state is executed.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 8B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, a total of three main symbols of the third symbol different from the main symbol displayed in the main display area Dm are displayed with respect to the small area Ds3 on the right. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character 710 (a boy with a headband in this embodiment) usually performs a predetermined action, and sometimes a special action different from the predetermined action or another character performs a predetermined action. A notice will be produced by appearing.

On the other hand, when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 while the variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), and , If a ball enters the second entrance 640 while the variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol is being performed, the number of times the ball is entered is held up to 4 times, and the number of reserved balls is It is shown by the first symbol display device 37, and is also shown in the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. Specifically, the symbol (first reserved ball number symbol) displayed in the upper half of the small area Ds1 indicates the number of reserved balls with respect to the first entrance 64, and the symbol displayed in the lower half (second reserved ball number symbol). The number of reserved balls symbol) indicates the number of reserved balls for the second entrance 640. FIG. 8 illustrates a case where four first reserved symbols are displayed while zero second reserved symbols are displayed (all the second reserved symbols are blank).

In the present embodiment, the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640 are each held up to a maximum of four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is four times. The number of times is not limited, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls symbol in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is different by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of hold balls for the maximum number of hold balls, and the number of hold balls may be displayed according to the number of hold lamps in the lit state.

Next, the reach effect in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9A is a diagram showing an example of reach effect. As shown in FIG. 9A, the main symbols with the same numbers are stopped and displayed on the effective line L1 of the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3, and only the middle symbol row Z2 is variablely displayed. When the state is reached, the characters "reach !!" are displayed in the middle symbol column Z2. As a result, the player can easily recognize that a reach state (chance that the main symbols with the same numbers are aligned on the effective line L1) has occurred.

In the present embodiment, as the mode of the variation effect in which the reach effect occurs, the variation time is short, the same main symbol is aligned on the effective line L1 (it becomes a big hit), and the normal reach with low expectation and the variation time are long. , A super reach with a high expectation that the same main symbols are aligned (a big hit) is provided on the effective line L1.

Next, the display mode of the special super reach in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 9 (b). This special super reach is one of the above-mentioned super reach, and is a mode that can be selected only when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a specific lottery result. Specifically, it will be the most unfavorable jackpot type (the number of rounds is 4 rounds, the ball is difficult to pass through the V winning switch 65e3, and the jackpot D is not given a time saving state), or the most advantageous jackpot type (chance mode). This special super reach is selected only when A becomes a small hit C) which is set 100 times.

FIG. 9B shows a display mode when the speed of the middle symbol row Z2, which is variablely displayed, becomes low after the special super reach is selected and the reach effect (see FIG. 9A) is executed. It is a figure which showed an example. As shown in FIG. 9A, in the special super reach, the eyes of the boy character displayed in the small area Ds2 look like burning like a flame, and the characters "great chance" are displayed in the small area Ds3. Appears with a balloon displayed inside. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the variable display this time is likely to indicate a lottery result that is advantageous to the player. In the special super reach, the symbols that are scrolled from top to bottom at low speed in the middle symbol row Z2 are the symbols with the letters "chance mode" and the symbols with the reach. There are only two types. Here, the symbol with "chance mode" means the transition to chance mode A, and when it is stopped and displayed on the effective line L1, it becomes a small hit C and 100 times after the end of the small hit. Chance mode A is set.

Even if the jackpot D is obtained, the number of prize balls is small, and neither the probability change state nor the time saving state is given after the jackpot, so that the degree of advantage for the player is low. On the other hand, when the small hit C is reached, the chance mode A in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed is set over a maximum of 100 variable displays after the small hit C is completed, so that the player is 100. You can receive almost the same profit as the time reduction period is set. Therefore, when the special super reach is executed, the game can be performed in the hope that it will be a small hit C rather than a big hit D.

In a general pachinko machine, when the variable display is executed, the game is played with the expectation that the third symbols with the same numbers will be aligned (that is, it will be a big hit). In the machine 10, when a special super reach occurs, it is possible to confirm the effect result in the hope that the third symbols with the same numbers will not be aligned. That is, it is possible to provide a novel game property that the game can be performed with the expectation that the hit will be a deviation (small hit C) having a high degree of advantage rather than a big hit (big hit D) having a low degree of advantage.

FIG. 10A is a diagram showing the display contents when the symbol with the characters “chance mode” is stopped and displayed on the effective line L1. As shown in FIG. 10A, when the symbol indicating the transition to chance mode A (the symbol with the letters "chance mode") is stopped and displayed, "chance mode GET !! Right-handed !!" A balloon with the characters "" appears in the small area Ds3. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the mode has been changed to the chance mode. In addition, the player can easily understand that right-handed hitting (a game method in which a ball is launched into the path on the right side of the game board 13 to aim at the second entrance 640) should be performed. Further, in the lower left of the small area Ds3, a substantially rectangular display area with the characters "100 times remaining" is displayed. This display area shows the remaining number of lottery in the chance mode A, and the number of times displayed is subtracted by 1 each time the fluctuation is started. With this display area, the player can easily understand the remaining number of lottery in the chance mode A.

FIG. 10B is a diagram showing the display contents at the time when the number of lottery times set as the chance mode A is completed. As shown in FIG. 10B, when the chance mode A ends, a balloon with the characters "Chance mode ends ... Return to left-handed!" Is displayed in the small area Ds3. .. As a result, the player is informed that the chance mode A has ended and that the player should hit left (a game method in which the ball is launched into the path on the left side of the game board 13 to aim at the first entrance 64). Can be easily understood.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. The second symbol display device 83 performs variable display or fluctuates by indicating whether or not the lottery of the normal symbol, which is performed when the ball passes through the normal entry port 67, is being executed by the lighting state. As a stop symbol after the end, a normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is shown by a lighting state.

More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the ball passes through either the left or right normal entry port 67, the symbol of "○" and the symbol of "x" as the normal symbol (second symbol) are displayed. A variable display is performed in which the symbols are alternately lit. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “○”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is used for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in an operating state (opened), and as a result, a ball can easily enter the second entry port 640. The number of times the ball has passed through the normal entry port 67 is held up to 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and also lit by the second symbol holding lamp 84. .. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, and the first symbol display device 37. And a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to 4 times, but is 3 times or less, or 3 times or less, as in the case of the 1st entrance 64 and the 2nd entrance 640. It may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol hold lamp 84.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 into which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the first ball entry port 64, the first ball entry port switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first ball entry port switch is turned on. A special symbol is drawn by the main control device 110, and the display according to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. In addition, the first entry port 64 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters. When the ball is launched into the path on the left side of the front view with respect to the variable display device unit 80 (so-called left-handed impact), the ball can easily enter the first ball entry port 64. In addition, although the rate of entering the ball is lower than that of hitting left, the ball is also hit when the ball is hit into the path on the right side of the front view with respect to the variable display device unit 80 (so-called right hit). May enter the ball.

A second ball entry port 640, through which a ball can enter, is arranged on the lower right side of the front view with respect to the first ball entry port 64. When a ball enters the second entrance 640, the second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second entrance switch is turned on. A special symbol is drawn by the main control device 110, and the display according to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. In addition, the second entry port 640 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters. As shown in FIG. 2, the second entrance 640 is provided with an electric accessory 640a that can be opened and closed on the right side, and when the electric accessory 640a is opened, a ball that flows down from the right direction is provided. It becomes easier to enter the ball. Therefore, in order to allow the ball to enter the second entry port 640, it is basically sufficient to hit the ball to the right. In addition, although the rate of entering a ball is lower than that of a right-handed ball, it is possible to enter the second ball-entry port 640 even when the ball hitting the left-handed ball flows down to the right side of the first ball-entry port 64. There is sex.

A variable winning device 65 is arranged at the upper right of the front view of the second ball opening 640, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 becomes a big hit, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be the stop symbol of the big hit after a predetermined time (variation time) has elapsed. At the same time, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the gaming state shifts to the special gaming state in which a larger amount of prize balls is paid out than in the normal state. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls are won). That is, the opening / closing plate 65f1 that normally closes the specific winning opening 65a is opened by a big hit, and the ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 0.5 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won) even when the lottery of the special symbol is a small hit.

Further, inside the variable winning device 65, a plurality of flow paths (normal discharge flow path 65e1 and special discharge flow path 65e2) through which the ball can pass are provided. The game ball that has flowed into the variable winning device 65 flows down one of the flow paths (normal discharge flow path 65e1 and special discharge flow path 65e2) and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. Further, the special discharge flow path 65e2 is provided with a V winning switch 65e3 that gives a high probability state (probability change state) of a special symbol after a big hit by passing a ball. The special discharge flow path 65e2 is in a state where it can pass only in the first round of the jackpot. Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the period during which the ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a (the opening / closing plate 65f1 is opened) and the special discharge passage for the ball in the first round of the jackpot. The period during which 65e2 can flow down is configured to be different depending on the type of jackpot.

More specifically, as the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing plate 65f1 in the first round of the jackpot, the opening time is relatively short, and it is difficult to allow the ball to enter the specific winning opening 65a during the opening period of the opening / closing plate 65f1. Either the opening / closing operation (opening / closing pattern) or the opening / closing operation (opening / closing pattern) in which the opening period is relatively long and the ball can be easily entered into the specific winning opening 65a during the opening period of the opening / closing plate 65f1. , Set according to the jackpot type (see FIG. 7). During the opening period of the opening / closing plate 65f1, the ball can flow down the special discharge flow path 65e2, so pay attention to whether or not the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a in the first round of the jackpot. You can play a game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game during the big hit from becoming monotonous.

Here, the configuration of the variable winning device 65 will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 to 6. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 4, the variable winning device 65 is combined with an opening forming member 65b arranged so as to project toward the front side of the game board 13 and the back side of the opening forming member 65b to form a variable winning device 65. A base member 65c for screwing to the game board 13 and a plurality of LEDs arranged on the back side of the base member 65c and for lighting the LEDs from the back side of the base member 65c to the front side of the pachinko machine 10. It has an arranged LED substrate 65d, a back cover body 65e that sandwiches the LED substrate 65d with a base member 65c, and an opening / closing plate 65f1 for opening / closing a specific winning opening 65a formed in the opening forming member 65d. The opening / closing unit 65f, the flow path cover body 65g that is combined on the back side of the back cover body 65e to form a flow path, and the game projecting into the flow path formed by the back cover body 65e and the flow path cover body 65g. A switching member 65h for switching the flow path of the sphere, a link member 65i locked with the switching member 65h, a back cover body 65j arranged on the back side of the flow path cover body 65g, and the back surface of the back cover body 65j. It is composed of a flow path solenoid 65k that is fixed to the side and operates the link member 65i, and a fixing cover body 65m that covers the flow path solenoid 65k from the back side and is fixed to the back cover body 65j with screws. There is.

FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65. FIG. 5 (c) is a top view of the variable winning device 65, and FIG. 5 (b) is a cross-sectional view of Lb-Lb of the variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 5B, the variable winning device 65 is formed with a specific winning opening 65a, which is an opening through which a game ball can enter. The specific winning opening 65a has a substantially rectangular opening formed above the pachinko machine 10, and is inclined downward to the left so that the game ball passing through the opening is guided to the left in FIG. 5 (b). The bottom surface is formed. At the left end of the bottom surface, a detection port 65a1 composed of a magnetic sensor 65c1 for detecting a winning of a game ball is arranged. The game ball that has passed through the detection port 65a1 is guided to the distribution flow path formed on the back side of the back cover body 65e shown in FIG. 6B.

As shown in FIG. 5B, the opening of the specific winning opening 65a is an open state in which the game ball can be entered by the opening / closing plate 65f1 configured by a shutter mechanism that can appear and disappear from the game board 13 side, and the ball cannot be entered. It is variable to a closed state where it is possible (difficult to enter the ball). In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the opening / closing plate 65f1, and the game ball can roll over the upper part of the opening / closing door. Further, in the open state, the opening / closing plate 65f1 is configured to be retracted from the inside of the specific winning opening 65a by being retracted to the inside of the base member 65c (inside the game board 13).

With this configuration, when the opening of the variable winning device 65 is closed, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the variable winning device 65 and is guided to the second entrance 640 side. It is configured as follows. Therefore, even during the time-saving game (including during the probabilistic game), it is possible to put the game ball into the second entrance 640 while hitting the right side, and the game method immediately shifts to the left side after the big hit game. You can reduce the trouble of changing. Therefore, the player can play the game more easily.

Further, in the open state, since the surface orthogonal to the direction in which the game balls flow down can be configured as the opening of the variable winning device 65, more game balls can be efficiently won in the specific winning opening 65a. Therefore, the time required for the jackpot game can be shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

FIG. 5A is a cross-sectional view taken along the line La-La shown in FIG. 5B. As shown in FIG. 5A, the magnetic sensor 65c1 having the detection port 65a1 is fixed to the base member 65c so that the detection port 65a1 is tilted toward the distribution flow path side of the back cover body 65e.

With reference to FIG. 6, a configuration will be described in which the game ball guided to the distribution flow path of the back cover body 65e is distributed to the normal discharge flow path 65e1 and the special discharge flow path 65e2, which will be described later.

FIG. 6A is a rear view of the back cover body 65e showing a state in which the switching member 65h is operated so that the game ball is distributed to the special discharge flow path 65e2. As shown in FIG. 6A, the switching member 65h has a locking hole 65h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 65i is inserted and a guide piece 65h2 for guiding the game ball, and the flow path cover body 65g. It is rotatably supported from the back side. Here, the flow path cover body 65g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 65h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 65h is rotated into the distribution flow path from the back surface side of the flow path cover body 65g. It is configured so that it can be arranged as possible.

As shown in FIG. 6A, the game ball guided into the distribution flow path from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 arranged diagonally downward to the left and guided to the special discharge flow path 65e2. NS. The game ball that has passed through the special discharge flow path 65e2 is detected by a V winning switch 65e3 composed of a magnetic sensor that can detect the passage of the game ball provided in the special discharge flow path 65e2, and is detected as an out ball outside the pachinko machine 10. Is discharged to.

Here, although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the gaming state after the jackpot game is a high-probability gaming state (as the gaming ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3 described above during the jackpot game. Probability change game state) is set. That is, the V winning switch 65e3 is configured as a winning opening for imparting a probabilistic gaming state. Further, the switching member 65h is configured to divide the gaming state after the big hit into a low-probability gaming state or a probabilistic gaming state.

In this way, since the game state set after the big hit game is changed by the flow route of the game ball that has won the specific winning opening 65a during the big hit game, it is possible to improve the interest of the player even during the big hit game. .. The time required to pass from the opening of the variable winning device 65 to the entrance of the special discharge flow path 65e2 (the opening surface closed by the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h) is configured to be 0.2 seconds at the shortest. There is. In the operation of the switching member 65h, the operation timing and the operation time are set in association with the elapsed time from the start of the jackpot. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 7, but in the present embodiment, the switching member 65h operates for 3 seconds after the start of the first round of the jackpot, and the special discharge flow that continues to the V winning switch 65e3. The road 65e2 is ready to pass.

Next, a case where the game ball is guided to the normal discharge flow path 65e1 will be described with reference to FIG. 6 (b). FIG. 6B is a diagram showing a state in which the flow path solenoid 65k is inactive and the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h closes the opening surface at the entrance of the special discharge flow path 65e2.

The game ball guided to the distribution flow path from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h and is guided to the normal discharge flow path 65e1. At the end of the normal discharge flow path 65e1, a discharge confirmation switch 65e4 composed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of a game ball is provided. Thereby, whether or not all the game balls that have entered the variable winning device 65 have been discharged can be determined by the total of the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 and the V winning switch 65e3. Therefore, when a problem such as ball clogging occurs in the variable winning device 65, the problem can be detected at an early stage.

In this way, the game ball that has won the specific winning opening 65a in the variable winning device 65 is detected by the magnetic sensor 65c1, and based on this, the prize ball (15 for one ball winning in this embodiment) is given to the player as a privilege. (Prize balls) can be paid out. In addition, by using the game ball after the detection to be configured so that it can be sorted whether or not it passes through the V winning switch 65e3, it is possible to execute a lottery as to whether or not to give a probabilistic game state. can. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated winning opening for giving the probabilistic gaming state separately from the variable winning device 65, and the space of the game board 13 can be effectively used.

Next, with reference to FIG. 7, the correspondence between the operation of the flow path solenoid 65k in one jackpot and the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing plate 65f1 will be described. As described above, in the present embodiment, the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1 in the first round of the jackpot is changed according to the jackpot type, so that the ease of flowing the ball with respect to the specific discharge flow path 65e2 is changed. There is. In the present embodiment, two types of patterns (a pattern in which the ball is difficult to enter into the specific winning opening 65a and a pattern in which the ball is easy to enter) are provided as the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1.

FIG. 7 is a diagram schematically showing the time-varying change of the operation of the flow path solenoid 65k and the opening / closing timing of the specific winning opening 65a for each jackpot type. As shown in the upper part of FIG. 7, the flow path solenoid 65k is kept off before the start of one round of jackpot. That is, before the start of one round, the ball can normally flow down to the discharge flow path 65e1 (see FIG. 6B). This off state continues until the start of one round. Then, when the first round is started, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to the ON state for only 3 seconds. That is, the ball can flow down to the special discharge flow path 65e2 (see FIG. 6A). When the period of the on state for 3 seconds ends, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to the off state again, and thereafter, it is kept in the off state until the jackpot ends.

Further, as shown in the middle part of FIG. 7, in the case of either jackpot C or D, when one round starts, the closed opening / closing plate 65f1 is opened. By opening the opening / closing plate 65f1, the ball can enter the inside of the variable winning device 65. This open state lasts only for 0.2 seconds. After 0.2 seconds have passed since the opening / closing plate 65f1 was opened, the closed state is maintained until the first round ends and the second round starts after an interval period of 5 seconds. The 1st round in the present embodiment ends when 10 balls enter the specific winning opening 65a or 3 seconds have elapsed from the start of the 1st round. Since it is very difficult to let the ball enter the specific winning opening 65a within 0.2 seconds, in most cases when the jackpots C and D are reached, the ball is made to flow down to the special discharge flow path 65e2. The jackpot ends without being able to do it. That is, since the ball cannot be passed through the V winning switch 65e3 during the jackpot, the probability variation state of the special symbol is not given after the jackpot ends. Therefore, when the jackpots are C and D, the gaming state after the jackpot is disadvantageous for the player as compared with other jackpot types. Although the probability is low, if the ball can be entered into the specific winning opening 65a within 0.2 seconds when the opening / closing plate 65f1 is opened, it is possible to shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit. Can be done. Therefore, even when the jackpot type is either jackpot C or D, it is possible to play the game with the expectation that the probability change state will be set after the jackpot ends.

Further, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 7, when any of the jackpots A, B, E, and F is obtained, the opening / closing plate 65f1 is opened for 3 seconds after the first round of the jackpot is started. That is, the period during which the flow path solenoid 65k is turned on coincides with the period during which the opening / closing plate 65f1 is set in the open state. Therefore, by allowing the ball to enter the specific winning opening 65a during a relatively long opening period, the V winning switch 65e3 can be easily passed. Therefore, in the case of jackpots A, B, E, and F, the ball can easily pass through the V winning switch 65e3 during the jackpot, and even the ball is launched toward the variable winning device 65 in the first round. Then, after the big hit, it is possible to shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the ease of transition to the probabilistic state is different depending on the jackpot type. As a result, it is possible to play the game with the expectation that an opening / closing pattern that can easily shift to the probabilistic state is set.

In the present embodiment, the opening period of the opening / closing plate 65f1 set when the jackpots A, B, E, and F are obtained coincides with the on period of the flow path solenoid 65k, but the present invention is limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, the on-period of the flow path solenoid 65k may be longer for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds). With this configuration, the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a just before the end of the opening period of the opening / closing plate 65f1 is allowed to flow down to the special discharge flow path 65e2 within a predetermined period (0.5 seconds). Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the occurrence of a situation in which the probabilistic state is not given even though the ball is entered into the specific winning opening 65a. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling dissatisfied.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. Attachment spaces K1 and K2 for attaching certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamps, etc. attached to the attachment space K1 are the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. Balls that do not win in any of the winning openings are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening 66. A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 11) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls is appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasing switch (FIGS. 3, 122). ing. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 12). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch (FIGS. 3, 122) is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is desired to be returned to the initial state.

<About the electrical configuration in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device in only one direction.

The main control device 110 executes the main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as a jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 12) for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, with reference to FIG. 12, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like use the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform a jackpot lottery, setting the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, drawing the display result of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. Used in.

For the jackpot lottery and the display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot (and small hit) lottery and the jackpot type (big hit symbol) are selected. Used to set the initial value of the first hit type counter C2 used for, the stop type counter C3 used for selecting the stop type, the fluctuation type counter CS1 used for selecting the fluctuation pattern, and the random number counter C1 per first. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the ordinary symbol (second symbol display device 83), and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Further, the small hit type counter C5 is used for selecting the small hit type. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 46). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although the details will be described later, in the RAM 203, each counter value is stored for each of the winning counter values for the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a and the second entry ball opening 640, in which the counter values for winning the first ball entrance 64 are stored. A second special symbol holding ball storage 203b to be stored is provided. In the present embodiment, the first entry port 64 and the second entry opening 640 are each provided with a maximum of four reserved balls, and a total of a maximum of eight reserved balls can be stored. Therefore, if the ball wins the first entry slot 64 during the period when the special symbol can be drawn, such as when the special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner or when the special symbol is not in the jackpot game, each counter value becomes the first. It is stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, and when a game ball wins in the second entrance 640, each counter value is stored in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b. After that, each counter value stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is moved to the execution area provided in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, and the first special symbol is variablely displayed (dynamically). Various settings and control processes for displaying) are executed. Similarly, each counter value stored in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b is moved to the execution area provided in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Various settings and control processing for this are executed.

On the other hand, during the period when the lottery of the special symbol is impossible, such as during the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol or during the jackpot game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the game ball is inserted into the first entrance 64. Alternatively, when the second ball opening 640 is won, if the number of reserved balls for the winning ball opening (starting port) is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment), each counter value is acquired. It is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b corresponding to the winning ball opening. In addition, when the number of reserved balls for the winning ball opening is the upper limit value (4 pieces in this embodiment) or more, each counter value or the like is not acquired and the prize balls (5 pieces in this embodiment) are not acquired. Only the prize ball) is treated as an invalid ball paid out to the player.

In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of reserved balls is set to 4 for each of the 1st entry port 64 and the 2nd entry port 640, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is less than 4 (for example). It may be 3) or more than 4 (for example, 8). In addition, a configuration in which an upper limit value is not provided may be used.

Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299), reaches the maximum value (for example, 299 in the case of a counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 299), and then becomes 0. It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 46).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the timing at which the ball wins the first ball opening 64 or the second ball opening 640. It is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. The value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is defined in the jackpot random number table (see FIG. 13B) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is set. When it matches the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot specified in the first hit random number table 202a, it is determined to be the jackpot of the special symbol.

Here, the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 13 (b). The first hit random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value (determination value) determined to be a hit in each game state is set in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Specifically, when the gaming state is a low-probability gaming state, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "0" in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. If it is "0", it is determined that it is a big hit. Further, when the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state, the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is within the range of "1 to 4". If it is within the range of "1 to 4", it is determined that it is a big hit. Further, regardless of the game state, in the lottery of the first special symbol, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is within the range of "295-299", and the range of "295-299" is determined. If it is inside, it is determined that it is a small hit.

Here, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a or the execution area of the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b must be a random number that is a small hit. For example, if it is a random number that is a small hit of a special symbol, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the one at the time of a small hit of the special symbol.

On the other hand, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the execution area of the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b is a random number that becomes a big hit of the special symbol. If so, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the one at the time of the big hit of the special symbol. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same execution area.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. As described above, in the low probability state of the special symbol, there is one value of the first random number counter C1 which is a big hit of the special symbol, and the random number value "0" is the first random number table as described above. It is stored in 202a. Since the total number of random numbers that are big hits is 1 while the total number of random numbers is 300, the probability of being a big hit of a special symbol is "1/300". On the other hand, in the high probability state of the special symbol, there are four values of the first random number counter C1 which is a big hit of the special symbol, and the random number values "1 to 4" are the first random number table as described above. It is stored in 202a. Since the total number of random numbers that are big hits is 4 while the total number of random numbers is 300 in this way, the probability of being a big hit of a special symbol is "1/75".

Further, the value of the first type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a big hit, the big hit type is selected based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 and the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 13C). The Rukoto. Specifically, it will be described later with reference to FIG. 13 (c).

The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disconnection displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after the reach occurs, the symbol is different from the symbol on which the reach is applied as the final stop symbol. Two stop (effect) patterns are selected: "out of reach" where the symbol stops (for example, in the range of 90 to 99) and "completely out of reach" (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) where reach does not occur. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and when a ball enters the first entry port 64, the value is the value of the RAM 203. It is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. When the ball enters the second entry port 640, the value is stored in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

From the value (random value) of the stop type selection counter C3, the random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by the stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Further, in the present embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability, and a range of random values set for each stop type of deviation according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol.

For example, in the probabilistic state of a special symbol, a jackpot is likely to occur, so the range of random values corresponding to the "completely off" stop type is wide, 0 to 89, so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary. Table is selected, "completely out of reach" is easily selected, and "out of reach" is narrowed to 90 to 99, so that "out of reach" is difficult to be selected. Further, in the low probability state of the special symbol, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of "completely off" is narrow as 0 to 79 in order to secure the ball entry time to the first entry port 64. A table for low probability is selected, it becomes difficult to select "completely out of reach", and the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of "out of reach" is widened to 80 to 99. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform many reach displays with a long effect time, so that the ball entry time to the first entry port 64 can be secured, and the variation display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. It will be easier to do.

Further, the small hit type counter C5 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit, the small hit type (small hit A) is based on the value of the small hit type counter and the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 14B). ~ C) will be selected. Specifically, it will be described later with reference to FIG. 14 (c).

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS1 determines one variation pattern from the set variation pattern table. A fluctuation time (dynamic display period) is set in this fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is also a counter for determining the fluctuation time. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 46) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The fluctuation pattern table 202d (see FIGS. 15 and 16) storing a random number value for determining one fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation from the value (random value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. It is provided inside.

A plurality of data tables for selecting a variation pattern are defined in the variation pattern table 202d (see FIGS. 15B and 16). In this fluctuation pattern table 202d, a plurality of fluctuation pattern tables dedicated to each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are set, and the fluctuation pattern table is set for each of the hit / fail determination results. There is. Details of each variation pattern table will be described later with reference to FIGS. 15 and 16.

The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is added in order in the range of 0 to 239, the maximum value (that is, 239) is reached, and then the counter returns to 0. Further, when the second hit random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second hit random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27), and the sphere passes through either the left or right normal start port (through gate) 67. When it is detected, it is acquired and stored in the normal map execution area of the RAM 203.

The value of the random number that normally hits the symbol is defined in the second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 14A) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and is the value of the second hit random number counter C4. However, when it matches the value of the random number to be the hit specified in the second hit random number table 202c, it is determined to be the hit of the normal symbol (second symbol). The details of the second random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. 14 (a).

FIG. 14A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second random number table 202c. In this second hit random number table 202c, when the probability of the normal symbol is low (during the normal state of the normal symbol), there are 199 random numbers that can be hit by the normal symbol, and the range is "5-203". .. Since the total number of random numbers that can be hit by the second random number counter C4 is 240 and the total number of random numbers that can be hit is 199, the probability of hitting a normal symbol is "199/240".

On the other hand, when the probability of the normal symbol is high (during the time saving state of the normal symbol), there are 200 random values that can be hit by the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 204". Since the total number of random numbers that can be taken by the second random number counter C4 is 240 and the total number of random numbers that can be hit is 200, the probability of hitting a normal symbol is "1 / 1.2". .. As described above, in the present embodiment, since the random value that is the hit of the normal symbol differs only by one between the low probability state of the normal symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol, the hit probabilities are almost the same. There is. Further, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 when the normal symbol hits are also the same. Therefore, the ease of entering the second ball entry port 640 is the same in the low probability state of the normal symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol. However, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described above, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the low probability state (normal state) of the normal symbol is relative to the fluctuation time in the high probability state (time reduction state) of the normal symbol. It becomes extremely long. As a result, in the low probability state (normal state) of the normal symbol, it is more difficult to execute the lottery of the second special symbol than in the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol. In the above, the player can be made to play the game aiming at the first entrance 64.

When the sphere passes through the normal start port 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the second symbol display device 83 executes the fluctuation display of the normal symbol for 3 seconds. Then, in the low probability state of the normal symbol, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5-203", it is determined that the player has won, and the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed. Later, the symbol "○" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol), and the second entry port 640 is opened only "0.9 seconds x 1 time". On the other hand, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, if the acquired value of the random number counter C4 per second is in the range of "5-204", it is determined that the player has won, and the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed. Later, a symbol "○" is lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol), and the second entry port 640 is opened only "1 second x 1 time". In this embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the opening time of the normal electric accessory, and the number of times of opening may be appropriately changed as long as the game playability is not impaired.

The normal figure variation type counter CS2 is configured as a loop counter in which 1 is added in order in the range of 0 to 99, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99), the counter returns to 0. When the game ball passes through the through gate 67, the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol is selected based on the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2. Specifically, a fluctuation pattern in which the value of the normal map fluctuation type counter CS2 is in the range of 0 to 99 (that is, the entire range) and the fluctuation time is 3 seconds is selected.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 46).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the values of the counters and the like. It is possible to execute the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83.

Returning to FIG. 11, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 11, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 46) when the power is cut off, and the restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 45) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 44) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

Next, the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 16. FIG. 13A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the present embodiment. In addition to the first hit random number table 202a and the second hit random number table 202c already described above, the ROM 202 is provided with at least a first hit type selection table 202b, a variation pattern table 202d, and a small hit type selection table 202e. Has been done.

First, the details of the first type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 13 (c). The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 13C) is a data table in which determination values for determining the jackpot type are stored for each type of special symbol, and the determination of the first hit type counter C2. The value is specified in association with each jackpot type. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning prize is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first hit type selection table 202b is compared. The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

As shown in FIG. 13 (c), "big hit A" is associated with the first special symbol in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 9". .. This jackpot A has 16 rounds. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 10 are counter values that become "big hit A", so if a big hit is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit A" is determined. The ratio is 10% (10/100). This "big hit A" is one of the big hit types with the largest number of rounds, and the opening / closing pattern of the specific winning opening 65a (easy) that allows the V winning switch 65e3 to pass through in the first round of the big hit (FIG. 7). (Refer to the lower row) is set, so it is easy to give a probability change state after a big hit. Therefore, it is one of the most advantageous jackpot types for players.

Further, in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "10 to 49", "big hit B" is associated and defined. This "big hit B" is a big hit with 12 rounds. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 40 counter values are "big hit B", so if a big hit is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit B" is determined. The ratio is 40% (40/100). Although the number of rounds of this "big hit B" is smaller than that of "big hit A", like "big hit A", the opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a that can pass through the V winning switch 65e3 in the first round of the big hit (easy). Since the pattern (see the lower part of FIG. 7) is set, the probability change state is likely to be given after the big hit. Therefore, although it is inferior to "big hit A" (and "big hit E" described later), it is a relatively advantageous big hit type for the player.

Further, in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "50 to 69", "big hit C" is associated and defined. This "big hit C" is a big hit with 12 rounds, like the "big hit B". Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 20 are counter values that become "big hit C", so if a big hit is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit C" is determined. The ratio is 20% (20/100). This "big hit C" has a smaller number of rounds than the "big hit A", and the opening / closing pattern of the specific winning opening 65a (see the middle part of FIG. 7) that is difficult to pass through the V winning switch 65e3 in the first round of the big hit is set. Therefore, it is difficult to give a probability change state after the big hit (it is easy to set the time saving state (chance mode B) of the normal symbol after the big hit). For this reason, it is a disadvantageous jackpot type as compared with "big hit A" and "big hit B" in which the probability change state (consecutive villa mode) is easily set.

Further, in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "70 to 99", "big hit D" is associated and defined. This "big hit D" is a big hit with 4 rounds. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 30 are counter values that become "big hit D", so if a big hit is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit D" is determined. The ratio is 30% (30/100). This "big hit D" has the smallest number of rounds among the six types of big hits, and the opening / closing pattern of the specific winning opening 65a that is difficult to pass through the V winning switch 65e3 in the first round of the big hit (see the middle row of FIG. 7). ) Is set, so it is difficult to give a probability change state after the big hit (it is easy to set the time saving state (chance mode B) of the normal symbol after the big hit). Therefore, it is the most disadvantageous jackpot type among all jackpot types.

On the other hand, for the second special symbol, "big hit E" is associated with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 69". This "big hit E" is a big hit with 16 rounds. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 70 counter values are "big hit E", so if a big hit is achieved in the second special symbol lottery, "big hit E" is determined. The ratio is 70% (70/100). This "big hit E" has the largest number of rounds among the six types of big hits, and the opening / closing pattern of the specific winning opening 65a (easy) that allows the V winning switch 65e3 to pass through the first round of the big hit (FIG. 7). (Refer to the bottom row) is set, so it is easy to give a probability change state after a big hit. Therefore, like "Big hit A", it is one of the most advantageous jackpot types for the player.

Further, for the second special symbol, "big hit F" is associated with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "70 to 99". This "big hit F" is a big hit with 4 rounds. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 30 are counter values that become "big hit F", so if a big hit is achieved in the second special symbol lottery, "big hit F" is determined. The ratio is 30% (30/100). This "big hit F" has the smallest number of rounds among the six types of big hits, but the opening / closing pattern of the specific winning opening 65a (easy) that allows the V winning switch 65e3 to pass through the first round of the big hit (FIG. 7). (Refer to the lower row) is set, so it is easy to give a probability change state after a big hit. Therefore, although it is disadvantageous for the prize spherical surface, it is easy to win the next big hit with a relatively small number of lottery, which is advantageous as compared with "big hit C" and "big hit D".

As described above, in the present embodiment, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, the opening / closing pattern of the specific winning opening 65a that can (easily) pass through the V winning switch 65e3 is set at a rate of 50%. While the jackpot type (big hit A, B) is determined, if a jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the V winning switch 65e3 can be passed (easily) at a rate of 100%. The jackpot type (big hit E, F) in which the opening / closing pattern of the winning opening 65a is set is determined. Therefore, once the consecutive villa mode (probability change state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol) is set, the lottery of the second special symbol is drawn by winning a prize at the second entrance 640 by hitting right. It becomes easy to repeat the state where it is easy to execute and the jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to have the player play the game for one purpose of shifting to the consecutive villa mode. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the normal mode (low probability state of special symbol and normal state of normal symbol), the probability of winning a big hit in the special symbol lottery is low, and it is basically difficult to execute the second special symbol lottery. , You will aim for a big hit by lottery of the first special symbol. However, even if a big hit is made in the lottery of the first special symbol, an opening / closing pattern (see the lower part of FIG. 7) that easily passes through the V winning switch 65e3 is set only at a rate of 50%. Even if it does not become a big hit, or even if it becomes a big hit, the opening / closing pattern (see the middle part of FIG. 7) that is difficult to pass through the V winning switch 65e3 continues to be set, so that the normal mode, which is disadvantageous to the player, continues for a long time. In some cases. If the disadvantageous state continues for a long time, the player may lose motivation for the game.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the normal mode, when a specific lottery result (small hit) is obtained by the lottery of the first special symbol, the chance mode A in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed temporarily. It is configured so that it can be migrated to. With this configuration, if a big hit is achieved by executing the lottery of the second special symbol while the chance mode A is set, it is possible (easy) to pass through the V winning switch 65e3 at a rate of 100%. Since the jackpot type (big hit E, F) in which the opening / closing pattern of the specific winning opening 65a is set is determined, it is possible to increase the motivation of the player for the game when the chance mode A is set. Further, since the game in the normal mode can be performed with the expectation that not only the big hit but also the chance mode A is set, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, the details of the small hit type selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. 14 (b). The small hit type selection table 202e is a data table that is referred to for determining the type of small hit when a small hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol. In the small hit type selection table 202e, the corresponding small hit type is defined for each range of values of the small hit type counter C5.

As shown in FIG. 14B, "small hit A" is defined in association with the range in which the value of the small hit type counter C5 is "0 to 39". This "small hit A" is a small hit type in which chance mode A is set over 10 special symbol lottery after the end of the small hit. Of the 100 random values that the small hit type counter C5 can take, 40 are random values that are "small hit A", so if a small hit is obtained by a special symbol lottery, it will be "small hit A". The ratio is 40% (40/100).

Further, in the range where the value of the small hit type counter C5 is "40 to 79", "small hit B" is defined in association with each other. This "small hit B" is a small hit type in which chance mode A is set over a lottery of 20 special symbols after the end of the small hit. Of the 100 random values that the small hit type counter C5 can take, 40 are random values that are "small hit B", so if a small hit is obtained by a special symbol lottery, it will be "small hit B". The ratio is 40% (40/100).

Further, "small hit C" is defined in association with the range in which the value of the small hit type counter C5 is "80 to 99". This "small hit C" is a small hit type in which chance mode A is set over 100 special symbol lottery after the end of the small hit. Of the 100 random values that the small hit type counter C5 can take, 20 are random values that are "small hit C", so if a small hit is obtained by a special symbol lottery, it will be "small hit C". The ratio is 20% (20/100).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the small hit is used as an opportunity to shift to the chance mode A, which is more advantageous than the normal mode. In chance mode A, the fluctuation time of the 2nd special symbol becomes shorter (3 seconds), which is more advantageous than the lottery of the 1st special symbol (it is easy to set the consecutive villa mode when it becomes a big hit). Since the lottery is easy to be executed, the player can be made to play the game with a strong expectation that it will be a big hit. Further, in the normal mode, it is possible to shift to the chance mode A without going through the jackpot, so that the game can be intonation even if the jackpot has not been won for a long period of time. Therefore, even if a so-called big addiction occurs, the motivation of the player for the game can be maintained by sandwiching the chance mode A in between. Further, the length (number of lottery) of the chance mode A to be given is configured to be different for each small hit type. As a result, the player who senses that the hit has been made can be made to play the game with the expectation that the chance mode A is a small hit type that is set for a longer period of time. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, the details of the variation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 and 16. As described above, the fluctuation pattern table 202d defines a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the fluctuation display from the value (random value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

As shown in FIG. 15A, the fluctuation pattern table 202d includes a normal table 202d1 for determining a fluctuation pattern (variation time) in the normal mode, a consecutive villa mode (probability change state), and a chance mode B (time reduction). The table 202d2 for the consecutive villa / chance B for determining the fluctuation pattern in the state) and the table 202d3 for the chance A for determining the fluctuation pattern in the chance mode A are included at least.

First, the normal table 202d1 will be described with reference to FIG. 15 (b). FIG. 15B is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the normal table 202d1. As shown in FIG. 15B, the normal table 202d1 has a random number value (variation type counter value) for determining the type (variation time) of the fluctuation pattern for each type of the special symbol and the stop type of the special symbol. The counter value of CS1) is specified.

Specifically, when the lottery of the first special symbol results in a loss and a complete loss is determined as the stop type, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is a short deviation (7 seconds) in the range of "0 to 98". The patterns are associated with each other, and the variation pattern of the long deviation (10 seconds) is associated with the range of "99 to 198". In addition, when a special symbol is drawn out and the out-of-reach is determined as the stop type, various normal reach (30 seconds) are set in the range of "0 to 198" (that is, the entire range) as the value of the variable type counter CS1. Are associated with each other. In addition, in the case of a small hit, which is a kind of loss, in the lottery of the first special symbol, various super reach (60 seconds) are set in the range of "0 to 198" (that is, the entire range) as the value of the variable type counter CS1. ) Is associated.

On the other hand, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, various normal reach (30 seconds) are associated with the range of "0 to 50" as the value of the variable type counter CS1, and the range is "51 to 179". Various super reach (60 seconds) are associated, and various special reach (90 seconds) are associated in the range of "180 to 198". That is, 60 seconds is selected as the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display based on the lottery of the first special symbol only in the case of a small hit or a big hit. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the player will enter the chance mode A or become a big hit when the player develops into the super reach. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of security during the fluctuation time after recognizing that the game has been reversed to super reach. In addition, the special reach with a fluctuation time of 90 seconds can be selected only in the case of a big hit, so when the fluctuation time exceeds 60 seconds (developed into a special reach), the lottery result of the first special symbol this time will be displayed. It is possible to make the player recognize that it was a big hit. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a greater sense of satisfaction.

On the other hand, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the normal mode, an ultra-long fluctuation (600 seconds) occurs for all the values of the fluctuation type counter CS1 regardless of the lottery result of the second special symbol. It is associated. As a result, in the normal mode, when a game is played aiming at the second entrance 640 by right-handed in an attempt to execute an advantageous lottery of the second special symbol, at least once every 10 minutes (600 seconds). However, the lottery of special symbols is not executed, and the game efficiency can be extremely poor. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) an irregular game method in which the player always strikes right in the normal mode. As described above, the present embodiment employs a simultaneous variation method (a method in which the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel). Therefore, even if the ball enters the second entrance 640 maliciously in the normal mode due to a player's operation error or the like and the second special symbol is changed for 10 minutes, the ball is left-handed. By aiming at the first ball entry port 64, it is possible to execute the change of the first special symbol during the change of the second special symbol.

Next, with reference to FIG. 16A, the details of the consecutive villa / chance B table 202d2 included in the fluctuation pattern table 202d will be described. As described above, the consecutive villa / chance B table 202d2 is a table used for determining the fluctuation pattern in the consecutive villa mode (probability change state) and the chance mode B (time saving state).

In this consecutive villa / chance B table 202d2, the same fluctuation pattern (variation time) when the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same stop type and the same fluctuation type counter CS1 value. Is configured to be determined. Specifically, when the lottery of the special symbol is missed and the stop type is determined to be completely missed, a short miss (7 seconds) is associated with the range where the value of the variable type counter CS1 is "0 to 190". , The range of "191 to 198" is associated with a long deviation (10 seconds). In this way, in the consecutive villa mode (probability change state) and chance mode B (time saving state), the percentage will be short out compared to the normal mode when the special symbol lottery is decided to be out of order and the stop type is completely out of order. Is configured to be high. As a result, it is possible to improve the game efficiency in the consecutive villa mode and the chance mode B, which are more advantageous to the player than in the normal mode.

In addition, when a special symbol is drawn out and the reach is determined to be out of reach as the stop type, various normal reach (30 seconds) are set in the range of "0 to 198" (that is, the entire range) as the value of the variable type counter CS1. Are associated with each other. In addition, in the case of a small hit, which is a kind of loss, in the lottery of the first special symbol, various super reach (60 seconds) are set in the range of "0 to 198" (that is, the entire range) as the value of the variable type counter CS1. ) Is associated.

On the other hand, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, various normal reach (30 seconds) are associated with the range of "0 to 50" as the value of the variable type counter CS1, and the range is "51 to 179". Various super reach (60 seconds) are associated, and various special reach (90 seconds) are associated in the range of "180 to 198".

In this way, in the consecutive villa mode (probability change state) in which the consecutive villa / chance B table 202d2 is set, and in the chance mode B (time saving state), unlike the normal mode, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed. The fluctuation time determined in is the same as the lottery of the first special symbol. As a result, the lottery of the second special symbol can be efficiently executed by launching the ball aiming at the second entrance 640 by right-handed hitting. That is, when it becomes a big hit, it becomes an advantageous state in which a probabilistic state is easily given. Therefore, it is possible to play the game with a stronger expectation that it will be a big hit.

Next, the details of the chance A table 202d3 included in the fluctuation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. 16B. As described above, the chance A table 202d3 is a table used for determining the fluctuation pattern in the chance mode A.

In the chance A table 202d3, the correspondence relationship between the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display based on the lottery of the first special symbol and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the same as that of the normal table 202d1. Therefore, detailed description will be omitted. On the other hand, the fluctuation time of the variation display based on the lottery of the second special symbol is determined to be 3 seconds regardless of the lottery result of the second special symbol. That is, since the fluctuation time is shorter than the fluctuation display executed based on the lottery of the first special symbol, the game efficiency is better by hitting right at the second entrance 640 than hitting left. Become. Therefore, since the lottery of the advantageous second special symbol can be efficiently executed, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

As described above, in the chance mode A, when a small hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, a specific period (the lottery of the special symbol is completed 10, 20, or 100 times) is completed after the end of the small hit. (Until) is set. Since the lottery of the first special symbol is easy to be executed in the normal mode, by shifting from the normal mode to the chance mode A via the small hit, it is possible to make the player advantageous state without going through the big hit. .. Therefore, in the normal mode, even if the jackpot is not won for a long period of time (even if a so-called big addiction occurs), the player's motivation for the game can be maintained by sandwiching the chance mode A in between. can. Further, as described above, the length (number of lottery) of the chance mode A to be given is configured to be different for each small hit type. As a result, the player who senses that the hit has been made can be made to play the game with the expectation that the chance mode A is a small hit type that is set for a longer period of time. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the first embodiment, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the chance mode A, the fluctuation pattern of 3 seconds is uniformly set regardless of the lottery result, but this is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. It may be arbitrarily determined within a range in which right-handed is more advantageous than left-handed. For example, if the lottery for the second special symbol is missed, a uniform fluctuation pattern of 3 seconds is set, and if it is a win, the same fluctuation pattern as when the lottery for the first special symbol is won is selected. It may be configured.

Next, the details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a block diagram showing a configuration of RAM 203 of the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 17, the RAM 203 includes a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, a first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d, and a second. Special symbol holding ball number counter 203e, normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f, probability variation counter 203g, probability variation setting flag 203h, probability variation passing counter 203i, winning number counter 203j, operation counter 203k, remaining ball timer flag 203m, remaining ball timer 203n, Probability change effective flag 203o, Probability change effective timer 203p, Discharge number counter 203q, Time saving medium counter 203r, Hit flag 203s, Special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203t, Special figure 2 Fluctuation time counter 203u, Big hit medium flag 203v, Small hit medium flag 203w , Chance mode counter 203x, abnormality monitoring flag 203y, abnormality monitoring counter 203aa, and other memory area 203z.

The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these areas has a random number per first. Each value of the counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball wins the first ball opening 64 (starting winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding number). Among the vacant areas (1st area to 4th area on hold), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the time-old winning prize is stored, and the data corresponding to the time-oldest winning prize is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is the execution area. Based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area after being shifted (moved) to, a determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is performed.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) whose area number is 1 smaller. Will be done. In the present embodiment, in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data is shifted only in the holding area (holding second area to holding fourth area) in which the winning data is stored.

The second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four holding areas, similarly to the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. In the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, each counter value acquired based on the start winning to the second entry port 640 is stored. Since the method of storing the counter value is the same as that of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Like the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding). It has a fourth area). A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the sphere passes through the through gate 67, and the acquired data is vacant in four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Among the existing areas, the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, similarly to the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, the winning order is maintained and the data corresponding to the winning is stored. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the lottery for winning the normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the counter C4 stored in the hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area (moved), a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty, so that it is the same as in the case of the 1st special symbol hold ball storage area 203a and the 2nd special symbol hold ball storage area 203b. In addition, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding area is packed into the holding area one smaller than the area number. Also, the data shift is performed only in the holding area where the winning data is stored.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d displays fluctuations (third) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry of balls into the first entry port 64 (starting prize). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the symbol display device 81 (variation display) up to a maximum of four times. The initial value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and the maximum value is 4 each time a ball enters the first entry port 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases. Is added by 1 (see S1304 in FIG. 39). On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see S303 in FIG. 29).

The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (holding number N1 of the variation display in the first special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (S304 in FIG. 29, FIG. 39). (See S1305). The hold ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 displays the fluctuation displayed on the main control device 110 by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d is changed. The value of the number of reserved balls itself can be obtained. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b2 of the voice lamp control device 113 is increased by the influence of noise and the like, and the main control device. Even if there is a deviation from the actual number of reserved balls held in 110, the deviation can be corrected by the next received number of reserved balls command.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and each time the number of reserved balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of reserved balls. Send a ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is a variable display (third) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the ball entering the second entry port 640 (starting prize). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the symbol display device 81 (variation display) up to a maximum of four times. The initial value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is set to zero, and the maximum value is 4 each time a ball enters the second entry port 640 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases. Is added by 1 (see S1310 in FIG. 39). On the other hand, the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see S903 in FIG. 35). The value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is also notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command, similarly to the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f sets the number of reserved balls (waiting number) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the balls in the through gate 67 up to four times. It is a counter that counts up to. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4 ( See S1504 in FIG. 41). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S1405 in FIG. 40).

When the sphere passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved sphere counter 203f (the number of times the variable display is held M in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired. , The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S1505 in FIG. 41). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S1503: No in FIG. 41). ).

The probability variation counter 203g is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability variation state of the special symbol (high probability state of the special symbol), and if the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is special. It indicates that the symbol is in the probability variation state, and if the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (low probability state of the special symbol). Further, as described above, in the probabilistic state of the special symbol, the time is shortened of the normal symbol. Therefore, if the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more, it indicates that the special symbol is in the probability variation state and the normal symbol is in the time saving state (the consecutive villa mode).

The initial value of the probability variation counter 203g is set to 0, and when the ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3 during the jackpot, 101 is set at the end of the jackpot (see S2202 in FIG. 48). Further, in the game state update process (see FIG. 30) executed when the variation display of the first special symbol or the variation display of the second special symbol is started, the value is subtracted by 1 (see S402 in FIG. 30). ). Further, the value of the probability variation counter 203g is reset to 0 when the jackpot game is started (see S707 in FIG. 33 and S1207 in FIG. 38).

The probability variation counter 203g is referred to in order to determine whether or not the gaming state is the probability variation state in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 31) and the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 36). (See S502 in FIG. 31 and S1002 in FIG. 36). Specifically, when the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 31, S306) and the second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 36, S906) are executed, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 31, S306) and the second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 36, S906), the value of the probability variation counter 203g is referred to, and if the value is 1 or more, the probability is high. While the special symbol is drawn based on the first random number table 202a for time, if the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0, the special symbol is based on the first random number table 202a for low probability time. Lottery will be held.

The probability variation counter 203g is also referred to in order to determine whether or not the gaming state is the time saving state in the normal symbol variation processing (S1408 and S1414 in FIG. 40). Specifically, the value of the probability variation counter 203g and the value of the time saving / medium counter 203r are referred to in the normal symbol variation processing, and if any of the counter values is 1 or more, the second hit random number for high probability time is used. While the lottery of ordinary symbols is performed based on the table 202c, if the values of the probability variation counter 203g and the time saving / medium counter 203r are both 0, the ordinary symbols are drawn based on the second random number table 202c for low probability time. A lottery will be held. Further, in the normal symbol variation processing, it is also referred to when determining the opening time of the electric accessory 640a when the normal symbol hits (see S1414 in FIG. 40).

The probability change setting flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the game state to the probability change state after the big hit game. In the pachinko machine 10, whether or not the gaming state is set to the probabilistic state is determined by whether or not the ball has passed the V winning switch 65e3 (see FIG. 6A) during the jackpot game. Here, when the ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON (S2312 in FIG. 49). On the other hand, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to off at the end of the jackpot (see S2206 in FIG. 48). The probability change setting flag 203h is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). Further, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, it is set to off.

When the probability change setting flag 203h is set to on when the power is turned on, it is determined whether the V winning switch 65e3 has passed before the power is turned off, and if it can be determined that the flag has passed, the probability change setting is set. The flag 203h may be officially set to on and configured to return. In this case, whether or not the V winning switch 65e3 is passed before the power is turned off can be determined by whether or not the probability variation passing counter 203i, which will be described later, has a value larger than 0. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the damage on the amusement store side by determining fraud such that only the probability change setting flag 203h is turned on and the power is turned on again when the power is turned off. can.

The probability variation passing counter 203i is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the V winning switch 65e3 in one round during the jackpot game (in the present embodiment, one round of the jackpot). It should be noted that it is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls that have won a prize in the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 have been discharged from the sum of the probability variation passing counter 203i and the discharge number counter 203q described later. The probability variation passage counter 203i is updated by adding one by one when passing through the V winning switch 65e3 (S2311 in FIG. 49). Further, after executing the process of checking whether the number of game balls won in the variable winning device 65 and the number of ejected balls match, the initial value is reset to "0" (S2411 in FIG. 50). The probability variation pass counter 203i is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

The winning number counter 203j is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have won a prize in the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 in one round in the jackpot game. Specifically, based on the detection that the game ball has passed through the detection port 65a1 (see FIG. 4) provided in the variable winning device 65, the game ball is added and updated one by one (S2303 in FIG. 49). .. On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of prizes won in the variable winning device 65 (the value of the winning number counter 203j) and the number discharged (the total value of the discharge number counter 203q and the probability variation passing counter 203i) are one. After it is determined whether or not it is done, it is reset to the initial value "0" (see S2411 in FIG. 50). The value of the winning number counter 203j is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

The operation counter 203k is a counter for measuring (counting) the time when the flow path solenoid (probability variation solenoid) 65k is set to be on (excited). In the present embodiment, when one round of jackpot is started, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to be on for 3 seconds (see FIG. 7). The operation counter 203k is set with a counter value corresponding to 3 seconds when one round of jackpots is started. On the other hand, in the process of S2309 of the winning process (FIG. 49, S2113) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the value is subtracted and updated one by one. Further, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to off based on the determination that the value of the operation counter 203k is 0. The operation counter 203k is backed up when the power is turned off, and in the initialized state, an initial value of 0 is set.

The remaining ball timer flag 203m is a flag indicating that the opening / closing plate 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is closed in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON, it indicates that the opening / closing plate 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is set from the open state to the closed state in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON, the remaining ball timer 203n, which will be described later, is added and updated one by one (see S2405 in FIG. 50). The remaining ball timer 203n is a counter for determining the time since the opening / closing plate 65f1 is closed, and is for determining whether the time required for the game ball in the variable winning device 65 to be discharged has elapsed. It is a counter of.

The remaining ball timer 203n is a game in which the variable winning device 65 is won when the preset one round (one round of the jackpot in the present embodiment) is completed and the opening / closing plate 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is closed. It is a counter for determining whether the time required for the ball to be ejected has elapsed. In the present embodiment, the time required for the game ball winning the variable winning device 65 to be discharged is 2 seconds, and in the present embodiment, the counter value corresponding to 3 seconds in advance is the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203n. Is set as. Based on the upper limit of the remaining ball timer 203n (3 seconds in the present embodiment), it is determined whether or not the number of winnings to the variable winning device 65 and the number of ejected pieces match (3 seconds). S2407 in FIG. 50). If they do not match, an error command is set to notify that fact. Therefore, it is possible to notify at an early stage that the game ball is jammed in the variable winning device 65. In addition, the ball is illegally left inside the variable winning device 65, and the ball flows down after the next big hit round is started (that is, after it is in a state where it can flow down to the special discharge flow path 65e2). It is possible to detect at an early stage a fraudulent act of letting the player pass the V winning switch 65e3.

If the number of winnings and the number of dischargeds do not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON, and if that flag is ON, the probability change setting flag 203h even if the game ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3. May not be set to on. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an illegally assigned probabilistic state.

The probability variation effective flag 203o is a flag for determining whether or not the passage is valid when the game ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3 after the flow path solenoid 65k is set to off. When the probability variation effective flag 203o is set to ON, the game ball flowing into the special discharge flow path 65e2 (see FIG. 6A) wins a V prize based on the flow path solenoid 65k being ON. It shows that it is less than or equal to the time required to pass the switch 65e3. That is, it indicates that it is a normal period for the game ball to pass through the V winning switch 65e3.

The probability change effective timer 203p is a counter for counting the time after the above-mentioned probability change effective flag 203o is set to ON. After the flow path solenoid 65k is turned off by the probability variation effective timer 203p, it is possible to determine the period required for normally passing through the V winning switch 65e3. In the present embodiment, the time required for the game ball entering the special discharge flow path 65e2 to pass through the V winning switch 65e3 is 1 second. The upper limit value of the probability variation effective timer 203p is set to a counter value corresponding to 1.2 seconds, and even if the V winning switch 65e3 is passed after that, it is determined to be invalid and is not determined to be passed.

As a result, in a state where the switching member 65h is not guided to the special discharge flow path 65e2 (see FIG. 6B), the ball is illegally entered into the special discharge flow path 65e2 and the game ball is passed through the V winning switch 65e3. It is possible to suppress damage caused by fraud such as pushing up a game ball from below the V winning switch 65e3 with a piano wire or the like to pass it, or causing a magnetic sensor to erroneously detect it as passing by radio waves or the like.

The discharge number counter 203q is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 (see FIG. 6A) in one round. The discharge number counter 203q is reset to an initial value of 0 after the number of game balls won in the variable winning device 65 and the number of discharges are determined (S2411 in FIG. 50).

The time saving medium counter 203r is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols in the time saving state. At this time, the time reduction / medium counter 203r is set to 101 when the probability variation setting flag is off at the end of the jackpot game. At this time, the time saving / medium counter 203r is subtracted by 1 in the game state update process executed when the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started, similarly to the probability variation counter 203g (FIG. 30). S404). By configuring the time saving state to end at the start of the fluctuation, the 101st fluctuation display is started after the time saving state (chance mode B) is set after the big hit, and the 100th fluctuation display is in the middle. However, the time saving state is terminated.

The hit flag 203s indicates that the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired based on the entry into the first entry port 64 or the second entry port 640 is a big hit or a small hit at the start of fluctuation. This is a flag that is set to ON when it is determined (see S507 in FIG. 31 and S1007 in FIG. 36). The hit flag 203s is set to off when displaying the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit or the small hit (see S707 in FIG. 33 and S1207 in FIG. 38). A 2-bit storage area is assigned to the hit flag 203s, and information corresponding to the first special symbol is stored in the upper bit and the information corresponding to the second special symbol is stored in the lower bit. More specifically, if the winning flag 203s is "10H", it means that the lottery of the first special symbol is a big hit or a small hit, and that the lottery result is being displayed in a variable manner. On the other hand, if the winning flag 203s is "01H", it means that the lottery of the second special symbol is a big hit and the variable display indicating the lottery result is in progress. On the other hand, if the hit flag 203s is "00H", it indicates that neither the big hit fluctuation nor the small hit fluctuation is executed.

If either one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set to on first at the start of fluctuation, the winning flag 203s may be a big hit or a small hit even if the other lottery result is a big hit or a small hit. , The winning flag 203s is not overwritten, and the other lottery result is processed in the same manner as the loss. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the first special symbol and the second special symbol from simultaneously executing the variable display that triggers the opening of the specific winning opening 65a. That is, when the fluctuation display that becomes a big hit is started in one of the special symbols, the fluctuation display that becomes a big hit or a small hit is not started in the other, and only the out-of-order fluctuation mode is displayed. NS.

In the present embodiment, the hit flag 203s common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol is configured, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol have independent hit flags. It may be set so that the first special symbol and the second special symbol simultaneously execute a variable display that is a big hit or a small hit. With such a configuration, even if the fluctuation display that becomes the jackpot D is started in the first special symbol during the probability variation state, the fluctuation time is set long and the fluctuation time is short in the second special symbol. By making it easy to be drawn by, it is possible to easily make a big hit with the second special symbol before the big hit D is started. Therefore, the player is informed of the time until the jackpot D is started (that is, the period until the probability variation game state ends), and the player is hurriedly won the jackpot with the second special symbol. It is possible to perform an effect of playing a game in an attempt to make it play. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a fresh effect. As a result, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

The special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203t is a counter for counting the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. When the variation pattern of the first special symbol is selected, the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set (S609 in FIG. 32). After that, in the process of S701 of the first special symbol variation stop process (FIGS. 33 and S204), the counter value (one by one in this embodiment) corresponding to the elapsed variation time is subtracted and updated.

The special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203u is a counter for counting the fluctuation time of the second special symbol. When the variation pattern of the second special symbol is selected, the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set (S1109 in FIG. 37). After that, in the process of S1201 of the second special symbol variation stop process (FIGS. 38 and S207), the counter value (one by one in this embodiment) corresponding to the elapsed variation time is subtracted and updated.

The jackpot flag 203v is a flag indicating whether or not the jackpot is being hit. If the jackpot flag 203v is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot, and if it is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the jackpot. The jackpot middle flag 203v is set to on at the start of the jackpot in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 47, S2004) (see S2104 in FIG. 47). On the other hand, it is set to off in the jackpot end processing executed at the end of the jackpot (see S2206 in FIG. 48).

The small hit medium flag 203w is a flag indicating whether or not the small hit is in progress. When the small hit medium flag 203w is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a small hit, and when it is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is not in a small hit. The small hit medium flag 203w is set to be on at the start of the small hit in the small hit control process (see FIG. 51, S2005) (see S2503 in FIG. 51). On the other hand, it is set to off at the end of the small hit (see S2510 in FIG. 51).

The chance mode counter 203x is a counter indicating whether or not the present is the chance mode A. If the value of the chance mode counter 203x is 1 or more, it means that the present is the chance mode A. Therefore, when selecting the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the above-mentioned chance A table 202d3. Will be done. On the other hand, if the value of the chance mode counter 203x is 0, it means that the current state is other than the chance mode A (normal mode, consecutive villa mode, or chance mode B). (Any of the normal table 202d1 and the consecutive villa / chance B table 202d2) is read from the fluctuation pattern table 202d and used to determine the fluctuation pattern (variation time). The chance mode counter 203x is set with a value corresponding to the small hit type when a small hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol (see S803, S805, and S806 in FIG. 34). On the other hand, when the variable display of the special symbol is started, the value is subtracted by 1 (see S406 in FIG. 30).

The abnormality monitoring flag 203y is a flag for determining whether or not the player is playing a game in a correct game method (a game method advantageous to the player) according to the current game state. If this abnormality monitoring flag 203y is on, it indicates that the player may be playing a game in an illegal (disadvantageous) game method, and if it is off, the player is playing in the correct game method. Indicates that you are doing.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is shortened in the consecutive villa mode (probability change state), chance mode A, and chance mode B (see FIGS. 16A and 16B). The lottery of the second special symbol becomes easy to be executed. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player to play the game aiming at the second entrance 640 by right-handed hitting, so right-handed hitting is the correct game method. In this case, the lottery is usually executed by the second special symbol, and the player plays the game by an illegal (unfavorable) game method during the period when the game is executed by the first special symbol. Therefore, the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is set to on. When this abnormality monitoring flag 203y is set to ON, the period during which the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is continuously set to ON is timed by the abnormality monitoring counter 203aa described later, and a predetermined time (20 seconds in this embodiment). When the above is achieved, the abnormality notification (displaying the voice and the warning image) is executed.

Also, in the normal mode (normal state in which chance mode A is not set), it is the correct game method to play with a left-handed hit, but the second entrance 640 or normal, which should only be entered with a right-handed hit. When it is determined that the ball has entered the ball entry port 67 and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol or the fluctuation display of the normal symbol has been executed, the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is set to ON and the abnormality notification is executed. It is configured as follows.

The abnormality monitoring counter 203aa is a counter for timing (counting) a period in which a game is likely to be performed by an illegal game method. When the value of the abnormality monitoring counter 203aa reaches the count value corresponding to 20 seconds, the abnormality notification is executed. The value of the abnormality monitoring counter 203aa is updated by 1 when the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is turned on during the fraud monitoring process (see S1702 in FIG. 43). On the other hand, if the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is off, it is reset to 0 (see S1705 in FIG. 43).

The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

Next, the details of the mode transition performed by using the various tables provided in the ROM 202, the various flags provided in the RAM 203, the counter, and the like will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, four types of modes are provided. Specifically, the "normal mode" and the "chance mode A" set in the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol) and the probabilistic state (high probability state of the special symbol). In addition, a "renso mode" set as a normal symbol time saving state) and a "chance mode B" set as a time saving state (a low probability state of a special symbol and a time saving state of a normal symbol) are provided. ing.

The "normal mode" shown on the upper left side of FIG. 18 is the most disadvantageous state for the player because it is difficult to execute the lottery of the second special symbol. Since it is difficult to execute the lottery of the second special symbol, it is advantageous for the player to execute the lottery of the first special symbol by launching the ball aiming at the first entry port 64. As shown in the upper left of FIG. 18, in the "normal mode", there is a possibility of shifting to another mode by winning a small hit or a big hit in a special symbol lottery. Specifically, if a special symbol is drawn for a big hit and the big hit types are big hits A and B, the mode shifts to the "renso mode". If the ball does not pass through the V winning switch 65e3 due to the fact that the ball was not launched in the first round of the jackpot, the "renso mode" may be set even if the jackpot is A or B. No (chance mode B is set).

In addition, if a special symbol lottery results in a big hit and the big hit type is big hit C, the mode shifts to "chance mode B". In the first round of the jackpot, if the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a during the extremely short opening period of the opening / closing plate 65f1 and the ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3, even if the jackpot is C. , "Renso mode" is set (chance mode B is not set). Further, if a small hit is obtained in the special symbol lottery, the mode shifts to "chance mode A" after the small hit is completed. The number of lottery times in which this "chance mode A" continues differs depending on the type of small hit (see FIG. 14B).

The "chance mode A" shown on the upper right side of FIG. 18 is the same as the "normal mode" in the game state (low probability state of the special symbol and normal state of the normal symbol), but the second special symbol. Since the fluctuation pattern table (table 202d3 for chance A) having a short fluctuation time (3 seconds) of the fluctuation display is referred to, this mode makes it easier for the second special symbol to be drawn as compared with the “normal mode”. As described above, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol, as an opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1, a pattern (opening / closing pattern with a long opening time) in which the ball is likely to pass through the V winning switch 65e3 is used. Since it is always set, it is more advantageous for the player than a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol. Therefore, even though they are in the same gaming state, they can be in a more advantageous state than the "normal mode".

In this "chance mode A", there is a possibility of shifting to another mode when a big hit is made or when a specified number of special symbol lottery is executed after the chance mode A is set. Specifically, a big hit is obtained by a lottery of a special symbol, and when either of the big hits E and F is obtained, the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1 is such that the ball easily passes through the V winning switch 65e3 (see the lower part of FIG. 7). Is set, so that the jackpot mode is set to the "renso mode" when the ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3. Even if the jackpot is either E or F, if the ball does not pass through the V winning switch 65e3 during the jackpot, the game does not shift to the "renso mode" (only the time saving state of the normal symbol is given). As a result, the mode shifts to chance mode B). Further, in the "chance mode A", when the lottery of the specified number of special symbols (10 times, 20 times, or 100 times) is completed without a big hit, the process returns to the "normal mode".

In this way, when the game state is the normal state, two types of modes, the disadvantageous "normal mode" and the more advantageous "chance mode A" than the "normal mode", can be switched back and forth. .. With this configuration, the degree of advantage can be switched according to the progress of the game even in the normal state, which is more disadvantageous than the "renso mode" and the "chance mode B". Therefore, even if it is not a big hit, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game from becoming monotonous, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

As described above, the "chance mode B" shown in the middle of FIG. 18 is a mode indicating a time saving state. In the time-saving state, as described above, the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed, so that it is advantageous for the player to launch the ball aiming at the second entrance 640 by right-handed hitting.

In this "chance mode B", there is a possibility of shifting to another mode when a big hit or a lottery of a specified number of special symbols (100 times) is executed after the chance mode B is set. be. Specifically, a big hit is obtained by a lottery of a special symbol, and when either of the big hits E and F is obtained, the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1 is such that the ball easily passes through the V winning switch 65e3 (see the lower part of FIG. 7). Is set, so that the jackpot mode is set to the "renso mode" when the ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3. Even if the jackpot is either E or F, if the ball does not pass through the V winning switch 65e3 during the jackpot, the game does not shift to the "renso mode" (only the time saving state of the normal symbol is given). As a result, chance mode B is looped). Further, in the "chance mode B", when the lottery of the specified number of special symbols (100 times) is completed without a big hit, the mode shifts to the "normal mode".

As described above, the "renso mode" shown in the lower part of FIG. 18 is a mode showing a probability change state. In the probabilistic state, as described above, the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed, and the probability of winning a big hit in the special symbol lottery is high (1/300 → 1/75), which is extremely advantageous for the player. It becomes.

In this "ream villa mode", if the lottery of the special symbol is executed a specified number of times (100 times) after the "ream villa mode" is set, there is a possibility of shifting to another mode. Specifically, in the "renso mode", when the lottery for the special symbol is missed 100 times in a row, the mode shifts (falls) to the "normal mode". On the other hand, basically, the jackpot does not shift to another mode (loops the "renso mode"). Therefore, in the "renso mode", the probability of winning a big hit in the special symbol lottery becomes high, and when the big hit occurs, the "renso mode" is set as the game state after the big hit. , It becomes an extremely advantageous mode in which the jackpot and the "renso mode" are easily repeated. Therefore, since the player can play the game with one goal of shifting to the "renso mode", it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game. Even if the special symbol lottery results in jackpots E and F, if the ball does not pass through the V winning switch 65e3 during the jackpot, the "renso mode" will not be looped and chance mode B will be entered. And migrate.

As described above, in the present embodiment, a plurality of gaming states having different degrees of advantage are switched back and forth. In addition to going back and forth between different gaming states, it is possible to go back and forth between modes with different degrees of advantage in the same gaming state. That is, in the most unfavorable normal state, the degree of advantage can be different depending on the situation of the game. Therefore, even if the lottery of special symbols continues for a long period of time, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game from becoming monotonous due to the change in the degree of advantage.

Returning to FIG. 11, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is used to open and close the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, and the opening / closing plate 65f1 for closing or opening the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205.

Further, various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115 are connected to the input / output port 205, and the MPU 201 is connected to the MPU 201. Various processes are executed based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as, I / O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 44) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 51a that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variable display effect (variable display effect). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as (variable display). The arithmetic unit MPU 221 has a ROM 222 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221 and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed, or at the time of super reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the content of the effect, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and displays and controls an error command including the type of the error. It is transmitted to the device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

Next, the details of the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 19A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 19A, the ROM 222 has at least a variation pattern selection table 222a.

In the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a, the voice lamp control device 113 is based on the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110, and the rough fluctuation content (variation time, fluctuation type (reach, deviation, etc.) indicated by the fluctuation pattern command) is shown. ) To determine more detailed fluctuations. Thereby, a wider variety of variation modes can be determined. Here, one of a plurality of types of variation mode is determined by lottery with respect to the rough variation content instructed by the main control device 110.

Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 19 (b). FIG. 19B is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. The RAM 223 includes a command storage area 223a, a first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b1, a second special symbol holding ball number counter 223b2, a special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223c1, and a special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223c2. Special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223d1, special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223d2, secondary special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223e, secondary special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223f, effect counter 223g, and game state storage area 223h. And other memory areas 223z are provided at least.

The command storage area 223a is an area in which various commands output from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 are temporarily stored until processing for the commands is executed. Specifically, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 54) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a is read out, and the command determination process performs the command determination process. , The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b2 are fluctuation effects (variation display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the fluctuation effect held in the main control device 110 up to 4 times for each type of special symbol. The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 corresponds to the number of reserved balls of the variable effect based on the lottery of the first special symbol, and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 corresponds to the variable effect based on the lottery of the first special symbol. Corresponds to the number of reserved balls.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110, and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. The value of the counter 203e cannot be acquired. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and counts the number of reserved balls counter 223b1 and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b2. In, the number of reserved balls is managed for each type of special symbol.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls in the variable display is added by entering the balls into the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640, or in the main control device 110, a special symbol is used. When the fluctuation display in the above is executed and the number of reserved balls is subtracted, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d after addition or subtraction, or the value of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e is indicated. The ball number command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command from the hold ball number command to the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 or the second special symbol. The value of the reserved ball number counter 203e is acquired and stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b2 (see S4211 in FIG. 54). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the values of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 223b1 and the second special symbol hold ball number counter 223b2 according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. , The value can be updated while synchronizing with the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110.

The values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b2 are used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b2 in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command. At the same time, in order to notify the display control device 114 of the values of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 223b1 and the second special symbol hold ball number counter 223b2 after storage, a display hold ball number command is sent to the display control device 114. Send.

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, the value of the hold ball number indicated by the command, that is, the first special symbol hold ball number counter 223b1 and the second special symbol of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the value of the reserved ball number counter 223b2 is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b1 and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223b2 are the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. Its value is changed while synchronizing with. Therefore, the number of reserved sphere symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 is also the value of the first special symbol reserved sphere counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved sphere counter 203e of the main control device 110. Can be changed while synchronizing with. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is reserved.

The special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223c1 and the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223c2 receive the fluctuation pattern command of the first special symbol and the fluctuation pattern command of the second special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110, respectively. It is turned on (see S4205 and S4208 in FIG. 54) and turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see S4402 and S4407 in FIG. 55). When the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223c1 and the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223c2 are turned on, the display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

When the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223d1 and the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223d2 receive the stop type command of the first special symbol and the stop type command of the second special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110. (See S4202 in FIG. 54), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see S4412 in FIG. 55). When the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223d1 or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223d2 is turned on, the stop type is changed based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type). It is determined.

The sub-special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223e and the sub-special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223f are counters for counting the fluctuation time of the first special symbol and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, respectively.

The effect counter 223 g is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, and the like. The effect counter 223g is composed of a 1-byte loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 198, and the value is added and updated by 1 each time the main process (see FIG. 53) is executed. ..

The game state storage area 223h is a storage area in which information corresponding to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is stored. Each time a state command output from the main control device 110 is received in the game state storage area 223h, the information corresponding to the state of the pachinko machine 10 indicated by the state command is updated (S4011, FIG. 52). See S4215 in FIG. 54). More specifically, the game state storage area 223h is allocated a storage area of 3 bits, and whether or not it is in the probabilistic state of the special symbol and whether or not it is in the time saving state of the normal symbol in order from the high-order bit. , A value indicating whether or not the chance mode A is set is stored. For example, if the value of the game state storage area 223h is "110H", it means that the special symbol is in the probabilistic state and the normal symbol is in the time saving state (that is, the consecutive villa mode), and if it is "010H". , It means that it is a low probability state of a special symbol and a time saving state of a normal symbol (that is, chance mode B), and if it is "001H", it means that it is a chance mode A. On the other hand, if the information stored in the game state storage area 223h is "000H", it means that the mode is normal.

By updating the game state storage area 223h in response to the state command output from the main control device 110, the state of the pachinko machine 10 can be accurately grasped by the voice lamp control device 113.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-mentioned data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 changes the display (variation) of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. It controls the production) and continuous notice production. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volt AC supplied from the outside, and has a voltage of 12 volt for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power cutoff, power cutoff) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volt. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time for executing the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 44).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236, the image controller 237, the input port 238, the output port 239, and the bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. .. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via the bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of winning a special symbol and the number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot are different, the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since there are models with exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display fluctuation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the fluctuation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads an instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, fetches the instruction code, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the MPU 231 is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), a system reset can be applied from the power supply device 115, and when the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is added by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value instructed by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional game machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, instead of storing the data.

Although details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, in general, the NAND flash memory 234a has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when random access is performed. For example, when reading data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading non-continuous data, it takes a long time to read the data. As described above, since the speed of reading the NAND flash memory 234a is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, the instructions constituting the control program can be read. It may take time, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. Since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later and data is read / written at high speed, the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores the control program executed in the MPU 231 and the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 described later of the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory 234a has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using a NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further store the control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, it is provided to store the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the control program and the fixed value data by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like is based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. Is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) occur when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or something. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b is known to perform known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and to avoid reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Performs data address translation.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the incorrect data. It is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in the individual NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When the address assigned to the character ROM 234 from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 is specified, the ROM controller 234b contains one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including the data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether or not the data of is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR flash 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can output the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or can be designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the assigned address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR type ROM 234d is the first program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be made executable in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in this boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified for the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Is set to, and the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds only one instruction pointer 231a, and assigns the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 is selected from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR type ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. It is stored in for the following reasons. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is peculiar to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data in reading the data on the first page. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from its read. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then gives an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231. As a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d among the boot programs. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 by setting to. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be started in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program includes a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. , The fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program is stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, in the MPU 231, first, the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined program storage area 233a. Set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a and reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instructions at high speed and execute the processing for the instructions.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has the remaining boot programs in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is set with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot program included in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data used in the control program (for example, the display data table and the transfer data table described later) are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Further, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 57) executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 57) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on the drawing list (see FIG. 26) described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and draws one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame in the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Process in parallel in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 59 (b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, in the image controller 237, since the drawing instruction of the next image is not received at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, in general, the NAND flash memory 234a facilitates a large capacity of the ROM, but the read speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to do. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, since the resident video RAM 235 is resident with image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained high.

Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing the image, but at the time of drawing the image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the above and the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. The end address (final address of the storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236). Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, those video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image can be drawn by the required time. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display the third symbol. The period during which the display process on the device 81 is unused can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is retained without being overwritten during the power-on, and when the power is turned on, the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. In addition to 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a variable image area 235b when the power is turned on and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

The main image area 235a at power-on is used as the main image at power-on to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 between the time the power is turned on and the time when all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is the area that stores the corresponding data. Further, in the fluctuating image area 235b when the power is turned on, the game is started by the player while the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a fluctuating image when the power is turned on, which displays the result of a lottery performed by the main control device 110 by a fluctuating effect when a ball entering the mouth 640 is detected.

When the power supply is started from the power supply unit 251 of the MPU 231, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 57).

Here, a variation image when the power is turned on will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 21, the power is turned on by the third symbol display device 81 while the display control device 114 is transferring the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 immediately after the power is turned on. It is explanatory drawing explaining the time image.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the main image area 235a at power-on, and the main image at power-on shown in FIG. 21 (a). The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

At this time, when the display fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is the instruction command for starting the fluctuation, the display control device 114 displays FIG. 21 (b). On the display screen of the main image when the power is turned on, as shown in FIG. At the same position as the symbol, the image of the “x” symbol that fluctuates when the power is turned on is displayed alternately and repeatedly during the fluctuation period. Then, from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 and the stop type command, the lottery performed by the main control device 110 is performed. Judging the result, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", the image shown in FIG. 21 (b) is displayed for a certain period of time after the variation effect is stopped, and if it is "out of the special symbol", it is shown in FIG. 21 (c). The displayed image is displayed for a certain period of time after the fluctuation effect is stopped.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can confirm the main image at power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has stopped. Can be done.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, when the power is turned on, the player starts the game while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball is detected at the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640. In this case, the power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the power-on variation image area 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 21B and 21C are alternated. Is instructed by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the fluctuation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the power is turned on. If a ball is detected in the first entry port 64 or the second entry port 640 while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect is displayed in the third symbol display. It can be displayed on the device 81 immediately.

Returning to FIG. 20, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 22, the back image and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c among the back images will be described. FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the four types of rear images and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each rear image, and FIG. 22A is an explanatory diagram showing " FIG. 22B shows the back side A corresponding to the "city stage", and the back sides B to D corresponding to the "forest stage", the "river stage", and the "sky stage", respectively. .. Further, FIG. 23 is shown with respect to the back surface E corresponding to the “island stage”.

As shown in FIG. 22, as the rear image corresponding to each of the rear surfaces A to D, an image longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is prepared in the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the rear image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared on the back surfaces A to D (hereinafter, referred to as "scrolling images") are configured so that the back image is continuous at the positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a'are composed of an image corresponding to the width of the display area in the horizontal direction, and the image between the position c and the position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then the image between the position a and the position a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The back image is scrolled and displayed in a simple connection.

When the back type change is decided based on the back type selection table and the stage is changed to "city stage", "forest stage", "river stage", or "empty stage", MPU231 will display the corresponding back image. First, the area between the position a and the position a'is set as the initial position of the display area, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image of the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and further, the display area is displayed. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as an image from the position a to the position a'. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the image between the positions a and c in a smooth connection so as to flow toward the left.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 23, the rear image on the back surface E has a third symbol in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) → ... In FIG. 23 with the passage of time. It is displayed on the display device 81. Specifically, on the back surface E, the image of the mountain towering over the island, the image of the sandy beach spreading at the foot of the mountain, and the image of the sea surrounding the island are displayed in a fixed position. It is displayed on the display device 81. On the other hand, the color tone of the sky image spreading on the mountain changes with the passage of time.

When the stage is changed to the "island stage", the rear image shown in FIG. 23A is displayed as the initial rear image of the back E. In the rear image shown in FIG. 23A, an orange sky indicating a morning glow is displayed. Then, with the passage of time, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to bright blue, and after a predetermined time elapses, the back image shown in FIG. 23B is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 23B, a bright blue sky indicating daytime is displayed. Next, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from bright blue to black with the lapse of time, and after a lapse of a predetermined time, the back image shown in FIG. 23 (c) is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 23 (c), a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, with the passage of time, the color tone of the sky gradually begins to turn white from black and then changes to orange. Then, after the lapse of a predetermined time, the image returns to the back image shown in FIG. 23 (a), and the back images of FIGS. 23 (a) to 23 (c) are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 again.

Next, in each back image, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 22A, the back surface A corresponding to the city stage, which is the initial stage, has the entire range of the back surface A, that is, the back surface of the resident video RAM 235 in which all the image data corresponding to the position a to the position d are recorded. It is stored in the image area 235c. Normally, the game is played without changing the stage while the initial stage "city stage" is displayed, so the image data on the back A corresponding to the frequently displayed "city stage" is displayed. By making all of them resident in the rear image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, the back surface B corresponding to the "forest stage", the back surface C corresponding to the "river stage", and the back surface D corresponding to the "empty stage" are a part of the back surface as shown in FIG. 22 (b). That is, only the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b is stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Further, the back surface E corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 23 (a), and the image data corresponding to the back image between FIGS. 23 (a) to 23 (b) excluding FIG. 23 (b) is obtained after the power is turned on. It is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and is resident in the start-up process.

Here, in order to change the rear image immediately, it is ideal to make the entire range of image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 for all the rear images, but if this is done, the resident video RAM 235 will be resident. As a result, a very large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image first displayed when the stage is changed is set to the range from the position a to the position a'(or the range of FIGS. 23 (a) to 23 (b)). ), And the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b (or the image between FIGS. 23 (a) and 23 (b)) including the initial position is transferred to the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Since the character ROM 234 is configured to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 even if the character ROM 234 is configured with a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, when the stage change is decided by the lottery at the start of the fluctuation, the back surface of the resident video RAM 235. By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial positions of the back surfaces B to D can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the scroll display or the color tone changes with the passage of time. It can be displayed while making it. Further, since only the image data corresponding to a part of the range of images is stored in the back surfaces B to D, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 and suppress an increase in cost.

Further, on the back surfaces B to D, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the range from the position a to the position b is directed from left to right using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. While scrolling, the range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b'to the position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. As a result, the image data from the position b'to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while scrolling the range from the position a to the position b, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. After scrolling the range from position a to position b using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from position b'to position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

Similarly, on the back surface E, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the images of FIGS. 23 (a) to 23 (b) are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. 23 (a), so that the image data of the images corresponding to FIGS. 23 (b) to (c) and 23 (c) to (a) can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. The range of ~ (b) is set. As a result, while displaying the images of FIGS. 23 (a) to 23 (b), the image data corresponding to the images of FIGS. 23 (b) to (c) and 23 (c) to (a) is normally used. Since it can be transferred to the video RAM 236, the images of FIGS. 23 (a) to 23 (b) are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Using the image data corresponding to the rear image, the images of FIGS. 23 (b) to (c) and 23 (c) to (a) are sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time. be able to.

In the backs B to E, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 20) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be reliably displayed.

Further, in the backs B to D, the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 correspond to the images between the positions b'and b. Image data to be stored is duplicated and stored. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video is displayed. By displaying the image from the position b'on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the rear image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a smooth connection. ing.

Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data of the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. do. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with a smooth connection so that the image between the positions a and c flows toward the left.

Returning to FIG. 20, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main symbols (see FIG. 6) with numbers “0” to “9”, which are the third symbols, are resident. As a result, when performing a variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 You can start the variable effect quickly. Therefore, even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37 after the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640, the third symbol display device In 81, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the variation effect is not immediately started.

Further, in the third symbol area 235d, as the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9", the main symbol consisting of the rear symbol such as a wooden box, the rear symbol and the character such as the furoshiki, the helmet, etc. Image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating the above is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed after one variation effect is stopped. Be done. As a result, when the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demo effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbol without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy", "old man", and "girl" are displayed according to various effects, and the data corresponding to these is displayed in the character design area 235e. By being resident, when the display control device 114 changes the character symbol based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but is resident. By reading the image data resident in the character symbol area 235e of the video RAM 235 in advance, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 causes a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 determines the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the sequential error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is sent after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that the data is overwritten and updated at any time, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 collects the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , Instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The image data transfer instruction is given by including the transfer data information in the drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. As a result, the MPU 231 can give an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to the frame buffer of either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While expanding the image and expanding the image in one frame buffer, the image information for one frame previously expanded is read from the other frame buffer, and the drive signal is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 is executed to display the image for one frame.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 expands the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer and simultaneously expands the image. The image for one frame previously expanded can be read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used for drawing the image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to complete, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffers 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, respectively.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. NS.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. NS. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing the work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counting counter 233h, and a stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a rear image change flag 233w, a rear image discrimination flag 233x, a demo display flag 233y, and a confirmation display flag 233z.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 subsequently executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained. Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated productions.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are described and display data for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110. This is an area in which the transfer data information of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and the transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table are stored.

These data tables are usually stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 subsequently controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 by using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device can be used. By using 81, it is possible to easily execute a diversified and complicated production.

Here, the details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect and an opening effect. , Display data tables corresponding to round production, ending production, and demo production are prepared.

The variation effect is an effect started by the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally displayed as a stop, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A and jackpot B. If any of the above, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally displayed as a stop. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

The opening production is a production for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special gaming state and the large opening that is normally closed will be repeatedly opened, and the round production will start from now on. This is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be played. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player of the end of the special gaming state.

As described above, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop of one variation effect. The third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demo effect is stored. Further, as the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effect, if there are 32 patterns of variation effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. 24. FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address represented by the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. The content (drawing content) of the image for one frame is defined in detail.

In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for identifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed enlarged from the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be reduced from the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for identifying a known α-blending coefficient used when performing a superposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...), and light in the image are drawn contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, and a character used for various effects such as a boy image and characters, is defined for each address. In addition, one or a plurality of information about the effect and the character is defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are displayed with respect to the passage of time. Since it is constant, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type is the back A to E corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of "city stage", "forest stage", "river stage", "sky stage", and "island stage"). Information is described that specifies whether to display one of them or to display a rear image different from the rear images A to E. Further, as the back surface type, when specifying to display a back image different from the back images A to E, information for specifying which back image is to be displayed is also described.

When it is specified that any of the back surfaces A to E is to be displayed by the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery among the back surfaces A to E as a drawing target. In addition, the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified according to the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back images A to E, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back type.

In the present embodiment, the case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table will be described. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are described. It may be specified as the position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed with respect to the frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from the start of drawing the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) of the image indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time from the display of the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81) according to the rear type. It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), or the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating the above) may be specified as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

In the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), the symbol type offset information is described as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before and the variation effect that is performed this time. This is because the symbol changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation to the elapse of a predetermined time, the offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is described. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Describe the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since each third symbol has a unique number, the fluctuation symbol in the previous variation effect and the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 can be selected as the third symbol. By managing with the numbers attached to and expressing the offset information by the difference of the numbers attached to each third symbol, it is possible to easily specify the third symbol to be displayed from the offset information.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is fluctuating at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. Therefore, during that time, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect that is being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

The start address "0000H" of the display data table is described with "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, and the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 24) is the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the display data table is obtained. Is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is added by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the pointer is then added. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 26) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed like the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is applied to the complicated and enormous processing of starting and executing a program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 may be limited, and the diversification of controllable production images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than game machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize.

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. 25. FIG. 25 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified by the display data table, it is resident. The transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

If all the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. Is described (corresponding to the addresses "0001H" and "097H" in FIG. 25). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (corresponding to the address "0002H" in FIG. 25).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

As with the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 25, in the example of FIG. 25). In "02F0H"), "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table. Is described.

When the display data table to be used is selected by the MPU 231 according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 26) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 25, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", since the Bull data is defined at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 receives display data in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Further, the transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and is associated with the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on images (main image at power-on and variable image at power-on) shown in FIGS. 21 (a) to 21 (c) on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to indicate. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on or the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM. , MPU 231 is set to on in the main process (see FIG. 57) (see S6005 in FIG. 57). Then, in order to display an image other than the image at the time of power-on on the third symbol display device 81 at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process of the transfer setting process. , Is set to off (see S7605 in FIG. 68 (b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 59 (b)), and is simplified. When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 59 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 59 (b)) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 59 (b) see S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is made so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. The processing (see FIGS. 60 to 64) and the display setting processing (see FIGS. 65 to 67) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S7501 in FIG. 68 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is turned on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 68 (b)) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because the resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 69) for transferring the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It is selected and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 is used for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 26), which will be described later, is generated in which the contents of instructions for drawing an image are described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is obtained for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 26), which will be described later, is generated in which drawing instructions are described. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing the Full data which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If (that is, if the Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a drawing list (see FIG. 26) described later that describes the instruction content for drawing an image to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 shifts the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address to acquire the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. 59 (b). ), The pointer update process (see S7205 in FIG. 65) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is added one by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and describes a drawing list described later. (See FIG. 26) is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add the information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

If the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller that draws an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing the drawing list instructed to 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 26, a back image used in the image of one frame and a third symbol (designs 1,). Symbol 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls Design 1, Number of reserved balls Symbol 2, ..., Error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described for each sprite such as (design). In addition, transfer data information for transferring predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 to the image controller 237 is also described in the drawing list.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information thereof. The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucent value. Performs conversion processing, synthesizes with other sprites according to α blending information, performs color tone correction processing according to color information, and performs filtering processing according to the filter specification information by the method specified by that information. Then, the image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying a hold ball number symbol). Based on the image, warning image notifying the occurrence of an error, etc.), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the sprite (display object) data are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 depends on the sprite type. Therefore, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, then the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls symbol 1, number of reserved balls symbol 2, ..., error symbol).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Further, when the transfer data information is described in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 describes the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source final address in ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a to store the transfer target image data) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes this transfer data information, the image controller 237 starts an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read out, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The timekeeping counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 stores one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 59 (b). ) Is executed, the time counting counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S7207 in FIG. 65). As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processes that should be performed.

The stored image data determination flag 233i stores the image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not it is present.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 57) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data discrimination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" indicating that the stored state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

Then, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 231. It is said. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite is always in the unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and of the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7713 in FIG. 69). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S7714 in FIG. 69). , The image controller 237 is made to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load on each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic on the bus line 240. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c) (hereinafter, referred to as “drawing target buffer”). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7802 in FIG. 70).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the previously expanded drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and displays the image with the drive signal for the third symbol display device 81. By transferring the information, the display process of displaying the image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated in accordance with the drawing target buffer information being transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, setting it to "1" if the value is "0" and "0" if the value is "1". Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the drawing list is transmitted by the V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed every time the drawing process of the process (see S6306 in FIG. 59 (b)) is executed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. NS.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. NS. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The rear image change flag 233w is a flag for determining whether or not to change the type of the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If the back image change flag 233w is on, it means that the type of the back image is changed, and if it is off, it means that the change is not performed. The rear image change flag 233w is set to on when the rear image change command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received (see S7001 in FIG. 64A). Further, the rear image change flag 233w is referred to in the normal image transfer setting process (see S7709 in FIG. 69), and is set to off when the rear image change process is executed (see S7710 in FIG. 69). As a result, the rear image corresponding to the rear image change command and the effect mode change command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be displayed.

The rear image discrimination flag 233x is a flag indicating the set rear image type. This flag is composed of, for example, 1 byte, and each back type is associated with each bit. If any bit of the back image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the back type corresponding to the on bit is set as the current back type. For example, if the 0th bit of the rear image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the rear surface A is set. When the rear image change command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received, the bit corresponding to the rear image notified by the command is set to on for the rear image discrimination flag 233x (FIG. 64 (a). ) S7002). At this time, all other bits are set to off. With this back image discrimination flag 233x, the currently set back type can be easily specified.

The demo display flag 233y is a flag indicating whether or not the demo is being produced. If the demo display flag 233y is on, it means that the demo is being produced, and if it is off, it means that the demo is not being produced. This demo display flag 233y is set to on when the demo display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 65) (see S7221 in FIG. 65), and the demo display data table is set. It is set to off when other display data tables other than are set for the display data table buffer 233d (S6505 in FIG. 61 (a), S6705 in FIG. 62 (a), S6805 in FIG. 62 (b). , See S6905 in FIG. 63). With this demo display flag 233y, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the demo is currently being produced.

The confirmation display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not the confirmation display effect is being executed. Here, the final display effect indicates an effect of stopping and displaying (confirming display) the stop symbol for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after the fluctuation pattern. If the confirmation display flag 233z is on, it means that the confirmation display effect is in progress, and if it is off, it means that the confirmation display effect is not in progress. The confirmation display flag 233z is set to on when the confirmation display data table is set to the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 65) (S7214 in FIG. 65), and is other than the confirmation display data table. It is set off when another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d (S6505 in FIG. 61 (a), S6705 in FIG. 62 (a), S6805 in FIG. 62 (b), FIG. See S6905 in 63). With this confirmation display flag 233z, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the current confirmation display effect is in progress.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 27 to 51. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process (see FIG. 45) that is started when the power is turned on, a main process (see FIG. 46) that is executed after the start-up process, and periodically (see the present embodiment). Then, there are a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27) that is activated (at a cycle of 2 milliseconds) and an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 44) that is activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. First, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described, and then the start-up process (see FIG. 45) and the main process (see FIG. 46) will be described.

FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process that is repeatedly executed every 2 milliseconds. When the MPU 201 executes this timer interrupt process, various processes to be executed periodically are performed.

In this timer interrupt process, first, an external output process is executed (S101). In the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27) and the main process (see FIG. 46), a command or the like to be transmitted to the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, or the like is generated based on various processes and is provided in the RAM 203. It is temporarily stored in the ring buffer for sending commands. In the external output process of S101, output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer is transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side.

For example, the hold ball number command set in the start winning process (FIG. 39, S108) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, the confirmation command, etc. set in the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 28, S107) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

Next, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S102), and then the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is opened or closed in the case of a big hit state. A large opening opening / closing process is executed (S103). That is, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the jackpot (special game state), and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether the specified number of balls have won the specific winning opening 65a. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds.

Next, the reading process of various winning switches is executed (S104). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved. Further, a prize ball command corresponding to the number of acquired balls to be transmitted to the payout control device 111 based on the prize detection information is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. As a result, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 111 by the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process executed next.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S105). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the second hit random number counter C4, and the small hit type counter C5 are updated (S106). Specifically, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the second hit random number counter C4, and the small hit type counter C5 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (the present embodiment). Then, when it reaches 299, 99, 239, 99), it clears to 0, respectively. When the first per random number counter C1 or the second per random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 or the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is used as the first per random number counter. It is read as the initial value of C1 or the second random number counter C4, and the initial value is set in the first random number counter C1 or the second random number counter C4. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C5 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, a process for displaying the first special symbol and the second special symbol by the first symbol display device 37 and a special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are executed. Then, the start winning process associated with winning the first ball opening 64 or the second ball opening 640 is executed (S108). The details of the special symbol variation process (S107) will be described later with reference to FIG. 28, and the details of the start winning process (S108) will be described later with reference to FIG. 39.

After the start winning process (S108) is executed, the normal symbol variation process (S109), which is the variation process of the normal symbol for the game ball passing through the normal ball entry port 67, is executed (S109), and then the normal ball entry port 67 is executed. (S110), the through-gate passage process for the passage of the game ball is executed. The details of the normal symbol variation processing (S109) will be described later with reference to FIG. 40, and the details of the through gate passage processing (S110) will be described later with reference to FIG. 41.

After executing the through-gate passage process (S110), the variation monitoring process (S111) for monitoring whether the player is performing the correct game corresponding to the game state is executed, and then the player does not correspond to the game state. When a (illegal) game is being executed, an illegal monitoring process (S112) for monitoring the period is performed. The details of the fluctuation monitoring process (S111) will be described later with reference to FIG. 42, and the details of the fraud monitoring process (S112) will be described later with reference to FIG. 43.

After executing the fraud monitoring process (S112), a launch control process for executing control regarding the launch of the ball is executed (S113), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S114). Ends the timer interrupt process. The firing control process (S113) detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor 51a, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. It is a process to determine whether to turn on / off the firing. Then, when the ball launch is on, the information of the ball launch signal is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the work RAM 203 in order to transmit the ball launch signal to the launch control device 112. As a result, the ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112 via the payout control device 111 by the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process that is executed next.

Next, with reference to FIG. 28, a special symbol variation process (S107), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S107). In the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 28, S107), various determinations and decisions are made using each counter value acquired based on the entry into the first entry port 64 and the second entry opening 640, and at the same time, various determinations and decisions are made. The first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 simultaneously control the variation display in the variation display mode according to the determination result, or stop the display in the display mode showing the determination result. Will be done.

In the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 28, S107), first, it is determined whether or not the big hit or small hit game is being executed (S201), and when it is determined that the big hit or small hit game is being executed. (S201: Yes), since the start or stop of the variable display of the special symbol should not be set, this process ends as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S201, when it is determined that neither the big hit nor the small hit is in progress (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S202). In the process of S202, when it is determined that the variation display of the first special symbol is being displayed (S202: Yes), the first special symbol variation stop process is executed (S204), and the process shifts to S205. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 33, but in the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S204), when the specified fluctuation time elapses during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, the lottery of the first special symbol is performed. The process of stopping the variable display is executed with the symbol indicating the result.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol is not in the variation display (S202: No), the first special symbol variation start process is executed (S203), and the process shifts to S205. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 29, but in the first special symbol fluctuation start processing (FIG. 29, S203), the hold data (various counter values) is stored in the first special symbol hold ball number storage area 203a. Then, the jackpot determination and the fluctuation pattern selection process based on the pending data are executed.

In the process of S205 executed after the first special symbol change start process (S203) or the first special symbol change stop process (S204) is executed, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol is displaying the change. (S205). In the process of S205, when it is determined that the second special symbol is in the variation display (S205: Yes), the second special symbol variation stop process is executed (S207), and this process is terminated. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 38, but in the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (FIG. 38, S207), the second special symbol is the same as the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (FIG. 33, S204). When the specified fluctuation time elapses during the fluctuation display of, the process of stopping the fluctuation display is executed with the symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol.

On the other hand, in the process of S205, when it is determined that the second special symbol is not being displayed in the variation (S205: No), the second special symbol variation start process is executed (S206), and this process is terminated. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 35, but in the second special symbol fluctuation start processing (S206), the number of second special symbol reserved balls is stored in the same manner as in the first special symbol fluctuation start processing (FIGS. 29 and S203). If the hold data (various counter values) is stored in the area 203b, the jackpot determination and the fluctuation pattern selection process based on the hold data are executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the details of the first special symbol variation start process (S203), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 28, S107), will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol change start processing (S203).

In this first special symbol change start processing (FIG. 29, S203), first, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired (S301), and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d It is determined whether the value (N1) is larger than 0 (S302). In the process of S302, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is larger than 0 (S302: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is set. After subtracting 1 (S303), a hold ball number command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the hold ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d after the subtraction is set (S304). ..

The hold ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is voiced in the external output process (S2001) of the main process (see FIG. 46) to be executed later by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d from the hold ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the first special symbol hold ball number counter of the RAM 223. Store in 223b1. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 223b1 according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the first special symbol of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the value of the reserved ball number counter 203d.

When the process of S304 is completed, the game state update process is then executed (S304). Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 30, but in the game state update process (FIG. 30, S304), various counters (probability variation counter 203 g, time saving medium counter 203r, chance mode counter 203x) indicating the state of the pachinko machine 10 are used. This is a process for updating the state of the pachinko machine 10 by updating the value.

When the process of S305 is completed, the first special symbol jackpot determination process is then executed (S306). Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 31, but in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 31, S306), the first random number counter C1 shifted to the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203c. Based on the value of and the current gaming state, the determination of whether or not it is a big hit is executed.

When the process of S306 is completed, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process is then executed (S307), and this process is completed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 32, but in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 32, S307), the first random number counter stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203c. Based on the result of the hit / fail determination based on the value of C1, the process for selecting the fluctuation pattern based on each counter value is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 30, a game state update process (S305), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29), will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing this game state update process (S305).

When the game state update process (see FIG. 30) is started, it is first determined whether or not the value of the probability variation counter 203g is greater than 0 (S401), and when it is determined that the probability variation counter 203g is greater than 0 (see FIG. 30). S401: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter is subtracted by 1 (S402), and the process proceeds to S403. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0 in the processing of S401 (S401: No), the processing of S402 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of S403.

In the process of S403, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203r is larger than 0 (S403). When it is determined that the time saving / medium counter 203r is larger than 0 in the processing of S403 (S403: Yes), the value of the time saving / medium counter 203r is subtracted by 1 (S404), and the process proceeds to S405. On the other hand, when the value of the time saving / medium counter 203r is 0 (S403: No), the processing of S404 is skipped and the process proceeds to S405.

In the process of S405, it is determined whether or not the value of the chance mode counter 203x is larger than 0 (S405), and when it is determined that the value of the chance mode counter 203x is larger than 0 (S405: Yes), the chance mode counter 203x The value of is subtracted by 1 (S406), and the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the chance mode counter 203x is 0 in the processing of S405 (S405: No), the processing of S406 is skipped and the process proceeds to S407.

In the process of S407, it is determined whether or not the game state has been changed. More specifically, the value of the probability variation counter 203g is updated from 1 to 0 to change from the probability variation state to the normal state, or the value of the time saving medium counter 203r is updated from 1 to 0 to change from the time saving state to the normal state. Or the value of the chance mode counter 203x is updated from 1 to 0, and it is determined whether the chance mode A has been changed to the normal mode in the normal state. If it is determined in the process of S407 that the game state has been changed (S407: Yes), a state command indicating the changed game state is set (S408), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the game state has not been changed (S407: No), the process of S408 is skipped and the main process is terminated as it is.

The state command set in the process of S408 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 in the external output process (S2001) of the main process (see FIG. 46) described later. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. By this state command, the voice lamp control device 113 can accurately grasp the state of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29), will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306).

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 31), first, each counter value stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is acquired (S501). Next, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is a high probability state (probability change state) (S502). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more. When it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more (that is, the gaming state is the probability variation state) (S502: Yes), the jackpot specified in the first random number table 202a for high probability time It is determined whether or not the random number value is matched with the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired from the counter buffer, and the determination result (lottery result) is acquired (S503). On the other hand, in the processing of S502, when it is determined that the probability variation counter 203g is off (that is, it is a low probability state of the special symbol) (S502: No), the first random number table 202a for the low probability time is displayed. It is determined whether or not the specified random number value that becomes a big hit and the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired from the counter buffer match, and the lottery result is acquired (S504).

When the processing of S503 or S504 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the hit flag 203s is on (S505), and if it is determined to be on (S505: Yes), this first special symbol jackpot determination process is performed. Before (see FIG. 31) is executed, it is determined as a big hit or a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, and it means that the variable display indicating the determination result is being executed. As the type of the stop symbol to be displayed on the symbol display device 37, the out-of-order symbol of the first special symbol is set (S510), and this process is terminated. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) that the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol both become big hits, and the other big hit is started during the execution of one big hit.

On the other hand, in the processing of S505, when it is determined that the hit flag 203s is not on (off) (S505: No), then the lottery result (judgment result) of the first special symbol is a big hit or a small hit. (S506), and if it is determined to be either a big hit or a small hit (S506: Yes), the hit flag 203s is set to on (S507). Next, the lottery result of the first special symbol is set as a big hit or a small hit (S508), and the first special symbol hit (big hit or small hit) symbol is set in the first symbol display device 37 (S509). End the process.

On the other hand, in the process of S506, if it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is neither a big hit nor a small hit (the lottery result is out of order) (S506: No), the process is shifted to S510 and stopped. The out-of-order symbol of the first special symbol is set as the symbol (S510), and this process is completed.

In the present embodiment, in the case of disconnection, "-" indicating the disconnection is set in the left 7-segment LED of the 7-segment display 37b of the first symbol display device 37. Here, each symbol set in the first symbol display device 37 is a process for setting a symbol to be stopped and displayed when the variable display is stopped.

Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29), will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307).

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 32), first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the first special symbol executed in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 31) is a jackpot. (S601), if it is determined to be a jackpot (S601: Yes), the first hit type selection table 202b is read out, and the jackpot type of the first special symbol corresponding to the value of the first hit type counter C2 is selected. (S602). When the processing of S602 is completed, the processing is transferred to S603.

On the other hand, in the process of S601, if it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is not a big hit (small hit or miss) (S601: No), the process of S602 is skipped and the process proceeds to S603. do.

In the process of S603, it is determined whether or not the value of the chance mode counter 203x is larger than 0 (S603). If it is determined that the value of the chance mode counter 203x is larger than 0 (S603: Yes), it means that the lottery of the first special symbol has been executed in the chance mode A. Therefore, the chance A table 202d3 is used as the variable pattern table. Is read out (S604), and the process proceeds to the process of S608. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the chance mode counter 203x is 0 (S603: No), then it is determined whether the probability variation counter 203g and the time saving medium counter 203r are both 0 (S605).

In the processing of S605, when it is determined that both the value of the probability variation counter 203g and the value of the time saving / medium counter 203r are 0 (S605: Yes), it means that the current state is the normal mode, so that it fluctuates. The normal table 202d1 is read as the pattern table, and the process proceeds to S608. On the other hand, when it is determined that either the value of the probability variation counter 203g or the value of the time reduction counter 203r is 1 or more (S605: No), it means that the probability variation state or the time reduction state is in progress. Therefore, the table 202d2 for the consecutive villa / chance B is read out as the fluctuation pattern table (S607), and the process proceeds to S608.

In the process of S608, 1 variation pattern (variation time) is selected from the read variation pattern table based on the lottery result of the first special symbol and the value of the variation type counter CS1 (S608). Next, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is generated based on the selected fluctuation pattern, and the value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern selected this time is set in the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter (S609). Next, the special figure 1 stop type command is set (S610), and this process is terminated.

The special figure 1 variation pattern command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 in the external output process (S2001) of the main process (see FIG. 46) described later. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure 1 variation pattern command, the voice lamp control device 113 determines a detailed variation display effect mode based on the variation pattern notified by the special figure 1 variation pattern command.

Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S204), which is one of the special symbol fluctuation processing (see FIG. 28), will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S204).

In the special symbol fluctuation stop processing (FIGS. 33 and S204), first, the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203t is subtracted and updated (S701), and the counter value after the subtraction is the fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern set this time. It is determined whether or not the counter value corresponds to the end (S702). If it is determined that the value of the fluctuation time counter 203t in FIG. 1 is not the counter value corresponding to the end of the fluctuation time (S702: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S702, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203t is the counter value corresponding to the end of the fluctuation time (S702: Yes), then the fluctuation pattern of this time is the second. 1 It is determined whether or not a jackpot is set as a lottery result of a special symbol (S703). In the process of S703, when it is determined that the jackpot is set (S703: Yes), the special figure 2 confirmation command for confirming and displaying the second special symbol is set (S704), and the first symbol is displayed. The fluctuation stop of the second special symbol of the device 37 is set (S705). Then, while setting the start of the jackpot (S706), the values of the hit flag 203s, the probability variation counter 203g, the time reduction / medium counter 203r, and the chance mode counter 203x are reset (S707), and the process shifts to S709.

On the other hand, in the process of S703, if it is determined that a lottery result (missing or small hit) other than the big hit is set as the lottery result of the first special symbol (S703: No), the mode shifts to the chance mode A. When determining whether or not to move to the chance mode A, the chance mode setting process for setting the number of chance modes is performed (S708), and the process shifts to the process of S709. The details of the chance mode setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 34.

In the process of S709, a special figure 1 confirmation command for confirming and displaying the symbol indicating the jackpot is set (S709), and the fluctuation of the first special symbol that is variablely displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is stopped (S710). ), End this process.

With this configuration, the second special symbol can be stopped at the symbol corresponding to the deviation at the timing when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed at the symbol corresponding to the hit. Therefore, the players can be concentrated on the jackpot.

Next, the chance mode setting process (S708), which is one of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processes (see FIG. 33), will be described with reference to FIG. 34. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this chance mode setting process (S708).

When this chance mode setting process (see FIG. 34) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not a small hit is set as a lottery result of the first special symbol (S801), and it is not a small hit (that is, it is a miss). If it is determined (S801: No), the chance mode A is not set, so the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S801, when it is determined that the small hit is set in the lottery result of the first special symbol (S801: Yes), it is determined whether the small hit type is the small hit A (S802). ..

In the processing of S802, when it is determined that the small hit is A (S802: Yes), the value of the chance mode counter 203x is set to 10 (S803), and the process proceeds to the processing of S807. As a result, after the small hit is completed, the chance mode A, which is more advantageous than the normal mode (the lottery of the second special symbol is easy to be executed), can be set over 10 special symbol lottery.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the small hit type is not the small hit A (S802: No), then it is determined whether or not the small hit type is the small hit B (S804), and if it is the small hit B. (S804: Yes), the value of the chance mode counter 203x is set to 20 (S805), and the process proceeds to S807. On the other hand, in the processing of S804, when it is determined that the small hit type this time is not the small hit B (that is, the small hit C) (S804: No), 100 is set to the value of the chance mode counter 203x (S806). ), The process proceeds to S807.

In the process of S807, a state command indicating the transition to the chance mode A is set (S807), and then a display special figure 2 confirmation command for confirming and displaying the second special symbol with the symbol corresponding to the deviation is set (S807). S808). Next, the variation display of the second special symbol in the first symbol display device 37 is stopped (S809), the start of a small hit is set (S810), the hit flag 203s is set to off (S811), and this process is performed. To finish.

By this chance mode setting process (see FIG. 34), when a small hit is made, the chance mode A can be set the number of times corresponding to the small hit type. As a result, when the game state is the normal state, every time a small hit is made, the chance mode is relatively advantageous from the normal mode, which is the most disadvantageous to the player (when right-handed, the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed). It can be transferred to A. Therefore, even if it is not a big hit, it is possible to add intonation to the game in the normal state, so that it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game from becoming monotonous.

Next, the second special symbol variation start process (S206), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 28), will be described with reference to FIG. 35. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol change start processing (S206).

In the second special symbol change start processing (see FIG. 35), first, the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is acquired (S901), and the acquired second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is used. It is determined whether or not the value (N2) is greater than 0 (S902). In the process of S902, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S902: No), the reserved ball does not exist and the lottery of the first special symbol is executed. Therefore, the processing of S903 to S906 is skipped and the process proceeds to S907. On the other hand, in the process of S902, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S902: Yes), the value of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e (N2). Is subtracted by 1 (S903), and a hold ball number command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the value after the subtraction is set (S904).

Next, the game state update process described above is executed with reference to FIG. 30 (S905), the second special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S906), and the process shifts to S907. Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 36, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 36, S906) is the first hit stored in the execution area of the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b. This is a process for executing a determination as to whether or not a jackpot is a jackpot based on the value of the random number counter C1.

In the process of S907, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (S907), and this process is terminated. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 37, but the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 37, S907) is a variation type counter stored in the execution area of the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b. This is a process for selecting a fluctuation pattern from the fluctuation pattern table 202d according to the value of CS1.

Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S906), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 35, S206), will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S906).

In the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 36), first, various counter values stored in the execution area of the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b are acquired (S1001). Next, with reference to the value of the probability variation counter 203g, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is the probability variation state (S1002). In the process of S1002, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more (that is, the gaming state is the probability variation state) (S1002: Yes), the first random number table 202a for high probability (Fig. The lottery result of whether or not the random number value of the jackpot defined in 13 (b) matches the value of the first random number counter C1 is acquired (S1003), and the process proceeds to S1005.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1002, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0 (that is, the gaming state is the normal state) (S1002: No), the first random number table 202a for low probability (S1002: No) The lottery result of whether or not the random number value of the jackpot defined in FIG. 13B) matches the value of the first random number counter C1 is acquired (S1004), and the process proceeds to S1005.

In the process of S1005, it is determined whether or not the hit flag 203s is on (S1005), and when it is determined that the hit flag 203s is off, that is, the jackpot variation display is executed in the first special symbol. If it is determined that there is no (S1005: No), it is determined whether the lottery result obtained in the process of S1003 or S1004 is a big hit (S1006). In the process of S1006, when it is determined that the lottery result is a big hit (S1006: Yes), the winning flag 203s is set to ON (S1007), and the lottery result of the second special symbol is set to the big hit (S1008). .. Next, the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S1009), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1005, when it is determined that the winning flag 203s is on (S1005: Yes), or in the process of S1006, when it is determined that the set lottery result is out of order (S1005: Yes). S1006: No), a symbol indicating the deviation of the second special symbol is set in the first special symbol display device 37 (S1010), and this process is terminated.

Next, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S907), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 35), will be described with reference to FIG. 37. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S907).

In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 37), first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot is set as the lottery result of the second special symbol (S1101). In the process of S1101, when it is determined that a big hit is set as the lottery result of the second special symbol (S1101: Yes), the first hit type selection table 202b is read out and the counter of the first hit type counter C2. The hit type corresponding to the value is selected (S1102). After that, the process proceeds to S1103. On the other hand, in the process of S1101, when it is determined that the lottery result of the second special symbol is set to be out of order (S1101: No), the process of S1102 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S1103.

In the processing of S1103, it is determined whether or not the value of the chance mode counter 203x is larger than 0 (S1103), and if the value of the chance mode counter 203x is larger than 0 (S1103: Yes), it is used as a fluctuation pattern table for chance A. The table 202d3 is read out (S1104), and the process proceeds to S1108. On the other hand, if the value of the chance mode counter 203x is 0 (S1103: No), it is determined whether the values of the probability variation counter 203g and the time saving / medium counter 203r are both 0 (S1105). In the processing of S1105, if each value of the probability variation counter 203g and the time saving / medium counter 203r is 0 (S1105: Yes), the normal table 202d1 is read out as the fluctuation pattern table (S1106), and the process proceeds to the processing of S1108. ..

On the other hand, in the processing of S1105, if the value of any one of the probability variation counter 203g and the time saving medium counter 203r is 1 or more (S1105: No), the table 202d2 for consecutive villa / chance B is read out as the variation pattern table. (S1107), the process proceeds to S1108.

In the process of S1108, a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the set lottery result of the special symbol and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is selected from the read fluctuation pattern table (S1108). Next, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is generated (set) based on the fluctuation pattern selected in the process of S1108, and the counter value corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern is set in the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203u (). S1109), a special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the stop type is set (S1110), and this process is terminated.

Next, the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S207), which is one of the special symbol fluctuation processing (see FIG. 28), will be described with reference to FIG. 38. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S207).

In the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see FIG. 38), first, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203u is subtracted and updated (S1201), and the counter value after the subtraction is the counter corresponding to the end of the fluctuation time. It is determined whether or not it is a value (S1202). If it is determined in the process of S1202 that the counter value does not correspond to the end of the fluctuation time (S1202: No), the present process is terminated as it is without setting the fluctuation stop of the second special symbol.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1202, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203u is a value corresponding to the end of the fluctuation time (S1202: Yes), a big hit is set as the lottery result of the second special symbol. It is determined whether or not it is (S1203). When it is determined that a jackpot is set as a result of the lottery of the second special symbol (S1203: Yes), the voice lamp control device is set so as to stop and display the fluctuation of the first special symbol according to the set stop type. A special figure 1 confirmation command for notifying 113 is set (S1204). Next, the stop display of the first special symbol is set in the first symbol display device 37 (S1205). Then, the start of the jackpot is set (S1206), the values of the hit flag 203s, the probability variation counter 203g, the time reduction / medium counter 203r, and the chance mode counter 203x are reset (S1207), and the process proceeds to S1208.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1203 that a small hit or a miss is set as the lottery result of the second special symbol (S1203: No), the processes of S1204 to S1207 are skipped and the process proceeds to S1208. Transition.

In the process of S1208, a special figure 2 confirmation command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 to stop and display the fluctuation of the second special symbol with the set stop type is set (S1208), and the first symbol is set. The display device 37 sets the variable stop of the second special symbol being executed (S1219), and ends this process.

In this way, since the control of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed independently and in parallel, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed in a variable manner at the same time. Can be made to. Therefore, it is possible to execute a lottery game with more special symbols within a predetermined time, and it is possible to increase the probability that the player will be given a big hit within the predetermined time. Therefore, the player can be made to play the game efficiently.

Further, even if the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed in a variable manner at the same time and the lottery game is executed, if a big hit game occurs in one of the first or second special symbols, the other Since the variable display of the special symbol is removed and the symbol is stopped and displayed, the player can concentrate on the jackpot game and play the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the details of the start winning process (S108), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S108). The start winning process (FIG. 39) determines whether a ball has won a prize in the first ball opening 64 or the second ball opening 640 (whether the ball has won a starting prize), and if a prize is won, the maximum number of pending balls (first). Each of the acquired counter values is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, up to a maximum of four for each of the entry port 64 and the second entry opening 640). It is a process to do.

In the start winning process (see FIG. 39), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64 (S1301). Here, the winning of the first ball opening 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball opening 64 (there was a start winning) (S1301: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired (N1). S1302), it is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1303). That is, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls for the first entry port 64 is stored up to the upper limit value.

Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first ball opening 64 (S1301: No), or even if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (N1). If is less than 4 (S1303: No), the process shifts to S1307 without acquiring various counter values of the counter buffer. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64 (S1301: Yes) and the value (N1) of the reserved ball number counter 203d in the first special figure is less than 4 (S1303: Yes), the first special 1 is added to the value (N1) of the symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (1304), and a reserved ball number command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the number of reserved balls after the addition is set (S1305). ..

The reserved ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S2001) of the main process (see FIG. 46) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d from the hold ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the first special symbol hold ball number counter of the RAM 223. Store in 223b1.

After setting the hold ball number command by the process of S1305, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS1 updated in the process of S106 of the timer interrupt process described above are set. It is stored in the first free holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S1306), and the process shifts to S1307. In the process of S1306, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the hold second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the hold third area is set, and if the value is 3, the hold fourth area is set as the first area.

Regarding each process from S1307 to S1312, the same process as the process performed for the start winning prize to the first ball opening 64 executed in each process from S1301 to S1306 is the second ball entry. Since it is executed for the start winning of the mouth 640, a detailed description will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 40, a normal symbol variation process (S109), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S109). The normal symbol variation process (S109) is a process for controlling the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display mounting unit 88, the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 640a, and the like.

In this normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 40), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (S1401). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is being performed after the display indicating the hit is made on the second symbol display device 83. Is included. If it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S1401: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1401, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S1401: No), it is determined whether the ordinary symbol of the second symbol display device 83 is being displayed in a variable manner. (S1402). When it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner (S1402: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the normal symbol being executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed (S1402: Yes). S1420). The fluctuation time here is a time set in advance by the processing of S1419, which will be described later, before the fluctuation display is started in the second symbol display mounting unit 88.

In the process of S1420, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S1420: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1420, when it is determined that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol to be variablely displayed has elapsed (S1420: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S1421). .. In the process of S1421, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is a win and the display mode is set by the process of S1413, the "○" symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted display) on the second symbol display device 83 as the second symbol. ) Is set to be done. On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is missed and the display mode at the time of the miss is set by the process of S1418, the "x" symbol is stopped and displayed (lights up) on the second symbol display device 83 as the second symbol. Is set to be displayed). When the stop display is set by the process of S1421, the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 ends, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is the second in the display mode set in the process of S1413 and the process of S1418. 2 A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the symbol display device 83.

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol this time is a hit (S1422). When it is determined that the lottery result of the ordinary symbol this time is a hit (S1422: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the ordinary electric accessory 640a is set (1423). On the other hand, if it is determined that the lottery result of the normal symbol this time is out of order (S1422: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1402, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the variable display (S1402: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times the variable display is held in the normal symbol M) is acquired. (S1403).

Next, when it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S1404), and it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0. (S1404: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S1404: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S1405).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S1406). In the process of S1406, the data stored in the normal symbol hold first to fourth areas of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the normal symbol hold 1st area → execution area, the normal symbol hold 2nd area → the normal symbol hold 1st area, the normal symbol hold 3rd area → the normal symbol hold 2nd area, the normal symbol hold 4th area → Shift the data in each area, such as the 3rd area for holding normal symbols. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is acquired (S1407).

Next, it is determined whether the gaming state is in the reduced working hours state (including the probable change state) (S1408). More specifically, when the value of either one of the probability variation counter 203g and the time reduction medium counter 203r is 1 or more, it is determined that the time reduction state (or probability variation state) is in effect. In the process of S1408, when it is determined that the time is not shortened (S1408: No), the hit / fail judgment is made based on the hit judgment value of the random number table per normal symbol for low probability (see FIG. 14 (a)). The result is acquired (S1411). On the other hand, in the process of S1408, when it is determined that the time-saving game is in progress (S1408: Yes), it is determined whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in the jackpot (S1409). In the process of S1409, if it is determined that the jackpot of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in progress (S1409: Yes), the process of S1411 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not a big hit (S1409: No), the hit determination value of the random number table per ordinary symbol for high probability (see FIG. 14A). Based on the above, the hit / fail determination result is acquired (S1410).

Next, when it is determined whether the lottery result of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is a win (S1412) and the lottery result of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is not a win (that is, it is a miss). (S1412: No), the display mode of "x" which is the display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S1418), and the process proceeds to S1419. On the other hand, in the process of S1412, when it is determined that the lottery result of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is a hit (that is, a hit) (S1412: Yes), the display mode at the time of hit is "○". The display mode of (S1413) is set.

Next, it is determined whether the game state is the reduced working hours state (including the probabilistic changing state) (S1414), and if it is determined that the game is in the reduced working hours state (S1414: Yes), the process shifts to S1416. On the other hand, in the process of S1414, when it is determined that the time is not shortened (S1414: No), it is determined whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit (S1415). In the process of S1415, if it is determined that the jackpot of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in progress (S1415: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S1416.

In the process of S1416, the opening period of the electric accessory 640a is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S1416), and the process shifts to S1419. On the other hand, in the processing of S1415, when it is determined that the jackpot of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not in progress (that is, the normal symbol is in a low probability state) (S1415: No), the electric accessory 640a is released. The time is set to 0.9 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S1417), and the process shifts to S1419.

In the process of S1419 to be executed after executing any of the processes of S1416 to S1418, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) is set to 3 seconds (S1419), and this process is terminated.

Next, the through-gate passage process (S110) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 41. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S110). This through gate passage process (S110) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27), determines whether or not the ball has passed through the normal entry port 67, and if the ball has passed, the second This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the random number counter C4 per 2.

In the through-gate passage process (see FIG. 41), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 (S1501). Here, the fact that the ball has passed through the normal ball entry port 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol entry port 67 (S1501: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is acquired (S1502), and the acquired normal symbol reserved ball number counter is acquired. It is determined whether or not the value (M) of 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S1503).

Whether the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 (S1501: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal entry port 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f. If is less than 4 (S1503: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal symbol entry port 67 (S1501: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S1503: Yes), the normal symbol hold ball number counter The value (M) of 203f is added by 1 (S1504). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S106 of the timer interrupt process described above is the first of the free hold areas (normal symbol hold first to fourth areas) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. Store in the area (S1505). In the process of S1505, the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the area of the normal symbol hold 1 is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the area of normal symbol hold 2 is set, if the value is 2, the area of normal symbol hold 3 is set, and if the value is 3, the area of normal symbol hold 4 is set first. Area.

Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the fluctuation monitoring process (S111), which is one of the timer interrupt processes (see FIG. 27) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the contents of this fluctuation monitoring process (S111). In this fluctuation monitoring process (S111), a process of monitoring whether or not the player is playing the correct game corresponding to the game state is executed. In the present embodiment, in the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol), basically, the ball is launched with a firing intensity at which the ball passes through the path on the left side of the variable display device unit 80. The game method (left-handed) becomes a regular game method, and during a big hit, a small hit, a time saving state, or a probability change state, the ball is fired at a firing strength at which the ball passes through the path on the right side of the variable display device unit 80. The game method (right-handed) becomes the regular game method. In the normal state, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the ultra-long variation (600 seconds) is set as the variation pattern, so that the game efficiency deteriorates. Therefore, hitting right in the normal state is disadvantageous for the player. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility of being disadvantageous to the player by monitoring whether or not the player is playing with the correct way of hitting. In addition, it is possible to monitor the act of fraudulently hitting the right and making the second entrance 640 win a prize to draw an advantageous second special symbol, which causes an unexpected disadvantage to the hall due to fraud. The possibility of getting rid of it can be reduced. Even in the normal state, if the chance mode A is set over the lottery of the special symbol of a specific number of times (10 times, 20 times, or 100 times) after the small hit, right-handed is a regular game. It becomes a method.

In the fluctuation monitoring process (see FIG. 42), first, it is determined whether or not a big hit or a small hit is in progress (S1601). In the processing of S1601, when it is determined that neither a big hit nor a small hit is made (S1601: No), the value of either the probability variation state or the time reduction state (that is, the probability variation counter 203g and the time reduction medium counter 203r). Is 1 or more) (S1602), and if it is determined that the state is in the probability variation state or the time saving state (S1602: Yes), it is determined whether the first special symbol is in the variable display (S1603). .. When it is determined that the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S1603: Yes), the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is set to ON (S1604), and this process is terminated. Here, the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is a flag for determining whether or not the player is playing the game by the correct game method (left-handed or right-handed) corresponding to the game state. When the time when the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is set to ON exceeds a predetermined period (for example, 120 seconds or more), an abnormality notification command is set, and the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the abnormality (third symbol) by the command. A character indicating that the display device 81 is abnormal (for example, a character display suggesting the correct game method (please hit right)) is executed, and an error sound or an instruction sound for the correct game is output by voice, and the hall is displayed. An abnormal signal is output to the computer)) is executed.

In the probabilistic state and the time saving state, by playing the game in the correct game method (right-handed), the lottery of the advantageous second special symbol is easily executed, and the lottery of the disadvantageous first special symbol is executed. It becomes difficult. Therefore, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is highly possible that the player is playing the game with a disadvantageous left-handed strike. In this case, by continuing the variable display of the first special symbol for a predetermined period (for example, 120 seconds) to notify the abnormality, the game can be continued by an illegal game method that is disadvantageous to the player. It can be prevented from being lost.

On the other hand, in the process of S1601, when it is determined that the big hit or the small hit is in progress (S1601: Yes), or in the process of S1603, when it is determined that the first special symbol is in the variable stop state (S1601: Yes). S1603: No), the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is set to off (S1605).

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S1602 that neither the probability change state nor the time saving state is obtained (S1602: No), it means that the current gaming state is the normal state. Therefore, the value of the chance mode counter 203x is next. It is determined whether it is greater than 0 (that is, whether right-handed hitting is chance mode A, which is a regular game method) (S1606). When it is determined that the value of the chance mode counter 203x is larger than 0 in the process of S1606 (S1606: Yes), each process of S1603 to S1605 is executed as in the probabilistic state and the time saving state.

On the other hand, in the process of S1606, when it is determined that the value of the chance mode counter 203x is 0 (normal mode) (S1606: No), it is determined whether the normal symbol (second symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner. (S1607). In the processing of S1607, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not changing (S1607: No), then it is determined whether or not the second special symbol is changing (S1608), and the second special symbol is changing. If not (S1608: No), there is a high possibility that the player is playing the game by the regular game method (left-handed) in the normal mode, so the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is set to off (S1609). This process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1607, when it is determined that the normal symbol is changing (S1607: Yes), or in the processing of S1608, when it is determined that the second special symbol is changing (S1608: Yes). Yes), it means that the ball passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 or entered the second entrance 640 during the normal mode, and it is highly possible that the player is hitting right. .. Therefore, in this case, the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is set to ON (S1604), and this process is terminated.

In this way, in the normal mode, it is a normal game method to play a game by left-handed, but if the normal symbol or the second special symbol that can be variablely displayed when right-handed is changing, it is incorrect. There is a high possibility that you are playing with the game method. Therefore, by setting the abnormality monitoring flag 203y to ON, if the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is kept on for a predetermined time (120 seconds in this embodiment) or more, the abnormality notification is executed, which is invalid. You can discover the game method earlier. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the hall from being given an unexpected disadvantage due to illegal games.

Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the fraud monitoring process (S112), which is one of the timer interrupt processes (see FIG. 27) in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing this fraud monitoring process (S112). In this fraud monitoring process (see FIG. 43), the period during which the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is set to be turned on is timed, and when the time exceeds a predetermined time (120 seconds or more in this embodiment), an abnormality alarm command is set. The process is executed.

In the fraud monitoring process (FIG. 43, S112), first, it is determined whether the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is on (S1701), and if the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is on (S1701: Yes), the value of the abnormality monitoring counter 203aa is set. 1 is added and updated (S1702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the updated abnormality monitoring counter 203aa is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (in the present embodiment, the counter value corresponding to 120 seconds) (S1703), and when it is determined that the value is less than the upper limit value. (S1703: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the abnormality monitoring counter 203aa is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (S1703: Yes), an abnormality alarm command is set (S1704), and this process is terminated.

This abnormality alarm command is output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S101) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Upon receiving this abnormality alarm command, the voice lamp control device 113 executes a process of causing the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output device 226 to output the mode of the abnormality alarm. As a result, fraud and defects can be detected at an early stage.

Further, by configuring the abnormality alarm command to be set when the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is set to the on for a predetermined period (120 seconds in the present embodiment) or more after the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is set to the on. Even if there is a period during which the game is not performed by the regular game method (for example, the period for switching from the right-handed state to the left-handed state) for a short time (less than 120 seconds) when the game state is switched, immediately Since the abnormality alarm is not output, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player feels uncomfortable.

In the present embodiment, the predetermined period is 120 seconds, but the predetermined period is not limited to this, and the predetermined period is configured in a time longer than the switching time required for normal gaming when switching the gaming state. do it. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress a problem that an abnormality alarm is erroneously output while the player changes the firing intensity (direction in which the ball is launched).

On the other hand, in the process of S1701, when it is determined that the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is off (S1701: No), the abnormality monitoring counter 203aa is reset to the initial value 0 (S1705), and this processing is terminated. do.

In this way, when it is determined that the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is off, the value of the abnormality monitoring counter 203aa is reset to the initial value, so that the process of setting the abnormality alarm command is avoided, and the normal game method is used. It is possible to suppress the problem that an abnormality alarm is output even though the game is being played.

FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S1801) as a setting of the power interruption occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout launch control device 111, and the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 45, a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing this start-up process.

This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process (FIG. 45), first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S1901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S1902). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S1903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1904), and if it is turned on (S1904: Yes), the process shifts to S1910. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is not turned on (S1904: No), it is further determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1905), and if it is not stored. (S1905: No) Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the process is also shifted to S1910 in this case as well.

If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1906), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process is shifted to S1910 even in such a case. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S1910, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S1910). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S1911, S1912) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). Therefore, if the RAM erase switch (see FIG. 3) is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM 203 initialization process (S1911, S1912) is executed.

Similarly, when the power failure occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 203 initialization process (S1911, S1912) is executed in the same manner. .. In the RAM initialization process (S1911, S1912), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1911), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1912). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S1913.

On the other hand, the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is not turned on (S1904: No), the power failure occurrence information is stored (S1905: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is stored. If it is normal (S1907: Yes), the power off occurrence information is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S1908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S1909), and the process proceeds to S1913. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

Next, an effect permission command for permitting execution of various effects is output to the voice lamp control device 113 (S1913), and a state command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the game state at the time of startup. Is set (S1914). After that, the interrupt is permitted (S1915), and the process proceeds to the main process (see FIG. 46) described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process (see FIG. 45) will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the counter update process and the power cutoff process are roughly classified.

In the main process (see FIG. 46), first, in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 is controlled on the sub side. The external output process to be transmitted to the device (peripheral control device) is executed (S2001).

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S2002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S2003) and executed. After the processing of S2003, a jackpot control process for setting the operation of the opening / closing plate 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 and the flow path solenoid 65k in the jackpot game is executed (S2004). The details of this jackpot control process (S2004) will be described later with reference to FIG. 47.

After executing the big hit control process (S2004), the small hit control process (S2005) for setting the operation of the opening / closing plate 65f1 during the small hit is executed. The details of this small hit control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 48. When the small hit control process (S2005) is completed, the electric accessory opening / closing process is then executed (S2006). In this electric accessory opening / closing process (S2006), the opening / closing process of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 is executed. Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S2007).

When the process of S2007 is completed, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol (for example, the symbol of "○" or "x") displayed on the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S2008). Briefly, on condition that the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing of the passage, and the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. Ordinary symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Then, a lottery of ordinary symbols is carried out based on the value of the second random number counter C4, and when the ordinary symbol is hit, the ordinary electric accessory 640a is used for a predetermined time (1 second x 2 times or 0.9 seconds x 2). Times) Opened.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2009), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S2009: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 milliseconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the previous main process (S2010). ), If the predetermined time has already passed (S2010: Yes), the process is shifted to S2001, and each process after S2001 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if a predetermined time (4 milliseconds) has not yet elapsed from the start of the previous main process (S2010: No), the remainder until the predetermined time is reached, that is, until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. Within the time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S2011, S2012).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S2011). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S2002 (S2012).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S2001 to S2008 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

Further, in the processing of S2009, if the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2009: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 44 has been executed, the process when the power is cut off after S2013 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S2013), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). Transmit (S2014). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S2015), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S2016), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The processing of S2009 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S2001 to S2008, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S2011 and S2012 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cut state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S2001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S2001 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is used in the initial setting process (S1901) without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S2001 can be started. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S2004), which is one of the main processes (see FIG. 46) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described with reference to FIG. 47. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot control process (S2004).

In the jackpot control process (see FIG. 47), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S2101). Specifically, whether the start of the jackpot was set in the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see FIG. 33) (S706 in FIG. 33), or the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see FIG. 38). Among them, when the start of the jackpot is set (see S1206 in FIG. 38), it is determined that the jackpot is started in the process of S2101.

In the process of S2101, when it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S2101: Yes), an opening command for executing the opening effect indicating the start of the jackpot is set (S2102), and the flow path solenoid 65k. (See the upper part of FIG. 7) is started (S2103). Next, the jackpot middle flag 203v is set to ON (S2104), and this process ends. By setting the jackpot flag 203v to on here, in the processing of S201 of the special symbol variation processing, it is determined that the jackpot is in progress, and the fluctuation start and fluctuation stop of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are started. Since the processing can be completed without executing various processing for setting, it is possible to prevent a problem that the variable display is started even during the big hit.

On the other hand, in the process of S2101, when it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is not started (S2101: No), then it is determined whether the jackpot is in progress (S2105). Among the special symbol jackpots, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. In the process of S2105, if it is determined that the special symbol is not a big hit (S2105: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2105, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (S2105: Yes), then it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S2106), and the start timing of the new round is determined. If (S2106: Yes), the opening operation of the opening / closing plate 65f1 corresponding to the number of rounds is read (S2107). Next, the read opening operation (opening / closing pattern) is set to the opening / closing plate 65f1 (S2108), and this process is terminated. Although not shown, if it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S2105: Yes), a round number command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the start of a new round is given. Is set. The round number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is stored in the external output process (S2001) of the main process (see FIG. 46) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, when the display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is received, a new round effect is started on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2106, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S2106: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S2109), and if it is the start timing of the ending effect (S2109). : Yes), set the ending command (S2110), and end this process. The ending command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S2001) of the main process (see FIG. 46) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the ending effect indicating the end of the jackpot.

On the other hand, in the process of S2109, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S2109: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the jackpot (S2111). Here, the jackpot end timing indicates the case where the execution period of the ending effect has elapsed. If it is determined in the process of S2111 that it is the end timing of the jackpot (S211: Yes), the jackpot end process for setting the game state after the end of the jackpot is executed (S2112), and this process is terminated. The details of this jackpot end processing (S2112) will be described later with reference to FIG. 48.

On the other hand, if it is not the end timing of the jackpot (S211: No), the winning process for performing the processing according to the winning of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is executed (S2113), and then the specific winning opening (S2113) is executed. An abnormal process for determining whether or not the ball that has entered the large opening port) 65a is normally discharged is executed (S2114), and this process is terminated. Details of these winning processes (S2113) and abnormal processing (S2114) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 49 and 50, respectively.

Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the jackpot end process (S2112), which is one of the jackpot control processes (see FIG. 47) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described. As described above, this jackpot end process (S2112) is a process for setting the game state after the jackpot ends. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing this jackpot end process (S2112).

In the jackpot end processing (see FIG. 48), first, it is determined whether the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S2201), and if the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S2201: Yes), the ball is hit during the current jackpot. Since it means that the V winning switch 65e3 has been passed, by setting 101 to the value of the probability variation counter 203g, the game state after the big hit is set to be the probability variation state (S2202), and the process shifts to S2205. do.

On the other hand, in the process of S2201, when it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203h is off (S2201: No), then it is determined whether or not the current jackpot type is jackpot D (S2203). If it is not a jackpot D (S2203: No), 101 is set in the value of the time saving / medium counter 203r (S2204), and the process proceeds to S2205. On the other hand, if it is a jackpot D (S2203: Yes), the process of S2204 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2205. As a result, when the jackpot type is jackpot D and the ball does not pass through the V winning switch 65e3 during the jackpot, the gaming state after the jackpot is set to the normal state. On the other hand, if the ball does not pass through the V winning switch 65e3 in another jackpot type, a time saving state of 100 times is set after the jackpot.

In the processing of S2205, a status command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the status after the end of the jackpot is set from each value of the probability variation counter 203g and the time saving medium counter 203r (S2205), and the jackpot medium flag 203x, And the probability variation setting flag 203h are both set to off (S2206), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the details of the winning process (S2113) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing this winning process (S2113). This winning process (S2113) is executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 47), and as described above, is a process for performing control according to the winning of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a.

In this winning process (S2113), first, it is determined whether or not the current round is valid (S2301). Here, the round validity period is the period during which the round game is set, that is, the period from when the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is set to the open state until the end of the interval period (3 seconds). Is. In the process of S2301, if the round validity period is not (S2301: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2301, when it is determined that the current round validity period is (S2301: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the winning of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is detected (S2302). If the winning of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is detected (S2302: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the winning number counter 203j to update (S2303), and the process proceeds to S2304.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2302, if the winning of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is not detected (S2302: No), the processing of S2303 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2304.

In the process of S2304, it is determined whether the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S2304), and if the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S2304: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S2306.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2304, when it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is 9 or less (S2304: No), it is determined whether the round time has elapsed (S2305), and if the round time has elapsed, it is determined. (S2305: Yes), the process proceeds to S2306.

In the processing of S2306, the closing of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is set (S2306), the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON (S2307), and the process proceeds to S2308.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the round time has not elapsed in the processing of S2305 (S2305: No), the processing of S2306 and S2307 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of S2308.

In the process of S2308, it is determined whether or not the operation counter 203k is larger than 0 (S2308), and if the operation counter 203k is not 0 (S2308: Yes), the operation counter 203k is subtracted by 1 (S2309), and the operation counter 203k is subtracted by 1. Move to processing. On the other hand, if the operation counter 203k is 0 (S2308: No), it means that it is the ball brushing period after closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a, so that the probability variation effective flag 203o is then turned on. (S2316). In the process of S2316, if the probability variation valid flag 203o is off (S2316: No), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, if the probabilistic valid flag 203o is on (S2316: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the probabilistic valid timer 203p (S2317), and then the value of the probabilistic valid timer 203p is the upper limit value (1. 5 seconds) is determined (S2318). Then, if the value of the probability change effective timer 203p is not the upper limit value (S2318: No), the process proceeds to the process of S2310, and the process of monitoring the ball entering the probability change entry port 671 and updating the probability change setting flag 203h is executed. do. As a result, if the probability variation effective timer 203p is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed the V winning switch 65e3, so that the probability variation game state can be set in consideration of the ball brushing time. Further, since there is an upper limit to the time for which the ball is determined to be valid, it is possible to prevent the ball from being illegally passed through the V winning switch and being given a probabilistic gaming state.

On the other hand, if the value of the probabilistic valid timer 203p is the upper limit value (S2318: Yes), the probabilistic valid flag 203o is set to off (S2319), the value of the probabilistic valid timer 203p is reset (S2320), and this process is performed. finish.

In the process of S2310, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed the V winning switch 65e3 (S2310), and if the ball has not passed the V winning switch 65e3 (S2310: No), the process proceeds to the process of S2313. On the other hand, if the ball has passed the V winning switch 65e3 (S2310: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the probability variation passage counter 203i (S2311), the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON (S2312), and S2313. Move to the processing of.

In the process of S2313, it is determined whether or not the operation counter 203k is 0 (S2313), and if the operation counter 203k is not 0 (S2313: No), the process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the operation counter 203k is 0 (S2313: Yes), the flow path solenoid 65k is set to off (S2314), the probability variation valid flag 203o is set to on (S2315), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 50, the abnormality processing (S2114) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing this abnormality processing (S2114). This abnormal processing (S2114) is a processing executed in the jackpot control processing (see FIG. 47), and as described above, the ball that has entered the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is normally discharged. It is a process for determining whether or not it has been done.

In the abnormal processing (S2114), first, it is determined whether the current round valid period is (S2401), and if it is not the round valid period (S2401: No), the present processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round valid period is (S2401: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the ball has passed the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 (S2402).

In the process of S2402, when it is determined that the ball has passed the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 (S2402: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the ball discharge number counter 203q (S2403), and the process proceeds to the process of S2404. On the other hand, in the process of S2402, if the sphere has not passed through the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 (S2402: No), the process of S2403 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S2404.

In the process of S2404, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203m is on (S2404). If it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203m is off (S2404: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the remaining ball timer flag 203m is on (S2404: Yes), the ball brushing period is in progress, so 1 is added to the value of the remaining ball timer 203n to update (S2405). Next, it is determined whether the value of the remaining ball timer 203n is the upper limit value (3 seconds in this embodiment) (S2406), and if the value of the remaining ball timer 203n is not the upper limit value (S2406: No), the book is used as it is. End the process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the remaining ball timer 203n is the upper limit value (3 seconds) (S2406: Yes), then the number of discharged balls (the value of the probability variation passing counter 203i and the value of the ball discharged number counter 203q) It is determined whether the total value) matches the number of winnings (S2407).

If it is determined in the process of S2407 that the number of ejected items and the number of winning items do not match (S2407: No), an error command is set (S2408), and the process proceeds to the process of S2409. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, a character of a winning number mismatch error is displayed) is displayed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to illegally leave the ball in the variable winning device 65 and suppress the illegal act of causing the ball to flow down to the special discharge flow path 65e2 during the on period of the flow path solenoid 65k after the start of the next big hit. can.

On the other hand, in the process of S2407, if it is determined that the number of discharged items and the number of winning items match (S2407: Yes), the process of S2408 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2409. In the process of S2409, the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to off (S2409), and then the value of the remaining ball timer 203n is reset (S2410). After that, the values of the winning number counter 203j, the ball ejection number counter 203q, and the probability variation passing counter 203i are reset (S2411), and this process is terminated.

By executing this abnormal processing (see FIG. 50), the ball that has entered the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is not normally discharged due to the clogging of the ball inside the variable winning device 65 or the like. It is possible to detect and notify the occurrence of such a problem at an early stage. In addition, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts in which the ball is illegally left inside the variable winning device 65 during a big hit.

Next, with reference to FIG. 51, a small hit control process (S2005), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 46) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the contents of this small hit control process (S2005).

In the small hit control process (see FIG. 51), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit of the special symbol is started (S2501). In the process of S2501, when it is determined that the small hit of the special symbol is started (S2105: Yes), the opening command of the small hit is set (S2502). Then, the small hit medium flag 203w is set to ON (S2503), and this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S2501, when it is determined that the small hit of the special symbol is not started (S2501: No), it is determined whether the small hit middle flag 203w is on (S2504). As for the small hits of the special symbols, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the small hits of the special symbols (including during the small hit game of the special symbols). Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the end of the small hit game of the special symbol. In the process of S2504, if the small hit medium flag 203w is off (S2504: No), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2504, when it is determined that the small hit medium flag 203w is on (S2504: Yes), it is determined whether or not it is the opening end timing (S2505), and if it is the opening end timing. (S2505: Yes), the opening pattern of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is set (S2506), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S2505, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the opening (S2505: No), it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the opening pattern set in the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a (S2507). ). In the process of S2507, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the opening pattern set in the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a (S2507: Yes), the ending command of the small hit is set (S2508), and this processing is performed. finish.

On the other hand, if it is not the end timing of the set open pattern (S2507: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the small hit of the special symbol (S2509). That is, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the ending. If it is determined in the process of S2509 that it is the end timing of the small hit (S2509: Yes), the small hit middle flag 203w is set to off (S2510), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is not the end timing of the small hit (S2509: No), this process ends as it is.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 52 to 56, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 52. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S4001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing of S4116 (see FIG. 53) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure") in this startup processing. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S4002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 53, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command from the main control device 110 (see FIGS. 53 and S4113), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S4116. The power off processing flag is turned on before the power off processing is executed, and the power off processing flag is turned off after the power off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power off processing of S4116 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power off processing flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S4002: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power of S4116 is turned off. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S4006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data corruption of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S4003: Yes), the process proceeds to S4004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data corruption in RAM 223 is not confirmed (S4003: No), the process proceeds to S4008.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power-off process of S4116 was completed after a momentary power failure occurred, or was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S4003: No), and the data shifts to S4008.

If the power off processing flag is on (S4002: Yes), the start-up process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power off process of S4116, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 of the above was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power off processing is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S4004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S4004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S4004). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of RAM 223, all the storage areas of RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S4006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: No), the abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S4007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may do it.

In the process of S4008, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S4008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S4116 is executed (see S4115 of FIG. 53). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S4116 is executed, the process of S4008 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S4116 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S4009), and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S4010), the state The game state notified by the command is set in the game state storage area 223h (S4011), then interrupt permission is set (S4012), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the processing of S4008 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the startup processing of this time is started after the power is completely shut off, for example, so that the processing of S4008 is performed via the processing of S4004 to S4006. This is the case where the processing is reached, or only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S4008: No), S4009, which is the clearing process of the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process is shifted to S4010, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S4010).

The reason for skipping the clearing process of S4009 is that when the processing of S4008 is reached via the processing of S4004 to S4006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S4004. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the previous process of S4101 was executed (S4101), 1 millisecond. If the above time has not passed (S4101: No), the process proceeds to the process of S4111 without performing the process of S4102 to S4110. In the process of S4101, it is the process related to the display (effect) that S4102 to S4110 determines whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed, whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S4111 and the variation display setting process of S4112 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S4111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the processing of S4112 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing can be prevented. Based on the above, settings related to the variable display effect can be made without delay.

When it is determined that 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S4101 (S4101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S4103 to S4110 are sent to the display control device 114. (S4102). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited by the process of S4108 described later (S4103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S4104). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that the power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If it is not at the time of turning on the power, the process proceeds to the process of S4105 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S4105, the customer waiting effect is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S4106). In the customer waiting effect, when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is a display control device as a command. It is transmitted to 114. In the hold quantity display update process (S4106), a process of updating the display of the hold symbol display of the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S4107). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting the effect. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

In addition, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the sortable period (the period during which the jackpot game is in progress and the state in which there is no hold), which will be described later, the hold symbol display displayed in the order in which the hold is established starts to change. It is sorted and displayed in order.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is then executed (S4108), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S4109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S4109, the liquid crystal display effect execution management process is executed (S4110). After that, the process proceeds to S4111. In the liquid crystal display execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S4108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal display effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S4109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

After the liquid crystal display effect execution management process (S4110), a command determination process for performing a process according to a command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S4111). Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 54.

After the command determination process (S4111), in order to display the variation display effect on the third symbol display device 81, a display variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is issued. A variable display setting process, which is a process set for transmission to the display control device 114, is executed (S4112). Details of this variable display setting process (S4112) will be described later with reference to FIG. 55.

When the processing of S4112 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4113). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S4113 (S4113: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing in-progress flag are turned on (S4115), and the power-off process is executed (S4116). After executing the power off processing, the power off processing flag is turned off (S4117), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power off processing, the occurrence of the interrupt processing is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the power failure occurrence information is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S4113 (S4113: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S4114), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S4114: No), the process returns to the process of S4101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, in the process of S4114, when it is determined that the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4114: Yes), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S4111) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 54. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S4111). This command determination process (S4111) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. .. The details of the command determination process (S4111) will be described below.

In the command determination process (FIG. 54, S4111), first, from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223, the first command received from the main control device 110 among the unprocessed commands is read and analyzed, and the main control device 110 is analyzed. Further, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command has been received (S4201). When it is determined that either the special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command has been received (S4201: Yes), the flag corresponding to the type of the received command is set to on (S4202). Specifically, when the special figure 1 stop type command is received, the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223d1 is set to on, and when the special figure 2 stop type command is received, the special figure 2 stop type selection flag is set. Set 223d2 to on. Next, the stop type (any of complete loss, reach loss, small hit, and jackpot A to D) is extracted from the received special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 stop type command (S4203), and this process is performed. finish. The stop type extracted in the process of S4203 is stored in the voice lamp control device 113 in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221. The stop type extracted from the special figure 1 stop type command can be identified as the stop type of the first special symbol, and the stop type extracted from the special figure 2 stop type command is of the second special symbol. It is identifiable that it is a stop type, and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 55) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

On the other hand, if it is determined that neither the special figure 1 stop type command nor the special figure 2 stop type command has been received in the processing of S4201 (S4201: No), then the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern is transmitted from the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not a command has been received (S4204). The special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is a command for notifying the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol.

When it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command has been received in the processing of S4204 (S4204: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223c1 provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4205), and the received special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is set to ON (S4205). FIG. 1 The variation pattern type is extracted from the variation pattern command (S4206), and this process is terminated. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 in a format that can be identified as the variation pattern type of the first special symbol, and is stored in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 55) described later. , When notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation display effect of the first special symbol and the display mode of the variation display effect of the first special symbol (set the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol). When you do).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 variation pattern command has not been received (S4204: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation pattern command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4207). The special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is a command for notifying the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol.

In the process of S4207, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command has been received (S4207: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223c2 provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4208), and the received special figure 2 is received. FIG. 2 The variation pattern type is extracted from the variation pattern command (S4209), and this process is terminated. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 in a format that can be identified as the variation pattern type of the second special symbol, and is stored in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 55) described later. , When notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation display effect of the second special symbol and the display mode of the variation display effect of the second special symbol (set the variation pattern command for display of the second special symbol). When you do).

In the process of S4207, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S4207: No), it is determined whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4210). When it is determined that the hold ball number command has been received (S4210: Yes), the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d or the second special symbol hold ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 included in the received hold ball number command is included. The value of the number counter 203e (that is, the number of reserved balls for the fluctuation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is extracted and provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the extracted counter value. The corresponding counter value is updated (S4211), and this process ends. More specifically, when the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is extracted, the extracted counter value is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball counter 223b1 of the RAM 223, and the second special symbol reserved ball number is stored. When the value of the counter 203e is extracted, the extracted counter value is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b2.

Here, since the hold ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball wins the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640 (starting winning), the starting winning is won. Each time, by the processing of S4211, the values of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b1 of the voice lamp control device 113 and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223b2 are set to the first special symbol holding of the main control device 110. The values of the ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e can be adjusted respectively. Therefore, due to the influence of noise or the like, the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b1 or the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223b2 of the voice lamp control device 113 is the first special symbol holding ball number counter of the main control device 110. Even if it deviates from the value of 203d or the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e, if the reserved ball number command is notified based on the start winning, the first special symbol reserved ball number of the voice lamp control device 113 The value of the counter 223b1 or the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b2 can be modified to match the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d or the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110.

Further, in the process of S4210, when it is determined that the reserved ball number command has not been received (S4210: No), it is determined whether the special figure 1 confirmation command or the special figure 2 confirmation command has been received from the main controller 110. (S4212). If it is determined that either the special figure 1 confirmation command or the special figure 2 confirmation command has been received in the processing of S4212 (S4212: Yes), the confirmation display of the special symbol corresponding to the command is set (S4213). , End this process. Specifically, in the process of S4213, when the special figure 1 confirmation command is received, the confirmation display of the first special symbol is set, and when the special figure 2 confirmation command is received, the confirmation display of the second special symbol is received. To set.

On the other hand, in the process of S4212, when it is determined that neither the special figure 1 confirmation command nor the special figure 2 confirmation command has been received (S4212: No), it is determined whether or not the state command has been received (S4214), and the state is determined. If a command has been received (S4214: Yes), the information corresponding to the game state notified by the received state command is set (stored) in the game state storage area 223h (S4215), and this process ends. ..

On the other hand, in the process of S4214, when it is determined that the state command has not been received (S4214: No), the process corresponding to the other command is executed (S4216), and this process is terminated. In the processing of S4215, if the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is performed. Is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114.

Next, with reference to FIG. 55, the variation display setting process (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing this variation display setting process (S4112). This variation display setting process (see FIG. 55) is one of the main processes (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. As described above, the variation display setting process (see FIG. 55) is based on the first or second variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to display the variation display effect on the third symbol display device 81. , A variable pattern command for displaying the first special symbol or the second special symbol is generated, and a process of transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Further, based on the extracted stop type (complete off, reach out, jackpot E, F), the display special figure 1 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type, or the display special figure 2 Executes the process to set the stop type command.

In the variation display setting process (see FIG. 55), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation start flag 223c1 provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4401). Then, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223c1 is off (S4401: No), the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process of S4406 is started. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223c1 is on (S4401: Yes), the fluctuation of the first special symbol this time is based on the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command received from the main controller 110. Each process of S4402 to S4405 for determining the detailed aspect of the display is executed.

More specifically, first, the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223c1 is set to off (S4402), and then the fluctuation pattern selection process for selecting the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is executed (S4403). The details of this fluctuation pattern selection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 56. Next, 1 is subtracted from the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 (S4404), the counter value is set in the secondary special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223e (S4405), and the process proceeds to S4406.

In the processing of S4406, it is determined whether the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223c2 provided in the RAM 223 is on (S4406), and if the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223c2 is off (S4406: No), the main controller 110 Since the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command has not been received, the process proceeds to S4411. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223c2 is on (S4406: Yes), the fluctuation of the second special symbol this time is based on the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command received from the main controller 110. Each process of S4407 to S4410 for determining the detailed aspect of the display is executed.

Specifically, the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223c2 is set to off (S4407), and then the fluctuation pattern command for displaying the second special symbol is set based on the extracted fluctuation pattern (S4408). Next, 1 is subtracted from the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b2 (S4409), the counter value is set in the secondary special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223f (S4410), and the process proceeds to S4411.

In the process of S4411, it is determined whether either the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223d1 or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223d2 of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4411). Then, when it is determined that both the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223d1 and the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223d2 are off (S4411: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S4411, when it is determined that either the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223d1 or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223d2 is on (S4411: Yes), the flag determined to be on is turned off. (S4412), and then, in the process of S4203 of the command determination process (see FIG. 54), the stop type extracted from the special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command is set (S4413). Next, based on the set stop type, a display special figure 1 stop type command or a display special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is generated (S4414). End the process.

In addition, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a big hit, the special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command notified from the main control device 110 notifies the big hit type and makes a small hit. In that case, the small hit type is notified, and in the case of a loss, a complete loss or a reach loss is notified.

With this configuration, the voice lamp control device 113 can control the display control device 114 so that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variablely displayed at the same time.

Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the details of the variation pattern selection process (S4403) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing this fluctuation pattern selection process (S4403). This variation pattern selection process (S4403) is one process of the variation display setting process (S4112) (see FIG. 55) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is detailed in the variation pattern of the first special symbol. This is a process for setting an aspect.

In the variation pattern selection process (S4403), first, in the process of S4206 of the command determination process (see FIG. 54), it is determined whether or not the super reach is extracted from the special figure 1 variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 (see FIG. 54). In S4501), when it is determined that the extracted fluctuation pattern is super reach (S4501: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the set stop type is small hit C (S4502). In the process of S4502, when it is determined that the set stop type is not the small hit C (S4502: No), then it is determined whether or not the set stop type is the big hit D (S4503). If it is determined that the stop type is not the jackpot D (S4503: No), the process shifts to S4504. Further, in the processing of S4501, if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern this time is not super reach (S4501: No), there is no possibility of setting a special super reach at this point, so the processing of S4502 and S4503 is skipped. , The process shifts to S4504.

In the process of S4504, the detailed mode of the current variation pattern is described based on the variation pattern extracted from the special figure 1 variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 in the process of S4206 of the command determination process (see FIG. 54). The decision is made and the process is transferred to S4506.

On the other hand, in the process of S4502, when it is determined that the set stop type is the small hit C (S4502: Yes), or in the process of S4503, the set stop type is the big hit D. If it is determined (S4503: Yes), the process proceeds to S4505 for setting the special super reach (see FIG. 9B). In the processing of S4505, the mode of the fluctuation pattern this time is determined to be a special super reach (see FIG. 9B) (S4505), and the process proceeds to the processing of S4506. In the process of S4506, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the determined variation pattern is set (S4506), and this process is terminated.

By executing this variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 56), the special super reach (see FIG. 9 (b)) is performed only when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit D or a small hit C. Can be executed. Among the lottery results for which the special super reach (see FIG. 9B) is set, the jackpot D has a small number of prize balls, and neither the probability change state nor the time saving state is given after the jackpot, so that the degree of advantage for the player is high. It gets lower. On the other hand, when the small hit C is reached, after the small hit C is completed, the chance mode A in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed is set over 100 times of variable display, so that 100 for the player. You can receive almost the same profit as the time reduction period is set. Therefore, when the special super reach is executed, the game can be performed in the hope that it will be a small hit C rather than a big hit D. This is because the number of prize balls (about 500) that can be obtained when the jackpot is D is that the lottery of the first special symbol can be performed only about 30 to 40 times after the jackpot.

In a general pachinko machine, when the variable display is executed, the game is played with the expectation that the third symbols with the same numbers will be aligned (that is, it will be a big hit). In the machine 10, when a special super reach occurs, it is possible to confirm the effect result in the hope that the third symbols with the same numbers will not be aligned. That is, it is possible to provide a novel game property that the game can be performed with the expectation that the hit will be a deviation (small hit C) having a high degree of advantage rather than a big hit (big hit D) having a low degree of advantage.

<Regarding the control process of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 70. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. Normally, the MPU 231 executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected, and the V interrupt process can be executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 57, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process is to execute the initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the activation of this main process is performed according to the following flow. When the power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is "0000H", the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction to start the main process.

Here, if all the boot programs first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". When it is detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a large amount of time to set the buffer RAM 234c from its read, so the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231. As a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the NOR type ROM has a high speed because a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Since it is a memory capable of reading data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately shifts to the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 enables various controls for the third symbol display device 81 to be executed. To start.

Here, the boot process (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. 58. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S6001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in the third symbol display device 81 by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it is possible to sufficiently store not only the image data but also the control program and the like, while controlling the character ROM 234. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 is used. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing the data is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c according to the boot program. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234a1, only a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the process of S6102, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S6102, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot processing (see S6001 in FIG. 57) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 57) (S6105), the execution of the boot program is completed and the main boot process is completed.

By executing the boot process (S6001) in this way, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use to perform various processes.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read a control program or fixed value data from a work RAM composed of a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 58, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes all the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, the control program is not necessarily limited to this, and a predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101 is a boot program that executes a boot processing to be processed following the processing of S6102. May be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is indicated by an instruction pointer. The process set in 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S6101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, some boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfer a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S6101. After repeating the process a plurality of times including the process of S6102 and S6102, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released has been described, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect unit in the MPU 231 which becomes possible after the boot process earlier.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 57. When the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings are made for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device. In addition, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, an image is drawn on the image controller 237 so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct the execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color on the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected whether or not the color image corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). The transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235a at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 at power-on according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transmits the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a part of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of a part of the register or the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237 to grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on to the main image area 235a at power-on is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S6003, then the variable image at power-on A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the variable image area 235b when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on (S6004). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) are included. , The start address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, is included, and the image controller receives the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on. Then, the image data transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S6004, then the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 68 (a)) described later, all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image is executed (see S7502 in FIG. 68 (a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. As a result, in the meantime, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 59 (b)), the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) (not shown) is simply drawn. The command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 59 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 59 (b)) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow read speed of the character ROM 234 can be stored in the resident video RAM 235. It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image when the power is turned on and the variable image when the power is turned on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image when the power is turned on is the third. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some kind of initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player or the like resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. This can be immediately confirmed, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the main image at power-on after the power is turned on, so that the main image at power-on is the third symbol. Since the player started the game while it was displayed on the display device 81, the player entered the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (starting prize), and the start instruction of the variable effect was given. When the main control device 110 passes through the voice lamp control device 113, that is, when the display fluctuation pattern command is received, the fluctuation image at power-on is immediately displayed during the fluctuation effect period, and a simple fluctuation is performed. You can produce. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, but the character ROM 234 Is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, and it takes a long time to transfer the flash memory. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image is continuously displayed at the time of turning on the power for a long time. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Therefore, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, the power failure is restored. Immediately after, even while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the process of S6005, the interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 59 (a). FIG. 59 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 59 (b). FIG. 59B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display processing of the image.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, in the image controller 237, since the drawing instruction of the next image is not received at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 59 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. The command determination process (S6302) is executed so that the display device 81 can display the image, and then the display setting process (S6303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S6302), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area is analyzed by the command interrupt process, the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the display demo command and the display demo command are executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. Set the data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when the start of the variation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 60 to 64.

In the display setting process (S6303), one frame of images to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) or the like. Specifically specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 65 to 67.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (S6304). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S6303) or the simple display setting process (S6309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the transfer setting process is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is normally used from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously notified. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 68 and 69.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame, the parameters required for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305), which are determined in the task process (S6304), are used. , The drawing list shown in FIG. 26 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list (S6306). The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 70.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. As a counter updated by the process of S6307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear out reach, non-front / back out reach, complete out) is set. The corresponding stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S6308) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S6309) is executed to shift to the process of S6304.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 60 to 64, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S6302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 60, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S6401: No), The command judgment process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), the new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S6303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S6402), and then the command The type of the unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S6403).

Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404). Then, if there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: Yes), the variation pattern command process is executed (S6405), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S6405) will be described with reference to FIG. 61A. FIG. 61A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing (S6405). This fluctuation pattern command processing (S6405) executes the processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. Set to buffer 233d (S6501).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but a part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly displayed. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the processing of S6501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a shorter fluctuation time than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the variation is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main control device 110 is used for the next display. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demo effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the symbol.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer is set. Initialize 233f to 0 (S6504). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S6505), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this fluctuation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S6505, from the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501. , The drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by S6502e. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the above.

Further, in the display setting process, when the time of the variation effect defined in the variation display data table is measured by using the time counting counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S6503, the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 60. In the processing of S6404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S6406). If there is a stop type command for display (S6406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S6407), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S6407) will be described with reference to FIG. 61 (b). FIG. 61B is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes the process corresponding to the display variable type command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the stop type command processing (S6407), first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (either big hit A to F, small hit A to C, reach off, or complete off) indicated by the display stop type command. (S6601), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 59 (b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device is used. The stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on 81 is finally set (S6602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the other stop symbol is set. Set it on (S6603) and return to the command determination process.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variation based on the data table. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S6304), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S6603, and the specified stop symbol is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address in which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

Since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S6601, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type is stopped. Determine the table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disconnection is set by the process of S6602.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit of the special symbol" is set, the third symbol display device 81 actually has the "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is off". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" is displayed, which causes the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol jackpot", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disengagement, in reality, if it is a "big hit of the special symbol", the third symbol display device 81 stops the complete disengagement. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big hit of the special symbol", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 60, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S6408), and the display is displayed. If there is an opening command for (S6408: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S6409), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the opening command processing (S6409) will be described with reference to FIG. 62A. FIG. 62A is a flowchart showing the opening command processing. This opening command process executes the process corresponding to the opening command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the opening command processing, first, the opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). After that, the transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702), and the time data is set in the timekeeping counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S6703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6704). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S6705), the opening command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 60, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6408, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S6408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S6410), and the display is performed. If there is a round number command (S6410: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S6411), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the round number command processing (S6411) will be described with reference to FIG. 62 (b). FIG. 62B is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. This round number command process executes the process corresponding to the display round number command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display data. Set to the table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6802).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6801, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6804). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S6805), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 60, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6410, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S6412), and the display is performed. If there is an ending command for (S6412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the ending command processing (S6413) will be described with reference to FIG. 63. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the ending command processing. This ending command process executes the process corresponding to the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set to the buffer 233d (S6901). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6902).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6901, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6903). S6904). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S6905), the ending command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

Returning to FIG. 60, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6412, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S6412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6414), and the rear image is determined. If there is a change command (S6414: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S6415), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the rear image change command processing (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. 64. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the rear image change command processing. This rear image change command process executes the process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the rear image change command process, first, the rear image change flag 233w that notifies the normal image transfer setting process (S7503) of the change of the rear image due to the reception of the rear image change command in the on state is set to on (S7001). ). Then, among the bits of the back image discrimination flag 233x provided for each back image type (back A, B), the bit corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is set to on, and other bits are set. The bit corresponding to the back image type of is set to off (S7002), the back image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag 233w set by the process of S7001 is turned on, the rear image type after the change is changed from the rear image discrimination flag 233x set by the process of S7002. Identify.

Further, in the task processing, when it is specified to display either the back side A or B according to the back side type of the back side image specified in the display data table, from the back side image discrimination flag 233x set by S7002, The type of back image to be displayed at that time is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type (RAM type) in which the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored. The resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, he / she does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In that case, there should be no case where two or more back image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command mistakenly changes the back image. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S7002, when it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted, and the back image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change in the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set it appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 60. In the processing of S6414, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S6414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6416), and there is an error command. If (S6416: Yes), the error command processing is executed (S6417), and the process returns to the processing of S6401.

Here, the details of the error command processing (S6417) will be described with reference to FIG. 64 (b). FIG. 64B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing executes the processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the error command processing, first, the error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S7101). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (S7102), and the error command is set. The process ends and the process returns to the command judgment process.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7101, the error type generated from the error determination flag set by the process of S7102 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the processing in S7102 sets the error discrimination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the person concerned with the hall can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 60. If it is determined that there is no error command in the process of S6416 (S6416: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S6418), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

In the processing of S6401 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes). ), The processing of S6402 to S6418 is executed again. Then, the processes of S6401 to S6418 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S6401 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 59 (b)) is also processed in the same manner as the command determination process. However, in the simple command judgment processing, only the commands required to display the image at power-on, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, are sent from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Extract and execute the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 61 (a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 61 (b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, and for other commands, Performs the process of discarding without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 61A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the fluctuation image at power-on is changed to the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S6501. The image data of the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on, which are set and required in that case, are stored in the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable dynamic image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S6502, the process of writing the Bull data to the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 65 to 67, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S6303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 65, first, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7201), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S7201: No). ), It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed earlier, the processes of S7202 to S7204 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S7205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S7201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after the new command flag is set to off (S7202), S7203 to S7204 Executes the process corresponding to the new command by the process of.

In the process of S7203, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S7203). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S7203: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S7204).

Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 66. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error discrimination flag is referred to, and all the error discrimination set to be ON is performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S7301).

In the task processing (S6304), based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified, and the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are specified for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S7301, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S7302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 65. After the warning image setting process (S7204) or in the process of S7203, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S7203: No), the process proceeds to the process of S7205.

In S7205, the pointer update process is executed (S7205). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 67. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7401). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in various data tables, Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the actual data of each data is specified after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S7401, then, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. (S7402). As a result, if it is End information (S7402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S7403), and if it is a demo display data table (S7403: Yes), the display data The time data corresponding to the production time of the demo display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counting counter 233h (S7404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S7405), and this processing is completed. Then, return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demo display data table, so that the demo effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S7403, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S7403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (S7403: No). S7406), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is set. Since the drawn contents of the above are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7402, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S7402: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the process returns to FIG. 65 to continue the description. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are acquired from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7206). In the task processing (S6304), the types of sprites (display objects) that compose the image are specified based on the drawing contents developed in the processing of S7206 together with the warning image developed earlier, and for each sprite. , Display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and other parameters required for drawing are determined.

Next, the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S7207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7208). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S7208: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is 0 or less (S7208: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmation display flag is on. (S7209).

As a result, if the confirmation display flag is off (S7209: No), the confirmation display has not been produced yet, and it is the timing to produce the confirmation display. Therefore, first, the confirmation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d. It is set (S7210), and then the contents are cleared by writing the Bull data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7211). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7213). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S7214), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7215), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. As such, the drawing content can be set. Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the final display effect by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the final display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by starting another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not applied to the MPU 231. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S7215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, and in the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task processing (S6304), from the start of the fluctuation until a predetermined time elapses, the stop symbol of the variation effect immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by S7215, and the stop symbol thereof is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S7209, if the confirmation display flag is on (S7209: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S7216). If the demo display flag is off (S7216: No), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so that a certain time has elapsed from the end of the final display effect. Later, a process for displaying the demo effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

First, the demo display data table is acquired and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7217), and the contents are cleared by writing the Bull data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7218). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7220), the demo display flag indicating that the demo is being produced in the ON state is set to ON (S7221), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demo effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing contents can be set to.

In the process of S7216, if the demo display flag is on (S7216: Yes), it means that the demo effect is performed after the final display effect is completed, and the demo effect is completed. Therefore, the display setting process is terminated as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. Then, in this case, various settings are made so that the demo effect is started again as described above by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the voice lamp control device 113 Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demo effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The simple display setting process (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 59 (b)) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the variation image at power-on is completed, one of the variation images at power-on according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time. The process of setting the display data table that specifies that the image of the above is stopped and displayed in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 68 and 69, the details of the transfer setting process (S6305) described above, which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 68A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the resident image transfer setting The process is executed (S7502), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 68 (b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, is off as a result of the processing of S7501 (S7501: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is the resident video from the character ROM 234. It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7503), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 69.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S7502), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 68 (b). FIG. 68B is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S7502).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the untransferred image data (S7601), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S7601: Yes). ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S7602). In the process of S7602, when the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data and then the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. When it is determined by the process of S7602 that the transfer process has not been completed (S7602: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S7602: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S7603. Further, as a result of the processing of S7601, even if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7601: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S7603.

In the process of S7603, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S7603), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S7603: No), the non-resident image data has not been transferred. A transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7604), and this process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the resident video RAM 235 (area provided in the resident video RAM 235) for storing the resident target image data) is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 235. Transfers to the specified address of the resident video RAM 235. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

If all the resident target image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S7603 (S7603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to off (S7605), and this process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 59 (b)), the command is not a simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 59 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 59 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 60 to 64) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 65 to 67) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 69) (see S7501: No in FIG. 68 (a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 is resident in all resident video RAM 235 except for the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is continuously held without being overwritten during the power-on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed with. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 includes image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, a main control device 110, an audio lamp control device 113, and a display control device 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is resident immediately after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timings can be performed. , The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S7503), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 69. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S7503).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7205) of the display setting process (S6303) executed earlier is used. Acquire the information described in the indicated address (S7701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is the transfer data information (S7702), and if it is the transfer data information (S7702: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored is obtained from the transfer data information. The start address (storage source start address), the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S7703) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S7704), and the process proceeds to S7705.

Further, in the process of S7702, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but the Null data (S7702: No), the processes of S7703 and S7704 are skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S7705. In the process of S7705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S7705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S7705: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S7706).

In the process of S7706, after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. Then, when it is determined by the process of S7706 that the transfer process has not been completed (S7706: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S7706: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S7707. Further, as a result of the processing of S7705, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S7705: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S7707.

In the process of S7707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7707), and if the transfer start flag is on (S7707: Yes), the image data to be transferred exists, so that the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S7708), the image data of the sprite indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S7703 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to the process of S7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S7707: No), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag 233w is on (S7709). If the rear image change flag 233w is not on but off (S7709: No), the image data to be transferred does not exist, so the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the rear image change flag 233w is on (S7709: Yes), it means that the rear image is changed. Therefore, after the rear image change flag 233w is set to off (S7710), it is provided for each rear image type. Among the rear image discrimination flags 233x, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag 233x in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S7711). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag 233x in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination (transfer destination). The start address of the normal video RAM 236) is acquired (S7712), and the process proceeds to S7713.

In the process of S7713, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713). The discrimination in the processing of S7713 is performed by referring to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

Then, as a result of the processing of S7713, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , Ends the normal image transfer setting process as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load on each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S7713 (S7713: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S7714). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 displays the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the sub-area) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Forward to the given address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the process of S7714, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S7715), and this normal transfer setting process is terminated. To update the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, as described above, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is set to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are supposed to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination process, and as a result, the display stop type command is used. When it is determined that the stop type information shown is the stop type of the jackpot, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, among the image data used in the rear image, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 is used. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed as the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with the setting of. Then, the MPU 231 performs the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the image storage area 236a so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When drawing the sprite, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 70, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information). , Color information, filter designation information), and a drawing list (not shown) is generated from the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305) (S7801). That is, in the processing of S7801, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S6304). Then, the parameters required for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, and then the details for each sprite are arranged in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which the sprite image data is stored and the parameters required for drawing the sprite as various drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 has a fixed area. , The storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified according to the sprite type, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws an image in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231 and expands the image by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the start address of the storage source to the final address of the storage source is read out from the character ROM 234 in order and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list subsequently transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can display the expanded image in the frame buffer. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be processed in parallel at the same time. Can be done.

The drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233j after the process of S7802 (S7803). Then, the drawing process is finished, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and to "0" when it is "1". Will be done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the drawing list is transmitted by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It will be performed every time the drawing process of the inclusion process (see FIG. 59 (b)) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is configured to shift to the chance mode A, which is more advantageous than the normal mode, based on a small hit in the lottery of the special symbol. In chance mode A, the fluctuation time of the 2nd special symbol becomes shorter (3 seconds), which is more advantageous than the lottery of the 1st special symbol (it is easy to set the consecutive villa mode when it becomes a big hit). Since the lottery of the symbols is easily executed, the player can be made to play the game with a strong expectation that it will be a big hit. Further, in the normal mode, it is possible to shift to the chance mode A without going through the jackpot, so that the game can be intonation even if the jackpot has not been won for a long period of time. Therefore, even if a so-called big addiction occurs, the motivation of the player for the game can be maintained by sandwiching the chance mode A in between. Further, the length (number of lottery) of the chance mode A to be given is configured to be different for each small hit type. As a result, the player who senses that the hit has been made can be made to play the game with the expectation that the chance mode A is a small hit type that is set for a longer period of time. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Further, in the first embodiment, as the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display of the special symbol, the super reach mode in which the fluctuation time is 60 seconds is determined only in the case of a big hit or a small hit. .. That is, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the super reach is not set. With this configuration, the player is made to recognize that the variable display being executed is a super reach (when the variable time exceeds 30 seconds), the player recognizes that the hit is a small hit or a big hit. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game. In addition, in the present embodiment, the special reach with a fluctuation time of 90 seconds can be determined only when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the special symbol. With this configuration, the player can be made to recognize that the jackpot will be a big hit when it is found that the variable display being executed is a special reach (the variable time exceeds 60 seconds). Therefore, since the player can be made to detect that the jackpot will be a big hit before the fluctuation display ends, the result of the production can be watched with confidence in the remaining fluctuation time.

Further, in the present embodiment, a special super reach is provided as a kind of effect mode when the super reach is determined. The production mode of this special super reach is configured so that it can be determined only when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit D or a small hit C. Since the jackpot D has a small number of prize balls and is not given a probability change state or a time saving state after the jackpot, the degree of advantage for the player is low. On the other hand, when the small hit C is reached, the chance mode A in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed is set over a maximum of 100 variable displays after the small hit C is completed, so that the player is 100. You can receive almost the same profit as the time reduction period is set. Therefore, when the special super reach is executed, the game can be performed in the hope that it will be a small hit C rather than a big hit D.

In a general pachinko machine, when the variable display is executed, the game is played with the expectation that the third symbols with the same numbers will be aligned (that is, it will be a big hit). In the machine 10, when a special super reach occurs, it is possible to confirm the effect result in the hope that the third symbols with the same numbers will not be aligned. That is, it is possible to provide a novel game property that the game can be performed with the expectation that the hit will be a deviation (small hit C) having a high degree of advantage rather than a big hit (big hit D) having a low degree of advantage.

In the first embodiment, the value of the chance mode counter 203x is subtracted each time the special symbol lottery is executed, regardless of whether the lottery is the first special symbol or the second special symbol lottery. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the value of the chance mode counter 203x may be subtracted only when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed. With this configuration, when the chance mode A is set, the lottery of the advantageous special symbol 2 can be reliably performed a predetermined number of times regardless of the number of reserved balls in the lottery of the first special symbol. can. Therefore, the expectation for the chance mode A can be further increased.

In the first embodiment, the chance mode A is always set when a small hit is made in the lottery of the first special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the chance mode A is not set. It may be configured to provide a hit type. As a result, even if super reach occurs, it is possible to provide a case where the chance mode A is not set. Therefore, when super reach occurs, it is possible to draw more attention to the effect result.

In the first embodiment, the jackpot D, which is the most disadvantageous to the player among the jackpot types (that is, the time saving state is not given and the prize ball is the least), or the jackpot D, which is the most advantageous to the player among the small hit types. The configuration is such that a special super reach is provided in a mode that is selected only when a small hit C is obtained, but the conditions for generating the special super reach are not limited to this. For example, the special super reach is configured to be executed only when the most advantageous jackpot A or the most advantageous small hit C among the jackpot types won in the lottery of the first special symbol is obtained. You may. With this configuration, the player can be made aware that the most advantageous big hit or the most advantageous small hit will be before the symbol stops, so that the player can feel reassured. Can be done.

In the first embodiment, after the lottery of the special symbol is executed, the winning flag 203s is referred to, and when the winning flag 203s is on, the lottery result is overwritten. is not it. For example, the winning flag 203s may be referred to before the lottery of the special symbol is executed, and if it is on, the lottery result may be determined to be out of order and the lottery of the special symbol may be skipped. With this configuration, the processing load can be reduced when the hit flag 203s is on.

In the first embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is common (3 seconds) between the normal (low probability) state of the normal symbol and the time saving (high probability) state of the normal symbol, and further, the hit probability of the normal symbol is set. There is no big difference in the opening period of the electric accessory 640a when it hits a normal symbol, but it is not limited to this. When the chance mode A is set, it may be arbitrarily determined as long as it is more advantageous to hit right than to hit left (it becomes easier to execute a lottery of special symbols). More specifically, for example, in order to ensure that the number of balls held is reduced when hitting right in the normal mode, for example, the probability of hitting a normal symbol is lowered (for example, to 1/3), or an electric role is used. The opening period of the object 640a may be shorter (for example, 0.7 seconds × 1 time), or the fluctuation time of the normal symbol may be longer (for example, 10 seconds). In this way, by making a difference in control between the normal low state of the normal symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol, it is possible to reliably reduce the number of balls held when right-handed in the normal mode. Therefore, by always hitting the right side even in the normal mode, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which only the advantageous second special symbol lottery is performed without reducing the number of balls held.

In the present embodiment, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the chance mode A, the short variation (3 seconds) is selected, but when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed, it is the same as the normal mode. The configuration was such that control was executed. On the other hand, when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed, the chance A table may be changed so that the fluctuation time becomes long (for example, always 120 seconds). With this configuration, if a left-handed ball is accidentally hit in chance mode A, or a part of the ball hit by a right-handed ball enters the first entry port 64, the entry is made. Since the fluctuation time of the first special symbol based on the sphere becomes long, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol can be performed a plurality of times during the long fluctuation time. Therefore, when a right-handed hit is made in the chance mode A, more advantageous second special symbol lottery can be executed.

In the first embodiment, on the condition that a small hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, the chance A table 202d3 is referred to as the variable pattern table over the lottery of the special symbol a specific number of times (chance). The configuration was such that the mode A is shifted to), but the conditions for setting the chance mode A are not limited to this. For example, the variation pattern table to be referred to may be varied according to the time information. Specifically, a known RTC (Real-Time Clock) capable of measuring the time is connected to the input / output port 205 of the main control device 110 so that the main control device 110 can grasp the current time. Then, in a predetermined time zone (for example, from 10:00 AM to 11:00 AM), if the game state is the normal state, the chance A table 202d3 is referred to when the special symbol lottery is executed, and other than the above. If the game state is the normal state in the time zone of the above, the normal table 202d1 may be referred to when the lottery of the special symbol is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to improve the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 in the time zone in which the chance mode A is referred to.

In the first embodiment, when the chance mode A is set, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is shortened, and the frequency of lottery of the advantageous second special symbol is increased, so that the configuration becomes more advantageous than the normal mode. However, it is not limited to this. In the chance mode A, the lottery of the first special symbol may also be advantageous. Specifically, while the chance mode A is set, the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1 that easily passes through the V winning switch 65e3 even when the jackpots C and D are obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol (FIG. (Refer to the lower part of 7) may be set. That is, in the chance mode A, an opening / closing pattern that easily passes through the V winning switch 65e3 may be set for all jackpot types. With this configuration, an advantageous opening / closing pattern can be obtained even when the chance mode A is set in the presence of the holding ball of the first special symbol and there are holding balls that are jackpots C and D in the holding. Can be set. In addition, even if the ball enters the first entry port 64 and becomes either jackpot C or D despite hitting right in chance mode A, an advantageous opening / closing pattern is provided. Can be set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the absurdity that an unfavorable opening / closing pattern is set even though the game is played according to the instruction (launching direction) on the screen in the chance mode A and a big hit is obtained.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot type that is more advantageous in the lottery of the second special symbol is likely to be the advantageous jackpot type, but the special symbol that is easier to select the advantageous jackpot type depending on the state may be switched. .. Specifically, for example, when the rate at which an advantageous opening / closing pattern is set when a big hit is made in the second special symbol is reduced (for example, 70%), and when a big hit is made in the first special symbol, for example. The proportion to which the advantageous opening / closing pattern is given may be higher (for example, 100%) or lower (for example, 50%) than the second special symbol depending on the situation. More specifically, for example, in the chance mode A, when the lottery of the first special symbol started in the presence of the reserved ball of the second special symbol is a big hit, the lottery of the second special symbol is a big hit. The opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1 which is advantageous is set at a higher ratio (for example, 100%) than the above, and in other cases, the ratio is lower than the jackpot in the second special symbol lottery (for example). For example, the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1 which is advantageous at 50%) may be set. With this configuration, when a right-handed ball is hit in chance mode A and the ball happens to enter the first ball entry port 64 and the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the player is notified. It is possible to have a sense of expectation for the probabilistic state. Also, in chance mode A, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is short (in 3 seconds), so it is difficult to collect the reserved balls of the second special symbol (it is full to store one hold). Even if you change to left-handed after confirming that the hold has been accumulated, it is possible to increase the possibility that the hold of the second special symbol will be exhausted before the ball enters the first entry port 64. can. Therefore, in the chance mode A, the irregular game method of hitting the left after the second special symbol is held is suppressed, and the right hit is continued in the chance mode A, and it happens to go to the first entrance 64. You can only benefit if the ball enters.

<Modified example of the first embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described modification of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 75. In the first embodiment described above, in the normal mode, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is determined to be an extremely long fluctuation pattern (the fluctuation time is an ultra-long fluctuation of 10 minutes) as compared with the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. Will be done. As a result, the game efficiency when right-handed is performed in the normal mode is lowered, and the irregular game method in which right-handed is always performed in the normal mode is suppressed.

However, since the simultaneous fluctuation method (a method in which the fluctuation display of the first special symbol and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel) is adopted, for example, the reserved ball of the second special symbol is 4 There is a possibility that some players will perform irregular game methods such as hitting right until the number of balls is accumulated and returning to left-handing when the reserved balls are accumulated to execute the lottery of the first special symbol.

On the other hand, in this modified example, in the normal mode, when the reserved balls of the second special symbol are accumulated (one or more), the ball is returned to the left-handed and the lottery of the first special symbol is executed. As the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, the same ultra-long fluctuation (10 minutes) as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set. As a result, when a right-handed ball is hit in the normal mode and the ball is returned to the left-handed ball with the reserved balls of the second special symbol accumulated, both the first special symbol and the second special symbol have a super long fluctuation of 10 minutes. Therefore, it is possible to form an extremely disadvantageous state in which the lottery of the special symbol is executed only about every 10 minutes, so that the player can more reliably continue to strike left in the normal mode.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the first embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that the contents of the variation pattern table 202d of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 are partly different. This is a change, and a part of the processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the first It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical configuration in a modified example of the first embodiment>
First, the configuration of the variation pattern table 202d provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 and 72. Similar to the first embodiment, the fluctuation pattern table 202d is a data table referred to for determining a fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a fluctuation display indicating the lottery result when a lottery for a special symbol is executed. Is.

As shown in FIG. 71 (a), the fluctuation pattern table 202d in the present modification includes a normal (special figure 2 when no hold) table 202d11 as a table used for determining the fluctuation pattern in the normal mode, and a normal table 202d11. A table 202d12 for (when special figure 2 is on hold) is provided. The normal (when there is no special figure 2 hold) table 202d11 is a table that is referred to when there is no (0) holding balls of the second special symbol, and the normal (when special figure 2 hold is not held) table 202d12 is. , A table that is referred to when there are (one or more) reserved balls with the second special symbol.

Further, the fluctuation pattern table 202d includes a table 202d21 for the consecutive villa / chance B (first half) as a table used for determining the fluctuation pattern in the consecutive villa mode (probability change state) and the chance mode B (time saving state). A table 202d22 for the villa / chance B (second half) is provided. The table 202d21 for the consecutive villa / chance B (first half) is a data table that is referred to when the remaining number of lottery is 6 times or more in the consecutive villa mode or the chance mode B. The table 202d22 for the consecutive villa / chance B (second half) is a data table that is referred to when the number of remaining lottery is 5 or less.

Further, the variation pattern table 202d is provided with a chance A (first half) table 202d31 and a chance A (second half) table 202d32 as tables used for determining the variation pattern in the chance mode A. The chance A (first half) table 202d31 is a data table that is referred to when the remaining number of lottery is 6 or more in the chance mode A. The chance A (second half) table 202d32 is a data table that is referred to when the number of remaining lottery is 5 or less.

First, the table referenced in the normal mode will be described. Since the normal table 202d11 (when the special figure 2 is not held) is the same as the normal table 202d1 of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 15B), detailed description thereof will be omitted. When the normal (when special figure 2 is on hold) table 202d12 is referred to, as shown in FIG. 71 (b), the type of special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) and lottery of special symbol Regardless of the result (stop type), an ultra-long fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 600 seconds (10 minutes) is determined.

When the holding ball of the second special symbol exists, 10 minutes is determined not only for the fluctuation time of the second special symbol but also for the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, so that the normal mode can be determined. It is possible to increase the penalty for continuing to hit right in. That is, in the normal mode, the holding ball is generated in the second special symbol, which is unlikely to occur unless the game method of intentionally launching the ball aiming at the second entrance 640 is continued. Therefore, as a penalty for a player who intentionally executes an irregular game method, as long as the reserved ball of the second special symbol remains, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are displayed. Is also configured so that ultra-long fluctuations are set. As a result, even if the player quits the irregular game method and returns to left-handed, the special symbol lottery is held only about every 10 minutes (it is difficult to execute the first special symbol lottery), which is a disadvantage. A state can be formed. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the deterrent effect on the player performing an irregular game method.

Next, the tables referred to in the consecutive villa mode and the chance mode B will be described. Since the table 202d21 for the consecutive villa / chance B (first half) is the same as the table 202d2 for the consecutive villa / chance B (see FIG. 16A) of the first embodiment described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted. .. As shown in FIG. 72 (a), when the table 202d22 for the consecutive villa / chance B (second half) is referred to, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is uniformly 0 regardless of the lottery time of the second special symbol. A 7 second ultra-short variation is determined. On the other hand, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is the same as the table 202d21 for the consecutive villa / chance B (first half) (table 202d2 for the consecutive villa / chance B in the first embodiment).

In the consecutive villa mode and chance mode B, it is the correct game method to play the game by hitting right, but when the number of fluctuations set as the consecutive villa mode or chance mode B is within 5 times remaining, the consecutive villa / When the table 202d21 for chance B (first half) is referred to, a long fluctuation time is set just before the end of the consecutive villa mode or chance mode B, and many reserved balls are accumulated during the fluctuation display of the long fluctuation time. It may end up. That is, at the end of the consecutive villa mode or the chance mode B, there may be a state in which two or more reserved balls of the second special symbol exist. In this case, even if the player returns to the normal mode and returns to left-handed according to the correct game method, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes 1 or more when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed, and a penalty occurs. (The fluctuation time of the first special symbol becomes 10 minutes). In this way, if the player is penalized even though the player is executing the correct game method, the player may be dissatisfied.

Therefore, in this modified example, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is extremely short (0.7 seconds) over the fluctuation of the special symbol five times in the final stage of the consecutive villa mode and the chance mode B in which the game is played by right-handed. It is configured so that it is difficult for a new ball to enter the second ball opening 640 during the fluctuation. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol will be 1 or more at the end of the consecutive villa mode or the chance mode B. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the absurdity that a penalty is incurred for a player who performs the correct game method.

Next, the table referred to in the chance mode A will be described. Since the chance A (first half) table 202d31 is the same as the chance A table 202d3 (see FIG. 16B) of the first embodiment described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted. As shown in FIG. 72 (b), when the chance A (second half) table 202d32 is referred to, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is 0.7 seconds uniformly regardless of the lottery time of the second special symbol. The ultra-short fluctuation of is determined. On the other hand, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is the same as the chance A (first half) table 202d31 (chance A table 202d3 in the first embodiment).

In the chance mode A, as in the consecutive villa mode and the chance mode B, it is the correct game method to play the game by hitting right. Therefore, when the chance A (first half) table 202d31 is referred to when the number of fluctuations set as the chance mode A is within 5 times remaining, a long fluctuation time is set just before the end of the chance mode A, and the fluctuation time is long. A lot of reserved balls may be accumulated during the fluctuation display of the fluctuation time. That is, even if the chance mode A ends and the player shifts to the normal mode and returns to left-handed, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes 1 or more when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed, and the penalty is incurred. There is a possibility that it will occur (the fluctuation time of the first special symbol will be 10 minutes).

Therefore, as for the chance A (second half) table 202d32, as in the case of the above-mentioned consecutive villa / chance B (second half) table 202d22, it is difficult for new balls to enter the second entrance 640 during fluctuations. The configuration is such that ultra-short fluctuations are set in. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol will be 1 or more at the end of the chance mode A. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the absurdity that a penalty is incurred for a player who performs the correct game method.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the modified example of the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 73 to 75, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the modified example of the first embodiment will be described. First, FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (S311) executed in place of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 32) of the first embodiment. The first special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (S311), like the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment, creates a variation pattern based on the lottery result of the first special symbol. This is the process to select.

Of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (S311) in the modified example of the first embodiment, in each of the processes S601 to S603, S605, and S608 to S610, the first special symbol variation in the first embodiment, respectively. Among the pattern selection processes (see FIG. 32), the same processes as those of S601 to S603, S605, and S608 to S610 are executed.

Further, in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (see FIG. 73) in the modified example of the first embodiment, the value of the chance mode counter 203x is larger than 0 (that is, the chance mode A) in the process of S603. When it is determined (S603: Yes), the chance A time selection process for selecting the variation pattern for the lottery of the first special symbol executed in the chance mode A is executed (S611), and the process proceeds to S608. Transition. The details of the chance A time selection process (S611) will be described later with reference to FIG. 74 (a).

Further, in the processing of S605, when it is determined that the values of the probability variation counter 203g and the time saving / medium counter 203r are both 0 (that is, the normal mode) (S605: Yes), the first execution is performed in the normal mode. The normal time selection process for selecting the variation pattern for the special symbol lottery is executed (S612), and the process shifts to S608. The details of this normal time selection process (S612) will be described later with reference to FIG. 74 (b). On the other hand, in the processing of S605, when it is determined that either the probability variation counter 203g or the time saving / medium-time counter 203r has a value of 1 or more (that is, the consecutive villa mode or the chance mode B) (S605: No). , The consecutive villa time selection process for selecting the variation pattern for the lottery of the first special symbol executed in the consecutive villa mode or the chance mode B is executed (S613), and the process shifts to S608. The details of the continuous villa selection process (S613) will be described later with reference to FIG. 75.

Next, with reference to FIG. 74 (a), the details of the above-mentioned chance A time selection process (S611) will be described. As described above, the chance A time selection process (S611) is a process for selecting a variation pattern for the special symbol lottery executed in the chance mode A.

When this chance A time selection process (S611) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the chance mode counter 203x is larger than 5 (S2601), and if it is determined to be larger than 5, (S2601: Yes). , The chance A (first half) table 202d31 is read out from the fluctuation pattern table 202d as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern of the current fluctuation display (S2602), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S2601 that the value of the chance mode counter 203x is 5 or less (S2601: No), there is a chance as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern of the current fluctuation display from the fluctuation pattern table 202d. The A (second half) table 202d32 is read out (S2603), and this process ends.

By executing this chance A selection process (see FIG. 74 (a)), when a special symbol lottery is executed at the end of chance mode A (the number of remaining lottery is 5 or less), chance A (see FIG. 74 (a)). The fluctuation pattern can be determined with reference to the table 202d32 for the latter half). That is, as described above, the ultra-short fluctuation is set so that a new ball entering the second ball opening 640 is unlikely to occur during the fluctuation. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol will be 1 or more at the end of the chance mode A. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the absurdity that a penalty is incurred for a player who performs the correct game method.

Next, the details of the normal time selection process (S612) will be described with reference to FIG. 74 (b). As described above, this normal time selection process (S612) is a process for selecting a variation pattern for the special symbol lottery executed in the normal mode.

When this normal time selection process (S612) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S2701), and if it is determined to be 0 (S2701). S2701: Yes), the normal table 202d11 (when there is no special figure 2 hold) is read from the fluctuation pattern table 202d as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern of the current fluctuation display (S2702), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S2701 that the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S2701: No), the fluctuation pattern table 202d shows the current fluctuation. As a table for determining the display fluctuation pattern, the normal table 202d12 (when special figure 2 is on hold) is read out (S2703), and this process is terminated.

By executing this normal time selection process (see FIG. 74 (b)), when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 1 or more in the normal mode, it is super long. Fluctuation (600 seconds) can be set. When the holding ball of the second special symbol is present in the normal mode, 10 minutes is determined not only for the fluctuation time of the second special symbol but also for the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. , The penalty for continuing to hit right in the normal mode can be increased. That is, in the normal mode, the holding ball is generated in the second special symbol, which is unlikely to occur unless the game method of intentionally launching the ball aiming at the second entrance 640 is continued. Therefore, as a penalty for a player who intentionally executes an irregular game method, as long as the reserved ball of the second special symbol remains, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are displayed. Is also configured so that ultra-long fluctuations are set. As a result, even if the player quits the irregular game method and returns to left-handed, the special symbol lottery is held only about every 10 minutes (it is difficult to execute the first special symbol lottery), which is a disadvantage. A state can be formed. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the deterrent effect on the player performing an irregular game method.

Next, with reference to FIG. 75, the details of the above-mentioned consecutive villa selection process (S613) will be described. As described above, the consecutive villa selection process (S613) is a process for selecting a variation pattern for the special symbol lottery executed in the consecutive villa mode and the chance mode B.

When this continuous villa selection process (S613) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation counter 203g is within the range of 1 or more and 5 or less (S2801), and it is out of the range of 1 to 5 (S2801). When it is determined that the value is 0 or 6 or more (S2801: No), then it is determined whether the value of the time saving / medium counter 203r is within the range of 1 or more and 5 or less (S2802). In the process of S2802, when it is determined that the value of the time saving / medium counter 203r is out of the range of 1 to 5 (value is 0 or 6 or more) (S2802: No), the remaining number of times of the probability change state remains 6 times or more. Since it is either in the state where the remaining number of times in the time saving state remains 6 times or more, the fluctuation pattern table 202d is used as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display this time. ) Table 202d21 is read out (S2803), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2801, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203g is within the range of 1 or more and 5 or less (S2801: Yes), or when the value of the time saving / medium counter 203r is within the range of 1 or more and 5 or less. If it is determined that there is (S2802: Yes), the table 202d22 for consecutive villa / chance B (second half) is read out as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display this time (S2804), and this process is terminated.

By executing this continuous villa selection process (see FIG. 75), the fluctuation pattern table can be switched according to the remaining number of times in the probability change state or the time saving state. As a result, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol can be made extremely short (0.7 seconds) over the fluctuation of the special symbol five times in the final stage of the consecutive villa mode and the chance mode B in which the game is played by right-handed. That is, it is possible to make it difficult for a new ball to enter the second ball opening 640 during the fluctuation. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol will be 1 or more at the end of the consecutive villa mode or the chance mode B. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the absurdity that a penalty is incurred for a player who performs the correct game method.

Although not shown, in this modification, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 is executed instead of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment. The second special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 is the same as the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (see FIG. 73) described above, and is in the current state (whether it is the consecutive villa mode or the chance mode A). Depending on the chance mode B or the normal mode), the above-mentioned chance A selection process (see FIG. 74 (a)), normal time selection process (see FIG. 74 (b)), and consecutive villa selection. By executing any of the processes (see FIG. 75), a process of selecting any of the tables specified in the variation pattern table 202d is executed. Since the content of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 is the same as that of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (see FIG. 73) described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 75, detailed description thereof will be omitted. do.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the first embodiment, in the normal mode, the holding balls of the second special symbol are accumulated (one or more) and then returned to the left-handed state, and the first special symbol is returned. When the lottery is executed, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to the same ultra-long fluctuation (600 seconds) as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol. As a result, when a right-handed ball is hit in the normal mode and the ball is returned to the left-handed ball with the reserved balls of the second special symbol accumulated, both the first special symbol and the second special symbol have a super long fluctuation of 10 minutes. Therefore, it is possible to form an extremely disadvantageous state in which the lottery of the special symbol is executed only about every 10 minutes, so that the player can more reliably continue to strike left in the normal mode.

Further, in this modified example, in the consecutive villa mode, the chance mode A, and the chance mode B in which the game is played by right-handed, the remaining number of lottery is 5 times or less (the lottery of the special symbol within 5 times is executed). When the mode shifts to the normal mode), the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is extremely short (0.7 seconds). As a result, it becomes difficult for new balls to enter the second entrance 640 during fluctuations, so that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol can be 1 or more at the end of the consecutive villa mode or chance mode B. The sex can be lowered. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the absurdity that a penalty is incurred for a player who performs the correct game method.

In this modified example, the ultra-short variation (0.7 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol because the remaining number of lottery in the consecutive villa mode, chance mode A, or chance mode B is 5. It was supposed to be within the number of times, but it is not limited to this. For example, the ultra-short fluctuation (0.7 seconds) may be selected only once, or in the state of the game method in which right-handed is correct, the ultra-short fluctuation (0.7 seconds) is selected regardless of the number of lottery. It may be the configuration of choice.

In this modification, in the normal mode, when the holding ball of the second special symbol is present, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is extremely long (10 minutes), but the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set. The conditions for switching to ultra-long fluctuation (600 seconds) are not limited to this. For example, when a reserved ball with a normal symbol is present, an ultra-long variation (600 seconds) may be selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol.

In this modification, an effect of notifying the player to return to left-handed at the timing when the chance mode A ends (the timing when the last variation display of the chance mode A ends) is executed (see FIG. 10B). Although it was configured, the execution timing of this production is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to execute an effect (see FIG. 10B) to notify the player to return to left-handed at the start of the change of the last fluctuation display in the chance mode A, or during the chance mode A, the chance may be executed. At the timing when it is determined that the reserved ball for the end of the mode A is held, the player may be notified to return to the left-handed hit (see FIG. 10B). With this configuration, it is possible to more reliably prevent (suppress) the occurrence of a state in which a plurality of reserved balls of the second special symbol exist at the end of the chance mode A.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 80. In the first embodiment and the modified example of the first embodiment described above, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit in the normal mode, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is short (lottery of the second special symbol). It is configured to shift to chance mode A (which is easy to execute), and it is possible to add intonation to the game even if it is not a big hit in a disadvantageous normal state.

On the other hand, in the second embodiment, when the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol) is set after the big hit, the lottery of the special symbol executed during the normal state is set. The configuration is such that the normal mode and the chance mode A are switched according to the number of times. As a result, the chance mode A is set periodically, and it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous in the normal state, which is the most disadvantageous to the player.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that the contents of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 are partially changed. The contents of the RAM 203 provided in the control device 110 have been partially changed, and the partial processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has been changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. be. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the first It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
First, the electrical configuration in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 and 77. FIG. 76A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 according to the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 76A, in the ROM 202 in the second embodiment, the small hit type selection table 202e is deleted from the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in the first embodiment. At the same time, the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202f is newly added. The details of the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202f will be described with reference to FIG. 76 (b).

FIG. 76B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202f. The fluctuation pattern scenario table 202f is a data table that defines the correspondence between the number of lottery of special symbols and the fluctuation pattern table used for selecting the fluctuation pattern (variation pattern scenario) for each of the previous jackpot types. .. At the end of the jackpot, among the fluctuation pattern scenarios specified in the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202f, the scenario corresponding to the jackpot type is set, and at the start of the fluctuation, the fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the fluctuation pattern table specified in the scenario. NS.

First, when the previous jackpot type is other than jackpot D (that is, jackpots A to C, jackpots E, F) (if the ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3 during the jackpot, the probability change state is given 100 times, and the V winning switch (In the case of a jackpot where the time saving state is given 100 times if it does not pass through 65e3) will be described. As shown in FIG. 76 (b), among the variable pattern scenarios set when the previous jackpot type is other than the jackpot D, the range in which the number of lottery of special symbols is 1 to 100 is continuous as a variable pattern table. A table 202d2 for Zhuang / Chance B (see FIG. 16A) is associated with the table 202d2. As a result, even if the probability change state (ream villa mode) is set after the big hit, or the time saving state (chance mode B) is set, the player can aim at the second entrance 640 by hitting right. It is possible to form a state in which it is easy to discriminate the advantageous second special symbol.

Further, a normal table 202d1 (see FIG. 15B) is associated with the variable pattern table in the range where the number of lottery of special symbols is 101 to 150. Therefore, if the consecutive villa mode or chance mode B is set after the big hit and the lottery of the special symbol exceeds 100 times without winning the big hit, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is a super long fluctuation (600). Only seconds) are selected. Therefore, if the lottery of the first special symbol is not executed by left-handed, the game efficiency is extremely deteriorated (when right-handed, the lottery of the special symbol is executed only once every 10 minutes) can be formed. ..

Further, a chance A table 202d3 (see FIG. 16B) is associated with the variation pattern table in the range where the number of lottery of special symbols is 151 to 160. Therefore, when the lottery of the special symbol is executed 50 times after exiting the consecutive villa mode or the chance mode B, it is possible to shift to the chance mode A over the 10 times of the special symbol lottery thereafter. Therefore, even if the consecutive villa mode (probability change state) or chance mode B (time saving state) that is advantageous for the player ends and the mode shifts to the most disadvantageous normal mode, the game is played until chance mode A is set. Can remind the player to continue. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player's motivation for the game from being lowered in the normal mode, which is disadvantageous to the player.

A normal table 202d1 (see FIG. 15B) is associated with the variation pattern table in the range in which the number of lottery of special symbols is 161 to 200. That is, the normal mode continues over the lottery of 40 special symbols. Although not shown, the configuration is such that the chance mode A 10 times and the normal mode 40 times are alternately repeated thereafter. That is, the number of special symbol lottery is in the range of 201-210, 251-260, 301-310, ... (Every time the special symbol lottery is executed 40 times in the normal mode, 10 special symbol lottery is performed. The chance A table 202d3 (see FIG. 16B) is referenced. On the other hand, the number of special symbol lottery is in the range of 211-250, 261-300, 31-13-50, ... (For every 10 special symbol lottery executed in chance mode A, 40 special symbols are drawn. (Through the lottery), the normal table 202d1 (see FIG. 15B) is referenced.

In this way, every time the lottery of 40 special symbols is executed in the normal mode, the game is shifted to the chance mode A, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal mode, so that the game can be played until the next chance mode A. Can make you want to continue. Therefore, the motivation of the player for the game can be improved, and the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

On the other hand, when the previous jackpot type was jackpot D (when the time saving state of the normal symbol is not given after the jackpot), the number of lottery of the special symbol is in the range of 1 to 25, and the normal table 202d1 as the variable pattern table ( (See FIG. 15 (b)) is associated. Therefore, after the end of the jackpot D, only the ultra-long fluctuation (600 seconds) is selected when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed over the lottery of the special symbol 25 times. Therefore, if the lottery of the first special symbol is not executed by left-handed, the game efficiency is extremely deteriorated (when right-handed, the lottery of the special symbol is executed only once every 10 minutes).

Further, a chance A table 202d3 (see FIG. 16B) is associated with the variation pattern table in the range where the number of lottery of special symbols is 26 to 50. Therefore, when the lottery of the special symbol is executed 25 times after the jackpot D is completed, the chance mode A can be shifted to the lottery of the special symbol 25 times thereafter.

After that, the normal mode over the lottery of 25 special symbols and the chance mode A over the lottery of 25 special symbols are alternately repeated. Therefore, the number of lottery of special symbols in one chance mode A is larger than that after exiting the consecutive villa mode or chance mode B (10 times → 25 times), which is another jackpot type, and once. The number of lottery of special symbols in the normal mode of is reduced (40 times → 25 times). That is, an opening / closing pattern (see the middle part of FIG. 7) that makes it difficult for the ball to pass through the V winning switch 65e3 is set, and the normal state after the big hit is set as a relief for the most disadvantageous big hit that the time saving state of the normal symbol is not given. , It can be more advantageous than other jackpot types (increasing the ratio of chance mode A). Therefore, even if the jackpot D is the most unfavorable, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player's motivation for the game from being lowered.

As described above, in the second embodiment, in the most disadvantageous normal state (low probability state of the special symbol and normal state of the normal symbol), the normal mode and the chance mode A are set according to the number of lottery of the special symbol. It is configured to be switched and periodically shifts to chance mode A. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game from becoming monotonous in the most unfavorable normal state.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 77. As shown in FIG. 77, in the RAM 203 of the second embodiment, the small hit medium flag 203w and the chance mode counter 203x are deleted from the configuration of the RAM 203 of the first embodiment, and the fluctuation number counter is countered. 203ab and scenario storage area 203ac are newly added.

The fluctuation number counter 203ab is a counter for counting the number of lottery of special symbols executed after the jackpot is completed. Based on the value of the fluctuation count counter 203ab and the fluctuation pattern scenario set at the end of the previous jackpot, a fluctuation pattern table for determining the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is selected from the scenario storage area 203ac (FIG. See S622 of 79). The value of the fluctuation count counter 203ab is incremented by 1 each time the game state update process 3 is executed (see S411 in FIG. 78). Unless the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, the value of the fluctuation number counter 203ab is retained even when the power is cut off, and is reset to 0 at the end of the jackpot (see S2213 in FIG. 80).

The scenario storage area 203ac is a storage area for storing the fluctuation pattern scenario according to the previous jackpot type. When the special symbol lottery is executed, the fluctuation pattern table for determining the fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern scenario stored in the scenario storage area 203ac and the value of the fluctuation count counter 203ab described above. Will be done. At the end of the jackpot, the scenario storage area 203ab stores the variation pattern scenario corresponding to the jackpot type (see S2212 in FIG. 80).

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the second embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 80. First, the game state update process 3 (S321) executed in the first special symbol change start process (see FIG. 29) instead of the game state update process (see FIG. 30) in the first embodiment will be described. The game state update process 3 (S321) is a process for updating a counter or the like related to the state of the pachinko machine 10 as in the game state update process (see FIG. 30) in the first embodiment.

FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the game state update process 3 (S321). Of the game state update process 3 (S321) in the second embodiment, in each of the processes S401 to S404, S407, and S408, S401 to S404 of the game state update process (see FIG. 30) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same processing as each processing of S407 and S408 is executed.

Further, in the game state update process 3 (see FIG. 78) in the second embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S407 that the game state has not been changed (S407: No), or the game state is in the normal state. When it is determined that the change has been made to (S407: Yes) and a state command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the changed gaming state (normal state) is set (S408), the value of the fluctuation count counter 203ab is set. 1 is added and updated (S411), and this process ends. By updating the fluctuation count counter 203ab in the game state update process 3 (see FIG. 78), when the fluctuation pattern is subsequently determined, the fluctuation pattern table is created based on the exact number of lottery of special symbols. You can choose.

Next, with reference to FIG. 79, in the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29), the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment is executed instead of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 32). 1 The special symbol variation pattern selection process 3 (S322) will be described. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 3 (S322). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process 3 (S322) performs the variation pattern according to the lottery result of the first special symbol, similarly to the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment. This is a process for selecting.

In each of the first special symbol variation pattern selection processes 3 (see FIG. 79), S601, S602, and S608 to S610, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 32), respectively. The same processes as those of S601, S602, and S608 to S610 are executed.

Further, in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 3 (see FIG. 79) in the second embodiment, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit (S601), and when it is a big hit. When the jackpot type selection process (S602) in the above is completed, the value of the fluctuation count counter 203ab is read out.

Next, the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the value of the read fluctuation count counter 203ab is specified based on the fluctuation pattern scenario stored in the scenario storage area 203ac (S622), and the process shifts to S608. As a result, in the processing of S608, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the current lottery result is selected by referring to the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the number of fluctuations after the jackpot and the fluctuation pattern scenario set at the end of the jackpot. Can be done. That is, when selecting the variable pattern table, the degree of advantage can be changed according to the number of lottery by switching the variable pattern table to be referred to according to the number of lottery of the special symbol. In particular, in the most disadvantageous normal state for the player (low probability state of the special symbol and normal state of the normal symbol), the game can be periodically shifted to the advantageous chance mode A, so that the game in the normal state can be played. It is possible to prevent (suppress) becoming monotonous.

Although the illustration is omitted, in the second embodiment, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 3 is executed instead of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment. NS. The second special symbol variation pattern selection process 3 corresponds to the value of the variation count counter 203ab and the set variation pattern scenario, similarly to the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 3 (see FIG. 79) described above. Then, the process of selecting the variation pattern according to the lottery result of the second special symbol this time is executed. Since the content of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 3 is the same as that of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 3 (see FIG. 79) described with reference to FIG. 79, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 80, the jackpot end process 3 (S2121) executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 47) instead of the jackpot end process (see FIG. 48) in the first embodiment will be described. .. The jackpot end process 3 (S2121) is a process for setting the game state after the jackpot ends, similar to the jackpot end process (see FIG. 48) in the first embodiment.

FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process 3 (see FIG. 80). Of the jackpot end processing 3 (see FIG. 80) in the second embodiment, each of the processes S2201 to S2206 is the same as each process of the jackpot end processing (see FIG. 48) S2201 to S2206 in the first embodiment. The process is executed.

Further, in the jackpot end processing 3 (see FIG. 80) in the second embodiment, when the processing of S2206 is completed, the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202f (see FIG. 76B) is used to correspond to the current jackpot type. The variation pattern scenario is read out (S2211), and the read variation pattern scenario is stored in the scenario storage area 203ac (S2212).

More specifically, if the jackpot type this time is other than jackpot D (big hits A to C, E, F), the table 202d2 for consecutive villas / chance B will be drawn for 100 special symbols after the jackpot ends. Is referred to, and in 101 to 150 times, the normal table 202d1 is referred to, and thereafter, the chance A table 202d3 is referred to over 10 special symbol lottery (chance mode A), and 40 times. A scenario is set in which the state in which the normal table 202d1 is referred to (normal mode) is alternately repeated over the lottery of the special symbol. On the other hand, if the jackpot this time is jackpot D, the table 202d3 for chance A is referred to over 25 special symbol lottery (chance mode A), and it is normal over 25 special symbol lottery. A scenario is set in which the state in which the table 202d1 is referenced (normal mode) is alternately repeated.

When the process of S2212 is completed, the value of the fluctuation count counter 203ab is then reset (S2213), and this process is terminated. By executing this jackpot end processing 3 (see FIG. 80), it is possible to set a variation pattern scenario according to the jackpot type, so that the variation pattern scenario can be diversified.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, in the normal state, a fluctuation pattern table referred to for selecting a fluctuation pattern according to the number of lottery of special symbols after the jackpot is completed is displayed. It is configured to switch, and in the normal state, it is configured to periodically shift to the chance mode A, which is more advantageous than the normal mode. As a result, in the normal state, which is the most disadvantageous to the player, the degree of advantage can be changed periodically, so that it is possible to suppress the game from becoming monotonous.

Further, in the second embodiment, the fluctuation pattern scenario set after the jackpot is different depending on the jackpot type, and when the jackpot type (big hit D) becomes unfavorable, an advantageous fluctuation pattern scenario is set. It has a structure. That is, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol until the end of one chance mode A is large, and the number of lottery of the special symbol from the end of one chance mode A to the next setting of chance mode A is The configuration is such that a small number of scenarios are set. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player's willingness to play in the event of an unfavorable jackpot, and to allow the player to continue playing for a longer period of time. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

In the second embodiment, the variable pattern table to be referred to is switched according to the number of lottery of special symbols executed after the jackpot is completed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized (the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed), the variable pattern table to be referred to may be switched according to the number of lottery of special symbols. .. That is, even when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202f may be referred to, and for example, the scenario set at the end of the jackpot D may be stored in the scenario storage area 203ac. With this configuration, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, it is easy to shift to the chance mode A, and it is possible to make it an advantageous state in which the number of lottery of special symbols in one chance mode A is long. Therefore, the player can be made to play the game with the pachinko machine 10 when the hall is opened, expecting that the pachinko machine 10 has been initialized. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. In addition, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the pachinko machine 10 that has never won a big hit from being shunned by the player, and improve the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10.

In the second embodiment, the configuration is such that the mode A is periodically shifted to the chance mode A in the normal state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the lottery of the special symbol of the first predetermined number of times (for example, 500 times) is executed after the game state becomes the normal state, the chance mode A sets the predetermined second number of times (for example, for example). , 1000 times) may be configured to be set over a lottery of special symbols. Then, after the second number of times has elapsed, the normal mode may be continued until the next big hit. With this configuration, when the first number of times (500 times) is consecutively disengaged in the normal state, an advantageous state is set over the second number of times, so that a so-called big addiction occurs. It is possible to provide relief (provide a so-called ceiling) in case of such a situation. Therefore, even if the deviations occur many times in the normal state, it is possible to make the player think that the state is approaching an advantageous state, so that the player's motivation for the game can be maintained.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 to 87. In the second embodiment described above, when the V winning switch 65e3 is passed during the jackpot, the gaming state is the normal state on the premise of the pachinko machine 10 in which the probability variation state of the special symbol is given 100 times after the jackpot ends. The configuration was such that the disadvantageous normal mode and the advantageous chance mode A were switched according to the number of lottery of special symbols executed after that.

On the other hand, in the third embodiment, the variable winning device 65b for small hits is provided, which has the same structure as the variable winning device 65 of each of the above embodiments and is opened during the small hit game. Then, in addition to the case where the special symbol lottery is a big hit, the special symbol lottery is a small hit, and the big hit is started when the ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3 in the small winning variable winning device 65b. It is premised on the pachinko machine 10 (so-called type-two type mixer) of the specifications. More specifically, there are only two types of game states, a time-saving state and a normal state, and the probability of winning a small hit when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed rather than the lottery of the first special symbol is determined. By keeping the height high, the ball can easily pass through the V winning switch 65e3 during the time saving state (it is easy to become a big hit). Further, as compared with the normal state, when a big hit occurs during the time saving state, the setting ratio of the time saving state after the end of the big hit is increased. In this specification, in the third embodiment, when the time saving state is not set (the normal state is set) after the big hit won during the time saving state, the normal mode and the chance mode A are switched. There is. As a result, even if the advantageous time saving state ends, the chance mode A is set in the normal state set after that, so the chance mode is expected to pull back the jackpot during the chance mode A. The game can be continued until the end of.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment is that the game board 13 is provided with a variable winning device 65b for small hits instead of the variable winning device 65. The point is that the second variable winning device 650 is provided at the lower left of the front view with respect to the first ball opening 64, and the contents of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 are partially changed. The point, the content of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 is partially changed, and the partial processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. That is the point. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the first It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the second embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 81. As shown in FIG. 81, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a variable winning device 65b for small hits is arranged at the upper right of the front view with respect to the second entrance 640. The variable winning device 65b is opened when a small hit is obtained in a special symbol lottery. The structure of the variable winning device 65b for small hits is the same as that of the variable winning device 65 in the first embodiment, and a normal discharge flow path 65e1 and a special discharge flow path 65e2 are provided therein. In the present embodiment, by passing through the V winning switch 65e3 provided in the special discharge flow path 65e2 during the small hit, the big hit is started after the small hit is completed. That is, in addition to the case where the big hit is won by the lottery of the special symbol, the chance of becoming a big hit is given even if the small hit is made, so that the player's interest can be improved when the small hit is made.

In the game board 13, the second variable winning device 650 is arranged at the lower left of the front view with respect to the first entry port 64. In the case of a big hit, the second variable winning device 650 allows a ball to enter by opening the second specific winning opening 650a, which is normally closed, and each time one ball enters. It is a winning slot that pays out 15 prize balls. That is, in the third embodiment, the second specific winning opening 650a is opened instead of the specific winning opening 65a when a big hit is made. The second specific winning opening 650a is configured to be opened according to an opening / closing pattern determined according to the small hit type when a small hit is made. As a result, in the case of a big hit, it is possible to make a left-handed hit aiming at the second specific winning opening 650a. It is possible to prevent the ball from entering the 640 (the lottery of the second special symbol is suspended).

<About the electrical configuration in the third embodiment>
Next, the configurations of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84. FIG. 82A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 82 (a), the ROM 202 in the third embodiment is different in that the small hit type selection table 202e is added to the configuration of the ROM 202 in the second embodiment. Further, although the details will be described later, the contents of the first random number table 202a, the first hit type selection table 202b, and the variation pattern scenario table 202f are changed from the second embodiment.

First, the details of the first random number table 202a in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 82 (b). As shown in FIG. 82 (b), in the first hit random number table 202a in the present embodiment, only "0" is defined as the determination value (random number value) determined to be the jackpot of the special symbol. Of the 300 counter values that the first random number counter C1 can take, one is a jackpot counter value (random number value), so the probability of a jackpot in a special symbol lottery is 1/300. As described above, in the third embodiment, only the time saving state and the normal state are provided as the gaming state, and the jackpot is always drawn with a constant lottery probability (1/300).

Further, in the first random number table 202a, "1 to 299" is defined as a determination value (random number value) determined to be a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol. Therefore, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, it becomes a big hit (1/300) or a small hit (299/300). In the small hit, when a ball enters the small hit winning opening 65c and the ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3 provided downstream of the special discharge flow path 65e2, the big hit is started after the small hit is completed. That is, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the lottery result of the big hit is directly obtained, or the small hit is a chance to pass the V winning switch 65e3. It is advantageous for the player compared to.

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, an opening / closing pattern that makes it easy for the ball to enter the special discharge flow path 65e2 when the “small hit E” selected at 5% of the small hit is reached. Set.

Next, the details of the first type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 82 (c). FIG. 82 (c) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first type selection table 202b in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 82 (c), the first hit type selection table 202b of the present embodiment includes three types of jackpot types (big hits GI) that can be determined when a jackpot is obtained in a special symbol lottery. , Three types of big hit types (big hits J to L) that can be started after the small hit are provided based on the fact that the V winning switch 65e3 is passed during the small hit.

As shown in FIG. 82 (c), among the three types of jackpots that can be determined when a jackpot is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is ". A "big hit G" is associated with the range of "0 to 49". This "big hit G" is a big hit type (time saving big hit) in which the number of rounds is 16 and the time saving state is given 100 times after the big hit is completed. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 50 are random values (counter values) corresponding to the "big hit G", so if a big hit is achieved by a special symbol lottery. The rate at which "big hit G" is determined is 50% (50/100). When the time is shortened, the lottery of the advantageous second special symbol is easily executed, so that the "big hit G" is advantageous for the player.

Further, "big hit H" is associated with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "50 to 79". This "big hit H" is a big hit type (normal big hit) in which the number of rounds is 16 and the normal state is set after the big hit ends (the time saving state is not given). Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 30 are random values (counter values) corresponding to "big hit H", so if a big hit is made in a special symbol lottery. The rate at which "big hit H" is determined is 30% (30/100). Since a normal state that is more disadvantageous than the time saving state is set after the jackpot, "big hit H" is a jackpot type that is more disadvantageous than "big hit G".

A "big hit I" is associated with a range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "80 to 99". This "big hit I" is a big hit type (special big hit) in which the number of rounds is four and the game state set after the big hit ends is variable according to the game state at the time of winning the big hit. More specifically, if the game state at the time of winning the "big hit I" is the normal state, the normal state is set even after the end of the big hit, and the game state at the time of winning the "big hit I" is the time saving state. For example, a time saving state of 100 times is set after the jackpot ends. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 20 are random values (counter values) corresponding to "big hit I", so if a big hit is achieved by a special symbol lottery. The rate at which "big hit I" is determined is 20% (20/100). In the normal state, when it becomes "big hit I", the time saving state is not given and the number of rounds is the smallest among all the big hit types, which is the most disadvantageous for the player. On the other hand, if it becomes "Big hit I" during the time saving state, although the number of rounds is small, there is a high possibility that it will be a big hit again during the time saving state, so "Big hit H" (and "Big hit K") that is not given the time saving state. It is advantageous for the player compared to.

On the other hand, among the three types of jackpots that can be determined when the ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3 during the small hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", that is, "big hit J". "Is associated with it. This "big hit J" is a big hit type (time saving big hit) in which the number of rounds is 16 and the time saving state is given 100 times after the big hit is completed. Of the 100 random values (counter values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 50 are random values (counter values) corresponding to the "big hit J", so the V winning switch 65e3 is pressed while the ball is a small hit. The rate at which "big hit J" is determined when passing is 50% (50/100). This "big hit J" is the most advantageous jackpot type for the player because the number of rounds is the largest and an advantageous time saving state is given.

Further, "big hit K" is associated with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "50 to 79". This "big hit K" is a big hit type (normal big hit) in which the number of rounds is 16 and the normal state is set after the big hit ends (the time saving state is not given). Of the 100 random values (counter values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 30 are random values (counter values) corresponding to the "big hit K", so the V winning switch 65e3 is pressed while the sphere is a small hit. The rate at which "big hit K" is determined when passing is 30% (30/100). The number of rounds is large, which is the most advantageous for the prize sphere, but since the normal state is set after the big hit, the state after the big hit is disadvantageous.

A "big hit L" is associated with a range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "80 to 99". This "big hit L" is a jackpot type (special jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 4 and the gaming state set after the jackpot ends is variable according to the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. The correspondence between the game state at the time of winning and the game state after the big hit is the same as the above-mentioned "big hit I". Of the 100 random values (counter values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 20 are random values (counter values) corresponding to the "big hit L", so the V winning switch 65e3 is pressed while the ball is a small hit. The rate at which "big hit L" is determined when passing is 20% (20/100). In the normal state, when it becomes "big hit I", the time saving state is not given and the number of rounds is the smallest among all the big hit types, which is the most disadvantageous for the player. On the other hand, if it becomes "Big hit I" during the time saving state, although the number of rounds is small, there is a high possibility that it will be a big hit again during the time saving state, so compared to "Big hit H" and "Big hit K" that are not given the time saving state. It is advantageous for the player.

It should be noted that the ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3 basically only in the time saving state. That is, it is only when a small hit is made in the lottery of the second special symbol executed based on the ball entering the second entrance 640 by right-handed. Therefore, when a big hit is obtained by passing the ball through the V winning switch 65e3, the time saving state is given after the big hit by basically becoming "big hit J, L". That is, when the V winning switch 65e3 is passed during the time saving state, the time saving state is entered again at a rate of 70%. Therefore, once the time saving state is entered, the jackpot and the time saving state are likely to be repeated, which is extremely advantageous for the player.

Further, in the normal state, basically, the ball does not pass through the V winning switch 65e3 and become a big hit. However, it is possible to perform an irregular game method in which the second special symbol is drawn by intentionally right-handing in the normal state and the ball is expected to pass through the V winning switch 65e3 during the small hit. There is sex. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the "big hit L" is obtained in the normal state, the time saving state is not given, so that the ratio of the time saving state being given in the case of the big hit is 50% ( In the normal state, it is the same as when a big hit is made by lottery of special symbols). With this configuration, even if a big hit is achieved by hitting right, the expectation that the time saving state is given is the same as when hitting left, so that the merit of hitting right in the normal state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which right-handed hitting is performed even in a normal state.

In the present embodiment, only the "big hit L" is configured as a special jackpot that changes whether or not the time saving state is given according to the game state, but the "big hit J" may also be a special jackpot. That is, when a big hit is obtained by passing through the V winning switch 65e3 in the normal state, the normal state may be set after the big hit. With such a configuration, it is possible to further enhance the deterrent effect on the irregular game method in which the player always strikes right.

As described above, in the third embodiment, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the special symbol executed in the normal state, an advantageous time saving state is given only in the case of "big hit G", and "big hit H". , Or "Big hit I", the normal state is set. Therefore, when a big hit is made in the normal state, the ratio of the time saving state being given is 50%. In the time saving state, the lottery of the second special symbol becomes easier to be executed, and in the lottery of the second special symbol, there is a probability of about 1/20 that the ball easily enters the special discharge flow path 65e2. It becomes the set small hit type (small hit E). Therefore, if the ball is launched aiming at the second entrance 640 by right-handed during the time saving state of 100 times, it is possible to form an extremely advantageous state in which the jackpot is hit again with high probability.

In addition, if a big hit is obtained in a special symbol lottery executed in a time-saving state, a time-saving state is given after the end of the big hit even if a "big hit I" is obtained in addition to the "big hit G". That is, if a big hit is obtained by lottery of a special symbol during the time saving state, the time saving state is given at a rate of 70%. That is, in the time saving state, the time saving state is given at a rate of 70% even if the big hit is obtained by the lottery of the special symbol or the big hit is obtained by passing through the V winning switch 65e3. Therefore, once the time saving state is reached, the jackpot and the time saving state are repeated with a high probability (about 70%), which is extremely advantageous for the player.

Next, the details of the small hit type selection table 202e in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 83 (a). In the small hit type selection table 202e in the third embodiment, the small hit type is associated with each value range of the small hit type counter C5.

More specifically, "small hit D" is associated with the range in which the value of the small hit type counter C5 is "0 to 94". This "small hit D" has a short time (0.2 seconds) for the small hit winning opening 65c, as in the first round of "big hits C and D" in the first embodiment (see the middle part of FIG. 7). Since the opening / closing pattern is set so that only the ball is opened, it is difficult to enter the small hit winning opening 65c (it is difficult for the ball to pass through the V winning switch 65e3), which is a disadvantageous small hit type. Since the flow path solenoid 65k also performs the same operation as the first round of the big hit in the first embodiment (see the upper part of FIG. 7), the ball is hit by the small hit winning opening 65c during the opening period of 0.2 seconds. If the ball can enter the special discharge flow path 65e2, the ball can flow down into the special discharge flow path 65e2. That is, when the ball passes through the V winning switch 65e, the big hit is started after the small hit. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the value of the small hit type counter C5 can take, 95 are random values (counter values) corresponding to "small hit D", so a small hit in the second special symbol lottery. In the case of, the ratio of "small hit D" is 95% (95/100).

"Small hit E" is associated with the range in which the value of the small hit type counter C5 is "95 to 99". This "small hit E" is the same as in the first round (see the lower part of FIG. 7) such as "big hit A" in the first embodiment, the opening period of the small hit winning opening 65c and the on of the flow path solenoid 65k. Since the opening / closing pattern that matches the period (opening period of the special discharge flow path 65e2) is set, it is easy to enter the small hit winning opening 65c (the ball easily passes through the V winning switch 65e3). It is a hit type. When the ball passes through the V winning switch 65e during the small hit, the big hit is started after the small hit. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the value of the small hit type counter C5 can take, 5 are the random values (counter values) corresponding to "small hit E", so a small hit in the second special symbol lottery. In the case of, the ratio of "small hit E" is 5% (5/100).

When the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, there is a probability of 299/300 that a small hit will be made. Then, at 5% (1/20) of the case of a small hit, the ball becomes a "small hit E" that easily passes through the V winning switch 65e3. Therefore, if you hit right during the time saving state of 100 times, there is a 99% or more probability that you will win a big hit in the special symbol lottery, or you will get a "small hit E" at least once within the time saving number (No. 1). 2 The probability of winning 100 consecutive "small hits D" in the lottery of special symbols is 0.42%). Therefore, when the time is shortened, there is a 99% or higher probability of a big hit. Therefore, once the time is shortened, a special symbol lottery will result in a "big hit H" (30% distribution), or when the V winning switch 65e3 is passed. It becomes "big hit K" (distribution 30%), and the big hit and the time saving state are repeated until the normal state is set after the big hit. That is, it becomes an extremely advantageous state in which the jackpot and the time saving state are repeated with a probability of about 70%.

Next, the details of the variation pattern scenario table 202f will be described with reference to FIG. 83 (b). FIG. 83B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the variation pattern scenario table 202f in the third embodiment. The fluctuation pattern scenario table 202f is a data table that defines the fluctuation pattern scenario for each of the previous jackpot types, similarly to the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202f in the second embodiment.

First, a fluctuation pattern scenario set when the previous jackpot type is jackpot K (16 rounds normal jackpot) will be described. As described above, this jackpot K is one of the jackpot types started after the end of the jackpot based on the ball passing through the V winning switch 65e3 during the jackpot, and the normal state is set after the jackpot. .. As described above, it is basically in a time saving state that the ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3 and becomes a big hit. Therefore, the jackpot K is a jackpot that triggers the end of the advantageous state in which the jackpot and the time saving state are likely to be repeated and returns to the disadvantageous normal state.

As shown in FIG. 83 (b), when the jackpot type is jackpot K, among the variable pattern scenarios set at the end of the jackpot K, the number of lottery of special symbols is in the range of 1 to 25 times. A normal table 202d1 (see FIG. 15B) is associated with the fluctuation pattern table. As a result, immediately after the jackpot K is completed, a disadvantageous state (normal mode) in which the lottery of the second special symbol is difficult to be executed is set.

Further, the chance A table 202d3 (see FIG. 16B) is associated with the variation pattern table in the range where the number of lottery of the special symbol is 26 to 35 times. For this reason, after the jackpot K is completed, if the lottery of 25 special symbols is lost in succession, the lottery of the second special symbol is likely to be executed over the subsequent 10 special symbol lottery. (The fluctuation time of the second special symbol is shorter than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol) (chance mode A is set). Therefore, while the chance mode A is set, it becomes easier to win a small hit by playing a game aiming at the second entrance 640 by hitting right. Therefore, in the chance mode A, there is a high possibility that the ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3 during the small hit, which is an advantageous state in which a big hit is likely to occur. As described above, the small hit E in which the opening / closing pattern in which the ball easily flows down into the special discharge flow path 65e2 is set is selected at a rate of 5% (1/20) when the small hit occurs. Therefore, in the chance mode A, the jackpot will be a big hit with a probability of about 1/20 just by continuing to execute the right-handed hit. The ratio of the maximum 10 special symbol lottery executed in chance mode A to all small hits D (small hit type in which the ball does not easily flow down to the special discharge flow path 65e2) is the small hit in the special symbol lottery. It is the 10th power of the value obtained by multiplying the probability of becoming (1/300) by the probability of becoming a small hit D (19/20) (about 57.9%). Therefore, the ratio (expectation degree) of a big hit in one chance mode A is about 42.1%, so that when the player shifts to the chance mode A, the player is expected to have a big hit. Can be done. Since the chance mode A is a kind of normal state as a game state, when a special big hit (big hit I, L) occurs, the normal state is set after the big hit. That is, the expectation of a big hit is high, but the expectation that a time saving state is given when a big hit is made is 50%, which is the same as in the normal mode.

After the number of lottery of the special symbol is 31 times or later, the normal table 202d1 (see FIG. 15B) is associated with the variable pattern table. Therefore, when the chance mode A ends, the normal mode is disadvantageous for the player until a big hit is obtained thereafter.

In this way, when the jackpot K, which is the main opportunity for the player to end the extremely advantageous time saving state, the expectation of the jackpot is high because the lottery of the special symbol is executed 25 times after the end of the jackpot K. It is configured to shift to chance mode A. With this configuration, even if the time saving state that is advantageous to the player ends and shifts to the normal state, it will be a big hit in the chance mode A that is set after that, and the time saving state will be set again. The game can be continued at least until the chance mode A ends. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from quitting the game immediately after the advantageous time saving state ends, so that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

On the other hand, when the jackpot type is other than the jackpot K (big hit G to J, L) and the time saving state is set as the game state after the jackpot (when the time saving jackpot is reached or during the time saving state, a special jackpot is achieved. In the case where the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is in the range of 1 to 100 times (that is, the number of lottery that shortens the time of the normal symbol), the variation pattern table is the table 202d2 for consecutive villas / chance B (Fig.). 16 (a)) is associated with it. As a result, during the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol becomes shorter than that in the normal mode, and the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed, which is advantageous for the player.

Further, when the number of lottery of the special symbol exceeds 100 times, the time saving state returns to the normal state. Therefore, for the number of lottery of the special symbol after 100 times, the normal table 202d1 (FIG. 15 (b)) )) Is associated. As a result, after the transition to the normal state, the lottery of the second special symbol becomes extremely difficult to be executed (the fluctuation time becomes a super long fluctuation of 10 minutes), so the lottery of the first special symbol is executed by left-handed. be able to.

When the jackpot type is other than jackpot K (big hit G to J, L) and the normal state is set as the game state after the jackpot (when the time saving state is not given) (when the jackpot is H, or In the case of a special jackpot during the normal state), the normal table 202d1 (see FIG. 15B) is associated as the variable pattern table regardless of the number of lottery of the special symbol. Therefore, after the big hit, it becomes difficult to execute the lottery of the second special symbol regardless of the number of lottery of the special symbol, so that the lottery of the first special symbol can be executed by left-handed.

As described above, in the third embodiment, when the jackpot K is obtained in the time saving state that is advantageous to the player and the game shifts to the normal state that is disadvantageous to the player, a lottery of a specific number of special symbols is drawn. Is executed to shift to the chance mode A, which is relatively advantageous to the player. In this chance mode A, the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed, and the small hit is easily won and the ball is easily flowed down to the special discharge flow path 65e2, so that the expectation of a big hit is high. Therefore, even if the advantageous time saving state ends, the player can be reminded to continue the game at least until the chance mode A ends. That is, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player's willingness to play when the most advantageous state ends.

In the third embodiment, when a special jackpot is obtained in the chance mode A, the gaming state after the special jackpot is set to the normal state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a special jackpot is obtained in the normal mode, a normal state may be set, and when a special jackpot is obtained in the chance mode A, a time saving state may be set. With this configuration, the expectation of the time-saving state in the case of a big hit in the chance mode A can be made equal to the jackpot in the time-saving state, so that the player's expectation for the chance mode A is further increased. be able to. Therefore, the player's willingness to play can be further improved.

In the third embodiment, when a small hit is made in the lottery of the second special symbol, the ball easily passes through the V winning switch 65e3 at a rate of 5% regardless of the game state or mode. It is not limited to this. For example, in the normal mode, it may be configured so that an opening / closing pattern that is difficult to pass through the V winning switch 65e when a small hit is made can be easily set. More specifically, for example, when a small hit is made in the normal mode, only the small hit D may be determined, or when the small hit E is obtained without changing the distribution of the small hit type. The opening / closing pattern of the small hit winning opening 65c may be the same as that of the small hit D (opening / closing pattern that is difficult to pass through the V winning switch 65e3) in the normal mode. With such a configuration, even if the right-handed hit is always executed in the normal mode, it becomes difficult to pass the ball through the V winning switch 65e3, so that the merit of executing the right-handed hit in the normal mode is reduced. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) an irregular game method of hitting right in the normal mode.

In the third embodiment, when the number of lottery of the special symbol is in the range of 26 to 35 after the end of the jackpot K, the chance mode A is set. However, the number of lottery to shift to the chance mode A and the chance The number of lottery for which mode A continues may be arbitrarily determined. Specifically, for example, the chance mode A may be set when the number of lottery of special symbols is in the range of 91 to 100 times. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player want to continue the game from the end of the jackpot K until the end of the special symbol lottery 100 times. Further, the chance mode A may be set when the number of lottery of the special symbol is in the range of 26 to 30 times. By reducing the number of times in the chance mode A, it becomes a big hit in the chance mode A after the time saving state ends, and the rate of pulling back the time saving state can be reduced, so that the gambling of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. Further, conversely, the number of lottery times in which the chance mode A is set may be increased. As the number of lottery in chance mode A increases, the expectation of a big hit in chance mode A also increases, so when the time saving state ends, it is possible to continue the game more reliably until chance mode A ends. can.

In the third embodiment, the configuration is such that the transition to the chance mode A is performed only after the jackpot K is completed, but the transition to the chance mode A may be made even when another jackpot is achieved. For example, even if the jackpot H is obtained, the configuration may be such that the mode shifts to the chance mode A. With this configuration, it becomes a normal jackpot (big hit H, K) in the time saving state, and when the normal state is set, a chance mode is executed when a special symbol lottery of a specific number of times (for example, 25 times) is executed. Since the transition to A is performed, it is possible to more reliably prevent (suppress) the decrease in the player's willingness to play when the time saving state ends and the mode shifts to the normal mode. In this case, if the jackpot H is obtained in the normal state, the chance mode A is given only when the jackpot H is given during the time saving state without setting the fluctuation pattern scenario in which the chance mode A is given. It may be configured to set a fluctuation pattern scenario. As a result, only the normal state after the time saving state ends can be advantageous without changing the degree of advantage of the normal state other than the normal state set after the time saving state ends.

In the third embodiment, the variation pattern scenario in which the chance mode A is set is set regardless of the game state at the time when the jackpot K is reached, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the jackpot K is used. The scenario set according to the game state and mode at the time of winning may be different. More specifically, for example, when the jackpot K is won by hitting right in the normal mode, a fluctuation pattern scenario in which the normal table 202d1 is referred to is set regardless of the number of times, and the jackpot is set in the time saving state or the chance mode A. When it becomes K, the variation pattern scenario in which the chance mode A is set may be set. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the merit of hitting right in the normal mode, so that it is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which hitting right is always performed.

In the present embodiment, only one lottery number for shifting to chance mode A after a big hit is provided, but the number of lottery shifts to chance mode A is not limited to this, and a plurality of types of variation patterns in which the number of lottery transitions to chance mode A is different. It may be configured to provide a scenario. More specifically, as a jackpot type that is started when the ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3, a plurality of normal jackpots (big hits K1, K2, ...) Are provided, and chances are provided for each type of normal jackpot. A variable pattern scenario in which the number of lottery shifts to the mode A is different may be set. More specifically, the number of lottery to shift to the chance mode A may be different by 25 times, for example, the jackpot K1 is 25 times, the jackpot K2 is 50 times, the jackpot K3 is 75 times, and so on. .. With this configuration, it is difficult for the player to identify when to shift to the chance mode A.

In the present embodiment, when the fluctuation pattern scenario in which the chance mode A is set after the big hit is set, the chance mode A is set only once, but as the configuration in which the chance mode A is set a plurality of times. May be good. Specifically, for example, after the jackpot K is completed, the chance mode A may be set in the range of 26 to 35 times, the range of 101 to 105 times, and the range of 1000 to 2000 times. good. As a result, even after the first chance mode A ends without winning the jackpot, it is possible to make the player think that the game will continue until the second chance mode A is reached. In addition, even if a big addiction occurs, it is possible to make the player think that the game will be continued until the third chance mode A is reached. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

Next, the details of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 84. FIG. 84 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 according to the third embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 84, the RAM 203 in the third embodiment has a probability variation counter 203g, a probability variation setting flag 203h, a probability variation passing counter 203i, and a probability variation effective flag with respect to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the second embodiment (see FIG. 77). The 203o and the probabilistic valid timer 203p have been deleted, and the jackpot start flag 203ad, the V pass counter 203ae, the V pass valid flag 203af, the V pass valid timer 203ag, and the winning state storage area 203ah have been added.

The jackpot start flag 203ad is a flag indicating whether or not the jackpot starts after the small hit. If the jackpot start flag 203ad is on, the jackpot start is set at the end of the jackpot (see S2512 in FIG. 87), and if it is off, the jackpot ends as it is. The jackpot start flag 203ad is set to ON when the ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3 during the small hit. It is also set to off at the end of the small hit (see S2510 in FIG. 87).

The V-pass counter 203ae, the V-pass valid flag 203af, and the V-pass valid timer 203ag correspond to the probabilistic pass counter 203i, the probabilistic valid flag 203o, and the probabilistic valid timer 203p, respectively, in the second embodiment. These contents are the same as the probability variation pass counter 203i, the probability variation effective flag 203o, and the probability variation effective timer 203p in the second embodiment, except that they are referred to or updated during the small hit. That is, the number of balls that have passed through the V winning switch 65e3 during the small hit is counted by the V passing counter 203ae. Further, the V passage valid flag 203af is used to determine whether or not the passage of the V winning switch 65e3 is valid. Further, the V passage effective timer 203ag sets a period during which the passage of the V winning switch 65e3 is valid after the flow path solenoid 203k is set to off.

The winning state storage area 203ah is a storage area for storing information indicating whether or not the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the time saving state. Specifically, if the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the time saving state (if the value of the time saving medium counter 203r is 1 or more), the information indicating the time saving state is set to the winning state storage area 203ah. 01H ”is stored. On the other hand, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal state (if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203r is 0), "00H" is stored in the winning state storage area 203ah as information indicating the normal state. Will be done. The information stored in the winning state storage area 203ah is retained until the end of the jackpot, and is referred to when setting the gaming state after the end of the special jackpot (see S2223 in FIG. 86). That is, at the end of the special jackpot, if "01H" indicating that the gaming state at the time of winning is the reduced working hours state is stored in the storage area 203ah at the time of winning, the reduced working hours state is set as the gaming state after the end of the jackpot. If "00H" indicating that the game state at the time of winning is the normal state is stored in the storage area 203ah at the time of winning, the normal state is set as the game state after the jackpot ends.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the third embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 to 87. First, FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 4 (S2021) executed in place of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 47) in the second embodiment (and the first embodiment).

The jackpot control process 4 in the third embodiment is a process for opening or closing the second specific winning opening 650a for each round of jackpots. In each of the jackpot control processes 4 (S2021), S2101, S2102, S2104 to S2111, S2101, S2102, S2104 of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 47) in the second embodiment (and the first embodiment), respectively. The same process as each process of ~ S2111 is executed. On the other hand, in the jackpot control process 4 (S2021), the processes S2103, S2112, and S2113 of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 47) in the second embodiment (and the first embodiment) are deleted. These processes are for executing the operation of the flow path solenoid 65k in the small hit variable winning device 65b, the monitoring of the V winning switch 65e3, and the like, and the second variable winning device 650 operates during the big hit. This is because in the third embodiment, it is an unnecessary process.

Further, in the jackpot control process 4 (see FIG. 85) in the third embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S2111 that it is the end timing of the jackpot (S211: Yes), the jackpot end process in the second embodiment Instead of 3 (see FIG. 80), the jackpot end process 4 is executed (S2131), and this process is terminated. The details of the jackpot end processing 4 (S2131) will be described with reference to FIG. 86.

FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end processing 4 (S2131). The jackpot end process 4 (S2131) is a process for setting the game state after the jackpot ends, similar to the jackpot end process 3 (see FIG. 80) in the second embodiment.

Of the jackpot end processing 4 (see FIG. 86) in the third embodiment, in each of the processes S2204 and S2211 to S2213, S2204 and S2211- of the jackpot end processing 3 (see FIG. 80) in the second embodiment, respectively. The same process as each process of S2213 is executed.

Further, when the jackpot end processing 4 (see FIG. 86) in the third embodiment is started, it is first determined whether the jackpot type this time is a time-saving jackpot (that is, jackpot G, J) (S2221). If it is a time-saving jackpot (S2221: Yes), the process is shifted to S2204 and the value of the time-saving medium counter 203r is set to 101, so that the time is shortened until just before the 101st special symbol lottery is executed after the jackpot. The state is set to be given (S2204). On the other hand, in the process of S2221 when it is determined that the time saving jackpot is not (S2221: No), then it is determined whether the jackpot type this time is a special jackpot (big hit I, L) (S2222). In the process of S2222, when it is determined that the current jackpot is a special jackpot (S2222: Yes), the information corresponding to the game state at the time when the jackpot is won is read out from the winning state storage area 203ah (S2223). It is determined whether the gaming state at the time of winning was the time saving state (S2224).

In the process of S2224, when it is determined that the game state at the time of winning is the time saving state (S2224: Yes), the process shifts to S2204 in order to set the game state after the big hit to the time saving state. On the other hand, in the process of S2224, if it is determined that the gaming state at the time of winning is not the time saving state (that is, the normal state) (S2224: No), the processing shifts to S2225 without setting the time saving state. .. Further, in the processing of S2222, even when it is determined that the current jackpot type is not a special jackpot (S2222: No), the current jackpot is a normal jackpot and it is not necessary to set the value of the time reduction / medium counter, so the processing is performed. To S2225.

In the process of S2225, a state command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the game state according to the value of the time saving / medium counter 203r is set (S2225), and the jackpot medium flag 203v is set to off (S2226). The process proceeds to S2211. By executing this jackpot control process 4 (see FIG. 86), it is possible to accurately set the game state at the time when the jackpot is won and the time saving state according to the jackpot type.

Next, with reference to FIG. 87, the details of the small hit control process 4 (S2022) executed in place of the small hit control process (see FIG. 51) in the second embodiment (and the first embodiment) will be described. .. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the small hit control process 4 (S2022).

In each of the small hit control processes 4 (see FIG. 87), S2501 to S2510, each of S2501 to S2510 of the small hit control process (see FIG. 51) in the second embodiment (and the first embodiment), respectively. The same process as the process is executed.

Further, in the small hit control process 4 (see FIG. 87) in the third embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S2509 that it is the end timing of the small hit (S2509: Yes), the big hit start flag 203ad is turned on. If it is determined whether it is present (S2511), and if it is determined that it is on (S2511: Yes), the start of the jackpot is set (S2512). At the time of this setting, the information corresponding to the gaming state at the time of winning is stored in the winning state storage area 203ah from the value of the time saving / medium counter 203r. Next, the value of the time saving / medium counter 203r is reset to 0 (S2513), and the process shifts to S2510.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2511, when it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203ad is not on (that is, is off), the processing of S2512 and S2513 is skipped and the processing is shifted to S2510. ..

Further, in the small hit control process 4 (see FIG. 87) in the third embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S2509 that it is not the end timing of the small hit (S2509: No), the winning process (S2514) and the abnormal process are performed. (S2515) are executed respectively. Each of these processes is the same as the winning process (see FIG. 49) and the abnormal process (see FIG. 50) in the second embodiment (and the first embodiment), and thus will be briefly described, but the winning process will be performed. When the process is executed (S2514), whether or not the ball has passed the valid period and whether or not the ball has passed through the V winning switch 65e3 is monitored, and when it is determined that the ball has passed through the V winning switch 65e3 during the valid period. , The jackpot start flag 203ad is set to on. Thereby, the start of the big hit can be set only when it is on by referring to the state of the big hit start flag 203ad at the end of the small hit.

Further, in the abnormal processing (S2515), the number of balls that have entered the small hit winning opening 65c and the number of balls that have been discharged to the outside through the normal discharge flow path 65e1 and the special discharge flow path 65e3. Is executed, and a process of determining whether all the balls that have entered the inside of the variable winning device 65b for small hits are normally ejected is executed, and an error is notified when the number of balls entered and the number of ejected balls do not match. Will be done. As a result, when a problem such as ball clogging occurs inside the variable winning device 65b for small hits, the problem can be notified to the clerk of the hall at an early stage.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment is premised on the pachinko machine 10 provided with only two types, a normal state which is disadvantageous as a gaming state and an advantageous time saving state. In the third embodiment, when it is confirmed that the jackpot K is obtained in the advantageous time saving state and the transition to the disadvantageous normal state is determined, the lottery of the special symbol of the first number of times (25 times) is executed. , It is configured to shift from the normal mode to the relatively advantageous chance mode A. This chance mode A continues over the second (10 times) special symbol lottery, and if the jackpot is not obtained during the second number of special symbol lottery, it is again. It is configured to shift to the disadvantageous normal mode. As a result, even if the advantageous time saving state is changed to the disadvantageous normal state, the game can be continued in anticipation of the chance mode A to be changed after that. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation for the game from being lowered at the end of the advantageous time saving state, and to maintain the player's motivation to play at least until the chance mode A ends.

In the third embodiment, when a special jackpot is obtained in the chance mode A, the gaming state after the special jackpot is set to the normal state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a special jackpot is obtained in the normal mode, a normal state may be set, and when a special jackpot is obtained in the chance mode A, a time saving state may be set. With this configuration, the expectation of the time-saving state in the case of a big hit in the chance mode A can be made equal to the jackpot in the time-saving state, so that the player's expectation for the chance mode A is further increased. be able to. Therefore, the player's willingness to play can be further improved.

In the third embodiment, when a small hit is made in the lottery of the second special symbol, the ball easily passes through the V winning switch 65e3 at a rate of 5% regardless of the game state or mode. It is not limited to this. For example, in the normal mode, it may be configured so that an opening / closing pattern that is difficult to pass through the V winning switch 65e when a small hit is made can be easily set. More specifically, for example, when a small hit is made in the normal mode, only the small hit D may be determined, or when the small hit E is obtained without changing the distribution of the small hit type. The opening / closing pattern of the small hit winning opening 65c may be the same as that of the small hit D (opening / closing pattern that is difficult to pass through the V winning switch 65e3) in the normal mode. With such a configuration, even if the right-handed hit is always executed in the normal mode, it becomes difficult to pass the ball through the V winning switch 65e3, so that the merit of executing the right-handed hit in the normal mode is reduced. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) an irregular game method of hitting right in the normal mode.

In the third embodiment, when the number of lottery of the special symbol is in the range of 26 to 35 after the end of the jackpot K, the chance mode A is set. However, the number of lottery to shift to the chance mode A and the chance The number of lottery for which mode A continues may be arbitrarily determined. Specifically, for example, the chance mode A may be set when the number of lottery of special symbols is in the range of 91 to 100 times. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player want to continue the game from the end of the jackpot K until the end of the special symbol lottery 100 times. Further, the chance mode A may be set when the number of lottery of the special symbol is in the range of 26 to 30 times. By reducing the number of times in the chance mode A, it becomes a big hit in the chance mode A after the time saving state ends, and the rate of pulling back the time saving state can be reduced, so that the gambling of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. Further, conversely, the number of lottery times in which the chance mode A is set may be increased. As the number of lottery in chance mode A increases, the expectation of a big hit in chance mode A also increases, so when the time saving state ends, it is possible to continue the game more reliably until chance mode A ends. can.

In the third embodiment, the configuration is such that the transition to the chance mode A is performed only after the jackpot K is completed, but the transition to the chance mode A may be made even when another jackpot is achieved. For example, even if the jackpot H is obtained, the configuration may be such that the mode shifts to the chance mode A. With this configuration, it becomes a normal jackpot (big hit H, K) in the time saving state, and when the normal state is set, a chance mode is executed when a special symbol lottery of a specific number of times (for example, 25 times) is executed. Since the transition to A is performed, it is possible to more reliably prevent (suppress) the decrease in the player's willingness to play when the time saving state ends and the mode shifts to the normal mode. In this case, if the jackpot H is obtained in the normal state, the chance mode A is given only when the jackpot H is given during the time saving state without setting the fluctuation pattern scenario in which the chance mode A is given. It may be configured to set a fluctuation pattern scenario. As a result, only the normal state after the time saving state ends can be advantageous without changing the degree of advantage of the normal state other than the normal state set after the time saving state ends.

In the third embodiment, the variation pattern scenario in which the chance mode A is set is set regardless of the game state at the time when the jackpot K is reached, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the jackpot K is used. The scenario set according to the game state and mode at the time of winning may be different. More specifically, for example, when the jackpot K is won by hitting right in the normal mode, a fluctuation pattern scenario in which the normal table 202d1 is referred to is set regardless of the number of times, and the jackpot is set in the time saving state or the chance mode A. When it becomes K, the variation pattern scenario in which the chance mode A is set may be set. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the merit of hitting right in the normal mode, so that it is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which hitting right is always performed.

In the present embodiment, only one lottery number for shifting to chance mode A after a big hit is provided, but the number of lottery shifts to chance mode A is not limited to this, and a plurality of types of variation patterns in which the number of lottery transitions to chance mode A is different. It may be configured to provide a scenario. More specifically, as a jackpot type that is started when the ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3, a plurality of normal jackpots (big hits K1, K2, ...) Are provided, and chances are provided for each type of normal jackpot. A variable pattern scenario in which the number of lottery shifts to the mode A is different may be set. More specifically, the number of lottery to shift to the chance mode A may be different by 25 times, for example, the jackpot K1 is 25 times, the jackpot K2 is 50 times, the jackpot K3 is 75 times, and so on. .. With this configuration, it is difficult for the player to identify when to shift to the chance mode A.

In the present embodiment, when the fluctuation pattern scenario in which the chance mode A is set after the big hit is set, the chance mode A is set only once, but as the configuration in which the chance mode A is set a plurality of times. May be good. Specifically, for example, as in the second embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the normal table 202d1 (normal mode) and the chance A table 202d3. The state (chance mode A) may be periodically switched. More specifically, for example, as a fluctuation pattern scenario set at the end of the jackpot K, the normal table 202d1 is associated with a range of 1 to 25 times of lottery of special symbols (value of fluctuation count counter 203ab). The chance A table 202d3 is associated with the range of 26 to 35 times, the normal table 202d1 is associated with the range of 36 to 60 times, and thereafter, for 10 special symbol lottery. The chance A table 202d3 and the normal table 202d1 for 25 special symbol lottery may be repeated. Further, as another example of shifting to the chance mode A multiple times, for example, after the jackpot K is completed, in the range of 26 to 35 times, the range of 101 to 105 times, and the range of 1000 to 2000 times. The chance mode A may be set. As a result, even after the first chance mode A ends without winning the jackpot, it is possible to make the player think that the game will continue until the second chance mode A is reached. In addition, even if a big addiction occurs, it is possible to make the player think that the game will be continued until the third chance mode A is reached. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 102. In the second embodiment described above, the first ball entry port 64, which makes it easy for the ball to enter by hitting the left side, and the second ball entry port 640, which makes it easy for the ball to enter the ball by hitting the right side, are provided, and the second ball entry port is provided. The person who wins the big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol executed based on the ball entering the mouth 640 wins the big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol based on the entry of the ball into the first entrance 64. It was configured to be more advantageous to the player than to be (it is easier to give a probability change state after a big hit). Then, in the normal state, the disadvantageous normal mode in which the lottery of the second special symbol is difficult to be executed and the advantageous chance mode A in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed are switched according to the number of lottery of the special symbol. Was supposed to be.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment, both the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol are easily executed by left-handed, and the lottery of the second special symbol is executed by right-handed. The board surface is configured so that it can be easily played. In addition, it is premised on the pachinko machine 10 having a control specification that executes a lottery for whether or not to fall from the probabilistic state to the normal state each time the lottery condition for the special symbol is satisfied in the probabilistic state of the special symbol. Based on these premise, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment, the degree of advantage (easiness of executing the lottery of the second special symbol) is determined according to the timing (number of lottery) of falling from the probabilistic state to the normal state. It is configured to be different. More specifically, it is specified by setting a scenario that refers to a variation pattern table in which the lottery of the first special symbol is difficult to be executed from the transition to the probabilistic state until the lottery of the special symbol is executed a specific number of times. If the player falls into the normal state before the lottery of the number of special symbols is executed, even if the player returns to the left-handed strike, the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide relief in the case of an early fall from the probabilistic state to the normal state, so that the player's motivation for the game can be maintained.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment is that the game board 13 is provided with a distribution unit 660 instead of the first ball slot 64. The point, the content of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 has been partially changed, the content of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 has been partially changed, and the content of the main control device 110 The point is that the partial processing executed by the MPU 201 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the first It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the second embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 88. FIG. 88 is a front view of the board surface 13 in the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 88, in the fourth embodiment, the distribution unit 660 is arranged at the position (below the variable display device unit 80) where the first ball entry port 640 was arranged in the second embodiment. It is different in that it is. Although the details will be described later, the distribution unit 660 is configured so that a ball can enter through a passage port provided above the distribution unit 660. Inside the distribution unit 660, a first special symbol lottery is executed when a ball enters, and a second special symbol lottery is executed when a ball enters. A central second entry port 640c is provided, and a ball that has entered the inside of the distribution unit 660 through the passage port is distributed to any of these entry ports. Therefore, the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed by launching the ball aiming at the distribution unit 660 by left-handed striking.

Here, the configuration of the distribution unit 660 will be described with reference to FIG. 89. FIGS. 89 (a) and 89 (b) are views showing the internal structure of the distribution unit 660. In reality, a cover body is arranged on the front side, and the cover body is composed of a member whose inside can be seen through, and a spiral handle is colored on the surface so that the inside cannot be seen through or is difficult to see through. It is configured so that the inside is difficult to see.

As shown in FIGS. 89 (a) and 89 (b), a passage port through which the ball can enter is provided in the upper part of the distribution unit 660, and the transparency that can detect that the ball has passed through the passage port is provided. A mold entry sensor 660a is arranged. Below the passage port, a distribution member 900 for distributing the ball to the first ball entry port 64 or the central second ball entry port 640c is provided. The first ball entry port 64 is arranged in the lower left direction of the front view of the distribution member 900, and the central second ball entry port 640c is arranged in the lower left direction of the front view of the distribution member 900. The ball that has passed through the passage port is alternately distributed to the first ball entry port 64 and the central second ball entry port 640c by the distribution member 900.

The distribution member 900 is configured to be capable of receiving a ball that has entered the distribution unit 660 by the accommodating portion 900a or 900c. When the ball is received by the accommodating portion 900a, the entire distribution member 900 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front due to the weight of the ball. As a result, the accommodating portion 900a is in a state of being inclined downward in the lower left direction (see FIG. 89B), and as a result, the first insertion portion 900a is arranged in the lower left direction in the front view with respect to the distribution member 900. The ball falls toward the ball opening 64a (the ball is guided to the first ball opening 64). Here, the sorting member 900 is configured to be rotatable about 45 degrees clockwise and counterclockwise, respectively, and a magnet 900b is provided on the boundary wall between the accommodating portion 900a and the accommodating portion 900b. There is.

On the other hand, on the base body provided on the back side of the sorting unit 660, the back side (passing port) of the position where the magnet 900b is arranged in a state where the sorting member 900 is not rotated clockwise or counterclockwise. The base side magnet 901 is arranged at the position (on the center line of the above). The magnet 900b of the sorting member 900 and the base side magnet 901 are configured to have polarities that repel each other. Specifically, the base-side magnet 901 is composed of a rod-shaped magnet fixed to the base body, and is configured so that a magnetic pole (S pole or N pole) is generated at the tip end portion. The base side magnet 901 is arranged and fixed so that the tip end portion faces the distribution member 900 side.

Like the base side magnet 901, the magnet 900b is also composed of a rod-shaped magnet, and is fixed to the distribution member 900 so that the tip portion faces the base side magnet 901 side. The base side magnet 901 is at a position where the distribution member 900 rotates and the boundary wall between the accommodating portion 900a and the accommodating portion 900b is directly above (on the center line of the interval at which the game ball of the passing port can enter about one ball). And the magnet 900b of the sorting member 900 are at the closest positions (the tips of the sorting members 900 face each other). Here, since the magnets are arranged so as to have the same polarity (for example, N pole and N pole), they do not stop at a position where the boundary wall of the sorting member 900 faces directly upward due to repulsion. , It will be maintained in the position rotated to the left or right.

As a result, when the magnet 900b reaches a position (upward position) on the center line of the passage port, the distribution member 900 repels the magnet 900b and the base side magnet 901, so that the distribution member 900 is moved to the left or right. As it rotates, either the accommodating portion 900a or the accommodating portion 900b faces the side (upper side of the gaming machine) that receives the ball entering the distribution unit 660. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the ball that has entered the ball from coming into contact with the boundary wall between the accommodating portion 900a and the accommodating portion 900b and causing ball clogging.

Further, when the magnet 900b and the base side magnet 901 repel each other, for example, the accommodating portion 900a receives the ball and rotates about 90 degrees to the left to guide the ball to the first entry port 64a, and then the distribution member. It is possible to prevent the 900 from rotating clockwise (the accommodating portion 900a faces upward). As a result, after guiding the ball to the first entry port 64, the accommodating portion 900c is in a state of facing upward, and then the accommodating portion 900c receives the ball that has entered the distribution unit 660. When the accommodating portion 90c receives the ball, the distribution member 900 rotates clockwise by about 90 degrees due to the weight of the received ball, and the accommodating portion 900c is tilted in a direction of inclining in the lower right direction in the front view. Therefore, the ball falls from the accommodating portion 900c and enters the central second entry port 640c (the ball is guided to the central second entry port 640c). In this way, the distribution member 900 can alternately guide the ball entering the distribution unit 660 to the first ball entry port 64 and the central second ball entry port 640c. Balls can be evenly distributed to the central second entrance 640c to win a prize. As a result, the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel at the same time.

<About the electrical configuration in the fourth embodiment>
Next, the configurations of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 93. First, FIG. 90A is a block diagram showing a configuration of a ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 according to the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 90A, the ROM 202 of the fourth embodiment is different in that the fall lottery table 202g is added to the configuration of the ROM 202 of the second embodiment. Further, the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b, the second hit random number table 202c, the fluctuation pattern table 202d, and the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202f are changed from the ROM 202 of the second embodiment.

The fall lottery table 202g is a table that is referred to when determining whether or not to fall from the probabilistic state to the normal state (fall lottery) in the probabilistic state of the special symbol, and is a random value value (random value) that is determined to be a fall. Counter value) is stored. In the probabilistic state of the special symbol, every time the lottery of the special symbol is executed, the fall lottery table 202g is referred to, and it is determined whether or not to fall to the normal state. Details of the fall lottery table 202g will be described later with reference to FIG. 93 (a).

Next, with reference to FIG. 90 (b), the details of the first type selection table 202b in the fourth embodiment will be described. The first hit type selection table 202b is a data table in which the jackpot type is defined in association with each value that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, as in the second embodiment.

In this fourth embodiment, four jackpot types are provided. That is, "big hit M" and "big hit N" that can be determined when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, and "big hit O" which can be determined when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol. "Big hit P" is provided.

As shown in FIG. 90 (b), when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is within the range of "0 to 69", the big hit type is "big hit". "M" is determined. This "big hit M" has 16 rounds, and as an opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1 in the first round, the ball flows down to the special discharge flow path 65e2 (passes through the V winning switch 65e3). This is a jackpot type in which a difficult opening / closing pattern (see the middle row of FIG. 7) is set. Since the number of rounds is the largest among the jackpots, it is advantageous for the player in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained, but since it is unlikely that a probability change state will be set after the jackpot, it is disadvantageous as a game state after the jackpot. Become.

Further, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is within the range of "70 to 99", "big hit N" is determined as the jackpot type. This "big hit N" has four rounds, and as an opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1 in the first round, the ball flows down to the special discharge flow path 65e2 (passes through the V winning switch 65e3). This is a jackpot type in which a difficult opening / closing pattern (see the middle row of FIG. 7) is set. Since the number of rounds is the smallest and the probability that a probability change state is set after the jackpot is low, "big hit N" is the most disadvantageous jackpot type.

Further, as shown in FIG. 90 (b), when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is within the range of "0 to 69", the big hit type is selected. "Big hit O" is decided. This "big hit O" has 16 rounds, and as an opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1 in the first round, the ball flows down to the special discharge flow path 65e2 (passes through the V winning switch 65e3). This is a jackpot type in which an easy opening / closing pattern (see the lower part of FIG. 7) is set. Since the number of rounds is the largest and the probability change state is likely to be set after the jackpot, "big hit O" is the most advantageous jackpot type.

Further, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is within the range of "70 to 99", "big hit P" is determined as the jackpot type. This "big hit P" has four rounds, and as an opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1 in the first round, the ball flows down to the special discharge flow path 65e2 (passes through the V winning switch 65e3). This is a jackpot type in which an easy opening / closing pattern (see the lower part of FIG. 7) is set. Although the number of rounds is the smallest, there is a high possibility that the probability change state will be set after the jackpot, so the "big hit P" is a game after the jackpot than the jackpot (big hit M, N) determined by the lottery of the first special symbol. The condition becomes advantageous.

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, only the big hit type is determined, in which the probability change state is hard to be given (the ball is hard to pass through the V winning switch 65e3). It has a structure. On the other hand, when a big hit is made in the lottery of the second special symbol, only the big hit type is easily given (the ball easily passes through the V winning switch 65e3). As a result, the degree of advantage when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed can be further increased.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the ball is easily inserted into the sorting member 900 when the ball is hit to the left. The distribution member 900 has a configuration in which each time a ball enters, the ball is alternately distributed to the first ball entry port 64 provided inside and the central second ball entry port 640c. Therefore, even in a normal state that is disadvantageous to the player, by hitting left, the lottery of the disadvantageous first special symbol and the lottery of the advantageous second special symbol can be performed in about half and half. Therefore, the player can be made to play the game in the normal state with the expectation that the lottery of the advantageous second special symbol will be a big hit.

Next, the details of the second random number table 202c in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 90 (c). In each of the above embodiments (first to third embodiments), the normal state of the normal symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol are the hit probability of the normal symbol, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and the hit of the normal symbol. The configuration was such that there was no significant difference in the opening period of the electric accessory 640a in the case. On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, in the normal state (low probability state) of the normal symbol, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is significantly lower than that in the time saving state (high probability state) of the normal symbol. ing.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 90 (c), only "0" is defined as the value of the second hit random number counter C4, which is the hit of the normal symbol in the normal state (low probability state) of the normal symbol. ing. On the other hand, in the time saving state (high probability state) of the ordinary symbol, the same random number value (counter value) as in each of the above embodiments is defined. Therefore, in the normal state of the normal symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol is 1/240, so even if the right-handed hit is executed in the normal state, the hit of the normal symbol is rare.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the normal state of the normal symbol is 30 seconds (3 seconds in the time saving state), and the opening period of the electric accessory 640a when the normal symbol hits. Is 0.2 seconds x 1 time (1 second x 2 times during the time saving state). Therefore, in the normal state (low probability state) of the normal symbol, it takes time from passing through the through gate 67 until the lottery result of the normal symbol is obtained, and the probability of winning the normal symbol is extremely low, and the normal symbol is normal. Even if the symbol hits, an opening period is set in which it is difficult for the ball to enter during the opening period of the electric accessory 640a. Therefore, in the normal state, it is possible to enhance the deterrent effect on the irregular game method in which the player always strikes right in anticipation that the lottery of the second special symbol will be executed and a big hit will be obtained.

Next, the configuration of the variation pattern table 202d in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 91 (a). As shown in FIG. 91 (a), the variation pattern table 202d of the fourth embodiment is provided with two types of variation pattern tables. Specifically, a normal table 202d1 and a probability variation granting table 202d4 are provided.

The normal table 202d1 is referred to mainly when determining the fluctuation pattern in the normal state, as in each of the above embodiments. In the present embodiment, the normal table 202d1 is referred to when determining the fluctuation pattern even in the time saving state or a part of the probability variation state.

The table 202d4 for probabilistic change gives a specific number of times (20 times or 50 times) after the end of the big hit when the game state after the big hit becomes the probable change state due to the ball passing through the V winning switch 65e3 during the big hit. ) Is a table that is referred to throughout the lottery of special symbols. Details will be described later, but during the period when this probability variation granting table 202d4 is referred to (within 20 times or 50 times after the end of the jackpot), the lottery of the first special symbol will be a long fluctuation, so left-handed. And, while the first special symbol is fluctuating for a long time, the lottery of the second special symbol can be performed a plurality of times. That is, when a left-handed player is hit, the lottery of the second special symbol, which is advantageous, can be biased. In the probabilistic state, only the lottery of the second special symbol, which is more advantageous for right-handed hitting, can be performed, so there is no merit to execute left-handed hitting. For this reason, the benefit of the table 202d4 for giving the probability change is that the ball falls from the probability change state to the normal state where it is difficult to enter the ball into the second entry port 640 even if the ball is hit right-handed within a specific number of times. This is the case.

Next, the details of the normal table 202d1 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 91 (b). As shown in FIG. 91 (b), in the present embodiment, the same fluctuation pattern is used in both the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol as long as the values of the stop type and the variation type counter CS1 are the same. Is selected. The correspondence between the value (counter value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation pattern is the same as the correspondence with the first special symbol in the normal table 202d1 in each of the above embodiments (see FIG. 15B). Since there is, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the details of the table 202d4 for probabilistic variation will be described with reference to FIG. 92 (a). As shown in FIG. 92 (a), a long fluctuation (120 seconds) is associated with the lottery of the first special symbol regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. On the other hand, for the lottery of the second special symbol, the same correspondence as the correspondence defined in the above-mentioned normal table 202d1 is defined. Therefore, the probability change state is given after the big hit, and the table 202d4 at the time of this probability change grant falls to the normal state within the period (the period until the lottery of the special symbol is completed 20 times or 50 times), and the left When it is returned to hitting, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol becomes long. Therefore, by continuing to hit left, the lottery of the second special symbol can be performed multiple times while the first special symbol is fluctuating for a long time, so that the lottery of the special symbol is advantageous for the second special symbol. Can be overemphasized in the lottery. Therefore, if the player falls from the probabilistic state to the normal state at an early stage, the player can be in a relatively advantageous state, and the motivation of the player to play after the fall to the normal state is reduced. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the storage.

Next, the variation pattern scenario table 202f in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 92 (b). The fluctuation pattern scenario table 202f is a data table that defines fluctuation pattern scenarios for each jackpot type, as in the second embodiment and the like.

As shown in FIG. 92 (b), when the jackpot M, O (16 round jackpot) is obtained and the probability variation state is given after the jackpot (when the ball passes the V winning switch 65e3 during the jackpot), it fluctuates. As a pattern scenario, the table 202d4 for probabilistic variation is associated with the number of times of lottery of special symbols is in the range of 1 to 20 times. In addition, the normal table 202d1 is associated with the 21st and subsequent times. Therefore, if the jackpot is M, O, the ball can be passed through the V winning switch 65e3, and the ball falls from the probabilistic state to the normal state within 20 times, the first special symbol is made when hitting left. Only the fluctuation of is a long fluctuation (120 seconds). Therefore, during the long fluctuation of the first special symbol, it is possible to form a relatively advantageous state in which the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed a plurality of times. Even if the special symbol lottery falls to the normal state (within 20 times), it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player's motivation for the game from being lowered. When the player falls into the normal state after exceeding 20 times, the normal table 202d1 is referred to, so that the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol are executed in about half and half.

Further, as shown in FIG. 92 (b), when the jackpot is N, P (4 round jackpot) and the probability change state is given after the jackpot (when the ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3 during the jackpot). As a variation pattern scenario, the table 202d4 for probabilistic variation is associated with the number of lottery of special symbols in the range of 1 to 50 times. Further, the normal table 202d1 is associated with the 51st time and thereafter. Therefore, if the jackpot is N, P, the ball can be passed through the V winning switch 65e3, and the ball falls from the probabilistic state to the normal state within 50 times, the first special symbol is made when hitting left. Only the fluctuation of is a long fluctuation (120 seconds). Therefore, during the long fluctuation of the first special symbol, it is possible to form a relatively advantageous state in which the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed a plurality of times. Even if the special symbol lottery falls to the normal state (within 20 times), it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player's motivation for the game from being lowered. In addition, in the case of a probability change state after a 4-round jackpot, the number of lottery that the table 202d4 for granting the probability change is referred to is larger than that of the 16-round jackpot, so that the relief against the disadvantageous jackpot on the prize sphere is relieved. Can be planned. If the player falls into the normal state after exceeding 50 times, the normal table 202d1 is referred to, so that the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol are executed in about half and half.

Further, as shown in FIG. 92 (b), when the probability change state is not given after the big hit (when the ball does not pass through the V winning switch 65e3 during the big hit), the number of lottery of special symbols is set as the fluctuation pattern scenario. The normal table 202d1 is associated with the normal table 202d1 regardless of. Therefore, the disadvantageous state in which the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol are executed in half and half continues at least until the next big hit.

As described above, in the variation pattern scenario of the fourth embodiment, when the gaming state after the big hit becomes the probability variation state, the probability variation is given over a specific number of times (20 times or 50 times) of special symbol lottery. The table 202d4 is referenced. When the probability variation granting table 202d4 is referred to, a long variation (120 seconds) is selected when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed. Therefore, if the player falls from the probabilistic state to the normal state within a specific number of times (20 times or 50 times) and then returns from right-handed to left-handed, the second special symbol will be moved multiple times during the fluctuation of the first special symbol. The lottery can be executed. That is, from the end of the jackpot to the execution of the special symbol lottery for a specific number of times (20 times or 50 times), the lottery of the second special symbol is executed more than the lottery of the first special symbol. It becomes an easy and advantageous state. Therefore, even if the player falls from the probabilistic state to the normal state at an early stage (within a specific number of times) after the big hit, the player's motivation for the game can be maintained.

Next, with reference to FIG. 93 (a), the details of the fall lottery table 202 g will be described. As described above, the fall lottery table 202g stores a random number value (counter value) determined to be a fall in the fall lottery.

As shown in FIG. 93 (a), in the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol, two judgment values of "100, 101" correspond to the fall to the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol). A random value (counter value) is specified. When the special symbol lottery is executed in the probabilistic state of the special symbol, the value of the fall lottery counter (not shown) is compared with the random number value (counter value) corresponding to the fall specified in the fall lottery table 202g. , When the values match, it falls to the normal state. The fall lottery counter (not shown) is composed of a loop counter that is updated periodically (for example, every time the main process (see FIG. 53) is executed) in the range of "0 to 299". Of the 300 random values (counter values) that can be taken by the fall lottery counter, two random values that are determined to be a fall are specified, so the probability that a fall will be determined in one fall lottery is 1/150. Is. The random number values determined to be jackpots in the probability variation state (values of the first random number counter C1) are four "1 to 4" (see FIG. 13B), and the jackpot is determined during the probability variation state. Since the probability is 1/75, it is set so that the probability of winning a jackpot is higher than the probability of being determined to fall in the fall lottery during the probability change state. Therefore, once the player shifts to the probabilistic state, the player can be expected to win multiple jackpots before falling to the normal state, so that the player's interest in playing the game during the probabilistic state can be improved. can.

Next, the details of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 93 (b). FIG. 93B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203. As shown in FIG. 93 (b), in the RAM 203 of the fourth embodiment, the probability variation counter 203 g is deleted with respect to the configuration of the RAM 203 of the second embodiment (see FIG. 77), and the variation of the special figure 1 The difference is that the stop flag 203ai, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203aj, and the probability change flag 203ak are added.

The special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ai is a flag indicating that the jackpot of the second special symbol is started to be executed while the first special symbol is variablely displayed. When the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ai is turned on, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped. The temporary stop indicates a display mode in which the combination of the third symbols corresponding to the detachment is stopped as a temporary stop symbol, and the third symbol is displayed as if it is vibrating without being completely stopped. .. In this way, when the jackpot of the second special symbol is started, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped by turning on the special diagram 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ai, so that the first special symbol can be hit during the jackpot. It is possible to prevent a problem that the lottery result is confirmed and displayed as a big hit (a big hit by the lottery of the first special symbol is started during the big hit by the lottery of the second special symbol). The special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ai is set to on when it is determined in the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 5 (see FIG. 100) that the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit (see FIG. 100). See S1214 in FIG. 100). Further, after the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ai is turned on and the jackpot by the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the process of S712 of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 5 (see FIG. 97) is executed first. Is set to off. When the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ai is set from on to off, the temporary stop is canceled and the fluctuation display according to the remaining fluctuation time is restarted.

The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203aj is a flag indicating that the jackpot of the first special symbol is executed while the second special symbol is variablely displayed. When the second fluctuation stop flag 203aj is turned on, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is temporarily stopped, and when it is turned off, the temporary stop is canceled and the fluctuation display is restarted. The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203aj is set to on when it is determined in the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 5 (see FIG. 97) that the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit (FIG. FIG. (See S714 of 97), after the jackpot by the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, it is set to off in the process of S1212 of the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 5 (see FIG. 100) that is executed first.

In the fourth embodiment, even if one special symbol is displayed in a variable manner corresponding to a big hit, the lottery result of the other special symbol is not rewritten to the outside, and the lottery result is held as it is. Then, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display corresponding to the jackpot elapses and the jackpot is started, the corresponding flag is turned on among the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ai or special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203aj. By doing so, the other variable display is temporarily stopped during the jackpot. Then, after the big hit, the temporary stop is released and the variable display is restarted. With this configuration, if one special symbol lottery is a big hit and the other special symbol lottery is a big hit during the variable display, the other is during the big hit based on the one special symbol lottery. It is possible to prevent the jackpot based on the special symbol lottery from being started, and to start the jackpot based on the lottery of both special symbols at different timings. Therefore, it can be advantageous for the player with respect to the configuration of each of the above-described embodiments, which may be rewritten as a big hit.

The probability variation flag 203ak is provided in place of the probability variation counter 203g in each of the above embodiments. In the present embodiment, the probabilistic state continues until the lottery result corresponding to the fall is obtained by the fall lottery. That is, the number of lottery of special symbols until the probability change state ends is indefinite. Therefore, it is configured to indicate whether or not it is in the probability change state depending on whether or not the probability change flag 203ak is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 94, a specific example will be described of the correspondence between the game state and the scenario in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 94 is a diagram showing the game state after the end of the jackpot and the transition of the reference fluctuation pattern table when the ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3 during the jackpot P (4 round jackpot).

As shown in FIG. 94, when the ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3 during the jackpot P, the gaming state after the jackpot ends is set to the probability change state. In the probabilistic state, in addition to increasing the probability of winning a big hit in the special symbol lottery, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol becomes shorter (30 seconds → 3 seconds), and the winning probability of the normal symbol increases (1/240 → 1 / 1.2), the opening period of the electric accessory 640a in the case of hitting a normal symbol becomes longer (0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times). Therefore, by hitting right, it becomes easier to enter the second ball entry port 640, so that the advantageous lottery of the second special symbol can be efficiently executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 94, when the game state after the jackpot P is set to the probabilistic state (the probabilistic state is given), as a variation pattern scenario, a lottery of special symbols 1 to 50 times after the jackpot P is drawn. A variation pattern scenario (see FIG. 92B) is set in which the table 202d4 for probabilistic variation is referred to.

When the lottery result corresponding to the fall is obtained when the lottery of the special symbol is executed 30 times, the normal state is thereafter shifted to. As shown in FIG. 94, since the set fluctuation pattern scenario does not change even if the normal state is entered, the probability variation granting table 202d4 is referred to until the lottery of the special symbol is completed 50 times. That is, the long variation (120 seconds) is selected when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed over the lottery of the special symbol 20 times after the fall. As described above, in the normal state, even if the right-handed strike is performed, the lottery of the second special symbol is hardly executed, and the left-handed strike is more advantageous. Then, as described above, each time a ball enters the distribution unit 660 that can be entered when a left-handed ball is hit, the distribution member 900 provided inside the ball enters the first entry port 64 and the central first ball. 2 The ball is alternately distributed to the entry port 640c (see FIGS. 89 (a) and 89 (b)). In this case, when the table 202d4 for probabilistic variation is referred to, while the long variation is set for the first special symbol, the variation display of the second special symbol is performed a plurality of times by the simultaneous variation method (the second special symbol). Lottery) can be executed. That is, since it is possible to focus on the lottery of the two special symbols, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the probable change state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 94, when the number of lottery of the special symbol executed after the jackpot P ends exceeds 50 times, the normal table 202d1 is referred to according to the set fluctuation pattern scenario. Switch. That is, in the case of left-handed hitting, the lottery of the disadvantageous first special symbol and the lottery of the advantageous second special symbol are equally performed, which is a disadvantageous state.

In this way, if you fall into the normal state (a state where left-handedness is advantageous) 30 times after the big hit where the probability change state is given, even if you are left-handed, a lottery of special symbols is advantageous. 2 It is possible to focus on the lottery of special symbols. Therefore, if the player falls to the normal state within 50 times of the fall lottery after the probability change state is set, the game should be played in a relatively advantageous state until the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times. Therefore, even if the player falls from the probabilistic state to the normal state at an early stage, the player's motivation for the game can be maintained.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the fourth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 to 102. First, the first special symbol variation start process 5 (S211) executed in place of the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29) in the second embodiment (and the first embodiment) will be described. The first special symbol change start process 5 (S211) is based on the lottery result of the first special symbol, similarly to the first special symbol change start process (see FIG. 29) in the second embodiment (and the first embodiment). This is a process for setting a corresponding fluctuation pattern.

Of the first special symbol variation start processing 5 (see FIG. 95) in the fourth embodiment, in each of the processes S301 to S304 and S322, S301 to S304 of the first special symbol variation start process in the second embodiment, respectively. , And the same processing as each processing of S322 is executed. Further, in the first special symbol fluctuation start processing 5 (see FIG. 95) in the fourth embodiment, after the processing of S304 is completed, 1 is added to the value of the fluctuation count counter 203ab (S331), and the first special symbol is added. The first special symbol jackpot determination process 5 for determining whether or not a jackpot is achieved in the lottery is executed (S332), and the process shifts to S322.

Next, with reference to FIG. 96, the details of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 5 (S332) described above will be described. The first special symbol jackpot determination process 5 (S332) is a process executed in place of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 31) in the second embodiment (and the first embodiment).

Of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 5 (see FIG. 96) in the fourth embodiment, in each of the processes S501 to S504 and S510, the first special symbol jackpot determination process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 31), respectively. ), The same processes as those of S501 to S504 and S510 are executed.

Further, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process 5 (see FIG. 96) in the fourth embodiment, when it is determined that the probability change is in progress (the probability change flag 203ak is on) in the process of S502 (S502: Yes). The value of the fall lottery counter was compared with the random number value (counter value) corresponding to the fall specified in the fall lottery table 202g (S511), and whether the value of the fall lottery counter matched the random number value corresponding to the fall (S511). Whether the lottery result corresponds to the fall) is determined (S512).

In the process of S512, when it is determined that the lottery result corresponding to the fall is obtained (S512: Yes), the game state is dropped to the normal state by setting the probability change flag 203ak to off (S513), and the player has fallen (S512). A state command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 that the game state has been changed to the normal state) is set (S514). Next, the lottery result of whether or not it is a big hit is acquired by referring to the first random number table 202a for the low probability time (S504), and the process shifts to S516. On the other hand, in the processing of S512, if the lottery result corresponding to the fall is not obtained (S512: No), the processing is shifted to S503, and the first hit random number table 202a for high probability is referred to and a big hit. The lottery result of whether or not is acquired (S503), and the process shifts to S516.

In the process of S516, it is determined whether or not the acquired lottery result is a big hit (S515), and if it is determined to be a big hit (S515: Yes), the lottery result of the first special symbol is set as a big hit (S515). S516), a jackpot symbol is set as a symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 (S517), and this process is completed. On the other hand, in the process of S515, if it is determined that the acquired lottery result is not a big hit (S515: No), the process shifts to S510.

By executing the first special symbol jackpot determination process 5 (see FIG. 96) in this way, it is possible to execute the determination of whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot in consideration of the result of the fall lottery.

Next, with reference to FIG. 97, the details of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 5 (S212) in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 5 (S212). The first special symbol variation stop process 5 (S212) is a process executed in place of the first special symbol variation stop process (see FIG. 33) in the second embodiment (and the first embodiment), and is the first process. This is a process for stopping and displaying the changing symbol when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed.

Of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 5 (see FIG. 97) in the fourth embodiment, each of the processes S701 to S703, S706, S709, and S710 is in the second embodiment (and the first embodiment), respectively. The same processes as those of S701 to S703, S706, S709, and S710 of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 33) are executed.

Further, when the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 5 (see FIG. 97) in the fourth embodiment is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ai is on (S711), and then it is on. (S711: Yes), the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 5 (see FIG. 97) this time is the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 5 (see FIG. 97) executed first after the big hit. Yes, and it means that the variable display of the first special symbol was temporarily stopped during the jackpot. Therefore, in this case, the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ai is set to off (S712), and the special figure 1 for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 that the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ai is set to off. The fluctuation stop command is set (S713), and this process ends. By executing the processes of S712 and S713, the first symbol and the third symbol temporarily stopped in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 can be displayed in a variable manner again. .. In addition, this fluctuation display is variablely displayed by the remaining fluctuation time obtained by subtracting the time elapsed before the start of the jackpot from the set fluctuation time.

In the process of S711, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ai is off (S711: No), each process of S701 to S703 is executed. Then, in the process of S703, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit (S703: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203aj is set to on (S714), and the special figure 2 fluctuation A special figure 2 variable stop command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 that the stop flag 203aj is set to ON is set (S715). As a result, while the jackpot won in the lottery of the first special symbol is being executed, the first symbol and the first symbol showing the lottery result of the second special symbol in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and The third symbol can be temporarily stopped. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the fluctuation time of the second special symbol from ending during the jackpot, the symbol indicating the lottery of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed during the jackpot, and the player cannot concentrate on the jackpot. It can be prevented from being lost.

After the processing of S715, the start of the jackpot is set (S706), the values of the probability change flag 203ak and the time saving / medium counter 203r are reset (S716), and the processing shifts to S709.

Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the details of the second special symbol change start processing 5 (S213) in the fourth embodiment will be described. The second special symbol variation start process 5 (S213) is a process executed in place of the second special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 35) in the second embodiment (and the first embodiment), and is the second. Similar to the second special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 35) in the embodiment (and the first embodiment), this is a process for setting a variation pattern according to the lottery result of the second special symbol.

Of the second special symbol variation start processing 5 (see FIG. 98) in the fourth embodiment, in each of the processes S901 to S904 and S922, S901 to S904 of the second special symbol variation start process in the second embodiment, respectively. , And the same processing as each processing of S924 is executed. Further, in the second special symbol fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 98) in the fourth embodiment, after the processing of S904 is completed, 1 is added to the value of the fluctuation count counter 203ab (S931), and the second special symbol The second special symbol jackpot determination process 5 for determining whether or not the lottery is a jackpot is executed (S932), and the process shifts to S924.

Next, with reference to FIG. 99, the details of the second special symbol jackpot determination process 5 (S932) described above will be described. The second special symbol jackpot determination process 5 (S932) is a process executed in place of the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 36) in the second embodiment (and the first embodiment).

Of the second special symbol jackpot determination process 5 (see FIG. 99) in the fourth embodiment, in each of the processes S1001 to S1004 and S1006 to SS1010, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 36) The same processes as those of S1001 to S1004 and S1006 to S1010 are executed.

Further, in the second special symbol jackpot determination process 5 (see FIG. 99) in the fourth embodiment, when it is determined that the probability change is in progress (the probability change flag 203ak is on) in the process of S1002 (S1002: Yes), The value of the fall lottery counter was compared with the random number value (counter value) corresponding to the fall specified in the fall lottery table 202g (S1011), and whether the value of the fall lottery counter matched the random number value corresponding to the fall (S1011). Whether the lottery result corresponds to the fall) is determined (S1012).

In the process of S1012, when it is determined that the lottery result corresponding to the fall has been obtained (S1012: Yes), the game state is caused to fall to the normal state by setting the probability change flag 203ak to off (S1013), and the player has fallen (S1013). A state command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 that the game state has been changed to the normal state) is set (S1014). Next, the lottery result of whether or not it is a big hit is acquired by referring to the first random number table 202a for the low probability time (S1004), and the process shifts to S1006. On the other hand, in the processing of S1012, if the lottery result corresponding to the fall is not obtained (S1012: No), the processing is shifted to S1003, and the first hit random number table 202a for high probability is referred to and a big hit. The lottery result of whether or not is acquired (S1003), and the process shifts to S1006.

By executing the second special symbol jackpot determination process 5 (see FIG. 99) in this way, it is possible to execute the determination of whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot in consideration of the result of the fall lottery.

Next, with reference to FIG. 100, the details of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 5 (S214) in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 5 (S214). The second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 5 (S214) is a process executed in place of the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 38) in the second embodiment (and the first embodiment), and is the second. This is a process for stopping and displaying the changing symbol when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed.

Of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 5 (see FIG. 100) in the fourth embodiment, the processes S1201 to S1203, S1206, S1208, and S1209 are in the second embodiment (and the first embodiment), respectively. The same processes as those of S1201 to S1203, S1206, S1208, and S1209 of the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 38) are executed.

Further, when the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 5 (see FIG. 100) in the fourth embodiment is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203aj is on (S1211), and it is on. When it is determined (S1211: Yes), the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 5 (see FIG. 100) this time is the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 5 (see FIG. 100) that is executed first after the big hit. Yes, and it means that the variable display of the second special symbol was temporarily stopped during the jackpot. Therefore, in this case, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203aj is set to off (S1212), and the special figure 2 for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203aj is set to off. The fluctuation stop command is set (S1213), and this process ends. By executing the processes of S1212 and S1213, the first symbol and the third symbol temporarily stopped in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 can be displayed in a variable manner again. .. In addition, this fluctuation display is variablely displayed by the remaining fluctuation time obtained by subtracting the time elapsed before the start of the jackpot from the set fluctuation time.

In the process of S1211, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203aj is off (S1211: No), each process of S1201 to S1203 is executed. Then, in the process of S1203, when it is determined that the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit (S1203: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ai is set to on (S1214), and the special figure 1 fluctuation A special figure 2 variable stop command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 that the stop flag 203ai is set to ON is set (S1215). As a result, while the jackpot won in the lottery of the second special symbol is being executed, the first symbol and the first symbol showing the lottery result of the first special symbol in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and The third symbol can be temporarily stopped. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the fluctuation time of the first special symbol from ending during the jackpot, the symbol indicating the lottery of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed during the jackpot, and the player cannot concentrate on the jackpot. It can be prevented from being lost.

After the processing of S1215, the start of the jackpot is set (S1206), the values of the probability change flag 203ak and the time saving / medium counter 203r are reset (S1216), and the processing is shifted to S1208.

Next, with reference to FIG. 101, the details of the normal symbol variation processing 5 (S121) in the fourth embodiment will be described. This ordinary symbol variation process 5 (S121) is a process executed in place of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 40) in the second embodiment (and the first embodiment), and the ball enters the ordinary ball entrance 67. This is a process for determining whether or not a normal symbol is correct when it has passed, and for setting a variable display of the normal symbol.

Of the ordinary symbol variation processing 5 (see FIG. 101) in the fourth embodiment, in each of the processes S1401 to S1416 and S1418 to S1423, the ordinary symbol variation processing (and the first embodiment) in the second embodiment (and the first embodiment), respectively, The same processes as those of S1401 to S1416 and S1418 to S1423 of (see FIG. 40) are executed. Further, in the normal symbol variation processing 5 (see FIG. 101) in the fourth embodiment, in the processing of S1414 and S1415, is the current time saving state (S1414: No), or is in the time saving state and is in the jackpot? (S1414: Yes, and S1415: Yes), the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is set to 0.2 seconds × 1 time, and the process is performed. It shifts to S1432.

In the process of S1432, it is determined whether or not the time saving state is in progress (whether or not the value of the time saving and medium counter 203r is 1 or more, or whether or not the probability variation flag 203ak is on) (S1432), and during the time saving. If it is determined that there is (S1432: Yes), the process of S1419 is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S1432, when it is determined that the time is not shortened (S1432: No), 30 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (S1433), and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, in the normal state of the normal symbol, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is significantly reduced, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is significantly lengthened, and the hit of the normal symbol is achieved. The opening time of the electric accessory 640a in the case of becomes extremely short. As a result, even if an irregular game method of constantly hitting the right is executed in an attempt to execute an advantageous lottery of the second special symbol in the normal state, the ball is allowed to enter the second entrance 640. Is extremely difficult, so it is possible to increase the possibility of loss. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the deterrent effect on the irregular game method in which the player always strikes right.

Next, with reference to FIG. 102, the details of the jackpot end process 5 (S2141) executed in place of the jackpot end process 3 (see FIG. 80) in the second embodiment will be described. The jackpot end process 5 (S2141) is a process for setting the game state after the jackpot ends, similar to the jackpot end process 3 (see FIG. 80) in the second embodiment.

Of the jackpot end processing 5 (see FIG. 102), the processes S2201, S2204, and S2206 are the same as the processes S2201, S2204, and S2206 of the jackpot end process 3 (see FIG. 80) in the second embodiment, respectively. The same process is executed.

Further, in the jackpot end processing 5 (S2141) in the fourth embodiment, when it is determined in the processing of S2201 that the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S2201: Yes), the probability variation flag 203ak is set to on. (S2231) Next, based on the respective values of the probability change flag 2003ak and the time saving / medium counter 203r, a state command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the game state after the end of the jackpot is set (S2322), and processing is performed. It shifts to S2206.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, when the gaming state after the big hit becomes the probabilistic state, the probabilistic change is given over a specific number of times (20 times or 50 times) of special symbol lottery. The time table 202d4 is referenced. When the probability variation granting table 202d4 is referred to, a long variation (120 seconds) is selected when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed. Therefore, if the player falls from the probabilistic state to the normal state within a specific number of times (20 times or 50 times) and then returns from right-handed to left-handed, the second special symbol will be moved multiple times during the fluctuation of the first special symbol. The lottery can be executed. That is, from the end of the jackpot to the execution of the special symbol lottery for a specific number of times (20 times or 50 times), the lottery of the second special symbol is executed more than the lottery of the first special symbol. It becomes an easy and advantageous state. Therefore, even if the player falls from the probabilistic state to the normal state at an early stage (within a specific number of times) after the big hit, the player's motivation for the game can be maintained.

In the fourth embodiment, a variation pattern scenario in which the number of lottery of special symbols and the reference variation pattern table are associated with each other is set at the end of the jackpot, and is related to the timing of falling from the probability variation state to the normal state. However, the table 202d4 for probabilistic change is referred to only in the lottery of a specific number of special symbols after the end of the big hit, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the table 202d4 for probabilistic change may be referred to during a lottery of a special symbol a specific number of times (for example, 10 times) when the player falls from the probabilistic state to the normal state. In this case, only when the number of lottery of special symbols executed from the probabilistic state to the normal state is, for example, 20 times or less, after the fall, a specific number of special symbol lottery (for example, 10 times) is drawn. The table 202d4 for probabilistic variation may be referred to. With this configuration, when the probability change state ends with a small number of lottery (for example, within 20 times), it is possible to give an advantageous state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed. Therefore, the motivation of the player can be maintained even after the probability change state ends. Also, regardless of whether you fall in the first fall lottery or the 20th fall lottery, you can give an advantageous state the same number of times, so if you fall within a specified number of times (for example, 20 times) In addition, the degree of advantage after that can be made equal.

In the fourth embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the table 202d4 for probabilistic change only in the lottery of the special symbol a specific number of times (20 times or 50 times) after the probabilistic change state is given. , Not limited to this. For example, as in the first embodiment, when a small hit is made in the normal state, the number of special symbols is drawn for a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) after the small hit is completed, and the probability change is given. The variation pattern table may be determined with reference to the table 202d4. As a result, it is possible to form an advantageous state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed while continuing the left-handed striking, so that it is possible to reduce the trouble of changing between the right-handed striking and the left-handed striking during the normal state. Further, for example, as in the second embodiment, there is a disadvantageous state in which the variation pattern table is determined by referring to the normal table 202d1 according to the number of lottery of special symbols executed in the normal state, and for when probabilistic variation is given. The configuration may be such that the advantageous state in which the fluctuation pattern is determined is repeatedly switched with reference to the table 202d4. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game in the normal state from becoming monotonous.

In the fourth embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the table 202d4 for probabilistic change only in the lottery of the special symbol a specific number of times (20 times or 50 times) after the probabilistic change state is given. , Not limited to this. For example, this control may be applied to a normal state. Specifically, when the time saving state is set after the big hit, a specific number of special symbols (for example, 10 times) are executed after the lottery of, for example, 50 times of special symbols is executed after the time saving state ends. The variation pattern scenario table 202f may be configured so that the probability variation granting table 202d4 is referred to throughout the lottery. As a result, even if the time saving state ends without winning the jackpot, the game can be continued at least until the state in which the lottery of the second special symbol set after that is easy to be executed ends. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. Further, for example, as in the first embodiment, a small hit can be selected in the lottery of the first special symbol, and after the small hit, the lottery of the special symbol a specific number of times (for example, 10 times) is carried out. The table 202d4 for probabilistic change may be referred to. As a result, in the normal state in which the lottery of the first special symbol is easily executed, it is possible to shift to an advantageous state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed without changing the gaming state, triggered by a small hit. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game from becoming monotonous in the normal state.

In the fourth embodiment, by referring to the table 202d4 for probabilistic variation, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to be longer than the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, and the table is left-handed to be continuous. When the ball enters the distribution unit 660, the frequency at which the lottery of the first special symbol is executed is reduced, but the configuration for reducing the frequency at which the lottery of the first special symbol is executed is reduced. Is not limited to this. For example, the operation of the distribution unit 900 of the distribution unit 660 may be controlled by a motor or the like, and then the direction may be electrically switched by the motor according to the number of balls entering the distribution unit 660. Then, in the normal state, each time one ball enters, the motor is controlled so as to guide the ball in a direction different from the direction in which the ball is guided. On the other hand, within a specific number of times (for example, 20 times or 50 times) after being set to the probabilistic state, the ball is distributed (guided) to the central second entry port 640c as the arrangement of the distribution unit 900. Is set to be higher than the frequency of distribution to the first entry port 64 (for example, every time the ball is set to guide the ball to the central second entry port 640c five times in a row, the ball is assigned to the first entry port 64. The motor may be controlled so as to set the arrangement to guide the motor once. With this configuration, the same effect as that of the fourth embodiment can be obtained.

In the present embodiment, a distribution unit 660 for alternately distributing the ball to the first ball entry port 64 and the central second ball entry port 640c is provided. It may be applied to (see FIG. 2). That is, a game in which the first ball entry port 64 is provided at a position where a ball can easily enter when a left-handed hit is made, and the second ball entry port 640 is provided at a position where a ball can easily enter when a right-handed hit is made. It may be applied to the board 13. In this case, as in the first embodiment, when the normal table 202d1 is selected, only the ultra-long fluctuation (600 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, and the probability variation is given. After that, the table 202d4 for probabilistic change may be referred to within a specific number of times (for example, 20 times or 50 times), during the time saving state, and during the probable change state. With this configuration, if the player falls within a specific number of times from the probabilistic state, the lottery for the first special symbol will be executed less frequently, and the lottery for the second special symbol can be performed more frequently. It is possible to provide relief to the player who has fallen into.

In the first, second, fourth embodiment, and the modified example of the first embodiment, the normal discharge flow path 65e1 and the special discharge flow path 65e2 are provided inside the variable winning device 65, and the special discharge flow path 65e2 is provided during the jackpot. By passing the ball through the V winning switch 65e3 provided downstream of the discharge flow path 65e2, the gaming state after the big hit is set to the probabilistic state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, depending on the type of jackpot, it may be a specification in which whether or not the gaming state after the jackpot is set to the probabilistic state is predetermined. With such a configuration, the configuration of the variable winning device 65 can be simplified, so that the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

In each of the above embodiments, when a right-handed hit is made and a big hit is made in the lottery of the second special symbol, it is easy to win a big hit type in which an advantageous game state is easily set. The method that is more advantageous than this is not limited to this. For example, if a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol executed by right-handed, the configuration may be such that it is easy to win the big hit type having a large number of rounds.

In each of the above embodiments, the probability variation counter 203g and the time saving medium counter 203r are updated at a stage prior to the determination of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit, but the present invention is limited to this. is not it. For example, it may be configured to update various counters after first determining whether or not it is a big hit. As a result, it is not necessary to set a value obtained by adding 1 to the number of lottery of special symbols with respect to the counter value, so that it is possible to set parameters that are easier to understand.

In each of the above embodiments, the variable display of the first special symbol executed based on the lottery of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol executed based on the lottery of the second special symbol are simultaneously performed. The simultaneous fluctuation method that can be executed in parallel was adopted, but it is not limited to this. For example, it may be adopted as a method of executing only one variable display at a time. In this case, the variation display may be executed one by one in the order in which the start winning prize is detected, or when the variation display of the second special symbol is suspended, the variation display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed. It may be a method of executing. With such a configuration, the control of the pachinko machine 10 can be simplified.

In the first embodiment, chance mode A is always set (see table 202d3 for chance A) when a small hit is made in a special symbol lottery, and in the second and third embodiments, the chance mode A is set. , Chance mode A is always set when the number of lottery defined in the fluctuation pattern scenario is reached. In the fourth embodiment, when a probability change state is given after a big hit, a specific number of times (20 times) is always set. , Or 50 times), but the table 202d4 for probabilistic change is referred to, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to determine by lottery whether or not to refer to the chance A table 202d3 and the probability variation granting table 202d4. More specifically, for example, when a small hit is obtained in the first embodiment, or when the number of lottery is predetermined in the variable pattern scenario in the second and third embodiments (transition to chance mode A). When the conditions are met), a lottery to decide whether or not to shift to chance mode A (for example, a lottery to shift to chance mode A with a probability of 2/3) is performed, and only when the lottery is won. It may be configured to shift to the chance mode A. Further, in the fourth embodiment, when it is determined that the probability change state is given after the big hit, a lottery for whether or not to refer to the probability change granting table 202d4 is executed, and only when the lottery is won. After the big hit, the table 202d4 for probabilistic change may be referred to over a specified number of times (20 times or 50 times) of special symbol lottery. With this configuration, when the conditions for transition to the chance mode A are satisfied, the lottery result can be confirmed with interest, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. Further, when the lottery is performed, for example, the lottery probability may be changed depending on the time zone. Specifically, an RTC (Real-Time Clock) for measuring the time is electrically connected to the input / output port 205 of the main control device 110, and the connected RTC is accessed to access the main control device 110. The current time can be grasped by the MPU 201 of. Then, for example, when the time zone is in the morning (for example, 10:00 am to 12:00 am) or in the evening time zone (for example, from 5:00 pm to 7:00 pm), the lottery is performed more than other time zones. The configuration may be such that the probability is high (2/3 → 9/10). With this configuration, it is possible to improve the operation of the time zone where the lottery probability is high. Therefore, set the time zone where the number of players tends to be small in the hall as the time zone where the lottery probability is high. For example, it is possible to increase the number of players who visit the hall. Therefore, the operating rate of the hall can be improved.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted to determine the symbol effective line, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the stop is stopped. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is specific". In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence composed of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

Each of the above-described embodiments may be configured in whole or in combination thereof.

The concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown below.

<Characteristic A group> (The degree of advantage of the fluctuation pattern of the other is changed according to the result of one lottery)
The first discrimination means that executes the first determination based on the establishment of the first condition, the second determination means that executes the second determination based on the establishment of the second condition, and the first determination means by the first determination means. Based on the determination or the determination result obtained by the second determination by the second determination means, the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game advantageous to the player and the establishment of the specific condition are the first. Identification in a gaming machine provided with a gaming state setting means for setting one gaming state from a plurality of gaming states including one gaming state and a second gaming state that is more favorable to the player than the first gaming state. The display means capable of displaying information and the display means include the first dynamic display executing means and the display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information indicating the determination result of the first determination by the first determination means. Of the second dynamic display executing means for dynamically displaying the second identification information indicating the discrimination result of the second discrimination by the second discriminating means and the second identification information executed by the second dynamic display executing means. As the dynamic display period in the dynamic display, a plurality of predetermined dynamic display periods including at least a first dynamic display period and a second dynamic display period in which the first dynamic display period has a different degree of advantage for the player. Based on the period selection means for selecting one dynamic display period from the period and the game state setting means setting the first game state, the period selection means sets the second dynamic display period. When the first selection state is set by the first setting means for setting the first selection state in which the selection ratio is lower than the selection ratio of the first dynamic display period and the first setting means thereof, the first selection state is set. The ratio of the period setting means selecting the second dynamic display period based on the fact that the determination result of the first determination by the first determination means is a special determination result different from the specific determination result. The gaming machine A1 is provided with a second setting means capable of setting a second selection state higher than the first selection state.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a winning result. Some of these gaming machines are either a normal state in which the hit state is drawn with a normal probability or a probability fluctuation state in which the hit state is drawn with a higher probability than the normal state. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-000392).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the normal state is set when the winning state ends, the disadvantageous state in which the winning state is drawn with a lottery probability lower than the probability fluctuation state is at least the next winning state. Therefore, there is a problem that it is not possible to improve the interest of the player in the game when the normal state is reached.

Further, some of the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines have a plurality of starting ports, and can display variations in the symbol for each starting port in parallel at the same time. Furthermore, by making the degree of advantage in the case of a hit different for each start opening where the start winning is generated, it is expected that the player will win first with the variable display corresponding to the advantageous start opening. Some are trying to improve the taste. In this conventional gaming machine, for example, when a hit is made, a start prize is given to a start port having a low degree of advantage rather than a fluctuation time of a fluctuation display based on a start prize to a start port having a high degree of advantage. Some are configured so that the variation time of the variation display based on the basis is long, and the variation display with a high degree of advantage can be executed a larger number of times during the long variation time.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, since the fluctuation time is changed with a hit as an opportunity, if the fluctuation time is not hit, a lot of fluctuation displays having a low degree of advantage are executed, which is a disadvantageous state. Therefore, there is a problem that the game until it becomes a hit becomes monotonous.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine A1, the first identification information indicating the determination result of the first determination by the first determination means is dynamically applied to the display means configured to display the identification information by the first dynamic display execution means. The second identification information that is displayed and indicates the determination result of the second determination by the second determination means is dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display execution means. As the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the second identification information executed by the second dynamic display execution means, the first dynamic display period and the first dynamic display period have a degree of advantage for the player. One dynamic display period is selected by the period selection means from a plurality of predetermined periods including at least a different second dynamic display period. Based on the fact that the first game state is set by the game state setting means, the ratio of selecting the second dynamic display period by the period selection means is lower than the ratio of selecting the first dynamic display period. Is set by the first setting means. When the first selection state is set by the first setting means, the period is set based on the fact that the judgment result of the first judgment by the first judgment means is a special judgment result different from the specific judgment result. The second setting means sets a second selection state in which the ratio of the means selecting the second dynamic display period is higher than that of the first selection state.

As a result, at least in the first selection state, even if the first determination does not result in a specific determination result, a special determination result can be obtained, so that the degree of advantage when the second determination is executed can be different. can. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous at least in the first game state.

The gaming machine A1 includes a selection means for selecting a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the first identification information executed by the first dynamic display execution means from a plurality of periods, and the selection means is the first. The gaming machine A2 is characterized in that the ratio of selecting each of the plurality of periods is the same in the selected state and the second selected state.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the first identification information executed by the first dynamic display execution means is selected from a plurality of periods by the selection means. In the first selection state and the second selection state, each of the plurality of periods is selected at the same ratio by the selection means.

As a result, when the special lottery result is obtained by the first determination, the advantage degree when the second determination is executed is different without changing the advantage degree when the first determination is executed. Can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game in the first game state from becoming monotonous.

The gaming machine A3 in the gaming machine A1 or A2, wherein the second dynamic display period is more advantageous to the player than the first dynamic display period.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A1 or A2, the second dynamic display period is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the first dynamic display period. In the state, the game can be performed with the expectation that the first determination will result in a special determination result. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game in the first game state from becoming monotonous.

As the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means in any of the game machines A1 to A3, at least the first privilege game and the second privilege game which is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game are at least. The type selection means for selecting one type of the privileged game from a plurality of types including the above type selection means is compared with the first determination, and the second determination is performed with the specific determination result. The gaming machine A4 is characterized in that the ratio of selecting the second privileged game is increased in such a case, and the second dynamic display period is shorter than the first dynamic display period.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, the type is selected from a plurality of types including at least the first privilege game and the second privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game. One type is selected by means. Compared with the first determination, when a specific determination result is obtained in the second determination, the second privilege game is selected at a higher rate by the type selection means. The second dynamic display period is composed of a shorter period than the first dynamic display period.

As a result, when the second selection state is set because the special discrimination result is obtained by the first discrimination, the dynamic display period of the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the second discrimination is shortened. It is possible to shorten the execution interval of the determination. Therefore, it becomes easy to execute the second determination in which the second privilege game, which is advantageous when a specific determination result is obtained, is easily selected. Therefore, it is expected that the player will be in the second selection state. It is possible to play a game in a game state. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

The second setting means includes a timekeeping means for measuring the timekeeping information in any of the game machines A1 to A4, and the timekeeping information measured by the timekeeping means is within a predetermined range, and the determination result of the first determination is the special. The gaming machine A5, characterized in that the second selection state is set based on the determination result.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A1 to A4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the timekeeping information is timed by the timekeeping means. The second selection state is set by the second setting means based on the fact that the timing information measured by the timing means is within a predetermined range and the determination result of the first determination is the special determination result.

This has the effect that the degree of advantage of the first gaming state can be changed according to the timekeeping information measured by the timekeeping means.

A launching means capable of launching a game ball into a gaming area based on a player's operation in any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, a first path through which the game ball launched by the launching means can pass, and the first path thereof. A second path different from the above, a first entry means arranged on the first path and capable of entering a game ball, and a second entry means arranged on the second path and capable of entering a game ball. The first condition is satisfied based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entry means, and the second condition is that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means. The gaming machine A6, which is characterized in that it is established based on the above.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a first path in which the game ball is launched into the game area by the launching means based on the operation of the player and the game ball launched by the launching means can pass through, and a second path different from the first path. Is provided in the game area. The first condition is satisfied based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entry means, and the second condition is satisfied based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means.

As a result, when the dynamic display period having a high degree of advantage is easily selected by the period selection means, the game ball is launched into the second path, and conversely, the dynamic display period having a high degree of advantage is selected by the period selection means. In a difficult state, the game ball can be launched into the first path. Therefore, since it is possible to give the player the pleasure of changing the launch direction of the game ball, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

As the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the first identification information executed by the first dynamic display execution means in any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, a normal dynamic display period and the normal dynamic display period thereof The second dynamic display period includes a selection means for selecting one dynamic display period from a plurality of periods including at least a special dynamic display period different from the first dynamic display period. The normal dynamic display period is advantageous to the person, and when the specific discrimination result is obtained by the first discrimination, or when the specific discrimination result and the special discrimination result are different from each other, the discriminant result is different. In this case, the special dynamic display period can be selected by the selection means, and the special dynamic display period can be selected by the selection means when the specific determination result or the special determination result is obtained by the first determination. The gaming machine A7, which is characterized in that it becomes.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the first identification information executed by the first dynamic display execution means, a normal dynamic display period and a special dynamic display period different from the normal dynamic display period are used. One dynamic display period is selected by the selection means from a plurality of periods including at least. The second dynamic display period is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the first dynamic display period. When a specific discrimination result is obtained by the first discrimination, or when a deviation discrimination result different from the specific discrimination result and the special discrimination result is obtained, the normal dynamic display period can be selected by the selection means. .. On the other hand, when a specific determination result or a special determination result is obtained by the first determination, the special dynamic display period can be selected by the selection means.

As a result, when the special dynamic display period is selected, the special dynamic display period is selected because the privilege game is executed or the second dynamic display period that is advantageous by the period selection means is easily selected. There is an effect that the player can be pleased when the player recognizes that.

As the types of the privilege games executed by the privilege game execution means in the gaming machine A7, a plurality of types including at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game. As the type of the second selection state set by the type selection means for selecting the type of the privilege game and the second setting means, the second determination is performed over the first number of times of the second determination. At least a small selection state in which the selection state is set and a multi-selection state in which the second selection state is set over the second determination of the second number of times more than the first number of times can be selected. Based on the state type selection means and the selection means selecting the dynamic display period, the effect execution means for executing a predetermined effect within the dynamic display period and the special effect execution means executed by the effect execution means. As the predetermined effect corresponding to the dynamic display period, the normal effect and an effect selection means capable of selecting at least a special effect different from the normal effect are provided, and the special effect is specified by the first determination. The first privilege game is determined by the type selection means, and the special determination result is obtained by the first determination, and the multi-selection state is selected by the state type selection means. The gaming machine A8, characterized in that it is selected only in either case of being played.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, one is selected from a plurality of types including at least the first privilege game and the second privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game. The type of award game is selected by the type selection means. As the types of the second selection state set by the second setting means, a small selection state in which the second selection state is set over the second determination of the first number of times and a second state in which the second selection state is set more than the first number of times. The multi-selection state in which the second selection state is set over the second determination of the number of times is configured to be selectable by at least the state type selection means. Based on the fact that the dynamic display period is selected by the period selection means, a predetermined effect is executed by the effect execution means within the dynamic display period, and the special dynamic display period executed by the effect execution means is supported. As a predetermined effect to be performed, a normal effect and a special effect different from the normal effect can be selected at least by the effect selection means. The second privilege game is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game. A specific determination result is obtained by the first determination, and a special determination result is obtained by the first determination when the first privilege game is determined by the type selection means, and a multi-selection state is selected by the state type selection means. The special effect is selected by the effect selection means only in either case of the above.

As a result, in the dynamic display of the first identification information for which the special dynamic display period is set, the first privilege game is executed when the player recognizes that the special effect has been executed, or multiple selections are made. There is an effect that the player can be made to recognize that the state is set.

In the gaming machine A8, the second number of times is larger than the number of times of the first determination executed when the game is played using the game ball that the player can acquire in the first privilege game. The gaming machine A9 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A8, the second number of times is executed when the player plays a game using a gaming ball that can be acquired by the player in the first privilege game. Since the number of determinations is larger than the number of determinations, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a novel playability that makes it expected that the first identification information indicating a specific determination result is not displayed when the special effect is executed.

<Characteristic B group> (Chance zone after falling with 1 type and 2 types)
Discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of discrimination conditions, display means that displays identification information indicating the discrimination result of discrimination by the discrimination means, and dynamic display that executes dynamic display of the identification information in the display means. Execution means and its dynamic display As a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the execution means, a period determination means for determining one of the plurality of predetermined periods. A ball-entry means on which a game ball can enter, a first position where the game ball can enter the ball-entry means, and a game ball from the first position to the ball-entry means. A variable means that can be changed to a second position where it is difficult to enter a ball and a variable control means that changes the variable means in a predetermined variable pattern based on the specific determination result obtained by the determination by the determination means. A privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the game ball entering the ball entry means entering a specific area provided inside the ball entry means and the privilege game execution means thereof. As a game state after the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means is completed, from a plurality of game states including a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. Counting means for counting the number of determinations executed by the determination means after the first game state is set by the game state setting means for setting the game state of 1 and the game state setting means, and the counting means. As the dynamic display period determined by the period determination means, the determination of an advantageous period that is more advantageous to the player than the other dynamic display periods is determined based on the number of times that the number of times has reached a predetermined specific number. The gaming machine B1 comprising: an advantageous state setting means for setting an advantageous state in which the ratio is high.

Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the lottery result executed based on the starting prize is a hit, a winning state advantageous to the player is given (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-000392). Gazette). In such a conventional gaming machine, it is possible to set either a normal state in which a starting prize is unlikely to occur or a time-saving state in which a starting prize is more likely to occur than in the normal state, as a game state after hitting. There is. In addition, there are some that have a ball entry port in which the entry rate of the game ball is high during the time saving state. Inside the ball entry port, a specific area is provided that triggers a hit state when the game ball can enter the ball. That is, during the time saving state, a winning state is given depending on whether the ball is won by a lottery based on the starting prize or when the ball enters a specific area, which is an advantageous state as compared with the normal state. It becomes.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, it is general that only the above-mentioned two types of gaming states (normal state and time saving state) are provided (so-called probabilistic state is not provided), which is an advantageous time saving state. There was a problem that the most unfavorable normal state was set when the game was completed. That is, when the most advantageous state ends, there is a risk that the motivation of the player for the game will be significantly reduced.

On the other hand, in the game machine B1, the open position at which the game ball can enter the ball entry means and the second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter the ball entry means than the first position are variable. The means are variably configured. The variable means is varied by the variable control means in a predetermined variable pattern based on the fact that the discrimination by the discriminant means results in a specific discriminant result. Based on the fact that the game ball that has entered the ball entry means enters a specific area provided inside the ball entry means, the privilege game execution means executes the privilege game that is advantageous to the player. As a game state after the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means is completed, one from a plurality of game states including a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. The game state of is set by the game state setting means. The number of determinations executed by the determination means after the first game state is set by the game state setting means is counted by the counting means, and the number of times counted by the counting means becomes a predetermined specific number. Based on this, as the dynamic display period determined by the period determination means, an advantageous state in which the determination ratio of the advantageous period advantageous to the player is higher than that of other dynamic display periods is set by the advantageous state setting means.

As a result, when the first game state, which has a lower degree of advantage than the second game state, is set after the privilege game is completed, the determination of a specific number of times is executed with the aim of shifting to the advantageous state. At least the game can be continued until. Therefore, when the first gaming state is set, there is an effect that the motivation of the player for the game can be improved.

Based on the setting of the first gaming state in the gaming machine B1, the first disadvantage state setting means for setting the disadvantageous state in which the determination ratio of the advantageous period is lower than the advantageous state and the advantageous state setting means are used. Based on the fact that the first number of discriminations by the discriminating means are executed after the advantageous state is set, the disadvantageous state is set by the second disadvantageous state setting means for setting the disadvantageous state and the second disadvantageous state setting means. The gaming machine B2 is characterized by comprising a second advantageous state setting means for setting the advantageous state based on the second determination of the number of times being executed by the determining means after the setting.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the fact that the first gaming state is set, the disadvantageous state in which the determination ratio of the advantageous period is lower than the advantageous state is set by the first disadvantageous state setting means. The disadvantageous state is set by the second disadvantageous state setting means based on the fact that the determination by the first number of times of the determination means is executed after the advantageous state is set by the advantageous state setting means. The advantageous state is set by the second advantageous state setting means based on the fact that the determination means executes the determination of the second number of times after the disadvantageous state is set by the second disadvantageous state setting means.

As a result, even if the advantageous state set by the advantageous state setting means ends, the game can be continued aiming at the advantageous state set by the second advantageous state setting means thereafter. Therefore, there is an effect that the motivation for the superiority of the player can be improved.

In the gaming machine B2, the second disadvantageous state setting means is executed by the discriminating means for the first number of times after the advantageous state is set by the advantageous state setting means or the second advantageous state setting means. The gaming machine B3, characterized in that the disadvantageous state is set based on the above.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B2, the determination by the first number of times after the advantageous state is set by the advantageous state setting means or the second advantageous state setting means is executed. Since the disadvantageous state is set by the second disadvantageous state setting means based on the above, the gaming state over the determination of the first number of times and the disadvantageous state over the determination of the second number of times can be alternately repeated. .. Therefore, even if the advantageous state of 1 is completed, the player can be made to think that the game is to be continued until the next advantageous state, so that the motivation of the player for the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the advantageous period is shorter than the disadvantage period in which the ratio determined by the period determining means is high when the number of times counted by the counting means is less than a predetermined specific number. A gaming machine B4 characterized by a length period.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines B1 to B3, when the number of times counted by the counting means is less than a predetermined number of times, the ratio determined by the period determining means is higher than the disadvantageous period. However, since the advantageous period is configured to have a short length, the discrimination by the discriminating means can be executed at short intervals during the advantageous period. Therefore, there is an effect that the game efficiency can be improved when the advantageous state is set.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the privilege game executing means can execute the privilege game based on the fact that the discrimination by the discrimination means results in a special discrimination result different from the specific discrimination result. A gaming machine B5 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the award game is performed by the award game execution means based on the fact that the discrimination by the discriminating means results in a special discriminating result different from the specific discriminating result. Is executed, there is an effect that the game can be played with the expectation that a special discrimination result will be obtained.

A launching means capable of launching a game ball based on a player's operation in the gaming machine B5, a first path through which the game ball launched by the launching means can pass, a second path different from the first path, and the above. The discriminating means includes a first ball-entry means provided on the first path and capable of entering a game ball and a second ball-entry means provided on the second path and capable of entering a game ball. The first determination means for executing the first determination based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry means and the second determination based on the entry of the game ball into the second entry means. The gaming machine B6, characterized in that it includes a second discriminating means for executing the above.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game ball is launched by the launching means based on the operation of the player. A first path through which the game ball launched by the launching means can pass and a second path different from the first path are provided. The first path is provided with a first ball entry means on which a game ball can enter, and the second path is provided with a second ball entry means on which a game ball can enter. In the determination means, the first determination is executed by the first determination means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first entry means, and the game ball has entered the second entry means. The second determination is executed by the second determination means.

As a result, the player can be made to select whether to launch the game ball on the first path or the game ball on the second path, so that it is possible to provide the playability that suits the taste of each player. can.

In the gaming machine B6, the period determining means determines the advantageous period as the dynamic display period when the determination by the second determining means is executed in the advantageous state, and the advantageous state is set. When the determination by the second determination means is executed in the state where the determination is not performed, the ratio of determining the disadvantageous display period which is disadvantageous is higher than when the determination by the first determination means is executed. The gaming machine B7 is characterized in that the first determination has a lower probability of producing the specific determination result than the second determination.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the advantageous state, when the determination by the second determination means is executed, the ratio of the advantageous period being determined by the period determination means increases. On the other hand, when the advantageous state is not set, when the determination by the second determination means is executed, the disadvantageous display period, which is more disadvantageous than the case where the determination by the first determination means is executed, is the period determination means. The percentage determined by is higher. The first determination is configured to have a lower probability of producing a specific determination result than the second determination.

Thereby, in the advantageous state, the game ball can be launched aiming at the second path, and in the state other than the advantageous state, the game ball can be launched aiming at the first path. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be given the pleasure of changing the launch direction of the game ball according to the state.

The gaming machine B8 is characterized in that the probability that the first determination results in the special determination result is the same as the probability that the second determination results in the special determination result.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B7, the probability that the first discrimination results in the special discrimination result is the same as the probability that the second discrimination results in the special discrimination result. Therefore, when the gaming ball is launched aiming at the first path, there is an effect that the gaming can be performed with the expectation that a special discrimination result will be obtained.

<Characteristic C group> (Simultaneous fluctuation, the fluctuation time is variable according to the holding of the other special figure under specific conditions)
The first entry means on which the game ball can enter, the second entry means different from the first entry means, and the first entry based on the entry of the game ball into the first entry means. The ball entry information acquisition means for acquiring ball information and acquiring the second ball entry information based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means, and the ball entry information acquisition means acquired before the ball entry information acquisition means. A first discriminating means that executes a first determination based on the first ball entry information and a second determination that executes a second determination based on the second ball entry information acquired before the ball entry information acquisition means. The display means capable of displaying the second identification means, the first identification information indicating the determination result of the first determination, and the second identification information indicating the determination result of the second determination, and the display means for the first identification. The first dynamic display executing means for executing the dynamic display of information, the second dynamic display executing means for executing the dynamic display of the second identification information by the display means, and the second dynamic display executing means thereof. While the dynamic display of the second identification information is being executed, the second entry acquired by the entry information acquisition means based on the fact that the game ball newly enters the second entry means. The ball information is stored in the second discriminating information storage means that can at least store the ball information until the second discriminating by the second discriminating means is executed, and the first identification information executed by the first dynamic display executing means. As the dynamic display period in the dynamic display, one of a plurality of predetermined periods is dynamically based on at least the number of stored second ball entry information stored in the second ball entry information storage means. A game machine C1 comprising a period selection means for selecting a display period.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when the lottery result executed based on the winning (starting winning) to the starting port provided on the game board is a winning, a winning state advantageous to the player is given. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-000392). In this conventional gaming machine, a plurality of starting ports are provided, and the starting port in which a ball can easily enter is variable depending on the gaming state. In addition, a gaming machine having a plurality of starting ports is subject to a penalty such that the fluctuation time becomes extremely longer than usual when an irregular game is performed aiming at the starting opening where the ball is difficult to enter. There are also things that can be done.

However, there is a problem that the conventional gaming machine that hangs has insufficient deterrent effect on irregular gaming methods.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine C1, the first ball entry information is acquired by the ball entry information acquisition means based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means, while the second ball entry means The second ball entry information is acquired based on the ball entry of the game ball. Based on the first ball entry information acquired by the ball entry information acquisition means, the first discrimination is executed by the first discrimination means by the first discrimination means, and the second discrimination means is executed based on the second ball entry information. The second determination is performed. The first identification information indicating the determination result of the first determination and the second identification information indicating the determination result of the second determination are displayed on the display means. In the display means, the dynamic display of the first identification information is executed by the first dynamic display execution means, and the dynamic display of the second identification information is executed by the second dynamic display execution means. While the second dynamic display of the identification information is being executed by the second dynamic low display executing means, it is acquired by the ball entry information acquisition means based on the fact that the game ball newly enters the second ball entry means. The second ball entry information is stored at least until the second ball entry information storage means executes the second determination by the second determination means. The dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the first identification information executed by the first dynamic display execution means is based on at least the number of stored second ball entry information stored in the second ball entry information storage means. , One dynamic display period is selected from a plurality of predetermined periods by the period selection means.

As a result, the frequency of the first discrimination by the first discrimination means changes according to the number of stored second ball entry information, so that only the dynamic display of the first identification information and the dynamic display of the second identification information Instead, the game can be played by paying attention to the number of stored second ball entry information. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine C1, the first dynamic display executing means, when the dynamic display of the second identification information is executed, causes the dynamic display of the second identification information to be executed while the first identification information is executed. The gaming machine C2, which is capable of executing the dynamic display of.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1, when the dynamic display of the second identification information is executed, the first dynamic while the dynamic display of the second identification information is executed. Since the display executing means is configured to execute the dynamic display of the first identification information, it is possible to more efficiently execute the first discrimination by the first discrimination means and the second discrimination by the second discrimination means. effective.

In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the period selection means is described in the second ball entry information storage means as compared with the case where at least one second ball entry information is stored in the second ball entry information storage means. The gaming machine C3 is characterized in that, when the second ball entry information is not stored, the ratio of selecting an advantageous dynamic display period that is advantageous to the player is high.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1 or C2, the second ball entry information storage is more than the case where at least one second ball entry information is stored in the second ball entry information storage means. When the second ball entry information is not stored in the means, the ratio of selecting the advantageous dynamic display period advantageous to the player by the period selection means is high, so that the second ball entry information storage means is used for the second ball entry information storage means. There is an effect that the game can be performed so that the entry information of the ball is not stored.

The privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game advantageous to the player and the privilege game based on the result of the first determination or the specific determination result predetermined in the second determination in the gaming machine C3. As the type of the privilege game executed by the execution means, one of the above-mentioned privilege games from a plurality of types including the first privilege game and the second privilege game which is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game. The selection means is provided with a selection means capable of selecting a type, and the selection means is described when a specific determination result is obtained in the second determination rather than when the specific determination result is obtained in the first determination. The gaming machine C4 characterized in that the ratio of selecting the second privileged gaming is high.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the result of a specific determination predetermined in the first determination or the second determination, the privilege game execution means executes the privilege game advantageous to the player. As the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, one is selected from a plurality of types including the first privilege game and the second privilege game which is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game. The type of award game is selected. The rate at which the second privilege game is selected by the selection means is higher when the specific determination result is obtained in the second determination than when the specific determination result is obtained in the first determination.

As a result, the second discriminating means can be used to play the game with the expectation that a specific discriminating result will be obtained, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

As the gaming state after the privilege game is completed in the gaming machine C4, the first gaming state in which the first determination is more likely to be executed than the second determination and the second determination rather than the first gaming state. The period setting means is provided with a game state setting means capable of at least setting a second game state in which is easy to be executed. In the first game state, the second ball entry information is stored in the second ball entry information storage means. The gaming machine C5, characterized in that the setting ratio of the advantageous dynamic display period becomes high when it is not stored.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the game state after the privilege game is completed, the first game state in which the first determination is more likely to be executed than the second determination and the second determination in which the second determination is more likely to be executed than the first game state. The game state is configured to be configurable at least by the game state setting means. In the first game state, when the second ball entry information is not stored in the second ball entry information storage means, the ratio of setting the advantageous dynamic display period by the period setting means increases.

As a result, an irregular game method is executed in an attempt to execute the second determination in the first gaming state in which the first determination is easily executed, and the second entry information is stored in the second entry information storage means. If this is done, it becomes a disadvantageous state in which it is difficult to set the advantageous dynamic display period, so that there is an effect that it is possible to suppress an irregular game method.

As the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the second identification information executed by the second dynamic display execution means in the gaming machine C5, one dynamic display period is selected from a plurality of predetermined periods. The second period selection means is provided with a second period selection means, and the second period selection means selects a disadvantageous display period that is disadvantageous to the player when the first game state is set rather than the second game state. The gaming machine C6, which is characterized in that the value is high.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the second identification information executed by the second dynamic display execution means, one dynamic display period is selected from a plurality of periods predetermined by the second period selection means. Be selected. When the first gaming state is set, the ratio of selecting the disadvantageous display period disadvantageous to the player by the second period selecting means is higher than that of the second gaming state.

This has the effect of suppressing an irregular gaming method that attempts to execute the second determination in the first gaming state.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, a launching means capable of launching the gaming ball into the gaming area based on the operation of the player and the first ball entering means are provided, and the first path through which the gaming ball can pass and the first path. The gaming machine C7 is characterized in that it is provided with two ball-entry means and includes a second path different from the first path.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game ball is launched into the game area by the launching means based on the operation of the player. A first path through which the game ball can pass is provided with a first ball entry means, and a second path different from the first path is provided in the game area with a second ball entry means.

As a result, the firing direction can be changed according to the type of ball-entry means that the player wants to enter, so that there is an effect that the game can be prevented from becoming monotonous.

<Characteristic D group> (It makes it difficult to execute the lottery of one of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2)
The first ball is based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entry means capable of entering the game ball, the second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, and the first ball entry means. The first discrimination means for executing the discrimination, the second discrimination means for executing the second discrimination based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means, and the first discrimination by the first discrimination means. Alternatively, the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game advantageous to the player and the privilege executed by the privilege game execution means based on the specific determination result obtained by the second determination by the second determination means. As the gaming state after the game is completed, the first gaming state in which the probability of the specific determination result is set to the first probability and the second gaming state in which the probability of the specific determination result is set to a second probability higher than the first probability are set. Based on the establishment of the determination condition when the second game state is set by the game state setting means capable of setting one game state from a plurality of game states including at least and the game state setting means and the game state setting means. A game state changing means for changing the gaming state from the second gaming state to the first gaming state based on the determination result obtained by the third discriminating means for executing the discrimination and the third discriminating means. The second determination determines the frequency with which the first determination means is executed by the first determination means when the game state changing means changes to the first gaming state while a specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine D1 is provided with a frequency suppressing means for suppressing the frequency at which the second determination is executed by the means.

Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a winning is achieved in a lottery executed based on a starting ball, the winning state is advantageous to the player. In some of such conventional gaming machines, after a hit, a probability variation state in which the winning lottery probability is higher than usual is set. Further, there is known a gaming machine that executes a lottery (falling lottery) as to whether or not to shift from a probabilistic state to a normal state together with a lottery as to whether or not to win. In such a gaming machine, it is difficult for the player to predict how long the probabilistic state will continue, so that the player can play the game hoping that the probabilistic state will continue for a longer period of time.

However, the conventional gaming machine has a problem that if the probabilistic state is terminated early (with a small number of lottery), the motivation of the player for the game may be lowered.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine D1, the first determination is executed by the first determination means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first entry means, and the game ball enters the second entry means. The second determination is executed by the second determination means based on the sphere. Based on the result of a specific determination in the first determination by the first determination means or the second determination by the second determination means, the privilege game execution means executes the privilege game advantageous to the player. As a game state after the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means is completed, a first game state in which the probability of a specific determination result is set as the first probability and a second probability higher than the first probability thereof. One of the plurality of gaming states including at least the second gaming state set in is configured to be settable by the gaming state setting means. Based on the fact that when the second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, the discrimination is executed by the third discriminating means based on the establishment of the discriminating condition, and the predetermined discriminating result is obtained by the third discriminating means. Then, the game state is changed from the second game state to the first game state by the game state changing means. When the game state changing means changes to the first gaming state while the specific condition is satisfied, the frequency at which the first determination is executed by the first determining means is determined by the frequency suppressing means. Means suppresses the frequency with which the second determination is performed.

As a result, the frequency with which the first determination is executed can be changed according to whether or not the specific condition is satisfied when the state is changed to the first gaming state. It has the effect of being able to improve.

In the gaming machine D1, the first discriminating means executes the first discriminating when a predetermined first discriminating condition is satisfied after the game ball enters the first ball entering means. The second discriminating means executes the first discriminant when a predetermined second discriminating condition is satisfied after the game ball enters the second ball entering means, and the frequency suppressing means is a frequency suppressing means. The gaming machine D2 is characterized in that the predetermined first determination condition is controlled so as to be less likely to be satisfied than the predetermined second determination condition.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, after the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the first determination is executed by the first determination means when a predetermined first determination condition is satisfied. After the game ball enters the second ball entry means, the second determination is executed by the second determination means when a predetermined second determination condition is satisfied. The predetermined first determination condition is controlled by the frequency suppressing means so as to be less likely to be satisfied than the predetermined second determination condition.

As a result, the frequency with which the first determination is executed can be changed by changing the ease with which the predetermined first determination condition is satisfied, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine D1 or D2, when the specific determination result is obtained by the second determination rather than the first determination, the game after the executed privilege game is completed. The gaming machine D3, characterized in that the ratio of setting the second gaming state as the state is high.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D1 or D2, when a specific determination result is obtained by the second determination rather than the first determination, after the executed privilege game is completed. Since the rate at which the second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means as the gaming state is increased, the frequency at which the first determination is executed is suppressed by the frequency suppressing means, so that the player It will be advantageous for. Therefore, there is an effect that the motivation of the player for the game can be improved when the state is changed to the first game state when the specific condition is satisfied.

Dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the determination result of the first determination and the second determination with respect to the display means capable of displaying the identification information on any of the gaming machines D1 to D3 and the display means thereof. The gaming machine D4 is characterized by comprising a dynamic display executing means capable of dynamically displaying the second identification information indicating the determination result of the above.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the identification information is configured to be displayable on the display means. The dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the determination result of the first determination and the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the determination result of the second determination to the display means are performed by the dynamic display execution means, respectively. Will be executed.

As a result, even if the dynamic display of one of the identification information is being executed, the dynamic display of the other identification information can be executed, so that the dynamic display of the identification information can be performed more efficiently. There is an effect.

In the gaming machine D4, the frequency suppressing means increases the start interval from the start of the dynamic display of the first identification information of 1 to the start of the next dynamic display of the first identification information. The gaming machine D5, which is characterized in that it is controlled by.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the frequency suppressing means is controlled so that the start interval from the start of the dynamic display of the first identification information of 1 to the start of the dynamic display of the first identification information is long.

As a result, the frequency with which the first identification information is dynamically displayed can be reduced, which has the effect of improving the player's interest in the game.

A period for setting the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the first identification information or the second identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means in the gaming machine D4 or D5 from a plurality of predetermined periods. The plurality of predetermined periods provided with the setting means include at least a first dynamic display period and a second dynamic display period longer than the first dynamic display period, and the frequency thereof. In the suppressing means, the ratio of the second dynamic display period being set by the period setting means as the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the first identification information is higher than that of the first dynamic display period, and As the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the second identification information, a state in which the rate at which the first dynamic display period is selected by the period setting means is set higher than that of the second dynamic display period is set. A gaming machine D6 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D4 or D5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the first identification information or the second identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means is set from a plurality of periods predetermined by the period setting means. The plurality of predetermined periods include at least a first dynamic display period and a second dynamic display period longer than the first dynamic display period. The ratio of the second dynamic display period set by the period selection means as the dynamic display period of the first identification information is higher than that of the first dynamic display period, and the dynamic display in the dynamic display of the second identification information. As the period, the frequency suppressing means sets a state in which the ratio of the first dynamic display period being selected by the period selection means is higher than that of the second dynamic display period.

As a result, the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the second identification information tends to be shorter than the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the first identification information, so that the dynamic display of the second identification information can be performed. It has the effect of increasing the frequency of execution.

A launching means capable of launching a game ball into a gaming area based on a player's operation in any of the gaming machines D1 to D6, a first path through which the game ball launched by the launching means can pass, and the first path thereof. A second path different from the above and a game ball passing through the second path are provided at a position where the ball can enter, and the second determination is executed by the second determination means based on the entry of the game ball. The first ball-entry means and the second ball-entry means are arranged at positions where a game ball that has passed through the first path can enter. In the first gaming state, it is more difficult for a gaming ball that has passed through the second path to enter the third ball entry means as compared with the second gaming state, and the gaming state setting means is the first. When the specific determination result is obtained by the second determination, the ratio of setting the second gaming state as the gaming state after the executed privileged game is completed is higher than the determination of. A game machine D7 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a first path in which the game ball is launched into the game area by the launching means based on the operation of the player and the game ball launched by the launching means can pass through, and a second path different from the first path. Is provided. At a position where the game ball that has passed through the second path can enter, a third ball entry means is provided in which the second determination is executed by the second determination means based on the entry of the game ball. .. The first ball entry means and the second ball entry means are arranged at positions where the game ball that has passed through the first path can enter. The first game state is configured so that the game ball that has passed through the second path is less likely to enter the third ball entry means as compared with the second game state. When a specific determination result is obtained by the second determination rather than the first determination, the ratio at which the second game state is set by the game state setting means as the game state after the executed privilege game is completed is It is configured to be high.

As a result, when the second game state is set, it becomes easier to execute an advantageous second determination by firing the game ball to the second path, so that the game state is set after the privilege game is completed. There is an effect that the game can be performed with the expectation that the second game state is set.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D7, a passing means through which the game ball can pass, a first guiding state in which the gaming ball passing through the passing means is guided to the first ball entering means, and a first guiding state in which the game ball is guided to the second entering means. Based on the guidance means that can be changed to the second guidance state and the guidance means that guides the game ball to the first ball entry means, the guidance means is changed to the second guidance state, and the game ball is moved to the second guidance state. The gaming machine D8 is provided with a variable means for changing the guiding means to the first guiding state based on being guided by the second ball entering means.

According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a passing means through which the game ball can pass is provided. The guiding means is variably configured into a first guiding state in which the game ball that has passed through the passing means is guided to the first entering means and a second guiding state in which the game ball is guided to the second entering means. Based on the fact that the game ball is guided to the first ball entry means by the guiding means, the guiding means is changed to the second guiding state by the variable means. On the other hand, the guiding means is changed to the first guiding state by the variable means based on the fact that the game ball is guided to the second entering means.

As a result, each time the game ball passes through the passing means, the game ball can be alternately entered into the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means, so that the first determination is executed by the frequency suppressing means. When the frequency of the first determination is not suppressed, there is an effect that the frequency of the first determination and the frequency of the second determination can be easily equalized.

The specific condition includes the counting means for counting the total of the number of times the first determination is executed and the number of times the second determination is executed in any of the gaming machines D1 to D8, and the specific condition is the second game. The gaming machine D9 is characterized in that it is established when the counting value counted by the counting means after the state is set is in the range of a specific counting value or less.

According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the total of the number of times the first determination is executed and the number of times the second determination is executed is counted by the counting means. It is configured so that a specific condition is satisfied when the count value counted by the counting means after the second game state is set is in the range of the specific count value or less.

As a result, the game can be performed by paying attention to the number of times of the first determination and the second determination executed until the state is changed to the first game state, so that the player's interest in the game is improved. It has the effect of being able to make it.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B8, C1 to C7, and D1 to D9, the gaming machine Z1 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of a slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information is provided for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. A gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

A gaming machine Z2, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B8, C1 to C7, and D1 to D9. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

A gaming machine Z3 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B8, C1 to C7, and D1 to D9, the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
64 1st ball entry port (1st ball entry means)
81 Third symbol display device (display means)
203e 2nd special symbol reserved ball count counter (2nd ball entry information storage means)
640 Second ball entry port (second ball entry means)
S503, S504 1st determination means S608 Period selection means S609 1st dynamic display execution means S706, S1206 Bonus game execution means, selection means S1003, S1004 2nd determination means S1109 2nd dynamic display execution means S2112 Game state setting means

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a winning result. Among such gaming machines, for example, there are those that aim to improve the interest of the player in the game by providing a plurality of gaming states having different degrees of advantage.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2006-000392

However, there was a need for further improvement in interest.

The present invention has been made to solve the above illustrated problem like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine which can improve the interest in the game of the player.

Gaming machine of claim 1, wherein in order to achieve the object, a first ball entrance means playing ball capable ball entrance, a different second ball entrance means and its first ball entrance means, before Symbol first a first determination means for game balls to enter the sphere means executes a first determination based on the fact that the ball entrance, before Symbol game balls to the second input sphere means second based upon the ball entrance It is advantageous for the player based on the second determination means for executing the determination and the determination result of the first determination or the determination result of the second determination as a predetermined first determination result. The first control and the second determination are less likely to be executed than the first control and the first control based on the fact that the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game is satisfied and a predetermined execution condition is satisfied. A control executing means for executing one of a plurality of controls including at least two controls, and a first gaming state, which is a gaming state in which the first control is executed based on the satisfaction of a predetermined setting condition. The game state setting means to be set, the third discriminating means that executes the discriminating based on the fact that a predetermined discriminating condition is satisfied at least in the first gaming state, and the discriminating the third discriminating means in the first gaming state. Based on the result being a predetermined second determination result, the second control is executed in a gaming state in which the privilege game is less likely to be executed than in the first gaming state. The gaming machine includes a gaming state changing means for changing to the second gaming state, which is a gaming state, and the gaming machine is provided with the first gaming by the gaming state changing means under a situation in which a predetermined specific condition is satisfied. When the state is changed to the second gaming state, even if the gaming ball enters the first ball-entry means after the change and while the specific condition is satisfied, the first ball is entered. The determination result of the second determination is displayed without appearing, and the first gaming state is displayed by the gaming state changing means under the situation where the specific condition is not satisfied. when it is changed to the second game state from Ru configuration der the judgment result of the first determination by the game ball into the to the changed first ball entrance means is ball entrance can be revealing.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, the game is performed on a first ball-entry means capable of entering a game ball, a second ball-entry means different from the first ball-entry means, and the first ball-entry means. A first determination means that executes the first determination based on the ball entering the ball, and a second determination that executes the second determination based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means. A privilege to execute a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the means and the determination result of the first determination or the determination result of the second determination as a predetermined first determination result. It includes at least a first control and a second control that makes it more difficult to execute the second determination than the first control, based on the fact that the game execution means is provided and a predetermined execution condition is satisfied. A control executing means for executing one of a plurality of controls, and a gaming state setting means for setting a first gaming state, which is a gaming state in which the first control is executed based on the satisfaction of a predetermined setting condition. At least in the first gaming state, a third discriminating means that executes discriminating based on the establishment of a predetermined discriminating condition, and a discriminating result of the third discriminating means in the first gaming state are predetermined. Based on the determination result of 2, the second game state is a game state in which the privilege game is less likely to be executed than the first game state and the second control is executed. The gaming machine includes a gaming state changing means for changing to a gaming state, and the gaming machine is changed from the first gaming state to the second gaming state by the gaming state changing means under a situation in which a predetermined specific condition is satisfied. Even if the game ball enters the first ball-entry means after the change and while the specific condition is satisfied, the determination result of the first determination is present. It is a configuration in which the determination result of the second determination is displayed without being issued, and in a situation where the specific condition is not satisfied, the gaming state changing means is used to change from the first gaming state to the second gaming state. If it is changed, Ru configuration der the judgment result of the first determination by the game ball to the first ball entrance means after such change has ball entrance can be revealing.

This has the effect of improving the interest of the player in the game.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is an exploded perspective view of the variable winning device. (A) is a cross-sectional view of a variable winning device having a La-La cross section, (b) is a cross-sectional view of Lb-Lb, and (c) is a top view of the variable winning device. (A) to (b) are the rear view of a part of the variable winning apparatus. It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the operation of the flow path solenoid and the operation of an opening / closing plate in one round of a jackpot. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the reach effect, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the special super reach effect, which is one aspect of the reach effect. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display content at the time of entering the chance mode A, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content at the end of the chance mode A. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the structure of the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a first hit random number counter C1 in the first embodiment and a jackpot determination value in a special symbol. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship, and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter C2 in the first embodiment and the jackpot type in the special symbol. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second hit random number counter C4 in the first embodiment and the hit in the ordinary symbol, and (b) is a small hit type counter in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between C5 and the small hit type in the special symbol. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal table in the first embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the table for consecutive villas / chance B in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the table for chance A in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of the RAM of the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the transition method of the game state in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the ROM configuration of the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the RAM configuration of the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. be. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of a display control device. (A) to (c) are explanatory views for explaining the image at the time of power-on. (A) is an explanatory view for explaining the back surface A, and (b) is an explanatory view for explaining the back surfaces B to D. (A) to (c) are explanatory views explaining the back surface E. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the transfer data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a drawing list schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the 1st special symbol variation start processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the game state update process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which showed the 1st special symbol jackpot determination processing executed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart which showed the 1st special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the 1st special symbol fluctuation stop processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the chance mode setting process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the 2nd special symbol change start processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination processing executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which showed the 2nd special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the 2nd special symbol fluctuation stop processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol variation processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the thru gate passing process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation monitoring process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the fraud monitoring process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control processing executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process which is executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the abnormality processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation pattern selection process executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. (A) is a flowchart showing the opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the round number command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. .. It is a flowchart which showed the ending command processing executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the rear image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the warning image setting process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the pointer update process executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the drawing process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table in the modified example of the first embodiment, and (b) is for normal use (when special figure 2 is held) in the modified example of the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the table schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the table for consecutive villa / chance B (second half) in the modified example of the first embodiment, and (b) is the chance in the modified example of the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the table for A (the latter half) schematically. It is a flowchart which showed the 1st special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the modification of 1st Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing the chance A time selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the modified example of the first embodiment, and (b) is the main control in the modified example of the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the normal time selection process executed by the MPU in the apparatus. It is a flowchart which showed the continuous villa time selection process executed by MPU in the main control device in the modification of 1st Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the structure of the ROM of the main control unit in the second embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern scenario table in the second embodiment. be. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of the RAM of the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the game state update process 3 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the 1st special symbol variation pattern selection process 3 executed by MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot end processing 3 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the structure of the ROM of the main control device in the third embodiment, and (b) is the first hit random number counter C1 in the third embodiment and the jackpot determination value in the special symbol. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship, and FIG. 3C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter C2 in the third embodiment and the jackpot type in the special symbol. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the small hit type counter C5 in the third embodiment and the small hit determination value in the special symbol, and (b) is a variation pattern in the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the scenario table schematically. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of the RAM of the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot control process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot end processing 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the small hit control process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. (A) and (b) are front views of the sorting unit according to the fourth embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the structure of the ROM of the main control device in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 in the fourth embodiment and the jackpot type in the special symbol. It is a schematic diagram which shows the relationship schematically, and (c) is the schematic diagram which schematically showed the correspondence relation between the 2nd hit random number counter C4 in 4th Embodiment, and the hit in a normal symbol. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern table in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal table in the fourth embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the table for probabilistic variation in the fourth embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the variation pattern scenario table in the fourth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fall lottery table in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main control device in the fourth embodiment. .. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically an example of the game state after the end of a big hit in 4th Embodiment, and the transition of the reference variation pattern table. It is a flowchart which showed the 1st special symbol variation start processing 5 executed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the 1st special symbol variation stop processing 5 executed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the 2nd special symbol change start processing 5 executed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination process 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the 2nd special symbol change stop process 5 executed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the normal symbol variation processing 5 executed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot end processing 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and entry ports 64, 640, 67 and the like is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 11) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the front frame with the side on which the hinge 19 is provided as an opening / closing axis. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two sheets of glass is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when the effect or background displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which will be described later, is changed.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the area around the illumination portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and driving of the ball launch unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Touch sensor 51a for this purpose, push-button type stop switch 51b that stops firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and variable resistor that detects the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 by the change in electrical resistance. (Not shown) and is built-in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the operation amount, depending on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

In the present embodiment, the configuration is not limited to the above, but the configuration is such that the main control device 110 and other control devices detect the game ball launched by the ball launching unit 112a, and the solenoid of the ball launching unit 112a. May be configured to detect that has fired a game ball. Further, the number of detected game balls may be counted and stored until a process such as RAM clear is executed.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower portion of the front surface of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "dollar box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails and windmills for ball guidance and rails 61, 62, a general winning opening 63, and a first. The ball entry port 64, the second ball entry port 640, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled and configured, and the peripheral edge portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first entry opening 64, the second entry opening 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are arranged in the game board. It is fixed from the front side of 13 by a wood screw or the like. Further, the front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a starting port or the like is arranged and the launched ball is arranged) formed on the front surface of the game board 13 by being divided by two rails 61 and 62 and an arc member 70. The area where it flows down). Further, the game area includes all areas in which the game ball that has passed through the return ball prevention member 68 flows down before passing through the out port 66 and the winning port.

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center. Further, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is used as a base between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60.

In this pachinko machine 10, when a ball enters either the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640, a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, and the ball is a normal entry opening. When 67 is passed, a lottery of ordinary symbols (second symbol) is performed. In the special symbol lottery performed for entering the ball into the first ball opening 64 or the second ball opening 640, it is determined whether the special symbol is a big hit or not, and it is judged as a special symbol big hit. If so, the jackpot type is also determined. When the jackpot of the special symbol is reached, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state, and the special winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed, or until 10 balls are won. ) It is released, and the opening is repeated the number of times (number of rounds) according to the jackpot type. As a result, a large number of balls are won in the specific winning opening 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in the normal case. There are 6 types of special symbols, "Big hit A" to "Big hit F", and after the end of the special game state, as added value after the end of the big hit, the game according to the result of the big hit game Value (game value) is given to the player. The four types of "big hits A to D" are jackpot types that can be determined when a big hit is obtained in a lottery executed when the ball enters the first entrance 64. The two types of "big hits E and F" are jackpot types that can be determined when a big hit is obtained in a lottery executed when the ball enters the second entrance 640. Hereinafter, for the sake of simplification of the explanation, the lottery executed when the ball enters the first entry port 64 is referred to as the "first special symbol lottery", and the ball enters the second entry. The lottery that is executed when the ball enters the mouth 640 is called a "second special symbol lottery".

When a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, the first symbol display device 37 starts variable display of the special symbol, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds to 60 seconds) has elapsed, the lottery result is obtained. The special symbol indicating is stopped and displayed. When a ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entry times is determined for each type of entry opening. Each is held up to four times, and the number of held balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display is completed in the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first entry port 64 or the second entry port 640 remains, the next special symbol lottery is performed and the lottery is performed. , The variable display according to the lottery is started.

On the other hand, in the lottery of the normal symbol performed for the passage of the ball at the normal entrance 67, whether or not the normal symbol is a hit is determined. When it hits a normal symbol, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is changed to the open position for a predetermined time (for example, 0.9 seconds or 1 second), so that the second entrance 640 is opened. Be released. In the normal state, since the electric accessory 640a is arranged at the closed position, the second entry port 640 is closed. Therefore, when the ball hits the normal symbol, the ball can easily enter the second entrance 640, and as a result, the special symbol can be easily drawn.

Further, when the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed, the variable display of the normal symbol is started on the second symbol display device 83, and the lottery result is shown after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed. The normal symbol is stopped and displayed. If a ball passes through the normal entry port 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passes is suspended up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is held by the first symbol display device 37. Along with being displayed, it is also shown on the second symbol hold lamp 84. When the variable display is completed in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal entry port 67 remains, the next normal symbol lottery is performed and the variable display according to the lottery is displayed. It will be started.

As described above, as the jackpot type of the special symbol, six types of "big hit A" to "big hit F" are provided. When "Big hit A" and "Big hit E" are reached, the number of rounds is 16 rounds in a special gaming state (16 rounds big hit). On the other hand, when it becomes "big hit B" and "big hit C", the number of rounds becomes a special game state of 12 rounds (12 rounds big hit), and when it becomes "big hit D" and "big hit F", the number of rounds is both. Becomes a special game state for 4 rounds (4 rounds jackpot). Further, when a specific condition is satisfied during the jackpot game (when the ball passes the V winning switch 65e3 described later), the game shifts to a high probability state of the special symbol (during the probability change of the special symbol) after the jackpot ends. When a high-probability state of a special symbol is given, the high-probability state of the special symbol continues from the end of the jackpot until the change of the special symbol ends 100 times (until the 101st change starts). .. Although the details will be described later, the jackpots A and B and the jackpots E and F are configured so that the ball can easily pass through the V winning switch 65e3 during the jackpot game. On the other hand, in the jackpots C and D, it is difficult for the ball to pass through the V winning switch 65e3 during the jackpot game. Therefore, rather than the lottery of the first special symbol in which the jackpot C and D can be determined, the second special symbol in which either the jackpot E or F (that is, the jackpot in which the ball easily passes through the V winning switch 65e3) is determined). The lottery is more advantageous for the player.

In addition, after the jackpots other than "Big hit D" are completed among the above jackpots, as an added value after the jackpot ends, the hit probability of the normal symbol increases after the jackpot ends, and the second special symbol changes. The time is shortened. The state in which the hit probability of the normal symbol is increased continues from the end of the big hit until the change of the special symbol ends 100 times (until the 101st change starts). As a result, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second entry port 640, so that the lottery of the second special symbol, which is advantageous for the player, becomes easy to be executed. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player. In the normal state of the normal symbol, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol (10 minutes) is basically extremely longer than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol (7 seconds to 90 seconds). Therefore, if the game is played aiming at the second entry port 640 in the normal state of the normal symbol, the game efficiency is significantly lowered, so that the game can be played aiming at the first entry port 64.

Here, the "high probability state of the special symbol" means a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased, that is, a so-called "high probability state of the special symbol" (probability change state of the special symbol), in other words, a special gaming state. It is a state of the game in which it is easy to shift to (big hit). On the other hand, the case where it is not the "high probability state of the special symbol" is called the "low probability state of the special symbol", which means that the jackpot probability is lower than the probability variation state of the special symbol, that is, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is normal. Indicates a state (normal state of a special symbol). In addition, in the "normal symbol time saving state" (normal symbol high probability state), the winning probability of the normal symbol increases and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol becomes shorter, and the lottery of the second special symbol is executed. It refers to an easy game state. On the other hand, when it is not the "normal symbol time saving state", it is called the "normal symbol normal state" (normal symbol low probability state), which means that the normal symbol hit probability is higher than the normal state, that is, during the time saving. Indicates a state in which the probability of hitting is low.

Hereinafter, the period during which the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot of the special symbol is referred to as the probability variation period of the special symbol. Further, the period during which the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state after the end of the special symbol jackpot is referred to as the normal symbol time reduction period.

As described above, in the jackpot of the special symbol in the present embodiment, the number of rounds at the time of jackpot is different depending on the type of jackpot. On the other hand, the number of rounds may be the same for all jackpot types (for example, all 8 rounds). Further, for example, the period during which the "normal symbol is shortened" may be changed according to the type of jackpot. In addition, instead of changing the period during which the "normal symbol time is shortened", the time for opening the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 or the electric accessory is released by hitting one ordinary symbol. The number of times may be changed. Further, in the present embodiment, when the ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3 during the jackpot, it is in the "high probability state of the special symbol" from the end of the jackpot to the end of the fluctuation of the special symbol 100 times. , The probability change period of the special symbol is not limited to 100 times, and may be arbitrarily determined. In addition, the high probability state of the special symbol may be continued until the next big hit.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the initial setting is performed by turning on the power or the like, the pachinko machine 10 is always set to the "low probability state of the special symbol". After that, it becomes a big hit other than the big hit D, and when the ball does not pass through the V winning switch 65e3 during the big hit, it shifts from the "normal state of the normal symbol" to the "time saving state of the normal symbol". In this case, the set "time saving state of the normal symbol" is continued from the end of the jackpot until the variation display of the special symbol is completed 100 times. After becoming a big hit of a special symbol, if it does not become a big hit of a new special symbol by the end of the lottery of 100 special symbols, it returns to the "normal state of the normal symbol". The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to simultaneously execute the variation display based on the lottery of the first special symbol and the variation display based on the lottery of the second special symbol (using the simultaneous variation method). There is). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the lottery of the other special symbol may be executed and the variation display may be started while the 100th variation display of the special symbol in the time saving state is being executed. In this case, the time saving state is configured to end when the lottery condition for the 101st special symbol is satisfied after the time saving state is set. As a result, when a relatively long fluctuation time (for example, 90 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation time of the 100th fluctuation display, the short fluctuation time is continuously selected in the lottery of the other special symbol. It is possible to prevent (suppress) a problem in which the number of time reductions is substantially increased.

If a new jackpot type other than jackpot D is selected while the "normal symbol time saving state" is being continued, the "normal symbol time saving state" will be further changed to 100 special symbols after the end of the new jackpot. It continues until the fluctuation display ends.

The same applies to the probability variation state of the special symbol, and if the 101st special symbol lottery condition is satisfied during the execution of the variation display based on the 100th special symbol lottery out of the 100 probability variation states. At that point, the probability change state is terminated and the special symbol is set to the low probability state. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the 101st special symbol lottery from becoming a high probability.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in a part of the case where the lottery result of the special symbol is missed, the specific winning opening 65a is won for a predetermined time (for example, until 3 seconds elapse, or 10 balls are won. There is a small hit that is open (until you do). Since this small hit is a kind of loss, the game state is not changed, but after the small hit is completed, the second special symbol is displayed over a predetermined number of times (10 times, 20 times, or 100 times). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display due to the lottery becomes shorter (to 3 seconds). As described above, in the normal state of the normal symbol, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol becomes extremely long (600 seconds), so if the ball is continuously launched aiming at the second entry port 640, the game efficiency is extremely deteriorated. , It is disadvantageous for the player. On the other hand, after the small hit is completed, the fluctuation time is shortened over the fluctuation display of a predetermined number of times, and the ball is launched aiming at the second entry port 640 during the predetermined number of times, so that the second special The lottery of symbols can be easily executed. That is, it is in an advantageous state for the player for a predetermined number of times. Therefore, in the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol), which is the game state in which the player stays for the longest time in the game, the game can be performed with the expectation of a small hit. In addition, since it is possible to shift to an advantageous state without going through a big hit, it is possible to give a sharp impression to the game in the normal state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. In the following description, the state in which the lottery of the second special symbol set a predetermined number of times is easily executed after the small hit is referred to as "chance mode A". On the other hand, among the states in which "chance mode A" is not set, the low-probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol are the "normal mode", the low-probability state of the special symbol, and The time-saving state of the normal symbol is called "chance mode B", and the high-probability state of the special symbol and the time-saving state of the normal symbol is called "renso mode".

A first symbol provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right side in FIG. 2). A display device 37 is arranged. The first symbol display device 37 displays according to each control performed by the main control device 110, which will be described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a display or fluctuate by indicating whether or not a lottery of special symbols performed in association with entering the first ball opening 64 (starting winning) is being executed by the lighting state. As a stop symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is shown by a lighting state, or a ball entered in the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640. Of these, the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) whose fluctuation has not been executed, is indicated by the lighting state.

When a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 while the special symbol (first symbol) is variablely displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the ball enters the ball. The number of times is reserved up to 4 times, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640 are each held up to a maximum of four times, but the maximum number of times of holding is limited to four times. It may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during the jackpot, an error display, and the like. The LED 37a is configured so that the emission color (for example, red, green, blue) of each LED is different, and depending on the combination of the emission colors, various gaming states (high probability state of a special symbol) of the pachinko machine 10 are used with a small number of LEDs. Or, it is possible to display (such as during the time reduction of ordinary symbols). Further, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a jackpot, the jackpot type (special symbol according to the jackpots A to D). (1st symbol) is shown.

Further, in the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. .. In the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 (starting prize), the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 with this as a trigger. Will be executed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of an 8-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbol rows of left, middle, and right can be displayed. Is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the game state displayed by the control of the main control device 110 is displayed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 displays the first symbol display device 37. A decorative display is made accordingly. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 to 10. FIG. 8 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 8A is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 8B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

The third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols with numbers from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is composed of a rear symbol consisting of a wooden box with numbers from "0" to "9", of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1,3,5,7,9) are , A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached symbols that imitate characters such as furoshiki and helmets, which are almost full on the front of the wooden box. Even numbers are added to the lower right side of the attached symbol so that they are small in green and displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 11) described later is a big hit, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. , The jackpot is configured to occur after the fluctuation display is finished. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbol is not aligned.

As shown in FIG. 8A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower halves, and the lower two-thirds are the main display area Dm for variable display of the third symbol, and the rest. The upper 1/3 of is a sub-display area Ds for displaying the advance notice effect, the character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, middle, and right, and three symbol columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are periodically scrolled from top to bottom to perform variable display. In particular, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of this main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. This stop display state is held for at least 1 second. By displaying the stopped 3rd symbol for a certain period of time (1 second or more) in this way, whether or not the player is a combination of the 3rd symbols corresponding to the jackpot (the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot). It is possible to prevent overlooking (whether or not there is). Further, if a combination of jackpot symbols (in the present embodiment, a combination of the same main symbols) is aligned on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot moving image (opening effect) is displayed as a jackpot.

Further, if the combination of the third symbols displayed as stopped is a combination corresponding to the detachment and there is a reserved ball, the variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the reserved ball is started after the stop display for 1 second. .. If there are a plurality of reserved balls, the lottery is executed based on the reserved balls corresponding to the oldest incoming balls in time.

On the other hand, when the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the deviation of the special symbol is stopped and displayed for 1 second in the state where the holding ball does not exist, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses or a new ball enters either the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640. Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed, a demo effect indicating that the game has not been executed is displayed. It is rare that the player does not enter the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 even though the player has continuously fired the ball for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds). In most cases, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) because the player has quit the game, and the pachinko machine 10 has not played the game at all. to cause. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed from the stop display of the third symbol, it is determined that the player is not playing the game, and the demonstration effect is started. do. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily determine whether or not the game is being performed based on the presence or absence of the display of the demonstration effect. On the other hand, if a new ball enters the first entry port 64 and the second entry opening 640 before the predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses, the ball corresponds to the new entry. The variable display of the third symbol is executed.

The sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is further divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Of these, the small area Ds1 displays the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the balls that have been entered into the first entry port 64 and the second entry opening 640. The small areas Ds2 and Ds3 are areas for displaying the advance notice effect image. Further, the third symbol is displayed in the small area Ds3. Although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10, the types of special symbols (either the first special symbol or the second special symbol) in which the lottery is easily executed are configured differently depending on the game state. In the main display area Dm, a variable display is displayed when a lottery of a special symbol that is easy to execute in the current gaming state is executed. On the other hand, in the small area Ds3, a variable display is displayed when a lottery of a special symbol that is difficult to execute in the current gaming state is executed.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 8B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, a total of three main symbols of the third symbol different from the main symbol displayed in the main display area Dm are displayed with respect to the small area Ds3 on the right. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character 710 (a boy with a headband in this embodiment) usually performs a predetermined action, and sometimes a special action different from the predetermined action or another character performs a predetermined action. A notice will be produced by appearing.

On the other hand, when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 while the variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), and , If a ball enters the second entrance 640 while the variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol is being performed, the number of times the ball is entered is held up to 4 times, and the number of reserved balls is It is shown by the first symbol display device 37, and is also shown in the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. Specifically, the symbol (first reserved ball number symbol) displayed in the upper half of the small area Ds1 indicates the number of reserved balls with respect to the first entrance 64, and the symbol displayed in the lower half (second reserved ball number symbol). The number of reserved balls symbol) indicates the number of reserved balls for the second entrance 640. FIG. 8 illustrates a case where four first reserved symbols are displayed while zero second reserved symbols are displayed (all the second reserved symbols are blank).

In the present embodiment, the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640 are each held up to a maximum of four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is four times. The number of times is not limited, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls symbol in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is different by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of hold balls for the maximum number of hold balls, and the number of hold balls may be displayed according to the number of hold lamps in the lit state.

Next, the reach effect in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9A is a diagram showing an example of reach effect. As shown in FIG. 9A, the main symbols with the same numbers are stopped and displayed on the effective line L1 of the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3, and only the middle symbol row Z2 is variablely displayed. When the state is reached, the characters "reach !!" are displayed in the middle symbol column Z2. As a result, the player can easily recognize that a reach state (chance that the main symbols with the same numbers are aligned on the effective line L1) has occurred.

In the present embodiment, as the mode of the variation effect in which the reach effect occurs, the variation time is short, the same main symbol is aligned on the effective line L1 (it becomes a big hit), and the normal reach with low expectation and the variation time are long. , A super reach with a high expectation that the same main symbols are aligned (a big hit) is provided on the effective line L1.

Next, the display mode of the special super reach in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 9 (b). This special super reach is one of the above-mentioned super reach, and is a mode that can be selected only when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a specific lottery result. Specifically, it will be the most unfavorable jackpot type (the number of rounds is 4 rounds, the ball is difficult to pass through the V winning switch 65e3, and the jackpot D is not given a time saving state), or the most advantageous jackpot type (chance mode). This special super reach is selected only when A becomes a small hit C) which is set 100 times.

FIG. 9B shows a display mode when the speed of the middle symbol row Z2, which is variablely displayed, becomes low after the special super reach is selected and the reach effect (see FIG. 9A) is executed. It is a figure which showed an example. As shown in FIG. 9A, in the special super reach, the eyes of the boy character displayed in the small area Ds2 look like burning like a flame, and the characters "great chance" are displayed in the small area Ds3. Appears with a balloon displayed inside. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the variable display this time is likely to indicate a lottery result that is advantageous to the player. In the special super reach, the symbols that are scrolled from top to bottom at low speed in the middle symbol row Z2 are the symbols with the letters "chance mode" and the symbols with the reach. There are only two types. Here, the symbol with "chance mode" means the transition to chance mode A, and when it is stopped and displayed on the effective line L1, it becomes a small hit C and 100 times after the end of the small hit. Chance mode A is set.

Even if the jackpot D is obtained, the number of prize balls is small, and neither the probability change state nor the time saving state is given after the jackpot, so that the degree of advantage for the player is low. On the other hand, when the small hit C is reached, the chance mode A in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed is set over a maximum of 100 variable displays after the small hit C is completed, so that the player is 100. You can receive almost the same profit as the time reduction period is set. Therefore, when the special super reach is executed, the game can be performed in the hope that it will be a small hit C rather than a big hit D.

In a general pachinko machine, when the variable display is executed, the game is played with the expectation that the third symbols with the same numbers will be aligned (that is, it will be a big hit). In the machine 10, when a special super reach occurs, it is possible to confirm the effect result in the hope that the third symbols with the same numbers will not be aligned. That is, it is possible to provide a novel game property that the game can be performed with the expectation that the hit will be a deviation (small hit C) having a high degree of advantage rather than a big hit (big hit D) having a low degree of advantage.

FIG. 10A is a diagram showing the display contents when the symbol with the characters “chance mode” is stopped and displayed on the effective line L1. As shown in FIG. 10A, when the symbol indicating the transition to chance mode A (the symbol with the letters "chance mode") is stopped and displayed, "chance mode GET !! Right-handed !!" A balloon with the characters "" appears in the small area Ds3. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the mode has been changed to the chance mode. In addition, the player can easily understand that right-handed hitting (a game method in which a ball is launched into the path on the right side of the game board 13 to aim at the second entrance 640) should be performed. Further, in the lower left of the small area Ds3, a substantially rectangular display area with the characters "100 times remaining" is displayed. This display area shows the remaining number of lottery in the chance mode A, and the number of times displayed is subtracted by 1 each time the fluctuation is started. With this display area, the player can easily understand the remaining number of lottery in the chance mode A.

FIG. 10B is a diagram showing the display contents at the time when the number of lottery times set as the chance mode A is completed. As shown in FIG. 10B, when the chance mode A ends, a balloon with the characters "Chance mode ends ... Return to left-handed!" Is displayed in the small area Ds3. .. As a result, the player is informed that the chance mode A has ended and that the player should hit left (a game method in which the ball is launched into the path on the left side of the game board 13 to aim at the first entrance 64). Can be easily understood.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. The second symbol display device 83 performs variable display or fluctuates by indicating whether or not the lottery of the normal symbol, which is performed when the ball passes through the normal entry port 67, is being executed by the lighting state. As a stop symbol after the end, a normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is shown by a lighting state.

More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the ball passes through either the left or right normal entry port 67, the symbol of "○" and the symbol of "x" as the normal symbol (second symbol) are displayed. A variable display is performed in which the symbols are alternately lit. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “○”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is used for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in an operating state (opened), and as a result, a ball can easily enter the second entry port 640. The number of times the ball has passed through the normal entry port 67 is held up to 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and also lit by the second symbol holding lamp 84. .. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, and the first symbol display device 37. And a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to 4 times, but is 3 times or less, or 3 times or less, as in the case of the 1st entrance 64 and the 2nd entrance 640. It may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol hold lamp 84.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 into which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the first ball entry port 64, the first ball entry port switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first ball entry port switch is turned on. A special symbol is drawn by the main control device 110, and the display according to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. In addition, the first entry port 64 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters. When the ball is launched into the path on the left side of the front view with respect to the variable display device unit 80 (so-called left-handed impact), the ball can easily enter the first ball entry port 64. In addition, although the rate of entering the ball is lower than that of hitting left, the ball is also hit when the ball is hit into the path on the right side of the front view with respect to the variable display device unit 80 (so-called right hit). May enter the ball.

A second ball entry port 640, through which a ball can enter, is arranged on the lower right side of the front view with respect to the first ball entry port 64. When a ball enters the second entrance 640, the second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second entrance switch is turned on. A special symbol is drawn by the main control device 110, and the display according to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. In addition, the second entry port 640 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters. As shown in FIG. 2, the second entrance 640 is provided with an electric accessory 640a that can be opened and closed on the right side, and when the electric accessory 640a is opened, a ball that flows down from the right direction is provided. It becomes easier to enter the ball. Therefore, in order to allow the ball to enter the second entry port 640, it is basically sufficient to hit the ball to the right. In addition, although the rate of entering a ball is lower than that of a right-handed ball, it is possible to enter the second ball-entry port 640 even when the ball hitting the left-handed ball flows down to the right side of the first ball-entry port 64. There is sex.

A variable winning device 65 is arranged at the upper right of the front view of the second ball opening 640, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 becomes a big hit, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be the stop symbol of the big hit after a predetermined time (variation time) has elapsed. At the same time, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the gaming state shifts to the special gaming state in which a larger amount of prize balls is paid out than in the normal state. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls are won). That is, the opening / closing plate 65f1 that normally closes the specific winning opening 65a is opened by a big hit, and the ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 0.5 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won) even when the lottery of the special symbol is a small hit.

Further, inside the variable winning device 65, a plurality of flow paths (normal discharge flow path 65e1 and special discharge flow path 65e2) through which the ball can pass are provided. The game ball that has flowed into the variable winning device 65 flows down one of the flow paths (normal discharge flow path 65e1 and special discharge flow path 65e2) and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. Further, the special discharge flow path 65e2 is provided with a V winning switch 65e3 that gives a high probability state (probability change state) of a special symbol after a big hit by passing a ball. The special discharge flow path 65e2 is in a state where it can pass only in the first round of the jackpot. Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the period during which the ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a (the opening / closing plate 65f1 is opened) and the special discharge passage for the ball in the first round of the jackpot. The period during which 65e2 can flow down is configured to be different depending on the type of jackpot.

More specifically, as the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing plate 65f1 in the first round of the jackpot, the opening time is relatively short, and it is difficult to allow the ball to enter the specific winning opening 65a during the opening period of the opening / closing plate 65f1. Either the opening / closing operation (opening / closing pattern) or the opening / closing operation (opening / closing pattern) in which the opening period is relatively long and the ball can be easily entered into the specific winning opening 65a during the opening period of the opening / closing plate 65f1. , Set according to the jackpot type (see FIG. 7). During the opening period of the opening / closing plate 65f1, the ball can flow down the special discharge flow path 65e2, so pay attention to whether or not the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a in the first round of the jackpot. You can play a game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game during the big hit from becoming monotonous.

Here, the configuration of the variable winning device 65 will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 to 6. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 4, the variable winning device 65 is combined with an opening forming member 65b arranged so as to project toward the front side of the game board 13 and the back side of the opening forming member 65b to form a variable winning device 65. A base member 65c for screwing to the game board 13 and a plurality of LEDs arranged on the back side of the base member 65c and for lighting the LEDs from the back side of the base member 65c to the front side of the pachinko machine 10. It has an arranged LED substrate 65d, a back cover body 65e that sandwiches the LED substrate 65d with a base member 65c, and an opening / closing plate 65f1 for opening / closing a specific winning opening 65a formed in the opening forming member 65d. The opening / closing unit 65f, the flow path cover body 65g that is combined on the back side of the back cover body 65e to form a flow path, and the game projecting into the flow path formed by the back cover body 65e and the flow path cover body 65g. A switching member 65h for switching the flow path of the sphere, a link member 65i locked with the switching member 65h, a back cover body 65j arranged on the back side of the flow path cover body 65g, and the back surface of the back cover body 65j. It is composed of a flow path solenoid 65k that is fixed to the side and operates the link member 65i, and a fixing cover body 65m that covers the flow path solenoid 65k from the back side and is fixed to the back cover body 65j with screws. There is.

FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65. FIG. 5 (c) is a top view of the variable winning device 65, and FIG. 5 (b) is a cross-sectional view of Lb-Lb of the variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 5B, the variable winning device 65 is formed with a specific winning opening 65a, which is an opening through which a game ball can enter. The specific winning opening 65a has a substantially rectangular opening formed above the pachinko machine 10, and is inclined downward to the left so that the game ball passing through the opening is guided to the left in FIG. 5 (b). The bottom surface is formed. At the left end of the bottom surface, a detection port 65a1 composed of a magnetic sensor 65c1 for detecting a winning of a game ball is arranged. The game ball that has passed through the detection port 65a1 is guided to the distribution flow path formed on the back side of the back cover body 65e shown in FIG. 6B.

As shown in FIG. 5B, the opening of the specific winning opening 65a is an open state in which the game ball can be entered by the opening / closing plate 65f1 configured by a shutter mechanism that can appear and disappear from the game board 13 side, and the ball cannot be entered. It is variable to a closed state where it is possible (difficult to enter the ball). In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the opening / closing plate 65f1, and the game ball can roll over the upper part of the opening / closing door. Further, in the open state, the opening / closing plate 65f1 is configured to be retracted from the inside of the specific winning opening 65a by being retracted to the inside of the base member 65c (inside the game board 13).

With this configuration, when the opening of the variable winning device 65 is closed, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the variable winning device 65 and is guided to the second entrance 640 side. It is configured as follows. Therefore, even during the time-saving game (including during the probabilistic game), it is possible to put the game ball into the second entrance 640 while hitting the right side, and the game method immediately shifts to the left side after the big hit game. You can reduce the trouble of changing. Therefore, the player can play the game more easily.

Further, in the open state, since the surface orthogonal to the direction in which the game balls flow down can be configured as the opening of the variable winning device 65, more game balls can be efficiently won in the specific winning opening 65a. Therefore, the time required for the jackpot game can be shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

FIG. 5A is a cross-sectional view taken along the line La-La shown in FIG. 5B. As shown in FIG. 5A, the magnetic sensor 65c1 having the detection port 65a1 is fixed to the base member 65c so that the detection port 65a1 is tilted toward the distribution flow path side of the back cover body 65e.

With reference to FIG. 6, a configuration will be described in which the game ball guided to the distribution flow path of the back cover body 65e is distributed to the normal discharge flow path 65e1 and the special discharge flow path 65e2, which will be described later.

FIG. 6A is a rear view of the back cover body 65e showing a state in which the switching member 65h is operated so that the game ball is distributed to the special discharge flow path 65e2. As shown in FIG. 6A, the switching member 65h has a locking hole 65h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 65i is inserted and a guide piece 65h2 for guiding the game ball, and the flow path cover body 65g. It is rotatably supported from the back side. Here, the flow path cover body 65g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 65h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 65h is rotated into the distribution flow path from the back surface side of the flow path cover body 65g. It is configured so that it can be arranged as possible.

As shown in FIG. 6A, the game ball guided into the distribution flow path from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 arranged diagonally downward to the left and guided to the special discharge flow path 65e2. NS. The game ball that has passed through the special discharge flow path 65e2 is detected by a V winning switch 65e3 composed of a magnetic sensor that can detect the passage of the game ball provided in the special discharge flow path 65e2, and is detected as an out ball outside the pachinko machine 10. Is discharged to.

Here, although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the gaming state after the jackpot game is a high-probability gaming state (as the gaming ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3 described above during the jackpot game. Probability change game state) is set. That is, the V winning switch 65e3 is configured as a winning opening for imparting a probabilistic gaming state. Further, the switching member 65h is configured to divide the gaming state after the big hit into a low-probability gaming state or a probabilistic gaming state.

In this way, since the game state set after the big hit game is changed by the flow route of the game ball that has won the specific winning opening 65a during the big hit game, it is possible to improve the interest of the player even during the big hit game. .. The time required to pass from the opening of the variable winning device 65 to the entrance of the special discharge flow path 65e2 (the opening surface closed by the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h) is configured to be 0.2 seconds at the shortest. There is. In the operation of the switching member 65h, the operation timing and the operation time are set in association with the elapsed time from the start of the jackpot. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 7, but in the present embodiment, the switching member 65h operates for 3 seconds after the start of the first round of the jackpot, and the special discharge flow that continues to the V winning switch 65e3. The road 65e2 is ready to pass.

Next, a case where the game ball is guided to the normal discharge flow path 65e1 will be described with reference to FIG. 6 (b). FIG. 6B is a diagram showing a state in which the flow path solenoid 65k is inactive and the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h closes the opening surface at the entrance of the special discharge flow path 65e2.

The game ball guided to the distribution flow path from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h and is guided to the normal discharge flow path 65e1. At the end of the normal discharge flow path 65e1, a discharge confirmation switch 65e4 composed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of a game ball is provided. Thereby, whether or not all the game balls that have entered the variable winning device 65 have been discharged can be determined by the total of the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 and the V winning switch 65e3. Therefore, when a problem such as ball clogging occurs in the variable winning device 65, the problem can be detected at an early stage.

In this way, the game ball that has won the specific winning opening 65a in the variable winning device 65 is detected by the magnetic sensor 65c1, and based on this, the prize ball (15 for one ball winning in this embodiment) is given to the player as a privilege. (Prize balls) can be paid out. In addition, by using the game ball after the detection to be configured so that it can be sorted whether or not it passes through the V winning switch 65e3, it is possible to execute a lottery as to whether or not to give a probabilistic game state. can. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated winning opening for giving the probabilistic gaming state separately from the variable winning device 65, and the space of the game board 13 can be effectively used.

Next, with reference to FIG. 7, the correspondence between the operation of the flow path solenoid 65k in one jackpot and the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing plate 65f1 will be described. As described above, in the present embodiment, the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1 in the first round of the jackpot is changed according to the jackpot type, so that the ease of flowing the ball with respect to the specific discharge flow path 65e2 is changed. There is. In the present embodiment, two types of patterns (a pattern in which the ball is difficult to enter into the specific winning opening 65a and a pattern in which the ball is easy to enter) are provided as the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1.

FIG. 7 is a diagram schematically showing the time-varying change of the operation of the flow path solenoid 65k and the opening / closing timing of the specific winning opening 65a for each jackpot type. As shown in the upper part of FIG. 7, the flow path solenoid 65k is kept off before the start of one round of jackpot. That is, before the start of one round, the ball can normally flow down to the discharge flow path 65e1 (see FIG. 6B). This off state continues until the start of one round. Then, when the first round is started, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to the ON state for only 3 seconds. That is, the ball can flow down to the special discharge flow path 65e2 (see FIG. 6A). When the period of the on state for 3 seconds ends, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to the off state again, and thereafter, it is kept in the off state until the jackpot ends.

Further, as shown in the middle part of FIG. 7, in the case of either jackpot C or D, when one round starts, the closed opening / closing plate 65f1 is opened. By opening the opening / closing plate 65f1, the ball can enter the inside of the variable winning device 65. This open state lasts only for 0.2 seconds. After 0.2 seconds have passed since the opening / closing plate 65f1 was opened, the closed state is maintained until the first round ends and the second round starts after an interval period of 5 seconds. The 1st round in the present embodiment ends when 10 balls enter the specific winning opening 65a or 3 seconds have elapsed from the start of the 1st round. Since it is very difficult to let the ball enter the specific winning opening 65a within 0.2 seconds, in most cases when the jackpots C and D are reached, the ball is made to flow down to the special discharge flow path 65e2. The jackpot ends without being able to do it. That is, since the ball cannot be passed through the V winning switch 65e3 during the jackpot, the probability variation state of the special symbol is not given after the jackpot ends. Therefore, when the jackpots are C and D, the gaming state after the jackpot is disadvantageous for the player as compared with other jackpot types. Although the probability is low, if the ball can be entered into the specific winning opening 65a within 0.2 seconds when the opening / closing plate 65f1 is opened, it is possible to shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit. Can be done. Therefore, even when the jackpot type is either jackpot C or D, it is possible to play the game with the expectation that the probability change state will be set after the jackpot ends.

Further, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 7, when any of the jackpots A, B, E, and F is obtained, the opening / closing plate 65f1 is opened for 3 seconds after the first round of the jackpot is started. That is, the period during which the flow path solenoid 65k is turned on coincides with the period during which the opening / closing plate 65f1 is set in the open state. Therefore, by allowing the ball to enter the specific winning opening 65a during a relatively long opening period, the V winning switch 65e3 can be easily passed. Therefore, in the case of jackpots A, B, E, and F, the ball can easily pass through the V winning switch 65e3 during the jackpot, and even the ball is launched toward the variable winning device 65 in the first round. Then, after the big hit, it is possible to shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the ease of transition to the probabilistic state is different depending on the jackpot type. As a result, it is possible to play the game with the expectation that an opening / closing pattern that can easily shift to the probabilistic state is set.

In the present embodiment, the opening period of the opening / closing plate 65f1 set when the jackpots A, B, E, and F are obtained coincides with the on period of the flow path solenoid 65k, but the present invention is limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, the on-period of the flow path solenoid 65k may be longer for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds). With this configuration, the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a just before the end of the opening period of the opening / closing plate 65f1 is allowed to flow down to the special discharge flow path 65e2 within a predetermined period (0.5 seconds). Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the occurrence of a situation in which the probabilistic state is not given even though the ball is entered into the specific winning opening 65a. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling dissatisfied.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. Attachment spaces K1 and K2 for attaching certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamps, etc. attached to the attachment space K1 are the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. Balls that do not win in any of the winning openings are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening 66. A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 11) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls is appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasing switch (FIGS. 3, 122). ing. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 12). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch (FIGS. 3, 122) is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is desired to be returned to the initial state.

<About the electrical configuration in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device in only one direction.

The main control device 110 executes the main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as a jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 12) for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, with reference to FIG. 12, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like use the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform a jackpot lottery, setting the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, drawing the display result of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. Used in.

For the jackpot lottery and the display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot (and small hit) lottery and the jackpot type (big hit symbol) are selected. Used to set the initial value of the first hit type counter C2 used for, the stop type counter C3 used for selecting the stop type, the fluctuation type counter CS1 used for selecting the fluctuation pattern, and the random number counter C1 per first. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the ordinary symbol (second symbol display device 83), and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Further, the small hit type counter C5 is used for selecting the small hit type. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 46). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although the details will be described later, in the RAM 203, each counter value is stored for each of the winning counter values for the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a and the second entry ball opening 640, in which the counter values for winning the first ball entrance 64 are stored. A second special symbol holding ball storage 203b to be stored is provided. In the present embodiment, the first entry port 64 and the second entry opening 640 are each provided with a maximum of four reserved balls, and a total of a maximum of eight reserved balls can be stored. Therefore, if the ball wins the first entry slot 64 during the period when the special symbol can be drawn, such as when the special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner or when the special symbol is not in the jackpot game, each counter value becomes the first. It is stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, and when a game ball wins in the second entrance 640, each counter value is stored in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b. After that, each counter value stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is moved to the execution area provided in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, and the first special symbol is variablely displayed (dynamically). Various settings and control processes for displaying) are executed. Similarly, each counter value stored in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b is moved to the execution area provided in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Various settings and control processing for this are executed.

On the other hand, during the period when the lottery of the special symbol is impossible, such as during the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol or during the jackpot game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the game ball is inserted into the first entrance 64. Alternatively, when the second ball opening 640 is won, if the number of reserved balls for the winning ball opening (starting port) is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment), each counter value is acquired. It is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b corresponding to the winning ball opening. In addition, when the number of reserved balls for the winning ball opening is the upper limit value (4 pieces in this embodiment) or more, each counter value or the like is not acquired and the prize balls (5 pieces in this embodiment) are not acquired. Only the prize ball) is treated as an invalid ball paid out to the player.

In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of reserved balls is set to 4 for each of the 1st entry port 64 and the 2nd entry port 640, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is less than 4 (for example). It may be 3) or more than 4 (for example, 8). In addition, a configuration in which an upper limit value is not provided may be used.

Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299), reaches the maximum value (for example, 299 in the case of a counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 299), and then becomes 0. It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 46).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the timing at which the ball wins the first ball opening 64 or the second ball opening 640. It is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. The value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is defined in the jackpot random number table (see FIG. 13B) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is set. When it matches the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot specified in the first hit random number table 202a, it is determined to be the jackpot of the special symbol.

Here, the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 13 (b). The first hit random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value (determination value) determined to be a hit in each game state is set in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Specifically, when the gaming state is a low-probability gaming state, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "0" in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. If it is "0", it is determined that it is a big hit. Further, when the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state, the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is within the range of "1 to 4". If it is within the range of "1 to 4", it is determined that it is a big hit. Further, regardless of the game state, in the lottery of the first special symbol, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is within the range of "295-299", and the range of "295-299" is determined. If it is inside, it is determined that it is a small hit.

Here, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a or the execution area of the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b must be a random number that is a small hit. For example, if it is a random number that is a small hit of a special symbol, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the one at the time of a small hit of the special symbol.

On the other hand, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the execution area of the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b is a random number that becomes a big hit of the special symbol. If so, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the one at the time of the big hit of the special symbol. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same execution area.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. As described above, in the low probability state of the special symbol, there is one value of the first random number counter C1 which is a big hit of the special symbol, and the random number value "0" is the first random number table as described above. It is stored in 202a. Since the total number of random numbers that are big hits is 1 while the total number of random numbers is 300, the probability of being a big hit of a special symbol is "1/300". On the other hand, in the high probability state of the special symbol, there are four values of the first random number counter C1 which is a big hit of the special symbol, and the random number values "1 to 4" are the first random number table as described above. It is stored in 202a. Since the total number of random numbers that are big hits is 4 while the total number of random numbers is 300 in this way, the probability of being a big hit of a special symbol is "1/75".

Further, the value of the first type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a big hit, the big hit type is selected based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 and the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 13C). The Rukoto. Specifically, it will be described later with reference to FIG. 13 (c).

The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disconnection displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after the reach occurs, the symbol is different from the symbol on which the reach is applied as the final stop symbol. Two stop (effect) patterns are selected: "out of reach" where the symbol stops (for example, in the range of 90 to 99) and "completely out of reach" (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) where reach does not occur. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and when a ball enters the first entry port 64, the value is the value of the RAM 203. It is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. When the ball enters the second entry port 640, the value is stored in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

From the value (random value) of the stop type selection counter C3, the random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by the stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Further, in the present embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability, and a range of random values set for each stop type of deviation according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol.

For example, in the probabilistic state of a special symbol, a jackpot is likely to occur, so the range of random values corresponding to the "completely off" stop type is wide, 0 to 89, so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary. Table is selected, "completely out of reach" is easily selected, and "out of reach" is narrowed to 90 to 99, so that "out of reach" is difficult to be selected. Further, in the low probability state of the special symbol, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of "completely off" is narrow as 0 to 79 in order to secure the ball entry time to the first entry port 64. A table for low probability is selected, it becomes difficult to select "completely out of reach", and the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of "out of reach" is widened to 80 to 99. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform many reach displays with a long effect time, so that the ball entry time to the first entry port 64 can be secured, and the variation display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. It will be easier to do.

Further, the small hit type counter C5 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit, the small hit type (small hit A) is based on the value of the small hit type counter and the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 14B). ~ C) will be selected. Specifically, it will be described later with reference to FIG. 14 (c).

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS1 determines one variation pattern from the set variation pattern table. A fluctuation time (dynamic display period) is set in this fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is also a counter for determining the fluctuation time. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 46) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The fluctuation pattern table 202d (see FIGS. 15 and 16) storing a random number value for determining one fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation from the value (random value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. It is provided inside.

A plurality of data tables for selecting a variation pattern are defined in the variation pattern table 202d (see FIGS. 15B and 16). In this fluctuation pattern table 202d, a plurality of fluctuation pattern tables dedicated to each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are set, and the fluctuation pattern table is set for each of the hit / fail determination results. There is. Details of each variation pattern table will be described later with reference to FIGS. 15 and 16.

The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is added in order in the range of 0 to 239, the maximum value (that is, 239) is reached, and then the counter returns to 0. Further, when the second hit random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second hit random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27), and the sphere passes through either the left or right normal start port (through gate) 67. When it is detected, it is acquired and stored in the normal map execution area of the RAM 203.

The value of the random number that normally hits the symbol is defined in the second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 14A) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and is the value of the second hit random number counter C4. However, when it matches the value of the random number to be the hit specified in the second hit random number table 202c, it is determined to be the hit of the normal symbol (second symbol). The details of the second random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. 14 (a).

FIG. 14A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second random number table 202c. In this second hit random number table 202c, when the probability of the normal symbol is low (during the normal state of the normal symbol), there are 199 random numbers that can be hit by the normal symbol, and the range is "5-203". .. Since the total number of random numbers that can be hit by the second random number counter C4 is 240 and the total number of random numbers that can be hit is 199, the probability of hitting a normal symbol is "199/240".

On the other hand, when the probability of the normal symbol is high (during the time saving state of the normal symbol), there are 200 random values that can be hit by the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 204". Since the total number of random numbers that can be taken by the second random number counter C4 is 240 and the total number of random numbers that can be hit is 200, the probability of hitting a normal symbol is "1 / 1.2". .. As described above, in the present embodiment, since the random value that is the hit of the normal symbol differs only by one between the low probability state of the normal symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol, the hit probabilities are almost the same. There is. Further, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 when the normal symbol hits are also the same. Therefore, the ease of entering the second ball entry port 640 is the same in the low probability state of the normal symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol. However, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described above, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the low probability state (normal state) of the normal symbol is relative to the fluctuation time in the high probability state (time reduction state) of the normal symbol. It becomes extremely long. As a result, in the low probability state (normal state) of the normal symbol, it is more difficult to execute the lottery of the second special symbol than in the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol. In the above, the player can be made to play the game aiming at the first entrance 64.

When the sphere passes through the normal start port 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the second symbol display device 83 executes the fluctuation display of the normal symbol for 3 seconds. Then, in the low probability state of the normal symbol, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5-203", it is determined that the player has won, and the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed. Later, the symbol "○" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol), and the second entry port 640 is opened only "0.9 seconds x 1 time". On the other hand, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, if the acquired value of the random number counter C4 per second is in the range of "5-204", it is determined that the player has won, and the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed. Later, a symbol "○" is lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol), and the second entry port 640 is opened only "1 second x 1 time". In this embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the opening time of the normal electric accessory, and the number of times of opening may be appropriately changed as long as the game playability is not impaired.

The normal figure variation type counter CS2 is configured as a loop counter in which 1 is added in order in the range of 0 to 99, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99), the counter returns to 0. When the game ball passes through the through gate 67, the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol is selected based on the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2. Specifically, a fluctuation pattern in which the value of the normal map fluctuation type counter CS2 is in the range of 0 to 99 (that is, the entire range) and the fluctuation time is 3 seconds is selected.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 46).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the values of the counters and the like. It is possible to execute the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83.

Returning to FIG. 11, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 11, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 46) when the power is cut off, and the restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 45) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 44) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

Next, the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 16. FIG. 13A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the present embodiment. In addition to the first hit random number table 202a and the second hit random number table 202c already described above, the ROM 202 is provided with at least a first hit type selection table 202b, a variation pattern table 202d, and a small hit type selection table 202e. Has been done.

First, the details of the first type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 13 (c). The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 13C) is a data table in which determination values for determining the jackpot type are stored for each type of special symbol, and the determination of the first hit type counter C2. The value is specified in association with each jackpot type. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning prize is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first hit type selection table 202b is compared. The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

As shown in FIG. 13 (c), "big hit A" is associated with the first special symbol in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 9". .. This jackpot A has 16 rounds. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 10 are counter values that become "big hit A", so if a big hit is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit A" is determined. The ratio is 10% (10/100). This "big hit A" is one of the big hit types with the largest number of rounds, and the opening / closing pattern of the specific winning opening 65a (easy) that allows the V winning switch 65e3 to pass through in the first round of the big hit (FIG. 7). (Refer to the lower row) is set, so it is easy to give a probability change state after a big hit. Therefore, it is one of the most advantageous jackpot types for players.

Further, in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "10 to 49", "big hit B" is associated and defined. This "big hit B" is a big hit with 12 rounds. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 40 counter values are "big hit B", so if a big hit is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit B" is determined. The ratio is 40% (40/100). Although the number of rounds of this "big hit B" is smaller than that of "big hit A", like "big hit A", the opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a that can pass through the V winning switch 65e3 in the first round of the big hit (easy). Since the pattern (see the lower part of FIG. 7) is set, the probability change state is likely to be given after the big hit. Therefore, although it is inferior to "big hit A" (and "big hit E" described later), it is a relatively advantageous big hit type for the player.

Further, in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "50 to 69", "big hit C" is associated and defined. This "big hit C" is a big hit with 12 rounds, like the "big hit B". Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 20 are counter values that become "big hit C", so if a big hit is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit C" is determined. The ratio is 20% (20/100). This "big hit C" has a smaller number of rounds than the "big hit A", and the opening / closing pattern of the specific winning opening 65a (see the middle part of FIG. 7) that is difficult to pass through the V winning switch 65e3 in the first round of the big hit is set. Therefore, it is difficult to give a probability change state after the big hit (it is easy to set the time saving state (chance mode B) of the normal symbol after the big hit). For this reason, it is a disadvantageous jackpot type as compared with "big hit A" and "big hit B" in which the probability change state (consecutive villa mode) is easily set.

Further, in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "70 to 99", "big hit D" is associated and defined. This "big hit D" is a big hit with 4 rounds. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 30 are counter values that become "big hit D", so if a big hit is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit D" is determined. The ratio is 30% (30/100). This "big hit D" has the smallest number of rounds among the six types of big hits, and the opening / closing pattern of the specific winning opening 65a that is difficult to pass through the V winning switch 65e3 in the first round of the big hit (see the middle row of FIG. 7). ) Is set, so it is difficult to give a probability change state after the big hit (it is easy to set the time saving state (chance mode B) of the normal symbol after the big hit). Therefore, it is the most disadvantageous jackpot type among all jackpot types.

On the other hand, for the second special symbol, "big hit E" is associated with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 69". This "big hit E" is a big hit with 16 rounds. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 70 counter values are "big hit E", so if a big hit is achieved in the second special symbol lottery, "big hit E" is determined. The ratio is 70% (70/100). This "big hit E" has the largest number of rounds among the six types of big hits, and the opening / closing pattern of the specific winning opening 65a (easy) that allows the V winning switch 65e3 to pass through the first round of the big hit (FIG. 7). (Refer to the bottom row) is set, so it is easy to give a probability change state after a big hit. Therefore, like "Big hit A", it is one of the most advantageous jackpot types for the player.

Further, for the second special symbol, "big hit F" is associated with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "70 to 99". This "big hit F" is a big hit with 4 rounds. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 30 are counter values that become "big hit F", so if a big hit is achieved in the second special symbol lottery, "big hit F" is determined. The ratio is 30% (30/100). This "big hit F" has the smallest number of rounds among the six types of big hits, but the opening / closing pattern of the specific winning opening 65a (easy) that allows the V winning switch 65e3 to pass through the first round of the big hit (FIG. 7). (Refer to the lower row) is set, so it is easy to give a probability change state after a big hit. Therefore, although it is disadvantageous for the prize spherical surface, it is easy to win the next big hit with a relatively small number of lottery, which is advantageous as compared with "big hit C" and "big hit D".

As described above, in the present embodiment, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, the opening / closing pattern of the specific winning opening 65a that can (easily) pass through the V winning switch 65e3 is set at a rate of 50%. While the jackpot type (big hit A, B) is determined, if a jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the V winning switch 65e3 can be passed (easily) at a rate of 100%. The jackpot type (big hit E, F) in which the opening / closing pattern of the winning opening 65a is set is determined. Therefore, once the consecutive villa mode (probability change state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol) is set, the lottery of the second special symbol is drawn by winning a prize at the second entrance 640 by hitting right. It becomes easy to repeat the state where it is easy to execute and the jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to have the player play the game for one purpose of shifting to the consecutive villa mode. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the normal mode (low probability state of special symbol and normal state of normal symbol), the probability of winning a big hit in the special symbol lottery is low, and it is basically difficult to execute the second special symbol lottery. , You will aim for a big hit by lottery of the first special symbol. However, even if a big hit is made in the lottery of the first special symbol, an opening / closing pattern (see the lower part of FIG. 7) that easily passes through the V winning switch 65e3 is set only at a rate of 50%. Even if it does not become a big hit, or even if it becomes a big hit, the opening / closing pattern (see the middle part of FIG. 7) that is difficult to pass through the V winning switch 65e3 continues to be set, so that the normal mode, which is disadvantageous to the player, continues for a long time. In some cases. If the disadvantageous state continues for a long time, the player may lose motivation for the game.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the normal mode, when a specific lottery result (small hit) is obtained by the lottery of the first special symbol, the chance mode A in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed temporarily. It is configured so that it can be migrated to. With this configuration, if a big hit is achieved by executing the lottery of the second special symbol while the chance mode A is set, it is possible (easy) to pass through the V winning switch 65e3 at a rate of 100%. Since the jackpot type (big hit E, F) in which the opening / closing pattern of the specific winning opening 65a is set is determined, it is possible to increase the motivation of the player for the game when the chance mode A is set. Further, since the game in the normal mode can be performed with the expectation that not only the big hit but also the chance mode A is set, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, the details of the small hit type selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. 14 (b). The small hit type selection table 202e is a data table that is referred to for determining the type of small hit when a small hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol. In the small hit type selection table 202e, the corresponding small hit type is defined for each range of values of the small hit type counter C5.

As shown in FIG. 14B, "small hit A" is defined in association with the range in which the value of the small hit type counter C5 is "0 to 39". This "small hit A" is a small hit type in which chance mode A is set over 10 special symbol lottery after the end of the small hit. Of the 100 random values that the small hit type counter C5 can take, 40 are random values that are "small hit A", so if a small hit is obtained by a special symbol lottery, it will be "small hit A". The ratio is 40% (40/100).

Further, in the range where the value of the small hit type counter C5 is "40 to 79", "small hit B" is defined in association with each other. This "small hit B" is a small hit type in which chance mode A is set over a lottery of 20 special symbols after the end of the small hit. Of the 100 random values that the small hit type counter C5 can take, 40 are random values that are "small hit B", so if a small hit is obtained by a special symbol lottery, it will be "small hit B". The ratio is 40% (40/100).

Further, "small hit C" is defined in association with the range in which the value of the small hit type counter C5 is "80 to 99". This "small hit C" is a small hit type in which chance mode A is set over 100 special symbol lottery after the end of the small hit. Of the 100 random values that the small hit type counter C5 can take, 20 are random values that are "small hit C", so if a small hit is obtained by a special symbol lottery, it will be "small hit C". The ratio is 20% (20/100).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the small hit is used as an opportunity to shift to the chance mode A, which is more advantageous than the normal mode. In chance mode A, the fluctuation time of the 2nd special symbol becomes shorter (3 seconds), which is more advantageous than the lottery of the 1st special symbol (it is easy to set the consecutive villa mode when it becomes a big hit). Since the lottery is easy to be executed, the player can be made to play the game with a strong expectation that it will be a big hit. Further, in the normal mode, it is possible to shift to the chance mode A without going through the jackpot, so that the game can be intonation even if the jackpot has not been won for a long period of time. Therefore, even if a so-called big addiction occurs, the motivation of the player for the game can be maintained by sandwiching the chance mode A in between. Further, the length (number of lottery) of the chance mode A to be given is configured to be different for each small hit type. As a result, the player who senses that the hit has been made can be made to play the game with the expectation that the chance mode A is a small hit type that is set for a longer period of time. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, the details of the variation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 and 16. As described above, the fluctuation pattern table 202d defines a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the fluctuation display from the value (random value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

As shown in FIG. 15A, the fluctuation pattern table 202d includes a normal table 202d1 for determining a fluctuation pattern (variation time) in the normal mode, a consecutive villa mode (probability change state), and a chance mode B (time reduction). The table 202d2 for the consecutive villa / chance B for determining the fluctuation pattern in the state) and the table 202d3 for the chance A for determining the fluctuation pattern in the chance mode A are included at least.

First, the normal table 202d1 will be described with reference to FIG. 15 (b). FIG. 15B is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the normal table 202d1. As shown in FIG. 15B, the normal table 202d1 has a random number value (variation type counter value) for determining the type (variation time) of the fluctuation pattern for each type of the special symbol and the stop type of the special symbol. The counter value of CS1) is specified.

Specifically, when the lottery of the first special symbol results in a loss and a complete loss is determined as the stop type, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is a short deviation (7 seconds) in the range of "0 to 98". The patterns are associated with each other, and the variation pattern of the long deviation (10 seconds) is associated with the range of "99 to 198". In addition, when a special symbol is drawn out and the out-of-reach is determined as the stop type, various normal reach (30 seconds) are set in the range of "0 to 198" (that is, the entire range) as the value of the variable type counter CS1. Are associated with each other. In addition, in the case of a small hit, which is a kind of loss, in the lottery of the first special symbol, various super reach (60 seconds) are set in the range of "0 to 198" (that is, the entire range) as the value of the variable type counter CS1. ) Is associated.

On the other hand, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, various normal reach (30 seconds) are associated with the range of "0 to 50" as the value of the variable type counter CS1, and the range is "51 to 179". Various super reach (60 seconds) are associated, and various special reach (90 seconds) are associated in the range of "180 to 198". That is, 60 seconds is selected as the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display based on the lottery of the first special symbol only in the case of a small hit or a big hit. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the player will enter the chance mode A or become a big hit when the player develops into the super reach. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of security during the fluctuation time after recognizing that the game has been reversed to super reach. In addition, the special reach with a fluctuation time of 90 seconds can be selected only in the case of a big hit, so when the fluctuation time exceeds 60 seconds (developed into a special reach), the lottery result of the first special symbol this time will be displayed. It is possible to make the player recognize that it was a big hit. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a greater sense of satisfaction.

On the other hand, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the normal mode, an ultra-long fluctuation (600 seconds) occurs for all the values of the fluctuation type counter CS1 regardless of the lottery result of the second special symbol. It is associated. As a result, in the normal mode, when a game is played aiming at the second entrance 640 by right-handed in an attempt to execute an advantageous lottery of the second special symbol, at least once every 10 minutes (600 seconds). However, the lottery of special symbols is not executed, and the game efficiency can be extremely poor. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) an irregular game method in which the player always strikes right in the normal mode. As described above, the present embodiment employs a simultaneous variation method (a method in which the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel). Therefore, even if the ball enters the second entrance 640 maliciously in the normal mode due to a player's operation error or the like and the second special symbol is changed for 10 minutes, the ball is left-handed. By aiming at the first ball entry port 64, it is possible to execute the change of the first special symbol during the change of the second special symbol.

Next, with reference to FIG. 16A, the details of the consecutive villa / chance B table 202d2 included in the fluctuation pattern table 202d will be described. As described above, the consecutive villa / chance B table 202d2 is a table used for determining the fluctuation pattern in the consecutive villa mode (probability change state) and the chance mode B (time saving state).

In this consecutive villa / chance B table 202d2, the same fluctuation pattern (variation time) when the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same stop type and the same fluctuation type counter CS1 value. Is configured to be determined. Specifically, when the lottery of the special symbol is missed and the stop type is determined to be completely missed, a short miss (7 seconds) is associated with the range where the value of the variable type counter CS1 is "0 to 190". , The range of "191 to 198" is associated with a long deviation (10 seconds). In this way, in the consecutive villa mode (probability change state) and chance mode B (time saving state), the percentage will be short out compared to the normal mode when the special symbol lottery is decided to be out of order and the stop type is completely out of order. Is configured to be high. As a result, it is possible to improve the game efficiency in the consecutive villa mode and the chance mode B, which are more advantageous to the player than in the normal mode.

In addition, when a special symbol is drawn out and the reach is determined to be out of reach as the stop type, various normal reach (30 seconds) are set in the range of "0 to 198" (that is, the entire range) as the value of the variable type counter CS1. Are associated with each other. In addition, in the case of a small hit, which is a kind of loss, in the lottery of the first special symbol, various super reach (60 seconds) are set in the range of "0 to 198" (that is, the entire range) as the value of the variable type counter CS1. ) Is associated.

On the other hand, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, various normal reach (30 seconds) are associated with the range of "0 to 50" as the value of the variable type counter CS1, and the range is "51 to 179". Various super reach (60 seconds) are associated, and various special reach (90 seconds) are associated in the range of "180 to 198".

In this way, in the consecutive villa mode (probability change state) in which the consecutive villa / chance B table 202d2 is set, and in the chance mode B (time saving state), unlike the normal mode, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed. The fluctuation time determined in is the same as the lottery of the first special symbol. As a result, the lottery of the second special symbol can be efficiently executed by launching the ball aiming at the second entrance 640 by right-handed hitting. That is, when it becomes a big hit, it becomes an advantageous state in which a probabilistic state is easily given. Therefore, it is possible to play the game with a stronger expectation that it will be a big hit.

Next, the details of the chance A table 202d3 included in the fluctuation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. 16B. As described above, the chance A table 202d3 is a table used for determining the fluctuation pattern in the chance mode A.

In the chance A table 202d3, the correspondence relationship between the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display based on the lottery of the first special symbol and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the same as that of the normal table 202d1. Therefore, detailed description will be omitted. On the other hand, the fluctuation time of the variation display based on the lottery of the second special symbol is determined to be 3 seconds regardless of the lottery result of the second special symbol. That is, since the fluctuation time is shorter than the fluctuation display executed based on the lottery of the first special symbol, the game efficiency is better by hitting right at the second entrance 640 than hitting left. Become. Therefore, since the lottery of the advantageous second special symbol can be efficiently executed, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

As described above, in the chance mode A, when a small hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, a specific period (the lottery of the special symbol is completed 10, 20, or 100 times) is completed after the end of the small hit. (Until) is set. Since the lottery of the first special symbol is easy to be executed in the normal mode, by shifting from the normal mode to the chance mode A via the small hit, it is possible to make the player advantageous state without going through the big hit. .. Therefore, in the normal mode, even if the jackpot is not won for a long period of time (even if a so-called big addiction occurs), the player's motivation for the game can be maintained by sandwiching the chance mode A in between. can. Further, as described above, the length (number of lottery) of the chance mode A to be given is configured to be different for each small hit type. As a result, the player who senses that the hit has been made can be made to play the game with the expectation that the chance mode A is a small hit type that is set for a longer period of time. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the first embodiment, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the chance mode A, the fluctuation pattern of 3 seconds is uniformly set regardless of the lottery result, but this is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. It may be arbitrarily determined within a range in which right-handed is more advantageous than left-handed. For example, if the lottery for the second special symbol is missed, a uniform fluctuation pattern of 3 seconds is set, and if it is a win, the same fluctuation pattern as when the lottery for the first special symbol is won is selected. It may be configured.

Next, the details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a block diagram showing a configuration of RAM 203 of the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 17, the RAM 203 includes a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, a first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d, and a second. Special symbol holding ball number counter 203e, normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f, probability variation counter 203g, probability variation setting flag 203h, probability variation passing counter 203i, winning number counter 203j, operation counter 203k, remaining ball timer flag 203m, remaining ball timer 203n, Probability change effective flag 203o, Probability change effective timer 203p, Discharge number counter 203q, Time saving medium counter 203r, Hit flag 203s, Special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203t, Special figure 2 Fluctuation time counter 203u, Big hit medium flag 203v, Small hit medium flag 203w , Chance mode counter 203x, abnormality monitoring flag 203y, abnormality monitoring counter 203aa, and other memory area 203z.

The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these areas has a random number per first. Each value of the counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball wins the first ball opening 64 (starting winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding number). Among the vacant areas (1st area to 4th area on hold), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the time-old winning prize is stored, and the data corresponding to the time-oldest winning prize is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is the execution area. Based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area after being shifted (moved) to, a determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is performed.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) whose area number is 1 smaller. Will be done. In the present embodiment, in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data is shifted only in the holding area (holding second area to holding fourth area) in which the winning data is stored.

The second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four holding areas, similarly to the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. In the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, each counter value acquired based on the start winning to the second entry port 640 is stored. Since the method of storing the counter value is the same as that of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Like the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding). It has a fourth area). A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the sphere passes through the through gate 67, and the acquired data is vacant in four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Among the existing areas, the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, similarly to the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, the winning order is maintained and the data corresponding to the winning is stored. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the lottery for winning the normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the counter C4 stored in the hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area (moved), a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty, so that it is the same as in the case of the 1st special symbol hold ball storage area 203a and the 2nd special symbol hold ball storage area 203b. In addition, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding area is packed into the holding area one smaller than the area number. Also, the data shift is performed only in the holding area where the winning data is stored.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d displays fluctuations (third) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry of balls into the first entry port 64 (starting prize). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the symbol display device 81 (variation display) up to a maximum of four times. The initial value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and the maximum value is 4 each time a ball enters the first entry port 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases. Is added by 1 (see S1304 in FIG. 39). On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see S303 in FIG. 29).

The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (holding number N1 of the variation display in the first special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (S304 in FIG. 29, FIG. 39). (See S1305). The hold ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 displays the fluctuation displayed on the main control device 110 by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d is changed. The value of the number of reserved balls itself can be obtained. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b2 of the voice lamp control device 113 is increased by the influence of noise and the like, and the main control device. Even if there is a deviation from the actual number of reserved balls held in 110, the deviation can be corrected by the next received number of reserved balls command.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and each time the number of reserved balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of reserved balls. Send a ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is a variable display (third) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the ball entering the second entry port 640 (starting prize). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the symbol display device 81 (variation display) up to a maximum of four times. The initial value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is set to zero, and the maximum value is 4 each time a ball enters the second entry port 640 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases. Is added by 1 (see S1310 in FIG. 39). On the other hand, the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see S903 in FIG. 35). The value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is also notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command, similarly to the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f sets the number of reserved balls (waiting number) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the balls in the through gate 67 up to four times. It is a counter that counts up to. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4 ( See S1504 in FIG. 41). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S1405 in FIG. 40).

When the sphere passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved sphere counter 203f (the number of times the variable display is held M in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired. , The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S1505 in FIG. 41). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S1503: No in FIG. 41). ).

The probability variation counter 203g is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability variation state of the special symbol (high probability state of the special symbol), and if the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is special. It indicates that the symbol is in the probability variation state, and if the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (low probability state of the special symbol). Further, as described above, in the probabilistic state of the special symbol, the time is shortened of the normal symbol. Therefore, if the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more, it indicates that the special symbol is in the probability variation state and the normal symbol is in the time saving state (the consecutive villa mode).

The initial value of the probability variation counter 203g is set to 0, and when the ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3 during the jackpot, 101 is set at the end of the jackpot (see S2202 in FIG. 48). Further, in the game state update process (see FIG. 30) executed when the variation display of the first special symbol or the variation display of the second special symbol is started, the value is subtracted by 1 (see S402 in FIG. 30). ). Further, the value of the probability variation counter 203g is reset to 0 when the jackpot game is started (see S707 in FIG. 33 and S1207 in FIG. 38).

The probability variation counter 203g is referred to in order to determine whether or not the gaming state is the probability variation state in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 31) and the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 36). (See S502 in FIG. 31 and S1002 in FIG. 36). Specifically, when the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 31, S306) and the second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 36, S906) are executed, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 31, S306) and the second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 36, S906), the value of the probability variation counter 203g is referred to, and if the value is 1 or more, the probability is high. While the special symbol is drawn based on the first random number table 202a for time, if the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0, the special symbol is based on the first random number table 202a for low probability time. Lottery will be held.

The probability variation counter 203g is also referred to in order to determine whether or not the gaming state is the time saving state in the normal symbol variation processing (S1408 and S1414 in FIG. 40). Specifically, the value of the probability variation counter 203g and the value of the time saving / medium counter 203r are referred to in the normal symbol variation processing, and if any of the counter values is 1 or more, the second hit random number for high probability time is used. While the lottery of ordinary symbols is performed based on the table 202c, if the values of the probability variation counter 203g and the time saving / medium counter 203r are both 0, the ordinary symbols are drawn based on the second random number table 202c for low probability time. A lottery will be held. Further, in the normal symbol variation processing, it is also referred to when determining the opening time of the electric accessory 640a when the normal symbol hits (see S1414 in FIG. 40).

The probability change setting flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the game state to the probability change state after the big hit game. In the pachinko machine 10, whether or not the gaming state is set to the probabilistic state is determined by whether or not the ball has passed the V winning switch 65e3 (see FIG. 6A) during the jackpot game. Here, when the ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON (S2312 in FIG. 49). On the other hand, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to off at the end of the jackpot (see S2206 in FIG. 48). The probability change setting flag 203h is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). Further, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, it is set to off.

When the probability change setting flag 203h is set to on when the power is turned on, it is determined whether the V winning switch 65e3 has passed before the power is turned off, and if it can be determined that the flag has passed, the probability change setting is set. The flag 203h may be officially set to on and configured to return. In this case, whether or not the V winning switch 65e3 is passed before the power is turned off can be determined by whether or not the probability variation passing counter 203i, which will be described later, has a value larger than 0. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the damage on the amusement store side by determining fraud such that only the probability change setting flag 203h is turned on and the power is turned on again when the power is turned off. can.

The probability variation passing counter 203i is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the V winning switch 65e3 in one round during the jackpot game (in the present embodiment, one round of the jackpot). It should be noted that it is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls that have won a prize in the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 have been discharged from the sum of the probability variation passing counter 203i and the discharge number counter 203q described later. The probability variation passage counter 203i is updated by adding one by one when passing through the V winning switch 65e3 (S2311 in FIG. 49). Further, after executing the process of checking whether the number of game balls won in the variable winning device 65 and the number of ejected balls match, the initial value is reset to "0" (S2411 in FIG. 50). The probability variation pass counter 203i is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

The winning number counter 203j is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have won a prize in the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 in one round in the jackpot game. Specifically, based on the detection that the game ball has passed through the detection port 65a1 (see FIG. 4) provided in the variable winning device 65, the game ball is added and updated one by one (S2303 in FIG. 49). .. On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of prizes won in the variable winning device 65 (the value of the winning number counter 203j) and the number discharged (the total value of the discharge number counter 203q and the probability variation passing counter 203i) are one. After it is determined whether or not it is done, it is reset to the initial value "0" (see S2411 in FIG. 50). The value of the winning number counter 203j is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

The operation counter 203k is a counter for measuring (counting) the time when the flow path solenoid (probability variation solenoid) 65k is set to be on (excited). In the present embodiment, when one round of jackpot is started, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to be on for 3 seconds (see FIG. 7). The operation counter 203k is set with a counter value corresponding to 3 seconds when one round of jackpots is started. On the other hand, in the process of S2309 of the winning process (FIG. 49, S2113) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the value is subtracted and updated one by one. Further, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to off based on the determination that the value of the operation counter 203k is 0. The operation counter 203k is backed up when the power is turned off, and in the initialized state, an initial value of 0 is set.

The remaining ball timer flag 203m is a flag indicating that the opening / closing plate 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is closed in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON, it indicates that the opening / closing plate 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is set from the open state to the closed state in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON, the remaining ball timer 203n, which will be described later, is added and updated one by one (see S2405 in FIG. 50). The remaining ball timer 203n is a counter for determining the time since the opening / closing plate 65f1 is closed, and is for determining whether the time required for the game ball in the variable winning device 65 to be discharged has elapsed. It is a counter of.

The remaining ball timer 203n is a game in which the variable winning device 65 is won when the preset one round (one round of the jackpot in the present embodiment) is completed and the opening / closing plate 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is closed. It is a counter for determining whether the time required for the ball to be ejected has elapsed. In the present embodiment, the time required for the game ball winning the variable winning device 65 to be discharged is 2 seconds, and in the present embodiment, the counter value corresponding to 3 seconds in advance is the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203n. Is set as. Based on the upper limit of the remaining ball timer 203n (3 seconds in the present embodiment), it is determined whether or not the number of winnings to the variable winning device 65 and the number of ejected pieces match (3 seconds). S2407 in FIG. 50). If they do not match, an error command is set to notify that fact. Therefore, it is possible to notify at an early stage that the game ball is jammed in the variable winning device 65. In addition, the ball is illegally left inside the variable winning device 65, and the ball flows down after the next big hit round is started (that is, after it is in a state where it can flow down to the special discharge flow path 65e2). It is possible to detect at an early stage a fraudulent act of letting the player pass the V winning switch 65e3.

If the number of winnings and the number of dischargeds do not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON, and if that flag is ON, the probability change setting flag 203h even if the game ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3. May not be set to on. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an illegally assigned probabilistic state.

The probability variation effective flag 203o is a flag for determining whether or not the passage is valid when the game ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3 after the flow path solenoid 65k is set to off. When the probability variation effective flag 203o is set to ON, the game ball flowing into the special discharge flow path 65e2 (see FIG. 6A) wins a V prize based on the flow path solenoid 65k being ON. It shows that it is less than or equal to the time required to pass the switch 65e3. That is, it indicates that it is a normal period for the game ball to pass through the V winning switch 65e3.

The probability change effective timer 203p is a counter for counting the time after the above-mentioned probability change effective flag 203o is set to ON. After the flow path solenoid 65k is turned off by the probability variation effective timer 203p, it is possible to determine the period required for normally passing through the V winning switch 65e3. In the present embodiment, the time required for the game ball entering the special discharge flow path 65e2 to pass through the V winning switch 65e3 is 1 second. The upper limit value of the probability variation effective timer 203p is set to a counter value corresponding to 1.2 seconds, and even if the V winning switch 65e3 is passed after that, it is determined to be invalid and is not determined to be passed.

As a result, in a state where the switching member 65h is not guided to the special discharge flow path 65e2 (see FIG. 6B), the ball is illegally entered into the special discharge flow path 65e2 and the game ball is passed through the V winning switch 65e3. It is possible to suppress damage caused by fraud such as pushing up a game ball from below the V winning switch 65e3 with a piano wire or the like to pass it, or causing a magnetic sensor to erroneously detect it as passing by radio waves or the like.

The discharge number counter 203q is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 (see FIG. 6A) in one round. The discharge number counter 203q is reset to an initial value of 0 after the number of game balls won in the variable winning device 65 and the number of discharges are determined (S2411 in FIG. 50).

The time saving medium counter 203r is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols in the time saving state. At this time, the time reduction / medium counter 203r is set to 101 when the probability variation setting flag is off at the end of the jackpot game. At this time, the time saving / medium counter 203r is subtracted by 1 in the game state update process executed when the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started, similarly to the probability variation counter 203g (FIG. 30). S404). By configuring the time saving state to end at the start of the fluctuation, the 101st fluctuation display is started after the time saving state (chance mode B) is set after the big hit, and the 100th fluctuation display is in the middle. However, the time saving state is terminated.

The hit flag 203s indicates that the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired based on the entry into the first entry port 64 or the second entry port 640 is a big hit or a small hit at the start of fluctuation. This is a flag that is set to ON when it is determined (see S507 in FIG. 31 and S1007 in FIG. 36). The hit flag 203s is set to off when displaying the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit or the small hit (see S707 in FIG. 33 and S1207 in FIG. 38). A 2-bit storage area is assigned to the hit flag 203s, and information corresponding to the first special symbol is stored in the upper bit and the information corresponding to the second special symbol is stored in the lower bit. More specifically, if the winning flag 203s is "10H", it means that the lottery of the first special symbol is a big hit or a small hit, and that the lottery result is being displayed in a variable manner. On the other hand, if the winning flag 203s is "01H", it means that the lottery of the second special symbol is a big hit and the variable display indicating the lottery result is in progress. On the other hand, if the hit flag 203s is "00H", it indicates that neither the big hit fluctuation nor the small hit fluctuation is executed.

If either one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set to on first at the start of fluctuation, the winning flag 203s may be a big hit or a small hit even if the other lottery result is a big hit or a small hit. , The winning flag 203s is not overwritten, and the other lottery result is processed in the same manner as the loss. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the first special symbol and the second special symbol from simultaneously executing the variable display that triggers the opening of the specific winning opening 65a. That is, when the fluctuation display that becomes a big hit is started in one of the special symbols, the fluctuation display that becomes a big hit or a small hit is not started in the other, and only the out-of-order fluctuation mode is displayed. NS.

In the present embodiment, the hit flag 203s common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol is configured, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol have independent hit flags. It may be set so that the first special symbol and the second special symbol simultaneously execute a variable display that is a big hit or a small hit. With such a configuration, even if the fluctuation display that becomes the jackpot D is started in the first special symbol during the probability variation state, the fluctuation time is set long and the fluctuation time is short in the second special symbol. By making it easy to be drawn by, it is possible to easily make a big hit with the second special symbol before the big hit D is started. Therefore, the player is informed of the time until the jackpot D is started (that is, the period until the probability variation game state ends), and the player is hurriedly won the jackpot with the second special symbol. It is possible to perform an effect of playing a game in an attempt to make it play. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a fresh effect. As a result, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

The special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203t is a counter for counting the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. When the variation pattern of the first special symbol is selected, the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set (S609 in FIG. 32). After that, in the process of S701 of the first special symbol variation stop process (FIGS. 33 and S204), the counter value (one by one in this embodiment) corresponding to the elapsed variation time is subtracted and updated.

The special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203u is a counter for counting the fluctuation time of the second special symbol. When the variation pattern of the second special symbol is selected, the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set (S1109 in FIG. 37). After that, in the process of S1201 of the second special symbol variation stop process (FIGS. 38 and S207), the counter value (one by one in this embodiment) corresponding to the elapsed variation time is subtracted and updated.

The jackpot flag 203v is a flag indicating whether or not the jackpot is being hit. If the jackpot flag 203v is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot, and if it is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the jackpot. The jackpot middle flag 203v is set to on at the start of the jackpot in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 47, S2004) (see S2104 in FIG. 47). On the other hand, it is set to off in the jackpot end processing executed at the end of the jackpot (see S2206 in FIG. 48).

The small hit medium flag 203w is a flag indicating whether or not the small hit is in progress. When the small hit medium flag 203w is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a small hit, and when it is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is not in a small hit. The small hit medium flag 203w is set to be on at the start of the small hit in the small hit control process (see FIG. 51, S2005) (see S2503 in FIG. 51). On the other hand, it is set to off at the end of the small hit (see S2510 in FIG. 51).

The chance mode counter 203x is a counter indicating whether or not the present is the chance mode A. If the value of the chance mode counter 203x is 1 or more, it means that the present is the chance mode A. Therefore, when selecting the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the above-mentioned chance A table 202d3. Will be done. On the other hand, if the value of the chance mode counter 203x is 0, it means that the current state is other than the chance mode A (normal mode, consecutive villa mode, or chance mode B). (Any of the normal table 202d1 and the consecutive villa / chance B table 202d2) is read from the fluctuation pattern table 202d and used to determine the fluctuation pattern (variation time). The chance mode counter 203x is set with a value corresponding to the small hit type when a small hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol (see S803, S805, and S806 in FIG. 34). On the other hand, when the variable display of the special symbol is started, the value is subtracted by 1 (see S406 in FIG. 30).

The abnormality monitoring flag 203y is a flag for determining whether or not the player is playing a game in a correct game method (a game method advantageous to the player) according to the current game state. If this abnormality monitoring flag 203y is on, it indicates that the player may be playing a game in an illegal (disadvantageous) game method, and if it is off, the player is playing in the correct game method. Indicates that you are doing.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is shortened in the consecutive villa mode (probability change state), chance mode A, and chance mode B (see FIGS. 16A and 16B). The lottery of the second special symbol becomes easy to be executed. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player to play the game aiming at the second entrance 640 by right-handed hitting, so right-handed hitting is the correct game method. In this case, the lottery is usually executed by the second special symbol, and the player plays the game by an illegal (unfavorable) game method during the period when the game is executed by the first special symbol. Therefore, the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is set to on. When this abnormality monitoring flag 203y is set to ON, the period during which the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is continuously set to ON is timed by the abnormality monitoring counter 203aa described later, and a predetermined time (20 seconds in this embodiment). When the above is achieved, the abnormality notification (displaying the voice and the warning image) is executed.

Also, in the normal mode (normal state in which chance mode A is not set), it is the correct game method to play with a left-handed hit, but the second entrance 640 or normal, which should only be entered with a right-handed hit. When it is determined that the ball has entered the ball entry port 67 and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol or the fluctuation display of the normal symbol has been executed, the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is set to ON and the abnormality notification is executed. It is configured as follows.

The abnormality monitoring counter 203aa is a counter for timing (counting) a period in which a game is likely to be performed by an illegal game method. When the value of the abnormality monitoring counter 203aa reaches the count value corresponding to 20 seconds, the abnormality notification is executed. The value of the abnormality monitoring counter 203aa is updated by 1 when the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is turned on during the fraud monitoring process (see S1702 in FIG. 43). On the other hand, if the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is off, it is reset to 0 (see S1705 in FIG. 43).

The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

Next, the details of the mode transition performed by using the various tables provided in the ROM 202, the various flags provided in the RAM 203, the counter, and the like will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, four types of modes are provided. Specifically, the "normal mode" and the "chance mode A" set in the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol) and the probabilistic state (high probability state of the special symbol). In addition, a "renso mode" set as a normal symbol time saving state) and a "chance mode B" set as a time saving state (a low probability state of a special symbol and a time saving state of a normal symbol) are provided. ing.

The "normal mode" shown on the upper left side of FIG. 18 is the most disadvantageous state for the player because it is difficult to execute the lottery of the second special symbol. Since it is difficult to execute the lottery of the second special symbol, it is advantageous for the player to execute the lottery of the first special symbol by launching the ball aiming at the first entry port 64. As shown in the upper left of FIG. 18, in the "normal mode", there is a possibility of shifting to another mode by winning a small hit or a big hit in a special symbol lottery. Specifically, if a special symbol is drawn for a big hit and the big hit types are big hits A and B, the mode shifts to the "renso mode". If the ball does not pass through the V winning switch 65e3 due to the fact that the ball was not launched in the first round of the jackpot, the "renso mode" may be set even if the jackpot is A or B. No (chance mode B is set).

In addition, if a special symbol lottery results in a big hit and the big hit type is big hit C, the mode shifts to "chance mode B". In the first round of the jackpot, if the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a during the extremely short opening period of the opening / closing plate 65f1 and the ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3, even if the jackpot is C. , "Renso mode" is set (chance mode B is not set). Further, if a small hit is obtained in the special symbol lottery, the mode shifts to "chance mode A" after the small hit is completed. The number of lottery times in which this "chance mode A" continues differs depending on the type of small hit (see FIG. 14B).

The "chance mode A" shown on the upper right side of FIG. 18 is the same as the "normal mode" in the game state (low probability state of the special symbol and normal state of the normal symbol), but the second special symbol. Since the fluctuation pattern table (table 202d3 for chance A) having a short fluctuation time (3 seconds) of the fluctuation display is referred to, this mode makes it easier for the second special symbol to be drawn as compared with the “normal mode”. As described above, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol, as an opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1, a pattern (opening / closing pattern with a long opening time) in which the ball is likely to pass through the V winning switch 65e3 is used. Since it is always set, it is more advantageous for the player than a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol. Therefore, even though they are in the same gaming state, they can be in a more advantageous state than the "normal mode".

In this "chance mode A", there is a possibility of shifting to another mode when a big hit is made or when a specified number of special symbol lottery is executed after the chance mode A is set. Specifically, a big hit is obtained by a lottery of a special symbol, and when either of the big hits E and F is obtained, the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1 is such that the ball easily passes through the V winning switch 65e3 (see the lower part of FIG. 7). Is set, so that the jackpot mode is set to the "renso mode" when the ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3. Even if the jackpot is either E or F, if the ball does not pass through the V winning switch 65e3 during the jackpot, the game does not shift to the "renso mode" (only the time saving state of the normal symbol is given). As a result, the mode shifts to chance mode B). Further, in the "chance mode A", when the lottery of the specified number of special symbols (10 times, 20 times, or 100 times) is completed without a big hit, the process returns to the "normal mode".

In this way, when the game state is the normal state, two types of modes, the disadvantageous "normal mode" and the more advantageous "chance mode A" than the "normal mode", can be switched back and forth. .. With this configuration, the degree of advantage can be switched according to the progress of the game even in the normal state, which is more disadvantageous than the "renso mode" and the "chance mode B". Therefore, even if it is not a big hit, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game from becoming monotonous, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

As described above, the "chance mode B" shown in the middle of FIG. 18 is a mode indicating a time saving state. In the time-saving state, as described above, the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed, so that it is advantageous for the player to launch the ball aiming at the second entrance 640 by right-handed hitting.

In this "chance mode B", there is a possibility of shifting to another mode when a big hit or a lottery of a specified number of special symbols (100 times) is executed after the chance mode B is set. be. Specifically, a big hit is obtained by a lottery of a special symbol, and when either of the big hits E and F is obtained, the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1 is such that the ball easily passes through the V winning switch 65e3 (see the lower part of FIG. 7). Is set, so that the jackpot mode is set to the "renso mode" when the ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3. Even if the jackpot is either E or F, if the ball does not pass through the V winning switch 65e3 during the jackpot, the game does not shift to the "renso mode" (only the time saving state of the normal symbol is given). As a result, chance mode B is looped). Further, in the "chance mode B", when the lottery of the specified number of special symbols (100 times) is completed without a big hit, the mode shifts to the "normal mode".

As described above, the "renso mode" shown in the lower part of FIG. 18 is a mode showing a probability change state. In the probabilistic state, as described above, the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed, and the probability of winning a big hit in the special symbol lottery is high (1/300 → 1/75), which is extremely advantageous for the player. It becomes.

In this "ream villa mode", if the lottery of the special symbol is executed a specified number of times (100 times) after the "ream villa mode" is set, there is a possibility of shifting to another mode. Specifically, in the "renso mode", when the lottery for the special symbol is missed 100 times in a row, the mode shifts (falls) to the "normal mode". On the other hand, basically, the jackpot does not shift to another mode (loops the "renso mode"). Therefore, in the "renso mode", the probability of winning a big hit in the special symbol lottery becomes high, and when the big hit occurs, the "renso mode" is set as the game state after the big hit. , It becomes an extremely advantageous mode in which the jackpot and the "renso mode" are easily repeated. Therefore, since the player can play the game with one goal of shifting to the "renso mode", it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game. Even if the special symbol lottery results in jackpots E and F, if the ball does not pass through the V winning switch 65e3 during the jackpot, the "renso mode" will not be looped and chance mode B will be entered. And migrate.

As described above, in the present embodiment, a plurality of gaming states having different degrees of advantage are switched back and forth. In addition to going back and forth between different gaming states, it is possible to go back and forth between modes with different degrees of advantage in the same gaming state. That is, in the most unfavorable normal state, the degree of advantage can be different depending on the situation of the game. Therefore, even if the lottery of special symbols continues for a long period of time, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game from becoming monotonous due to the change in the degree of advantage.

Returning to FIG. 11, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is used to open and close the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, and the opening / closing plate 65f1 for closing or opening the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205.

Further, various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115 are connected to the input / output port 205, and the MPU 201 is connected to the MPU 201. Various processes are executed based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as, I / O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 44) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 51a that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variable display effect (variable display effect). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as (variable display). The arithmetic unit MPU 221 has a ROM 222 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221 and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed, or at the time of super reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the content of the effect, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and displays and controls an error command including the type of the error. It is transmitted to the device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

Next, the details of the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 19A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 19A, the ROM 222 has at least a variation pattern selection table 222a.

In the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a, the voice lamp control device 113 is based on the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110, and the rough fluctuation content (variation time, fluctuation type (reach, deviation, etc.) indicated by the fluctuation pattern command) is shown. ) To determine more detailed fluctuations. Thereby, a wider variety of variation modes can be determined. Here, one of a plurality of types of variation mode is determined by lottery with respect to the rough variation content instructed by the main control device 110.

Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 19 (b). FIG. 19B is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. The RAM 223 includes a command storage area 223a, a first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b1, a second special symbol holding ball number counter 223b2, a special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223c1, and a special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223c2. Special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223d1, special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223d2, secondary special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223e, secondary special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223f, effect counter 223g, and game state storage area 223h. And other memory areas 223z are provided at least.

The command storage area 223a is an area in which various commands output from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 are temporarily stored until processing for the commands is executed. Specifically, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 54) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a is read out, and the command determination process performs the command determination process. , The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b2 are fluctuation effects (variation display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the fluctuation effect held in the main control device 110 up to 4 times for each type of special symbol. The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 corresponds to the number of reserved balls of the variable effect based on the lottery of the first special symbol, and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 corresponds to the variable effect based on the lottery of the first special symbol. Corresponds to the number of reserved balls.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110, and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. The value of the counter 203e cannot be acquired. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and counts the number of reserved balls counter 223b1 and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b2. In, the number of reserved balls is managed for each type of special symbol.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls in the variable display is added by entering the balls into the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640, or in the main control device 110, a special symbol is used. When the fluctuation display in the above is executed and the number of reserved balls is subtracted, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d after addition or subtraction, or the value of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e is indicated. The ball number command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command from the hold ball number command to the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 or the second special symbol. The value of the reserved ball number counter 203e is acquired and stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b2 (see S4211 in FIG. 54). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the values of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 223b1 and the second special symbol hold ball number counter 223b2 according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. , The value can be updated while synchronizing with the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110.

The values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b2 are used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b2 in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command. At the same time, in order to notify the display control device 114 of the values of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 223b1 and the second special symbol hold ball number counter 223b2 after storage, a display hold ball number command is sent to the display control device 114. Send.

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, the value of the hold ball number indicated by the command, that is, the first special symbol hold ball number counter 223b1 and the second special symbol of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the value of the reserved ball number counter 223b2 is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b1 and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223b2 are the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. Its value is changed while synchronizing with. Therefore, the number of reserved sphere symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 is also the value of the first special symbol reserved sphere counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved sphere counter 203e of the main control device 110. Can be changed while synchronizing with. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is reserved.

The special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223c1 and the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223c2 receive the fluctuation pattern command of the first special symbol and the fluctuation pattern command of the second special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110, respectively. It is turned on (see S4205 and S4208 in FIG. 54) and turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see S4402 and S4407 in FIG. 55). When the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223c1 and the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223c2 are turned on, the display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

When the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223d1 and the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223d2 receive the stop type command of the first special symbol and the stop type command of the second special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110. (See S4202 in FIG. 54), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see S4412 in FIG. 55). When the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223d1 or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223d2 is turned on, the stop type is changed based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type). It is determined.

The sub-special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223e and the sub-special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223f are counters for counting the fluctuation time of the first special symbol and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, respectively.

The effect counter 223 g is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, and the like. The effect counter 223g is composed of a 1-byte loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 198, and the value is added and updated by 1 each time the main process (see FIG. 53) is executed. ..

The game state storage area 223h is a storage area in which information corresponding to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is stored. Each time a state command output from the main control device 110 is received in the game state storage area 223h, the information corresponding to the state of the pachinko machine 10 indicated by the state command is updated (S4011, FIG. 52). See S4215 in FIG. 54). More specifically, the game state storage area 223h is allocated a storage area of 3 bits, and whether or not it is in the probabilistic state of the special symbol and whether or not it is in the time saving state of the normal symbol in order from the high-order bit. , A value indicating whether or not the chance mode A is set is stored. For example, if the value of the game state storage area 223h is "110H", it means that the special symbol is in the probabilistic state and the normal symbol is in the time saving state (that is, the consecutive villa mode), and if it is "010H". , It means that it is a low probability state of a special symbol and a time saving state of a normal symbol (that is, chance mode B), and if it is "001H", it means that it is a chance mode A. On the other hand, if the information stored in the game state storage area 223h is "000H", it means that the mode is normal.

By updating the game state storage area 223h in response to the state command output from the main control device 110, the state of the pachinko machine 10 can be accurately grasped by the voice lamp control device 113.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-mentioned data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 changes the display (variation) of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. It controls the production) and continuous notice production. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volt AC supplied from the outside, and has a voltage of 12 volt for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power cutoff, power cutoff) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volt. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time for executing the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 44).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236, the image controller 237, the input port 238, the output port 239, and the bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. .. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via the bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of winning a special symbol and the number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot are different, the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since there are models with exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display fluctuation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the fluctuation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads an instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, fetches the instruction code, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the MPU 231 is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), a system reset can be applied from the power supply device 115, and when the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is added by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value instructed by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional game machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, instead of storing the data.

Although details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, in general, the NAND flash memory 234a has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when random access is performed. For example, when reading data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading non-continuous data, it takes a long time to read the data. As described above, since the speed of reading the NAND flash memory 234a is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, the instructions constituting the control program can be read. It may take time, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. Since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later and data is read / written at high speed, the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores the control program executed in the MPU 231 and the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 described later of the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory 234a has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using a NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further store the control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, it is provided to store the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the control program and the fixed value data by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like is based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. Is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) occur when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or something. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b is known to perform known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and to avoid reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Performs data address translation.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the incorrect data. It is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in the individual NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When the address assigned to the character ROM 234 from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 is specified, the ROM controller 234b contains one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including the data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether or not the data of is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR flash 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can output the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or can be designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the assigned address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR type ROM 234d is the first program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be made executable in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in this boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified for the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Is set to, and the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds only one instruction pointer 231a, and assigns the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 is selected from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR type ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. It is stored in for the following reasons. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is peculiar to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data in reading the data on the first page. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from its read. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then gives an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231. As a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d among the boot programs. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 by setting to. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be started in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program includes a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. , The fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program is stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, in the MPU 231, first, the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined program storage area 233a. Set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a and reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instructions at high speed and execute the processing for the instructions.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has the remaining boot programs in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is set with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot program included in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data used in the control program (for example, the display data table and the transfer data table described later) are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Further, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 57) executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 57) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on the drawing list (see FIG. 26) described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and draws one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame in the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Process in parallel in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 59 (b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, in the image controller 237, since the drawing instruction of the next image is not received at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, in general, the NAND flash memory 234a facilitates a large capacity of the ROM, but the read speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to do. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, since the resident video RAM 235 is resident with image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained high.

Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing the image, but at the time of drawing the image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the above and the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. The end address (final address of the storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236). Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, those video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image can be drawn by the required time. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display the third symbol. The period during which the display process on the device 81 is unused can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is retained without being overwritten during the power-on, and when the power is turned on, the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. In addition to 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a variable image area 235b when the power is turned on and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

The main image area 235a at power-on is used as the main image at power-on to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 between the time the power is turned on and the time when all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is the area that stores the corresponding data. Further, in the fluctuating image area 235b when the power is turned on, the game is started by the player while the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a fluctuating image when the power is turned on, which displays the result of a lottery performed by the main control device 110 by a fluctuating effect when a ball entering the mouth 640 is detected.

When the power supply is started from the power supply unit 251 of the MPU 231, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 57).

Here, a variation image when the power is turned on will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 21, the power is turned on by the third symbol display device 81 while the display control device 114 is transferring the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 immediately after the power is turned on. It is explanatory drawing explaining the time image.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the main image area 235a at power-on, and the main image at power-on shown in FIG. 21 (a). The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

At this time, when the display fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is the instruction command for starting the fluctuation, the display control device 114 displays FIG. 21 (b). On the display screen of the main image when the power is turned on, as shown in FIG. At the same position as the symbol, the image of the “x” symbol that fluctuates when the power is turned on is displayed alternately and repeatedly during the fluctuation period. Then, from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 and the stop type command, the lottery performed by the main control device 110 is performed. Judging the result, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", the image shown in FIG. 21 (b) is displayed for a certain period of time after the variation effect is stopped, and if it is "out of the special symbol", it is shown in FIG. 21 (c). The displayed image is displayed for a certain period of time after the fluctuation effect is stopped.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can confirm the main image at power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has stopped. Can be done.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, when the power is turned on, the player starts the game while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball is detected at the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640. In this case, the power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the power-on variation image area 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 21B and 21C are alternated. Is instructed by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the fluctuation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the power is turned on. If a ball is detected in the first entry port 64 or the second entry port 640 while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect is displayed in the third symbol display. It can be displayed on the device 81 immediately.

Returning to FIG. 20, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 22, the back image and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c among the back images will be described. FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the four types of rear images and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each rear image, and FIG. 22A is an explanatory diagram showing " FIG. 22B shows the back side A corresponding to the "city stage", and the back sides B to D corresponding to the "forest stage", the "river stage", and the "sky stage", respectively. .. Further, FIG. 23 is shown with respect to the back surface E corresponding to the “island stage”.

As shown in FIG. 22, as the rear image corresponding to each of the rear surfaces A to D, an image longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is prepared in the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the rear image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared on the back surfaces A to D (hereinafter, referred to as "scrolling images") are configured so that the back image is continuous at the positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a'are composed of an image corresponding to the width of the display area in the horizontal direction, and the image between the position c and the position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then the image between the position a and the position a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The back image is scrolled and displayed in a simple connection.

When the back type change is decided based on the back type selection table and the stage is changed to "city stage", "forest stage", "river stage", or "empty stage", MPU231 will display the corresponding back image. First, the area between the position a and the position a'is set as the initial position of the display area, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image of the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and further, the display area is displayed. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as an image from the position a to the position a'. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the image between the positions a and c in a smooth connection so as to flow toward the left.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 23, the rear image on the back surface E has a third symbol in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) → ... In FIG. 23 with the passage of time. It is displayed on the display device 81. Specifically, on the back surface E, the image of the mountain towering over the island, the image of the sandy beach spreading at the foot of the mountain, and the image of the sea surrounding the island are displayed in a fixed position. It is displayed on the display device 81. On the other hand, the color tone of the sky image spreading on the mountain changes with the passage of time.

When the stage is changed to the "island stage", the rear image shown in FIG. 23A is displayed as the initial rear image of the back E. In the rear image shown in FIG. 23A, an orange sky indicating a morning glow is displayed. Then, with the passage of time, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to bright blue, and after a predetermined time elapses, the back image shown in FIG. 23B is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 23B, a bright blue sky indicating daytime is displayed. Next, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from bright blue to black with the lapse of time, and after a lapse of a predetermined time, the back image shown in FIG. 23 (c) is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 23 (c), a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, with the passage of time, the color tone of the sky gradually begins to turn white from black and then changes to orange. Then, after the lapse of a predetermined time, the image returns to the back image shown in FIG. 23 (a), and the back images of FIGS. 23 (a) to 23 (c) are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 again.

Next, in each back image, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 22A, the back surface A corresponding to the city stage, which is the initial stage, has the entire range of the back surface A, that is, the back surface of the resident video RAM 235 in which all the image data corresponding to the position a to the position d are recorded. It is stored in the image area 235c. Normally, the game is played without changing the stage while the initial stage "city stage" is displayed, so the image data on the back A corresponding to the frequently displayed "city stage" is displayed. By making all of them resident in the rear image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, the back surface B corresponding to the "forest stage", the back surface C corresponding to the "river stage", and the back surface D corresponding to the "empty stage" are a part of the back surface as shown in FIG. 22 (b). That is, only the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b is stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Further, the back surface E corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 23 (a), and the image data corresponding to the back image between FIGS. 23 (a) to 23 (b) excluding FIG. 23 (b) is obtained after the power is turned on. It is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and is resident in the start-up process.

Here, in order to change the rear image immediately, it is ideal to make the entire range of image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 for all the rear images, but if this is done, the resident video RAM 235 will be resident. As a result, a very large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image first displayed when the stage is changed is set to the range from the position a to the position a'(or the range of FIGS. 23 (a) to 23 (b)). ), And the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b (or the image between FIGS. 23 (a) and 23 (b)) including the initial position is transferred to the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Since the character ROM 234 is configured to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 even if the character ROM 234 is configured with a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, when the stage change is decided by the lottery at the start of the fluctuation, the back surface of the resident video RAM 235. By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial positions of the back surfaces B to D can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the scroll display or the color tone changes with the passage of time. It can be displayed while making it. Further, since only the image data corresponding to a part of the range of images is stored in the back surfaces B to D, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 and suppress an increase in cost.

Further, on the back surfaces B to D, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the range from the position a to the position b is directed from left to right using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. While scrolling, the range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b'to the position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. As a result, the image data from the position b'to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while scrolling the range from the position a to the position b, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. After scrolling the range from position a to position b using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from position b'to position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

Similarly, on the back surface E, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the images of FIGS. 23 (a) to 23 (b) are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. 23 (a), so that the image data of the images corresponding to FIGS. 23 (b) to (c) and 23 (c) to (a) can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. The range of ~ (b) is set. As a result, while displaying the images of FIGS. 23 (a) to 23 (b), the image data corresponding to the images of FIGS. 23 (b) to (c) and 23 (c) to (a) is normally used. Since it can be transferred to the video RAM 236, the images of FIGS. 23 (a) to 23 (b) are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Using the image data corresponding to the rear image, the images of FIGS. 23 (b) to (c) and 23 (c) to (a) are sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time. be able to.

In the backs B to E, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 20) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be reliably displayed.

Further, in the backs B to D, the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 correspond to the images between the positions b'and b. Image data to be stored is duplicated and stored. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video is displayed. By displaying the image from the position b'on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the rear image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a smooth connection. ing.

Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data of the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. do. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with a smooth connection so that the image between the positions a and c flows toward the left.

Returning to FIG. 20, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main symbols (see FIG. 6) with numbers “0” to “9”, which are the third symbols, are resident. As a result, when performing a variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 You can start the variable effect quickly. Therefore, even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37 after the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640, the third symbol display device In 81, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the variation effect is not immediately started.

Further, in the third symbol area 235d, as the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9", the main symbol consisting of the rear symbol such as a wooden box, the rear symbol and the character such as the furoshiki, the helmet, etc. Image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating the above is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed after one variation effect is stopped. Be done. As a result, when the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demo effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbol without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy", "old man", and "girl" are displayed according to various effects, and the data corresponding to these is displayed in the character design area 235e. By being resident, when the display control device 114 changes the character symbol based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but is resident. By reading the image data resident in the character symbol area 235e of the video RAM 235 in advance, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 causes a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 determines the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the sequential error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is sent after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that the data is overwritten and updated at any time, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 collects the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , Instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The image data transfer instruction is given by including the transfer data information in the drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. As a result, the MPU 231 can give an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to the frame buffer of either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While expanding the image and expanding the image in one frame buffer, the image information for one frame previously expanded is read from the other frame buffer, and the drive signal is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 is executed to display the image for one frame.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 expands the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer and simultaneously expands the image. The image for one frame previously expanded can be read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used for drawing the image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to complete, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffers 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, respectively.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. NS.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. NS. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing the work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counting counter 233h, and a stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a rear image change flag 233w, a rear image discrimination flag 233x, a demo display flag 233y, and a confirmation display flag 233z.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 subsequently executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained. Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated productions.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are described and display data for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110. This is an area in which the transfer data information of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and the transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table are stored.

These data tables are usually stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 subsequently controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 by using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device can be used. By using 81, it is possible to easily execute a diversified and complicated production.

Here, the details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect and an opening effect. , Display data tables corresponding to round production, ending production, and demo production are prepared.

The variation effect is an effect started by the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally displayed as a stop, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A and jackpot B. If any of the above, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally displayed as a stop. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

The opening production is a production for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special gaming state and the large opening that is normally closed will be repeatedly opened, and the round production will start from now on. This is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be played. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player of the end of the special gaming state.

As described above, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop of one variation effect. The third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demo effect is stored. Further, as the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effect, if there are 32 patterns of variation effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. 24. FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address represented by the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. The content (drawing content) of the image for one frame is defined in detail.

In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for identifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed enlarged from the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be reduced from the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for identifying a known α-blending coefficient used when performing a superposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...), and light in the image are drawn contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, and a character used for various effects such as a boy image and characters, is defined for each address. In addition, one or a plurality of information about the effect and the character is defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are displayed with respect to the passage of time. Since it is constant, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type is the back A to E corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of "city stage", "forest stage", "river stage", "sky stage", and "island stage"). Information is described that specifies whether to display one of them or to display a rear image different from the rear images A to E. Further, as the back surface type, when specifying to display a back image different from the back images A to E, information for specifying which back image is to be displayed is also described.

When it is specified that any of the back surfaces A to E is to be displayed by the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery among the back surfaces A to E as a drawing target. In addition, the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified according to the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back images A to E, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back type.

In the present embodiment, the case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table will be described. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are described. It may be specified as the position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed with respect to the frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from the start of drawing the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) of the image indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time from the display of the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81) according to the rear type. It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), or the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating the above) may be specified as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

In the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), the symbol type offset information is described as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before and the variation effect that is performed this time. This is because the symbol changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation to the elapse of a predetermined time, the offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is described. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Describe the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since each third symbol has a unique number, the fluctuation symbol in the previous variation effect and the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 can be selected as the third symbol. By managing with the numbers attached to and expressing the offset information by the difference of the numbers attached to each third symbol, it is possible to easily specify the third symbol to be displayed from the offset information.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is fluctuating at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. Therefore, during that time, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect that is being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

The start address "0000H" of the display data table is described with "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, and the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 24) is the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the display data table is obtained. Is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is added by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the pointer is then added. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 26) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed like the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is applied to the complicated and enormous processing of starting and executing a program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 may be limited, and the diversification of controllable production images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than game machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize.

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. 25. FIG. 25 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified by the display data table, it is resident. The transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

If all the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. Is described (corresponding to the addresses "0001H" and "097H" in FIG. 25). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (corresponding to the address "0002H" in FIG. 25).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

As with the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 25, in the example of FIG. 25). In "02F0H"), "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table. Is described.

When the display data table to be used is selected by the MPU 231 according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 26) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 25, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", since the Bull data is defined at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 receives display data in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Further, the transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and is associated with the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on images (main image at power-on and variable image at power-on) shown in FIGS. 21 (a) to 21 (c) on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to indicate. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on or the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM. , MPU 231 is set to on in the main process (see FIG. 57) (see S6005 in FIG. 57). Then, in order to display an image other than the image at the time of power-on on the third symbol display device 81 at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process of the transfer setting process. , Is set to off (see S7605 in FIG. 68 (b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 59 (b)), and is simplified. When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 59 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 59 (b)) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 59 (b) see S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is made so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. The processing (see FIGS. 60 to 64) and the display setting processing (see FIGS. 65 to 67) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S7501 in FIG. 68 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is turned on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 68 (b)) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because the resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 69) for transferring the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It is selected and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 is used for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 26), which will be described later, is generated in which the contents of instructions for drawing an image are described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is obtained for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 26), which will be described later, is generated in which drawing instructions are described. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing the Full data which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If (that is, if the Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a drawing list (see FIG. 26) described later that describes the instruction content for drawing an image to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 shifts the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address to acquire the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. 59 (b). ), The pointer update process (see S7205 in FIG. 65) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is added one by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and describes a drawing list described later. (See FIG. 26) is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add the information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

If the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller that draws an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing the drawing list instructed to 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 26, a back image used in the image of one frame and a third symbol (designs 1,). Symbol 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls Design 1, Number of reserved balls Symbol 2, ..., Error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described for each sprite such as (design). In addition, transfer data information for transferring predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 to the image controller 237 is also described in the drawing list.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information thereof. The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucent value. Performs conversion processing, synthesizes with other sprites according to α blending information, performs color tone correction processing according to color information, and performs filtering processing according to the filter specification information by the method specified by that information. Then, the image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying a hold ball number symbol). Based on the image, warning image notifying the occurrence of an error, etc.), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the sprite (display object) data are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 depends on the sprite type. Therefore, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, then the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls symbol 1, number of reserved balls symbol 2, ..., error symbol).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Further, when the transfer data information is described in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 describes the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source final address in ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a to store the transfer target image data) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes this transfer data information, the image controller 237 starts an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read out, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The timekeeping counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 stores one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 59 (b). ) Is executed, the time counting counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S7207 in FIG. 65). As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processes that should be performed.

The stored image data determination flag 233i stores the image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not it is present.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 57) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data discrimination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" indicating that the stored state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

Then, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 231. It is said. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite is always in the unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and of the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7713 in FIG. 69). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S7714 in FIG. 69). , The image controller 237 is made to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load on each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic on the bus line 240. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c) (hereinafter, referred to as “drawing target buffer”). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7802 in FIG. 70).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the previously expanded drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and displays the image with the drive signal for the third symbol display device 81. By transferring the information, the display process of displaying the image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated in accordance with the drawing target buffer information being transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, setting it to "1" if the value is "0" and "0" if the value is "1". Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the drawing list is transmitted by the V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed every time the drawing process of the process (see S6306 in FIG. 59 (b)) is executed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. NS.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. NS. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The rear image change flag 233w is a flag for determining whether or not to change the type of the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If the back image change flag 233w is on, it means that the type of the back image is changed, and if it is off, it means that the change is not performed. The rear image change flag 233w is set to on when the rear image change command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received (see S7001 in FIG. 64A). Further, the rear image change flag 233w is referred to in the normal image transfer setting process (see S7709 in FIG. 69), and is set to off when the rear image change process is executed (see S7710 in FIG. 69). As a result, the rear image corresponding to the rear image change command and the effect mode change command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be displayed.

The rear image discrimination flag 233x is a flag indicating the set rear image type. This flag is composed of, for example, 1 byte, and each back type is associated with each bit. If any bit of the back image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the back type corresponding to the on bit is set as the current back type. For example, if the 0th bit of the rear image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the rear surface A is set. When the rear image change command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received, the bit corresponding to the rear image notified by the command is set to on for the rear image discrimination flag 233x (FIG. 64 (a). ) S7002). At this time, all other bits are set to off. With this back image discrimination flag 233x, the currently set back type can be easily specified.

The demo display flag 233y is a flag indicating whether or not the demo is being produced. If the demo display flag 233y is on, it means that the demo is being produced, and if it is off, it means that the demo is not being produced. This demo display flag 233y is set to on when the demo display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 65) (see S7221 in FIG. 65), and the demo display data table is set. It is set to off when other display data tables other than are set for the display data table buffer 233d (S6505 in FIG. 61 (a), S6705 in FIG. 62 (a), S6805 in FIG. 62 (b). , See S6905 in FIG. 63). With this demo display flag 233y, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the demo is currently being produced.

The confirmation display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not the confirmation display effect is being executed. Here, the final display effect indicates an effect of stopping and displaying (confirming display) the stop symbol for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after the fluctuation pattern. If the confirmation display flag 233z is on, it means that the confirmation display effect is in progress, and if it is off, it means that the confirmation display effect is not in progress. The confirmation display flag 233z is set to on when the confirmation display data table is set to the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 65) (S7214 in FIG. 65), and is other than the confirmation display data table. It is set off when another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d (S6505 in FIG. 61 (a), S6705 in FIG. 62 (a), S6805 in FIG. 62 (b), FIG. See S6905 in 63). With this confirmation display flag 233z, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the current confirmation display effect is in progress.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 27 to 51. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process (see FIG. 45) that is started when the power is turned on, a main process (see FIG. 46) that is executed after the start-up process, and periodically (see the present embodiment). Then, there are a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27) that is activated (at a cycle of 2 milliseconds) and an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 44) that is activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. First, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described, and then the start-up process (see FIG. 45) and the main process (see FIG. 46) will be described.

FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process that is repeatedly executed every 2 milliseconds. When the MPU 201 executes this timer interrupt process, various processes to be executed periodically are performed.

In this timer interrupt process, first, an external output process is executed (S101). In the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27) and the main process (see FIG. 46), a command or the like to be transmitted to the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, or the like is generated based on various processes and is provided in the RAM 203. It is temporarily stored in the ring buffer for sending commands. In the external output process of S101, output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer is transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side.

For example, the hold ball number command set in the start winning process (FIG. 39, S108) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, the confirmation command, etc. set in the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 28, S107) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

Next, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S102), and then the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is opened or closed in the case of a big hit state. A large opening opening / closing process is executed (S103). That is, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the jackpot (special game state), and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether the specified number of balls have won the specific winning opening 65a. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds.

Next, the reading process of various winning switches is executed (S104). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved. Further, a prize ball command corresponding to the number of acquired balls to be transmitted to the payout control device 111 based on the prize detection information is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. As a result, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 111 by the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process executed next.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S105). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the second hit random number counter C4, and the small hit type counter C5 are updated (S106). Specifically, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the second hit random number counter C4, and the small hit type counter C5 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (the present embodiment). Then, when it reaches 299, 99, 239, 99), it clears to 0, respectively. When the first per random number counter C1 or the second per random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 or the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is used as the first per random number counter. It is read as the initial value of C1 or the second random number counter C4, and the initial value is set in the first random number counter C1 or the second random number counter C4. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C5 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, a process for displaying the first special symbol and the second special symbol by the first symbol display device 37 and a special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are executed. Then, the start winning process associated with winning the first ball opening 64 or the second ball opening 640 is executed (S108). The details of the special symbol variation process (S107) will be described later with reference to FIG. 28, and the details of the start winning process (S108) will be described later with reference to FIG. 39.

After the start winning process (S108) is executed, the normal symbol variation process (S109), which is the variation process of the normal symbol for the game ball passing through the normal ball entry port 67, is executed (S109), and then the normal ball entry port 67 is executed. (S110), the through-gate passage process for the passage of the game ball is executed. The details of the normal symbol variation processing (S109) will be described later with reference to FIG. 40, and the details of the through gate passage processing (S110) will be described later with reference to FIG. 41.

After executing the through-gate passage process (S110), the variation monitoring process (S111) for monitoring whether the player is performing the correct game corresponding to the game state is executed, and then the player does not correspond to the game state. When a (illegal) game is being executed, an illegal monitoring process (S112) for monitoring the period is performed. The details of the fluctuation monitoring process (S111) will be described later with reference to FIG. 42, and the details of the fraud monitoring process (S112) will be described later with reference to FIG. 43.

After executing the fraud monitoring process (S112), a launch control process for executing control regarding the launch of the ball is executed (S113), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S114). Ends the timer interrupt process. The firing control process (S113) detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor 51a, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. It is a process to determine whether to turn on / off the firing. Then, when the ball launch is on, the information of the ball launch signal is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the work RAM 203 in order to transmit the ball launch signal to the launch control device 112. As a result, the ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112 via the payout control device 111 by the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process that is executed next.

Next, with reference to FIG. 28, a special symbol variation process (S107), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S107). In the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 28, S107), various determinations and decisions are made using each counter value acquired based on the entry into the first entry port 64 and the second entry opening 640, and at the same time, various determinations and decisions are made. The first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 simultaneously control the variation display in the variation display mode according to the determination result, or stop the display in the display mode showing the determination result. Will be done.

In the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 28, S107), first, it is determined whether or not the big hit or small hit game is being executed (S201), and when it is determined that the big hit or small hit game is being executed. (S201: Yes), since the start or stop of the variable display of the special symbol should not be set, this process ends as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S201, when it is determined that neither the big hit nor the small hit is in progress (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S202). In the process of S202, when it is determined that the variation display of the first special symbol is being displayed (S202: Yes), the first special symbol variation stop process is executed (S204), and the process shifts to S205. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 33, but in the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S204), when the specified fluctuation time elapses during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, the lottery of the first special symbol is performed. The process of stopping the variable display is executed with the symbol indicating the result.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol is not in the variation display (S202: No), the first special symbol variation start process is executed (S203), and the process shifts to S205. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 29, but in the first special symbol fluctuation start processing (FIG. 29, S203), the hold data (various counter values) is stored in the first special symbol hold ball number storage area 203a. Then, the jackpot determination and the fluctuation pattern selection process based on the pending data are executed.

In the process of S205 executed after the first special symbol change start process (S203) or the first special symbol change stop process (S204) is executed, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol is displaying the change. (S205). In the process of S205, when it is determined that the second special symbol is in the variation display (S205: Yes), the second special symbol variation stop process is executed (S207), and this process is terminated. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 38, but in the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (FIG. 38, S207), the second special symbol is the same as the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (FIG. 33, S204). When the specified fluctuation time elapses during the fluctuation display of, the process of stopping the fluctuation display is executed with the symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol.

On the other hand, in the process of S205, when it is determined that the second special symbol is not being displayed in the variation (S205: No), the second special symbol variation start process is executed (S206), and this process is terminated. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 35, but in the second special symbol fluctuation start processing (S206), the number of second special symbol reserved balls is stored in the same manner as in the first special symbol fluctuation start processing (FIGS. 29 and S203). If the hold data (various counter values) is stored in the area 203b, the jackpot determination and the fluctuation pattern selection process based on the hold data are executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the details of the first special symbol variation start process (S203), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 28, S107), will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol change start processing (S203).

In this first special symbol change start processing (FIG. 29, S203), first, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired (S301), and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d It is determined whether the value (N1) is larger than 0 (S302). In the process of S302, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is larger than 0 (S302: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is set. After subtracting 1 (S303), a hold ball number command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the hold ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d after the subtraction is set (S304). ..

The hold ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is voiced in the external output process (S2001) of the main process (see FIG. 46) to be executed later by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d from the hold ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the first special symbol hold ball number counter of the RAM 223. Store in 223b1. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 223b1 according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the first special symbol of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the value of the reserved ball number counter 203d.

When the process of S304 is completed, the game state update process is then executed (S304). Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 30, but in the game state update process (FIG. 30, S304), various counters (probability variation counter 203 g, time saving medium counter 203r, chance mode counter 203x) indicating the state of the pachinko machine 10 are used. This is a process for updating the state of the pachinko machine 10 by updating the value.

When the process of S305 is completed, the first special symbol jackpot determination process is then executed (S306). Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 31, but in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 31, S306), the first random number counter C1 shifted to the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203c. Based on the value of and the current gaming state, the determination of whether or not it is a big hit is executed.

When the process of S306 is completed, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process is then executed (S307), and this process is completed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 32, but in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 32, S307), the first random number counter stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203c. Based on the result of the hit / fail determination based on the value of C1, the process for selecting the fluctuation pattern based on each counter value is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 30, a game state update process (S305), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29), will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing this game state update process (S305).

When the game state update process (see FIG. 30) is started, it is first determined whether or not the value of the probability variation counter 203g is greater than 0 (S401), and when it is determined that the probability variation counter 203g is greater than 0 (see FIG. 30). S401: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter is subtracted by 1 (S402), and the process proceeds to S403. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0 in the processing of S401 (S401: No), the processing of S402 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of S403.

In the process of S403, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203r is larger than 0 (S403). When it is determined that the time saving / medium counter 203r is larger than 0 in the processing of S403 (S403: Yes), the value of the time saving / medium counter 203r is subtracted by 1 (S404), and the process proceeds to S405. On the other hand, when the value of the time saving / medium counter 203r is 0 (S403: No), the processing of S404 is skipped and the process proceeds to S405.

In the process of S405, it is determined whether or not the value of the chance mode counter 203x is larger than 0 (S405), and when it is determined that the value of the chance mode counter 203x is larger than 0 (S405: Yes), the chance mode counter 203x The value of is subtracted by 1 (S406), and the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the chance mode counter 203x is 0 in the processing of S405 (S405: No), the processing of S406 is skipped and the process proceeds to S407.

In the process of S407, it is determined whether or not the game state has been changed. More specifically, the value of the probability variation counter 203g is updated from 1 to 0 to change from the probability variation state to the normal state, or the value of the time saving medium counter 203r is updated from 1 to 0 to change from the time saving state to the normal state. Or the value of the chance mode counter 203x is updated from 1 to 0, and it is determined whether the chance mode A has been changed to the normal mode in the normal state. If it is determined in the process of S407 that the game state has been changed (S407: Yes), a state command indicating the changed game state is set (S408), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the game state has not been changed (S407: No), the process of S408 is skipped and the main process is terminated as it is.

The state command set in the process of S408 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 in the external output process (S2001) of the main process (see FIG. 46) described later. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. By this state command, the voice lamp control device 113 can accurately grasp the state of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29), will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306).

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 31), first, each counter value stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is acquired (S501). Next, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is a high probability state (probability change state) (S502). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more. When it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more (that is, the gaming state is the probability variation state) (S502: Yes), the jackpot specified in the first random number table 202a for high probability time It is determined whether or not the random number value is matched with the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired from the counter buffer, and the determination result (lottery result) is acquired (S503). On the other hand, in the processing of S502, when it is determined that the probability variation counter 203g is off (that is, it is a low probability state of the special symbol) (S502: No), the first random number table 202a for the low probability time is displayed. It is determined whether or not the specified random number value that becomes a big hit and the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired from the counter buffer match, and the lottery result is acquired (S504).

When the processing of S503 or S504 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the hit flag 203s is on (S505), and if it is determined to be on (S505: Yes), this first special symbol jackpot determination process is performed. Before (see FIG. 31) is executed, it is determined as a big hit or a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, and it means that the variable display indicating the determination result is being executed. As the type of the stop symbol to be displayed on the symbol display device 37, the out-of-order symbol of the first special symbol is set (S510), and this process is terminated. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) that the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol both become big hits, and the other big hit is started during the execution of one big hit.

On the other hand, in the processing of S505, when it is determined that the hit flag 203s is not on (off) (S505: No), then the lottery result (judgment result) of the first special symbol is a big hit or a small hit. (S506), and if it is determined to be either a big hit or a small hit (S506: Yes), the hit flag 203s is set to on (S507). Next, the lottery result of the first special symbol is set as a big hit or a small hit (S508), and the first special symbol hit (big hit or small hit) symbol is set in the first symbol display device 37 (S509). End the process.

On the other hand, in the process of S506, if it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is neither a big hit nor a small hit (the lottery result is out of order) (S506: No), the process is shifted to S510 and stopped. The out-of-order symbol of the first special symbol is set as the symbol (S510), and this process is completed.

In the present embodiment, in the case of disconnection, "-" indicating the disconnection is set in the left 7-segment LED of the 7-segment display 37b of the first symbol display device 37. Here, each symbol set in the first symbol display device 37 is a process for setting a symbol to be stopped and displayed when the variable display is stopped.

Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29), will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307).

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 32), first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the first special symbol executed in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 31) is a jackpot. (S601), if it is determined to be a jackpot (S601: Yes), the first hit type selection table 202b is read out, and the jackpot type of the first special symbol corresponding to the value of the first hit type counter C2 is selected. (S602). When the processing of S602 is completed, the processing is transferred to S603.

On the other hand, in the process of S601, if it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is not a big hit (small hit or miss) (S601: No), the process of S602 is skipped and the process proceeds to S603. do.

In the process of S603, it is determined whether or not the value of the chance mode counter 203x is larger than 0 (S603). If it is determined that the value of the chance mode counter 203x is larger than 0 (S603: Yes), it means that the lottery of the first special symbol has been executed in the chance mode A. Therefore, the chance A table 202d3 is used as the variable pattern table. Is read out (S604), and the process proceeds to the process of S608. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the chance mode counter 203x is 0 (S603: No), then it is determined whether the probability variation counter 203g and the time saving medium counter 203r are both 0 (S605).

In the processing of S605, when it is determined that both the value of the probability variation counter 203g and the value of the time saving / medium counter 203r are 0 (S605: Yes), it means that the current state is the normal mode, so that it fluctuates. The normal table 202d1 is read as the pattern table, and the process proceeds to S608. On the other hand, when it is determined that either the value of the probability variation counter 203g or the value of the time reduction counter 203r is 1 or more (S605: No), it means that the probability variation state or the time reduction state is in progress. Therefore, the table 202d2 for the consecutive villa / chance B is read out as the fluctuation pattern table (S607), and the process proceeds to S608.

In the process of S608, 1 variation pattern (variation time) is selected from the read variation pattern table based on the lottery result of the first special symbol and the value of the variation type counter CS1 (S608). Next, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is generated based on the selected fluctuation pattern, and the value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern selected this time is set in the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter (S609). Next, the special figure 1 stop type command is set (S610), and this process is terminated.

The special figure 1 variation pattern command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 in the external output process (S2001) of the main process (see FIG. 46) described later. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure 1 variation pattern command, the voice lamp control device 113 determines a detailed variation display effect mode based on the variation pattern notified by the special figure 1 variation pattern command.

Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S204), which is one of the special symbol fluctuation processing (see FIG. 28), will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S204).

In the special symbol fluctuation stop processing (FIGS. 33 and S204), first, the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203t is subtracted and updated (S701), and the counter value after the subtraction is the fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern set this time. It is determined whether or not the counter value corresponds to the end (S702). If it is determined that the value of the fluctuation time counter 203t in FIG. 1 is not the counter value corresponding to the end of the fluctuation time (S702: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S702, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203t is the counter value corresponding to the end of the fluctuation time (S702: Yes), then the fluctuation pattern of this time is the second. 1 It is determined whether or not a jackpot is set as a lottery result of a special symbol (S703). In the process of S703, when it is determined that the jackpot is set (S703: Yes), the special figure 2 confirmation command for confirming and displaying the second special symbol is set (S704), and the first symbol is displayed. The fluctuation stop of the second special symbol of the device 37 is set (S705). Then, while setting the start of the jackpot (S706), the values of the hit flag 203s, the probability variation counter 203g, the time reduction / medium counter 203r, and the chance mode counter 203x are reset (S707), and the process shifts to S709.

On the other hand, in the process of S703, if it is determined that a lottery result (missing or small hit) other than the big hit is set as the lottery result of the first special symbol (S703: No), the mode shifts to the chance mode A. When determining whether or not to move to the chance mode A, the chance mode setting process for setting the number of chance modes is performed (S708), and the process shifts to the process of S709. The details of the chance mode setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 34.

In the process of S709, a special figure 1 confirmation command for confirming and displaying the symbol indicating the jackpot is set (S709), and the fluctuation of the first special symbol that is variablely displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is stopped (S710). ), End this process.

With this configuration, the second special symbol can be stopped at the symbol corresponding to the deviation at the timing when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed at the symbol corresponding to the hit. Therefore, the players can be concentrated on the jackpot.

Next, the chance mode setting process (S708), which is one of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processes (see FIG. 33), will be described with reference to FIG. 34. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this chance mode setting process (S708).

When this chance mode setting process (see FIG. 34) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not a small hit is set as a lottery result of the first special symbol (S801), and it is not a small hit (that is, it is a miss). If it is determined (S801: No), the chance mode A is not set, so the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S801, when it is determined that the small hit is set in the lottery result of the first special symbol (S801: Yes), it is determined whether the small hit type is the small hit A (S802). ..

In the processing of S802, when it is determined that the small hit is A (S802: Yes), the value of the chance mode counter 203x is set to 10 (S803), and the process proceeds to the processing of S807. As a result, after the small hit is completed, the chance mode A, which is more advantageous than the normal mode (the lottery of the second special symbol is easy to be executed), can be set over 10 special symbol lottery.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the small hit type is not the small hit A (S802: No), then it is determined whether or not the small hit type is the small hit B (S804), and if it is the small hit B. (S804: Yes), the value of the chance mode counter 203x is set to 20 (S805), and the process proceeds to S807. On the other hand, in the processing of S804, when it is determined that the small hit type this time is not the small hit B (that is, the small hit C) (S804: No), 100 is set to the value of the chance mode counter 203x (S806). ), The process proceeds to S807.

In the process of S807, a state command indicating the transition to the chance mode A is set (S807), and then a display special figure 2 confirmation command for confirming and displaying the second special symbol with the symbol corresponding to the deviation is set (S807). S808). Next, the variation display of the second special symbol in the first symbol display device 37 is stopped (S809), the start of a small hit is set (S810), the hit flag 203s is set to off (S811), and this process is performed. To finish.

By this chance mode setting process (see FIG. 34), when a small hit is made, the chance mode A can be set the number of times corresponding to the small hit type. As a result, when the game state is the normal state, every time a small hit is made, the chance mode is relatively advantageous from the normal mode, which is the most disadvantageous to the player (when right-handed, the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed). It can be transferred to A. Therefore, even if it is not a big hit, it is possible to add intonation to the game in the normal state, so that it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game from becoming monotonous.

Next, the second special symbol variation start process (S206), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 28), will be described with reference to FIG. 35. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol change start processing (S206).

In the second special symbol change start processing (see FIG. 35), first, the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is acquired (S901), and the acquired second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is used. It is determined whether or not the value (N2) is greater than 0 (S902). In the process of S902, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S902: No), the reserved ball does not exist and the lottery of the first special symbol is executed. Therefore, the processing of S903 to S906 is skipped and the process proceeds to S907. On the other hand, in the process of S902, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S902: Yes), the value of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e (N2). Is subtracted by 1 (S903), and a hold ball number command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the value after the subtraction is set (S904).

Next, the game state update process described above is executed with reference to FIG. 30 (S905), the second special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S906), and the process shifts to S907. Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 36, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 36, S906) is the first hit stored in the execution area of the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b. This is a process for executing a determination as to whether or not a jackpot is a jackpot based on the value of the random number counter C1.

In the process of S907, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (S907), and this process is terminated. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 37, but the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 37, S907) is a variation type counter stored in the execution area of the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b. This is a process for selecting a fluctuation pattern from the fluctuation pattern table 202d according to the value of CS1.

Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S906), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 35, S206), will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S906).

In the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 36), first, various counter values stored in the execution area of the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b are acquired (S1001). Next, with reference to the value of the probability variation counter 203g, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is the probability variation state (S1002). In the process of S1002, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more (that is, the gaming state is the probability variation state) (S1002: Yes), the first random number table 202a for high probability (Fig. The lottery result of whether or not the random number value of the jackpot defined in 13 (b) matches the value of the first random number counter C1 is acquired (S1003), and the process proceeds to S1005.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1002, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0 (that is, the gaming state is the normal state) (S1002: No), the first random number table 202a for low probability (S1002: No) The lottery result of whether or not the random number value of the jackpot defined in FIG. 13B) matches the value of the first random number counter C1 is acquired (S1004), and the process proceeds to S1005.

In the process of S1005, it is determined whether or not the hit flag 203s is on (S1005), and when it is determined that the hit flag 203s is off, that is, the jackpot variation display is executed in the first special symbol. If it is determined that there is no (S1005: No), it is determined whether the lottery result obtained in the process of S1003 or S1004 is a big hit (S1006). In the process of S1006, when it is determined that the lottery result is a big hit (S1006: Yes), the winning flag 203s is set to ON (S1007), and the lottery result of the second special symbol is set to the big hit (S1008). .. Next, the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S1009), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1005, when it is determined that the winning flag 203s is on (S1005: Yes), or in the process of S1006, when it is determined that the set lottery result is out of order (S1005: Yes). S1006: No), a symbol indicating the deviation of the second special symbol is set in the first special symbol display device 37 (S1010), and this process is terminated.

Next, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S907), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 35), will be described with reference to FIG. 37. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S907).

In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 37), first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot is set as the lottery result of the second special symbol (S1101). In the process of S1101, when it is determined that a big hit is set as the lottery result of the second special symbol (S1101: Yes), the first hit type selection table 202b is read out and the counter of the first hit type counter C2. The hit type corresponding to the value is selected (S1102). After that, the process proceeds to S1103. On the other hand, in the process of S1101, when it is determined that the lottery result of the second special symbol is set to be out of order (S1101: No), the process of S1102 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S1103.

In the processing of S1103, it is determined whether or not the value of the chance mode counter 203x is larger than 0 (S1103), and if the value of the chance mode counter 203x is larger than 0 (S1103: Yes), it is used as a fluctuation pattern table for chance A. The table 202d3 is read out (S1104), and the process proceeds to S1108. On the other hand, if the value of the chance mode counter 203x is 0 (S1103: No), it is determined whether the values of the probability variation counter 203g and the time saving / medium counter 203r are both 0 (S1105). In the processing of S1105, if each value of the probability variation counter 203g and the time saving / medium counter 203r is 0 (S1105: Yes), the normal table 202d1 is read out as the fluctuation pattern table (S1106), and the process proceeds to the processing of S1108. ..

On the other hand, in the processing of S1105, if the value of any one of the probability variation counter 203g and the time saving medium counter 203r is 1 or more (S1105: No), the table 202d2 for consecutive villa / chance B is read out as the variation pattern table. (S1107), the process proceeds to S1108.

In the process of S1108, a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the set lottery result of the special symbol and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is selected from the read fluctuation pattern table (S1108). Next, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is generated (set) based on the fluctuation pattern selected in the process of S1108, and the counter value corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern is set in the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203u (). S1109), a special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the stop type is set (S1110), and this process is terminated.

Next, the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S207), which is one of the special symbol fluctuation processing (see FIG. 28), will be described with reference to FIG. 38. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S207).

In the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see FIG. 38), first, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203u is subtracted and updated (S1201), and the counter value after the subtraction is the counter corresponding to the end of the fluctuation time. It is determined whether or not it is a value (S1202). If it is determined in the process of S1202 that the counter value does not correspond to the end of the fluctuation time (S1202: No), the present process is terminated as it is without setting the fluctuation stop of the second special symbol.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1202, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203u is a value corresponding to the end of the fluctuation time (S1202: Yes), a big hit is set as the lottery result of the second special symbol. It is determined whether or not it is (S1203). When it is determined that a jackpot is set as a result of the lottery of the second special symbol (S1203: Yes), the voice lamp control device is set so as to stop and display the fluctuation of the first special symbol according to the set stop type. A special figure 1 confirmation command for notifying 113 is set (S1204). Next, the stop display of the first special symbol is set in the first symbol display device 37 (S1205). Then, the start of the jackpot is set (S1206), the values of the hit flag 203s, the probability variation counter 203g, the time reduction / medium counter 203r, and the chance mode counter 203x are reset (S1207), and the process proceeds to S1208.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1203 that a small hit or a miss is set as the lottery result of the second special symbol (S1203: No), the processes of S1204 to S1207 are skipped and the process proceeds to S1208. Transition.

In the process of S1208, a special figure 2 confirmation command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 to stop and display the fluctuation of the second special symbol with the set stop type is set (S1208), and the first symbol is set. The display device 37 sets the variable stop of the second special symbol being executed (S1219), and ends this process.

In this way, since the control of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed independently and in parallel, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed in a variable manner at the same time. Can be made to. Therefore, it is possible to execute a lottery game with more special symbols within a predetermined time, and it is possible to increase the probability that the player will be given a big hit within the predetermined time. Therefore, the player can be made to play the game efficiently.

Further, even if the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed in a variable manner at the same time and the lottery game is executed, if a big hit game occurs in one of the first or second special symbols, the other Since the variable display of the special symbol is removed and the symbol is stopped and displayed, the player can concentrate on the jackpot game and play the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the details of the start winning process (S108), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S108). The start winning process (FIG. 39) determines whether a ball has won a prize in the first ball opening 64 or the second ball opening 640 (whether the ball has won a starting prize), and if a prize is won, the maximum number of pending balls (first). Each of the acquired counter values is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, up to a maximum of four for each of the entry port 64 and the second entry opening 640). It is a process to do.

In the start winning process (see FIG. 39), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64 (S1301). Here, the winning of the first ball opening 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball opening 64 (there was a start winning) (S1301: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired (N1). S1302), it is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1303). That is, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls for the first entry port 64 is stored up to the upper limit value.

Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first ball opening 64 (S1301: No), or even if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (N1). If is less than 4 (S1303: No), the process shifts to S1307 without acquiring various counter values of the counter buffer. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64 (S1301: Yes) and the value (N1) of the reserved ball number counter 203d in the first special figure is less than 4 (S1303: Yes), the first special 1 is added to the value (N1) of the symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (1304), and a reserved ball number command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the number of reserved balls after the addition is set (S1305). ..

The reserved ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S2001) of the main process (see FIG. 46) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d from the hold ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the first special symbol hold ball number counter of the RAM 223. Store in 223b1.

After setting the hold ball number command by the process of S1305, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS1 updated in the process of S106 of the timer interrupt process described above are set. It is stored in the first free holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S1306), and the process shifts to S1307. In the process of S1306, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the hold second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the hold third area is set, and if the value is 3, the hold fourth area is set as the first area.

Regarding each process from S1307 to S1312, the same process as the process performed for the start winning prize to the first ball opening 64 executed in each process from S1301 to S1306 is the second ball entry. Since it is executed for the start winning of the mouth 640, a detailed description will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 40, a normal symbol variation process (S109), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S109). The normal symbol variation process (S109) is a process for controlling the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display mounting unit 88, the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 640a, and the like.

In this normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 40), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (S1401). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is being performed after the display indicating the hit is made on the second symbol display device 83. Is included. If it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S1401: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1401, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S1401: No), it is determined whether the ordinary symbol of the second symbol display device 83 is being displayed in a variable manner. (S1402). When it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner (S1402: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the normal symbol being executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed (S1402: Yes). S1420). The fluctuation time here is a time set in advance by the processing of S1419, which will be described later, before the fluctuation display is started in the second symbol display mounting unit 88.

In the process of S1420, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S1420: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1420, when it is determined that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol to be variablely displayed has elapsed (S1420: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S1421). .. In the process of S1421, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is a win and the display mode is set by the process of S1413, the "○" symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted display) on the second symbol display device 83 as the second symbol. ) Is set to be done. On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is missed and the display mode at the time of the miss is set by the process of S1418, the "x" symbol is stopped and displayed (lights up) on the second symbol display device 83 as the second symbol. Is set to be displayed). When the stop display is set by the process of S1421, the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 ends, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is the second in the display mode set in the process of S1413 and the process of S1418. 2 A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the symbol display device 83.

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol this time is a hit (S1422). When it is determined that the lottery result of the ordinary symbol this time is a hit (S1422: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the ordinary electric accessory 640a is set (1423). On the other hand, if it is determined that the lottery result of the normal symbol this time is out of order (S1422: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1402, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the variable display (S1402: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times the variable display is held in the normal symbol M) is acquired. (S1403).

Next, when it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S1404), and it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0. (S1404: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S1404: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S1405).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S1406). In the process of S1406, the data stored in the normal symbol hold first to fourth areas of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the normal symbol hold 1st area → execution area, the normal symbol hold 2nd area → the normal symbol hold 1st area, the normal symbol hold 3rd area → the normal symbol hold 2nd area, the normal symbol hold 4th area → Shift the data in each area, such as the 3rd area for holding normal symbols. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is acquired (S1407).

Next, it is determined whether the gaming state is in the reduced working hours state (including the probable change state) (S1408). More specifically, when the value of either one of the probability variation counter 203g and the time reduction medium counter 203r is 1 or more, it is determined that the time reduction state (or probability variation state) is in effect. In the process of S1408, when it is determined that the time is not shortened (S1408: No), the hit / fail judgment is made based on the hit judgment value of the random number table per normal symbol for low probability (see FIG. 14 (a)). The result is acquired (S1411). On the other hand, in the process of S1408, when it is determined that the time-saving game is in progress (S1408: Yes), it is determined whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in the jackpot (S1409). In the process of S1409, if it is determined that the jackpot of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in progress (S1409: Yes), the process of S1411 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not a big hit (S1409: No), the hit determination value of the random number table per ordinary symbol for high probability (see FIG. 14A). Based on the above, the hit / fail determination result is acquired (S1410).

Next, when it is determined whether the lottery result of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is a win (S1412) and the lottery result of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is not a win (that is, it is a miss). (S1412: No), the display mode of "x" which is the display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S1418), and the process proceeds to S1419. On the other hand, in the process of S1412, when it is determined that the lottery result of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is a hit (that is, a hit) (S1412: Yes), the display mode at the time of hit is "○". The display mode of (S1413) is set.

Next, it is determined whether the game state is the reduced working hours state (including the probabilistic changing state) (S1414), and if it is determined that the game is in the reduced working hours state (S1414: Yes), the process shifts to S1416. On the other hand, in the process of S1414, when it is determined that the time is not shortened (S1414: No), it is determined whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit (S1415). In the process of S1415, if it is determined that the jackpot of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in progress (S1415: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S1416.

In the process of S1416, the opening period of the electric accessory 640a is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S1416), and the process shifts to S1419. On the other hand, in the processing of S1415, when it is determined that the jackpot of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not in progress (that is, the normal symbol is in a low probability state) (S1415: No), the electric accessory 640a is released. The time is set to 0.9 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S1417), and the process shifts to S1419.

In the process of S1419 to be executed after executing any of the processes of S1416 to S1418, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) is set to 3 seconds (S1419), and this process is terminated.

Next, the through-gate passage process (S110) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 41. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S110). This through gate passage process (S110) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27), determines whether or not the ball has passed through the normal entry port 67, and if the ball has passed, the second This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the random number counter C4 per 2.

In the through-gate passage process (see FIG. 41), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 (S1501). Here, the fact that the ball has passed through the normal ball entry port 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol entry port 67 (S1501: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is acquired (S1502), and the acquired normal symbol reserved ball number counter is acquired. It is determined whether or not the value (M) of 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S1503).

Whether the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 (S1501: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal entry port 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f. If is less than 4 (S1503: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal symbol entry port 67 (S1501: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S1503: Yes), the normal symbol hold ball number counter The value (M) of 203f is added by 1 (S1504). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S106 of the timer interrupt process described above is the first of the free hold areas (normal symbol hold first to fourth areas) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. Store in the area (S1505). In the process of S1505, the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the area of the normal symbol hold 1 is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the area of normal symbol hold 2 is set, if the value is 2, the area of normal symbol hold 3 is set, and if the value is 3, the area of normal symbol hold 4 is set first. Area.

Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the fluctuation monitoring process (S111), which is one of the timer interrupt processes (see FIG. 27) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the contents of this fluctuation monitoring process (S111). In this fluctuation monitoring process (S111), a process of monitoring whether or not the player is playing the correct game corresponding to the game state is executed. In the present embodiment, in the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol), basically, the ball is launched with a firing intensity at which the ball passes through the path on the left side of the variable display device unit 80. The game method (left-handed) becomes a regular game method, and during a big hit, a small hit, a time saving state, or a probability change state, the ball is fired at a firing strength at which the ball passes through the path on the right side of the variable display device unit 80. The game method (right-handed) becomes the regular game method. In the normal state, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the ultra-long variation (600 seconds) is set as the variation pattern, so that the game efficiency deteriorates. Therefore, hitting right in the normal state is disadvantageous for the player. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility of being disadvantageous to the player by monitoring whether or not the player is playing with the correct way of hitting. In addition, it is possible to monitor the act of fraudulently hitting the right and making the second entrance 640 win a prize to draw an advantageous second special symbol, which causes an unexpected disadvantage to the hall due to fraud. The possibility of getting rid of it can be reduced. Even in the normal state, if the chance mode A is set over the lottery of the special symbol of a specific number of times (10 times, 20 times, or 100 times) after the small hit, right-handed is a regular game. It becomes a method.

In the fluctuation monitoring process (see FIG. 42), first, it is determined whether or not a big hit or a small hit is in progress (S1601). In the processing of S1601, when it is determined that neither a big hit nor a small hit is made (S1601: No), the value of either the probability variation state or the time reduction state (that is, the probability variation counter 203g and the time reduction medium counter 203r). Is 1 or more) (S1602), and if it is determined that the state is in the probability variation state or the time saving state (S1602: Yes), it is determined whether the first special symbol is in the variable display (S1603). .. When it is determined that the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S1603: Yes), the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is set to ON (S1604), and this process is terminated. Here, the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is a flag for determining whether or not the player is playing the game by the correct game method (left-handed or right-handed) corresponding to the game state. When the time when the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is set to ON exceeds a predetermined period (for example, 120 seconds or more), an abnormality notification command is set, and the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the abnormality (third symbol) by the command. A character indicating that the display device 81 is abnormal (for example, a character display suggesting the correct game method (please hit right)) is executed, and an error sound or an instruction sound for the correct game is output by voice, and the hall is displayed. An abnormal signal is output to the computer)) is executed.

In the probabilistic state and the time saving state, by playing the game in the correct game method (right-handed), the lottery of the advantageous second special symbol is easily executed, and the lottery of the disadvantageous first special symbol is executed. It becomes difficult. Therefore, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is highly possible that the player is playing the game with a disadvantageous left-handed strike. In this case, by continuing the variable display of the first special symbol for a predetermined period (for example, 120 seconds) to notify the abnormality, the game can be continued by an illegal game method that is disadvantageous to the player. It can be prevented from being lost.

On the other hand, in the process of S1601, when it is determined that the big hit or the small hit is in progress (S1601: Yes), or in the process of S1603, when it is determined that the first special symbol is in the variable stop state (S1601: Yes). S1603: No), the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is set to off (S1605).

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S1602 that neither the probability change state nor the time saving state is obtained (S1602: No), it means that the current gaming state is the normal state. Therefore, the value of the chance mode counter 203x is next. It is determined whether it is greater than 0 (that is, whether right-handed hitting is chance mode A, which is a regular game method) (S1606). When it is determined that the value of the chance mode counter 203x is larger than 0 in the process of S1606 (S1606: Yes), each process of S1603 to S1605 is executed as in the probabilistic state and the time saving state.

On the other hand, in the process of S1606, when it is determined that the value of the chance mode counter 203x is 0 (normal mode) (S1606: No), it is determined whether the normal symbol (second symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner. (S1607). In the processing of S1607, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not changing (S1607: No), then it is determined whether or not the second special symbol is changing (S1608), and the second special symbol is changing. If not (S1608: No), there is a high possibility that the player is playing the game by the regular game method (left-handed) in the normal mode, so the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is set to off (S1609). This process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1607, when it is determined that the normal symbol is changing (S1607: Yes), or in the processing of S1608, when it is determined that the second special symbol is changing (S1608: Yes). Yes), it means that the ball passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 or entered the second entrance 640 during the normal mode, and it is highly possible that the player is hitting right. .. Therefore, in this case, the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is set to ON (S1604), and this process is terminated.

In this way, in the normal mode, it is a normal game method to play a game by left-handed, but if the normal symbol or the second special symbol that can be variablely displayed when right-handed is changing, it is incorrect. There is a high possibility that you are playing with the game method. Therefore, by setting the abnormality monitoring flag 203y to ON, if the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is kept on for a predetermined time (120 seconds in this embodiment) or more, the abnormality notification is executed, which is invalid. You can discover the game method earlier. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the hall from being given an unexpected disadvantage due to illegal games.

Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the fraud monitoring process (S112), which is one of the timer interrupt processes (see FIG. 27) in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing this fraud monitoring process (S112). In this fraud monitoring process (see FIG. 43), the period during which the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is set to be turned on is timed, and when the time exceeds a predetermined time (120 seconds or more in this embodiment), an abnormality alarm command is set. The process is executed.

In the fraud monitoring process (FIG. 43, S112), first, it is determined whether the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is on (S1701), and if the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is on (S1701: Yes), the value of the abnormality monitoring counter 203aa is set. 1 is added and updated (S1702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the updated abnormality monitoring counter 203aa is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (in the present embodiment, the counter value corresponding to 120 seconds) (S1703), and when it is determined that the value is less than the upper limit value. (S1703: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the abnormality monitoring counter 203aa is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (S1703: Yes), an abnormality alarm command is set (S1704), and this process is terminated.

This abnormality alarm command is output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S101) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Upon receiving this abnormality alarm command, the voice lamp control device 113 executes a process of causing the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output device 226 to output the mode of the abnormality alarm. As a result, fraud and defects can be detected at an early stage.

Further, by configuring the abnormality alarm command to be set when the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is set to the on for a predetermined period (120 seconds in the present embodiment) or more after the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is set to the on. Even if there is a period during which the game is not performed by the regular game method (for example, the period for switching from the right-handed state to the left-handed state) for a short time (less than 120 seconds) when the game state is switched, immediately Since the abnormality alarm is not output, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player feels uncomfortable.

In the present embodiment, the predetermined period is 120 seconds, but the predetermined period is not limited to this, and the predetermined period is configured in a time longer than the switching time required for normal gaming when switching the gaming state. do it. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress a problem that an abnormality alarm is erroneously output while the player changes the firing intensity (direction in which the ball is launched).

On the other hand, in the process of S1701, when it is determined that the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is off (S1701: No), the abnormality monitoring counter 203aa is reset to the initial value 0 (S1705), and this processing is terminated. do.

In this way, when it is determined that the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is off, the value of the abnormality monitoring counter 203aa is reset to the initial value, so that the process of setting the abnormality alarm command is avoided, and the normal game method is used. It is possible to suppress the problem that an abnormality alarm is output even though the game is being played.

FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S1801) as a setting of the power interruption occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout launch control device 111, and the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 45, a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing this start-up process.

This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process (FIG. 45), first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S1901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S1902). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S1903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1904), and if it is turned on (S1904: Yes), the process shifts to S1910. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is not turned on (S1904: No), it is further determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1905), and if it is not stored. (S1905: No) Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the process is also shifted to S1910 in this case as well.

If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1906), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process is shifted to S1910 even in such a case. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S1910, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S1910). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S1911, S1912) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). Therefore, if the RAM erase switch (see FIG. 3) is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM 203 initialization process (S1911, S1912) is executed.

Similarly, when the power failure occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 203 initialization process (S1911, S1912) is executed in the same manner. .. In the RAM initialization process (S1911, S1912), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1911), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1912). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S1913.

On the other hand, the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is not turned on (S1904: No), the power failure occurrence information is stored (S1905: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is stored. If it is normal (S1907: Yes), the power off occurrence information is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S1908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S1909), and the process proceeds to S1913. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

Next, an effect permission command for permitting execution of various effects is output to the voice lamp control device 113 (S1913), and a state command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the game state at the time of startup. Is set (S1914). After that, the interrupt is permitted (S1915), and the process proceeds to the main process (see FIG. 46) described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process (see FIG. 45) will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the counter update process and the power cutoff process are roughly classified.

In the main process (see FIG. 46), first, in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 is controlled on the sub side. The external output process to be transmitted to the device (peripheral control device) is executed (S2001).

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S2002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S2003) and executed. After the processing of S2003, a jackpot control process for setting the operation of the opening / closing plate 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 and the flow path solenoid 65k in the jackpot game is executed (S2004). The details of this jackpot control process (S2004) will be described later with reference to FIG. 47.

After executing the big hit control process (S2004), the small hit control process (S2005) for setting the operation of the opening / closing plate 65f1 during the small hit is executed. The details of this small hit control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 48. When the small hit control process (S2005) is completed, the electric accessory opening / closing process is then executed (S2006). In this electric accessory opening / closing process (S2006), the opening / closing process of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 is executed. Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S2007).

When the process of S2007 is completed, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol (for example, the symbol of "○" or "x") displayed on the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S2008). Briefly, on condition that the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing of the passage, and the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. Ordinary symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Then, a lottery of ordinary symbols is carried out based on the value of the second random number counter C4, and when the ordinary symbol is hit, the ordinary electric accessory 640a is used for a predetermined time (1 second x 2 times or 0.9 seconds x 2). Times) Opened.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2009), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S2009: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 milliseconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the previous main process (S2010). ), If the predetermined time has already passed (S2010: Yes), the process is shifted to S2001, and each process after S2001 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if a predetermined time (4 milliseconds) has not yet elapsed from the start of the previous main process (S2010: No), the remainder until the predetermined time is reached, that is, until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. Within the time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S2011, S2012).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S2011). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S2002 (S2012).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S2001 to S2008 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

Further, in the processing of S2009, if the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2009: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 44 has been executed, the process when the power is cut off after S2013 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S2013), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). Transmit (S2014). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S2015), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S2016), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The processing of S2009 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S2001 to S2008, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S2011 and S2012 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cut state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S2001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S2001 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is used in the initial setting process (S1901) without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S2001 can be started. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S2004), which is one of the main processes (see FIG. 46) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described with reference to FIG. 47. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot control process (S2004).

In the jackpot control process (see FIG. 47), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S2101). Specifically, whether the start of the jackpot was set in the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see FIG. 33) (S706 in FIG. 33), or the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see FIG. 38). Among them, when the start of the jackpot is set (see S1206 in FIG. 38), it is determined that the jackpot is started in the process of S2101.

In the process of S2101, when it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S2101: Yes), an opening command for executing the opening effect indicating the start of the jackpot is set (S2102), and the flow path solenoid 65k. (See the upper part of FIG. 7) is started (S2103). Next, the jackpot middle flag 203v is set to ON (S2104), and this process ends. By setting the jackpot flag 203v to on here, in the processing of S201 of the special symbol variation processing, it is determined that the jackpot is in progress, and the fluctuation start and fluctuation stop of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are started. Since the processing can be completed without executing various processing for setting, it is possible to prevent a problem that the variable display is started even during the big hit.

On the other hand, in the process of S2101, when it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is not started (S2101: No), then it is determined whether the jackpot is in progress (S2105). Among the special symbol jackpots, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. In the process of S2105, if it is determined that the special symbol is not a big hit (S2105: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2105, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (S2105: Yes), then it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S2106), and the start timing of the new round is determined. If (S2106: Yes), the opening operation of the opening / closing plate 65f1 corresponding to the number of rounds is read (S2107). Next, the read opening operation (opening / closing pattern) is set to the opening / closing plate 65f1 (S2108), and this process is terminated. Although not shown, if it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S2105: Yes), a round number command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the start of a new round is given. Is set. The round number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is stored in the external output process (S2001) of the main process (see FIG. 46) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, when the display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is received, a new round effect is started on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2106, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S2106: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S2109), and if it is the start timing of the ending effect (S2109). : Yes), set the ending command (S2110), and end this process. The ending command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S2001) of the main process (see FIG. 46) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the ending effect indicating the end of the jackpot.

On the other hand, in the process of S2109, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S2109: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the jackpot (S2111). Here, the jackpot end timing indicates the case where the execution period of the ending effect has elapsed. If it is determined in the process of S2111 that it is the end timing of the jackpot (S211: Yes), the jackpot end process for setting the game state after the end of the jackpot is executed (S2112), and this process is terminated. The details of this jackpot end processing (S2112) will be described later with reference to FIG. 48.

On the other hand, if it is not the end timing of the jackpot (S211: No), the winning process for performing the processing according to the winning of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is executed (S2113), and then the specific winning opening (S2113) is executed. An abnormal process for determining whether or not the ball that has entered the large opening port) 65a is normally discharged is executed (S2114), and this process is terminated. Details of these winning processes (S2113) and abnormal processing (S2114) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 49 and 50, respectively.

Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the jackpot end process (S2112), which is one of the jackpot control processes (see FIG. 47) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described. As described above, this jackpot end process (S2112) is a process for setting the game state after the jackpot ends. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing this jackpot end process (S2112).

In the jackpot end processing (see FIG. 48), first, it is determined whether the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S2201), and if the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S2201: Yes), the ball is hit during the current jackpot. Since it means that the V winning switch 65e3 has been passed, by setting 101 to the value of the probability variation counter 203g, the game state after the big hit is set to be the probability variation state (S2202), and the process shifts to S2205. do.

On the other hand, in the process of S2201, when it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203h is off (S2201: No), then it is determined whether or not the current jackpot type is jackpot D (S2203). If it is not a jackpot D (S2203: No), 101 is set in the value of the time saving / medium counter 203r (S2204), and the process proceeds to S2205. On the other hand, if it is a jackpot D (S2203: Yes), the process of S2204 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2205. As a result, when the jackpot type is jackpot D and the ball does not pass through the V winning switch 65e3 during the jackpot, the gaming state after the jackpot is set to the normal state. On the other hand, if the ball does not pass through the V winning switch 65e3 in another jackpot type, a time saving state of 100 times is set after the jackpot.

In the processing of S2205, a status command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the status after the end of the jackpot is set from each value of the probability variation counter 203g and the time saving medium counter 203r (S2205), and the jackpot medium flag 203x, And the probability variation setting flag 203h are both set to off (S2206), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the details of the winning process (S2113) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing this winning process (S2113). This winning process (S2113) is executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 47), and as described above, is a process for performing control according to the winning of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a.

In this winning process (S2113), first, it is determined whether or not the current round is valid (S2301). Here, the round validity period is the period during which the round game is set, that is, the period from when the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is set to the open state until the end of the interval period (3 seconds). Is. In the process of S2301, if the round validity period is not (S2301: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2301, when it is determined that the current round validity period is (S2301: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the winning of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is detected (S2302). If the winning of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is detected (S2302: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the winning number counter 203j to update (S2303), and the process proceeds to S2304.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2302, if the winning of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is not detected (S2302: No), the processing of S2303 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2304.

In the process of S2304, it is determined whether the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S2304), and if the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S2304: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S2306.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2304, when it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is 9 or less (S2304: No), it is determined whether the round time has elapsed (S2305), and if the round time has elapsed, it is determined. (S2305: Yes), the process proceeds to S2306.

In the processing of S2306, the closing of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is set (S2306), the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON (S2307), and the process proceeds to S2308.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the round time has not elapsed in the processing of S2305 (S2305: No), the processing of S2306 and S2307 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of S2308.

In the process of S2308, it is determined whether or not the operation counter 203k is larger than 0 (S2308), and if the operation counter 203k is not 0 (S2308: Yes), the operation counter 203k is subtracted by 1 (S2309), and the operation counter 203k is subtracted by 1. Move to processing. On the other hand, if the operation counter 203k is 0 (S2308: No), it means that it is the ball brushing period after closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a, so that the probability variation effective flag 203o is then turned on. (S2316). In the process of S2316, if the probability variation valid flag 203o is off (S2316: No), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, if the probabilistic valid flag 203o is on (S2316: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the probabilistic valid timer 203p (S2317), and then the value of the probabilistic valid timer 203p is the upper limit value (1. 5 seconds) is determined (S2318). Then, if the value of the probability change effective timer 203p is not the upper limit value (S2318: No), the process proceeds to the process of S2310, and the process of monitoring the ball entering the probability change entry port 671 and updating the probability change setting flag 203h is executed. do. As a result, if the probability variation effective timer 203p is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed the V winning switch 65e3, so that the probability variation game state can be set in consideration of the ball brushing time. Further, since there is an upper limit to the time for which the ball is determined to be valid, it is possible to prevent the ball from being illegally passed through the V winning switch and being given a probabilistic gaming state.

On the other hand, if the value of the probabilistic valid timer 203p is the upper limit value (S2318: Yes), the probabilistic valid flag 203o is set to off (S2319), the value of the probabilistic valid timer 203p is reset (S2320), and this process is performed. finish.

In the process of S2310, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed the V winning switch 65e3 (S2310), and if the ball has not passed the V winning switch 65e3 (S2310: No), the process proceeds to the process of S2313. On the other hand, if the ball has passed the V winning switch 65e3 (S2310: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the probability variation passage counter 203i (S2311), the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON (S2312), and S2313. Move to the processing of.

In the process of S2313, it is determined whether or not the operation counter 203k is 0 (S2313), and if the operation counter 203k is not 0 (S2313: No), the process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the operation counter 203k is 0 (S2313: Yes), the flow path solenoid 65k is set to off (S2314), the probability variation valid flag 203o is set to on (S2315), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 50, the abnormality processing (S2114) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing this abnormality processing (S2114). This abnormal processing (S2114) is a processing executed in the jackpot control processing (see FIG. 47), and as described above, the ball that has entered the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is normally discharged. It is a process for determining whether or not it has been done.

In the abnormal processing (S2114), first, it is determined whether the current round valid period is (S2401), and if it is not the round valid period (S2401: No), the present processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round valid period is (S2401: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the ball has passed the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 (S2402).

In the process of S2402, when it is determined that the ball has passed the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 (S2402: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the ball discharge number counter 203q (S2403), and the process proceeds to the process of S2404. On the other hand, in the process of S2402, if the sphere has not passed through the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 (S2402: No), the process of S2403 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S2404.

In the process of S2404, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203m is on (S2404). If it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203m is off (S2404: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the remaining ball timer flag 203m is on (S2404: Yes), the ball brushing period is in progress, so 1 is added to the value of the remaining ball timer 203n to update (S2405). Next, it is determined whether the value of the remaining ball timer 203n is the upper limit value (3 seconds in this embodiment) (S2406), and if the value of the remaining ball timer 203n is not the upper limit value (S2406: No), the book is used as it is. End the process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the remaining ball timer 203n is the upper limit value (3 seconds) (S2406: Yes), then the number of discharged balls (the value of the probability variation passing counter 203i and the value of the ball discharged number counter 203q) It is determined whether the total value) matches the number of winnings (S2407).

If it is determined in the process of S2407 that the number of ejected items and the number of winning items do not match (S2407: No), an error command is set (S2408), and the process proceeds to the process of S2409. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, a character of a winning number mismatch error is displayed) is displayed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to illegally leave the ball in the variable winning device 65 and suppress the illegal act of causing the ball to flow down to the special discharge flow path 65e2 during the on period of the flow path solenoid 65k after the start of the next big hit. can.

On the other hand, in the process of S2407, if it is determined that the number of discharged items and the number of winning items match (S2407: Yes), the process of S2408 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2409. In the process of S2409, the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to off (S2409), and then the value of the remaining ball timer 203n is reset (S2410). After that, the values of the winning number counter 203j, the ball ejection number counter 203q, and the probability variation passing counter 203i are reset (S2411), and this process is terminated.

By executing this abnormal processing (see FIG. 50), the ball that has entered the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is not normally discharged due to the clogging of the ball inside the variable winning device 65 or the like. It is possible to detect and notify the occurrence of such a problem at an early stage. In addition, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts in which the ball is illegally left inside the variable winning device 65 during a big hit.

Next, with reference to FIG. 51, a small hit control process (S2005), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 46) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the contents of this small hit control process (S2005).

In the small hit control process (see FIG. 51), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit of the special symbol is started (S2501). In the process of S2501, when it is determined that the small hit of the special symbol is started (S2105: Yes), the opening command of the small hit is set (S2502). Then, the small hit medium flag 203w is set to ON (S2503), and this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S2501, when it is determined that the small hit of the special symbol is not started (S2501: No), it is determined whether the small hit middle flag 203w is on (S2504). As for the small hits of the special symbols, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the small hits of the special symbols (including during the small hit game of the special symbols). Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the end of the small hit game of the special symbol. In the process of S2504, if the small hit medium flag 203w is off (S2504: No), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2504, when it is determined that the small hit medium flag 203w is on (S2504: Yes), it is determined whether or not it is the opening end timing (S2505), and if it is the opening end timing. (S2505: Yes), the opening pattern of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is set (S2506), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S2505, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the opening (S2505: No), it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the opening pattern set in the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a (S2507). ). In the process of S2507, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the opening pattern set in the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a (S2507: Yes), the ending command of the small hit is set (S2508), and this processing is performed. finish.

On the other hand, if it is not the end timing of the set open pattern (S2507: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the small hit of the special symbol (S2509). That is, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the ending. If it is determined in the process of S2509 that it is the end timing of the small hit (S2509: Yes), the small hit middle flag 203w is set to off (S2510), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is not the end timing of the small hit (S2509: No), this process ends as it is.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 52 to 56, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 52. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S4001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing of S4116 (see FIG. 53) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure") in this startup processing. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S4002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 53, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command from the main control device 110 (see FIGS. 53 and S4113), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S4116. The power off processing flag is turned on before the power off processing is executed, and the power off processing flag is turned off after the power off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power off processing of S4116 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power off processing flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S4002: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power of S4116 is turned off. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S4006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data corruption of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S4003: Yes), the process proceeds to S4004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data corruption in RAM 223 is not confirmed (S4003: No), the process proceeds to S4008.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power-off process of S4116 was completed after a momentary power failure occurred, or was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S4003: No), and the data shifts to S4008.

If the power off processing flag is on (S4002: Yes), the start-up process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power off process of S4116, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 of the above was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power off processing is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S4004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S4004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S4004). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of RAM 223, all the storage areas of RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S4006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: No), the abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S4007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may do it.

In the process of S4008, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S4008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S4116 is executed (see S4115 of FIG. 53). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S4116 is executed, the process of S4008 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S4116 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S4009), and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S4010), the state The game state notified by the command is set in the game state storage area 223h (S4011), then interrupt permission is set (S4012), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the processing of S4008 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the startup processing of this time is started after the power is completely shut off, for example, so that the processing of S4008 is performed via the processing of S4004 to S4006. This is the case where the processing is reached, or only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S4008: No), S4009, which is the clearing process of the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process is shifted to S4010, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S4010).

The reason for skipping the clearing process of S4009 is that when the processing of S4008 is reached via the processing of S4004 to S4006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S4004. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the previous process of S4101 was executed (S4101), 1 millisecond. If the above time has not passed (S4101: No), the process proceeds to the process of S4111 without performing the process of S4102 to S4110. In the process of S4101, it is the process related to the display (effect) that S4102 to S4110 determines whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed, whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S4111 and the variation display setting process of S4112 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S4111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the processing of S4112 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing can be prevented. Based on the above, settings related to the variable display effect can be made without delay.

When it is determined that 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S4101 (S4101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S4103 to S4110 are sent to the display control device 114. (S4102). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited by the process of S4108 described later (S4103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S4104). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that the power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If it is not at the time of turning on the power, the process proceeds to the process of S4105 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S4105, the customer waiting effect is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S4106). In the customer waiting effect, when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is a display control device as a command. It is transmitted to 114. In the hold quantity display update process (S4106), a process of updating the display of the hold symbol display of the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S4107). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting the effect. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

In addition, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the sortable period (the period during which the jackpot game is in progress and the state in which there is no hold), which will be described later, the hold symbol display displayed in the order in which the hold is established starts to change. It is sorted and displayed in order.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is then executed (S4108), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S4109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S4109, the liquid crystal display effect execution management process is executed (S4110). After that, the process proceeds to S4111. In the liquid crystal display execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S4108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal display effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S4109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

After the liquid crystal display effect execution management process (S4110), a command determination process for performing a process according to a command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S4111). Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 54.

After the command determination process (S4111), in order to display the variation display effect on the third symbol display device 81, a display variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is issued. A variable display setting process, which is a process set for transmission to the display control device 114, is executed (S4112). Details of this variable display setting process (S4112) will be described later with reference to FIG. 55.

When the processing of S4112 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4113). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S4113 (S4113: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing in-progress flag are turned on (S4115), and the power-off process is executed (S4116). After executing the power off processing, the power off processing flag is turned off (S4117), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power off processing, the occurrence of the interrupt processing is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the power failure occurrence information is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S4113 (S4113: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S4114), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S4114: No), the process returns to the process of S4101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, in the process of S4114, when it is determined that the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4114: Yes), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S4111) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 54. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S4111). This command determination process (S4111) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. .. The details of the command determination process (S4111) will be described below.

In the command determination process (FIG. 54, S4111), first, from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223, the first command received from the main control device 110 among the unprocessed commands is read and analyzed, and the main control device 110 is analyzed. Further, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command has been received (S4201). When it is determined that either the special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command has been received (S4201: Yes), the flag corresponding to the type of the received command is set to on (S4202). Specifically, when the special figure 1 stop type command is received, the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223d1 is set to on, and when the special figure 2 stop type command is received, the special figure 2 stop type selection flag is set. Set 223d2 to on. Next, the stop type (any of complete loss, reach loss, small hit, and jackpot A to D) is extracted from the received special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 stop type command (S4203), and this process is performed. finish. The stop type extracted in the process of S4203 is stored in the voice lamp control device 113 in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221. The stop type extracted from the special figure 1 stop type command can be identified as the stop type of the first special symbol, and the stop type extracted from the special figure 2 stop type command is of the second special symbol. It is identifiable that it is a stop type, and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 55) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

On the other hand, if it is determined that neither the special figure 1 stop type command nor the special figure 2 stop type command has been received in the processing of S4201 (S4201: No), then the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern is transmitted from the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not a command has been received (S4204). The special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is a command for notifying the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol.

When it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command has been received in the processing of S4204 (S4204: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223c1 provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4205), and the received special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is set to ON (S4205). FIG. 1 The variation pattern type is extracted from the variation pattern command (S4206), and this process is terminated. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 in a format that can be identified as the variation pattern type of the first special symbol, and is stored in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 55) described later. , When notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation display effect of the first special symbol and the display mode of the variation display effect of the first special symbol (set the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol). When you do).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 variation pattern command has not been received (S4204: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation pattern command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4207). The special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is a command for notifying the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol.

In the process of S4207, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command has been received (S4207: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223c2 provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4208), and the received special figure 2 is received. FIG. 2 The variation pattern type is extracted from the variation pattern command (S4209), and this process is terminated. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 in a format that can be identified as the variation pattern type of the second special symbol, and is stored in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 55) described later. , When notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation display effect of the second special symbol and the display mode of the variation display effect of the second special symbol (set the variation pattern command for display of the second special symbol). When you do).

In the process of S4207, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S4207: No), it is determined whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4210). When it is determined that the hold ball number command has been received (S4210: Yes), the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d or the second special symbol hold ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 included in the received hold ball number command is included. The value of the number counter 203e (that is, the number of reserved balls for the fluctuation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is extracted and provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the extracted counter value. The corresponding counter value is updated (S4211), and this process ends. More specifically, when the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is extracted, the extracted counter value is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball counter 223b1 of the RAM 223, and the second special symbol reserved ball number is stored. When the value of the counter 203e is extracted, the extracted counter value is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b2.

Here, since the hold ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball wins the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640 (starting winning), the starting winning is won. Each time, by the processing of S4211, the values of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b1 of the voice lamp control device 113 and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223b2 are set to the first special symbol holding of the main control device 110. The values of the ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e can be adjusted respectively. Therefore, due to the influence of noise or the like, the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b1 or the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223b2 of the voice lamp control device 113 is the first special symbol holding ball number counter of the main control device 110. Even if it deviates from the value of 203d or the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e, if the reserved ball number command is notified based on the start winning, the first special symbol reserved ball number of the voice lamp control device 113 The value of the counter 223b1 or the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b2 can be modified to match the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d or the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110.

Further, in the process of S4210, when it is determined that the reserved ball number command has not been received (S4210: No), it is determined whether the special figure 1 confirmation command or the special figure 2 confirmation command has been received from the main controller 110. (S4212). If it is determined that either the special figure 1 confirmation command or the special figure 2 confirmation command has been received in the processing of S4212 (S4212: Yes), the confirmation display of the special symbol corresponding to the command is set (S4213). , End this process. Specifically, in the process of S4213, when the special figure 1 confirmation command is received, the confirmation display of the first special symbol is set, and when the special figure 2 confirmation command is received, the confirmation display of the second special symbol is received. To set.

On the other hand, in the process of S4212, when it is determined that neither the special figure 1 confirmation command nor the special figure 2 confirmation command has been received (S4212: No), it is determined whether or not the state command has been received (S4214), and the state is determined. If a command has been received (S4214: Yes), the information corresponding to the game state notified by the received state command is set (stored) in the game state storage area 223h (S4215), and this process ends. ..

On the other hand, in the process of S4214, when it is determined that the state command has not been received (S4214: No), the process corresponding to the other command is executed (S4216), and this process is terminated. In the processing of S4215, if the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is performed. Is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114.

Next, with reference to FIG. 55, the variation display setting process (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing this variation display setting process (S4112). This variation display setting process (see FIG. 55) is one of the main processes (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. As described above, the variation display setting process (see FIG. 55) is based on the first or second variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to display the variation display effect on the third symbol display device 81. , A variable pattern command for displaying the first special symbol or the second special symbol is generated, and a process of transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Further, based on the extracted stop type (complete off, reach out, jackpot E, F), the display special figure 1 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type, or the display special figure 2 Executes the process to set the stop type command.

In the variation display setting process (see FIG. 55), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation start flag 223c1 provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4401). Then, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223c1 is off (S4401: No), the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process of S4406 is started. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223c1 is on (S4401: Yes), the fluctuation of the first special symbol this time is based on the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command received from the main controller 110. Each process of S4402 to S4405 for determining the detailed aspect of the display is executed.

More specifically, first, the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223c1 is set to off (S4402), and then the fluctuation pattern selection process for selecting the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is executed (S4403). The details of this fluctuation pattern selection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 56. Next, 1 is subtracted from the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 (S4404), the counter value is set in the secondary special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223e (S4405), and the process proceeds to S4406.

In the processing of S4406, it is determined whether the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223c2 provided in the RAM 223 is on (S4406), and if the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223c2 is off (S4406: No), the main controller 110 Since the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command has not been received, the process proceeds to S4411. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223c2 is on (S4406: Yes), the fluctuation of the second special symbol this time is based on the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command received from the main controller 110. Each process of S4407 to S4410 for determining the detailed aspect of the display is executed.

Specifically, the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223c2 is set to off (S4407), and then the fluctuation pattern command for displaying the second special symbol is set based on the extracted fluctuation pattern (S4408). Next, 1 is subtracted from the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b2 (S4409), the counter value is set in the secondary special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223f (S4410), and the process proceeds to S4411.

In the process of S4411, it is determined whether either the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223d1 or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223d2 of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4411). Then, when it is determined that both the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223d1 and the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223d2 are off (S4411: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S4411, when it is determined that either the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223d1 or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223d2 is on (S4411: Yes), the flag determined to be on is turned off. (S4412), and then, in the process of S4203 of the command determination process (see FIG. 54), the stop type extracted from the special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command is set (S4413). Next, based on the set stop type, a display special figure 1 stop type command or a display special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is generated (S4414). End the process.

In addition, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a big hit, the special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command notified from the main control device 110 notifies the big hit type and makes a small hit. In that case, the small hit type is notified, and in the case of a loss, a complete loss or a reach loss is notified.

With this configuration, the voice lamp control device 113 can control the display control device 114 so that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variablely displayed at the same time.

Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the details of the variation pattern selection process (S4403) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing this fluctuation pattern selection process (S4403). This variation pattern selection process (S4403) is one process of the variation display setting process (S4112) (see FIG. 55) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is detailed in the variation pattern of the first special symbol. This is a process for setting an aspect.

In the variation pattern selection process (S4403), first, in the process of S4206 of the command determination process (see FIG. 54), it is determined whether or not the super reach is extracted from the special figure 1 variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 (see FIG. 54). In S4501), when it is determined that the extracted fluctuation pattern is super reach (S4501: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the set stop type is small hit C (S4502). In the process of S4502, when it is determined that the set stop type is not the small hit C (S4502: No), then it is determined whether or not the set stop type is the big hit D (S4503). If it is determined that the stop type is not the jackpot D (S4503: No), the process shifts to S4504. Further, in the processing of S4501, if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern this time is not super reach (S4501: No), there is no possibility of setting a special super reach at this point, so the processing of S4502 and S4503 is skipped. , The process shifts to S4504.

In the process of S4504, the detailed mode of the current variation pattern is described based on the variation pattern extracted from the special figure 1 variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 in the process of S4206 of the command determination process (see FIG. 54). The decision is made and the process is transferred to S4506.

On the other hand, in the process of S4502, when it is determined that the set stop type is the small hit C (S4502: Yes), or in the process of S4503, the set stop type is the big hit D. If it is determined (S4503: Yes), the process proceeds to S4505 for setting the special super reach (see FIG. 9B). In the processing of S4505, the mode of the fluctuation pattern this time is determined to be a special super reach (see FIG. 9B) (S4505), and the process proceeds to the processing of S4506. In the process of S4506, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the determined variation pattern is set (S4506), and this process is terminated.

By executing this variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 56), the special super reach (see FIG. 9 (b)) is performed only when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit D or a small hit C. Can be executed. Among the lottery results for which the special super reach (see FIG. 9B) is set, the jackpot D has a small number of prize balls, and neither the probability change state nor the time saving state is given after the jackpot, so that the degree of advantage for the player is high. It gets lower. On the other hand, when the small hit C is reached, after the small hit C is completed, the chance mode A in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed is set over 100 times of variable display, so that 100 for the player. You can receive almost the same profit as the time reduction period is set. Therefore, when the special super reach is executed, the game can be performed in the hope that it will be a small hit C rather than a big hit D. This is because the number of prize balls (about 500) that can be obtained when the jackpot is D is that the lottery of the first special symbol can be performed only about 30 to 40 times after the jackpot.

In a general pachinko machine, when the variable display is executed, the game is played with the expectation that the third symbols with the same numbers will be aligned (that is, it will be a big hit). In the machine 10, when a special super reach occurs, it is possible to confirm the effect result in the hope that the third symbols with the same numbers will not be aligned. That is, it is possible to provide a novel game property that the game can be performed with the expectation that the hit will be a deviation (small hit C) having a high degree of advantage rather than a big hit (big hit D) having a low degree of advantage.

<Regarding the control process of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 70. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. Normally, the MPU 231 executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected, and the V interrupt process can be executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 57, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process is to execute the initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the activation of this main process is performed according to the following flow. When the power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is "0000H", the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction to start the main process.

Here, if all the boot programs first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". When it is detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a large amount of time to set the buffer RAM 234c from its read, so the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231. As a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the NOR type ROM has a high speed because a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Since it is a memory capable of reading data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately shifts to the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 enables various controls for the third symbol display device 81 to be executed. To start.

Here, the boot process (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. 58. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S6001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in the third symbol display device 81 by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it is possible to sufficiently store not only the image data but also the control program and the like, while controlling the character ROM 234. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 is used. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing the data is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c according to the boot program. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234a1, only a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the process of S6102, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S6102, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot processing (see S6001 in FIG. 57) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 57) (S6105), the execution of the boot program is completed and the main boot process is completed.

By executing the boot process (S6001) in this way, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use to perform various processes.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read a control program or fixed value data from a work RAM composed of a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 58, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes all the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, the control program is not necessarily limited to this, and a predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101 is a boot program that executes a boot processing to be processed following the processing of S6102. May be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is indicated by an instruction pointer. The process set in 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S6101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, some boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfer a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S6101. After repeating the process a plurality of times including the process of S6102 and S6102, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released has been described, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect unit in the MPU 231 which becomes possible after the boot process earlier.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 57. When the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings are made for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device. In addition, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, an image is drawn on the image controller 237 so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct the execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color on the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected whether or not the color image corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). The transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235a at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 at power-on according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transmits the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a part of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of a part of the register or the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237 to grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on to the main image area 235a at power-on is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S6003, then the variable image at power-on A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the variable image area 235b when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on (S6004). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) are included. , The start address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, is included, and the image controller receives the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on. Then, the image data transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S6004, then the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 68 (a)) described later, all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image is executed (see S7502 in FIG. 68 (a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. As a result, in the meantime, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 59 (b)), the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) (not shown) is simply drawn. The command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 59 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 59 (b)) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow read speed of the character ROM 234 can be stored in the resident video RAM 235. It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image when the power is turned on and the variable image when the power is turned on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image when the power is turned on is the third. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some kind of initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player or the like resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. This can be immediately confirmed, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the main image at power-on after the power is turned on, so that the main image at power-on is the third symbol. Since the player started the game while it was displayed on the display device 81, the player entered the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (starting prize), and the start instruction of the variable effect was given. When the main control device 110 passes through the voice lamp control device 113, that is, when the display fluctuation pattern command is received, the fluctuation image at power-on is immediately displayed during the fluctuation effect period, and a simple fluctuation is performed. You can produce. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, but the character ROM 234 Is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, and it takes a long time to transfer the flash memory. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image is continuously displayed at the time of turning on the power for a long time. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Therefore, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, the power failure is restored. Immediately after, even while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the process of S6005, the interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 59 (a). FIG. 59 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 59 (b). FIG. 59B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display processing of the image.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, in the image controller 237, since the drawing instruction of the next image is not received at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 59 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. The command determination process (S6302) is executed so that the display device 81 can display the image, and then the display setting process (S6303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S6302), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area is analyzed by the command interrupt process, the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the display demo command and the display demo command are executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. Set the data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when the start of the variation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 60 to 64.

In the display setting process (S6303), one frame of images to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) or the like. Specifically specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 65 to 67.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (S6304). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S6303) or the simple display setting process (S6309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the transfer setting process is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is normally used from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously notified. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 68 and 69.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame, the parameters required for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305), which are determined in the task process (S6304), are used. , The drawing list shown in FIG. 26 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list (S6306). The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 70.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. As a counter updated by the process of S6307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear out reach, non-front / back out reach, complete out) is set. The corresponding stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S6308) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S6309) is executed to shift to the process of S6304.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 60 to 64, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S6302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 60, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S6401: No), The command judgment process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), the new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S6303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S6402), and then the command The type of the unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S6403).

Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404). Then, if there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: Yes), the variation pattern command process is executed (S6405), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S6405) will be described with reference to FIG. 61A. FIG. 61A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing (S6405). This fluctuation pattern command processing (S6405) executes the processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. Set to buffer 233d (S6501).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but a part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly displayed. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the processing of S6501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a shorter fluctuation time than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the variation is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main control device 110 is used for the next display. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demo effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the symbol.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer is set. Initialize 233f to 0 (S6504). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S6505), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this fluctuation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S6505, from the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501. , The drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by S6502e. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the above.

Further, in the display setting process, when the time of the variation effect defined in the variation display data table is measured by using the time counting counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S6503, the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 60. In the processing of S6404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S6406). If there is a stop type command for display (S6406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S6407), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S6407) will be described with reference to FIG. 61 (b). FIG. 61B is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes the process corresponding to the display variable type command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the stop type command processing (S6407), first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (either big hit A to F, small hit A to C, reach off, or complete off) indicated by the display stop type command. (S6601), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 59 (b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device is used. The stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on 81 is finally set (S6602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the other stop symbol is set. Set it on (S6603) and return to the command determination process.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variation based on the data table. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S6304), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S6603, and the specified stop symbol is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address in which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

Since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S6601, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type is stopped. Determine the table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disconnection is set by the process of S6602.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit of the special symbol" is set, the third symbol display device 81 actually has the "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is off". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" is displayed, which causes the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol jackpot", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disengagement, in reality, if it is a "big hit of the special symbol", the third symbol display device 81 stops the complete disengagement. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big hit of the special symbol", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 60, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S6408), and the display is displayed. If there is an opening command for (S6408: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S6409), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the opening command processing (S6409) will be described with reference to FIG. 62A. FIG. 62A is a flowchart showing the opening command processing. This opening command process executes the process corresponding to the opening command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the opening command processing, first, the opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). After that, the transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702), and the time data is set in the timekeeping counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S6703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6704). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S6705), the opening command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 60, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6408, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S6408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S6410), and the display is performed. If there is a round number command (S6410: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S6411), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the round number command processing (S6411) will be described with reference to FIG. 62 (b). FIG. 62B is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. This round number command process executes the process corresponding to the display round number command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display data. Set to the table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6802).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6801, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6804). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S6805), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 60, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6410, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S6412), and the display is performed. If there is an ending command for (S6412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the ending command processing (S6413) will be described with reference to FIG. 63. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the ending command processing. This ending command process executes the process corresponding to the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set to the buffer 233d (S6901). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6902).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6901, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6903). S6904). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S6905), the ending command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

Returning to FIG. 60, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6412, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S6412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6414), and the rear image is determined. If there is a change command (S6414: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S6415), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the rear image change command processing (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. 64. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the rear image change command processing. This rear image change command process executes the process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the rear image change command process, first, the rear image change flag 233w that notifies the normal image transfer setting process (S7503) of the change of the rear image due to the reception of the rear image change command in the on state is set to on (S7001). ). Then, among the bits of the back image discrimination flag 233x provided for each back image type (back A, B), the bit corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is set to on, and other bits are set. The bit corresponding to the back image type of is set to off (S7002), the back image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag 233w set by the process of S7001 is turned on, the rear image type after the change is changed from the rear image discrimination flag 233x set by the process of S7002. Identify.

Further, in the task processing, when it is specified to display either the back side A or B according to the back side type of the back side image specified in the display data table, from the back side image discrimination flag 233x set by S7002, The type of back image to be displayed at that time is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type (RAM type) in which the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored. The resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, he / she does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In that case, there should be no case where two or more back image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command mistakenly changes the back image. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S7002, when it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted, and the back image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change in the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set it appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 60. In the processing of S6414, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S6414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6416), and there is an error command. If (S6416: Yes), the error command processing is executed (S6417), and the process returns to the processing of S6401.

Here, the details of the error command processing (S6417) will be described with reference to FIG. 64 (b). FIG. 64B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing executes the processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the error command processing, first, the error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S7101). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (S7102), and the error command is set. The process ends and the process returns to the command judgment process.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7101, the error type generated from the error determination flag set by the process of S7102 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the processing in S7102 sets the error discrimination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the person concerned with the hall can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 60. If it is determined that there is no error command in the process of S6416 (S6416: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S6418), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

In the processing of S6401 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes). ), The processing of S6402 to S6418 is executed again. Then, the processes of S6401 to S6418 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S6401 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 59 (b)) is also processed in the same manner as the command determination process. However, in the simple command judgment processing, only the commands required to display the image at power-on, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, are sent from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Extract and execute the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 61 (a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 61 (b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, and for other commands, Performs the process of discarding without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 61A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the fluctuation image at power-on is changed to the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S6501. The image data of the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on, which are set and required in that case, are stored in the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable dynamic image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S6502, the process of writing the Bull data to the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 65 to 67, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S6303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 65, first, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7201), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S7201: No). ), It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed earlier, the processes of S7202 to S7204 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S7205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S7201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after the new command flag is set to off (S7202), S7203 to S7204 Executes the process corresponding to the new command by the process of.

In the process of S7203, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S7203). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S7203: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S7204).

Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 66. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error discrimination flag is referred to, and all the error discrimination set to be ON is performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S7301).

In the task processing (S6304), based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified, and the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are specified for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S7301, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S7302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 65. After the warning image setting process (S7204) or in the process of S7203, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S7203: No), the process proceeds to the process of S7205.

In S7205, the pointer update process is executed (S7205). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 67. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7401). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in various data tables, Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the actual data of each data is specified after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S7401, then, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. (S7402). As a result, if it is End information (S7402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S7403), and if it is a demo display data table (S7403: Yes), the display data The time data corresponding to the production time of the demo display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counting counter 233h (S7404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S7405), and this processing is completed. Then, return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demo display data table, so that the demo effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S7403, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S7403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (S7403: No). S7406), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is set. Since the drawn contents of the above are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7402, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S7402: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the process returns to FIG. 65 to continue the description. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are acquired from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7206). In the task processing (S6304), the types of sprites (display objects) that compose the image are specified based on the drawing contents developed in the processing of S7206 together with the warning image developed earlier, and for each sprite. , Display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and other parameters required for drawing are determined.

Next, the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S7207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7208). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S7208: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is 0 or less (S7208: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmation display flag is on. (S7209).

As a result, if the confirmation display flag is off (S7209: No), the confirmation display has not been produced yet, and it is the timing to produce the confirmation display. Therefore, first, the confirmation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d. It is set (S7210), and then the contents are cleared by writing the Bull data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7211). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7213). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S7214), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7215), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. As such, the drawing content can be set. Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the final display effect by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the final display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by starting another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not applied to the MPU 231. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S7215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, and in the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task processing (S6304), from the start of the fluctuation until a predetermined time elapses, the stop symbol of the variation effect immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by S7215, and the stop symbol thereof is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S7209, if the confirmation display flag is on (S7209: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S7216). If the demo display flag is off (S7216: No), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so that a certain time has elapsed from the end of the final display effect. Later, a process for displaying the demo effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

First, the demo display data table is acquired and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7217), and the contents are cleared by writing the Bull data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7218). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7220), the demo display flag indicating that the demo is being produced in the ON state is set to ON (S7221), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demo effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing contents can be set to.

In the process of S7216, if the demo display flag is on (S7216: Yes), it means that the demo effect is performed after the final display effect is completed, and the demo effect is completed. Therefore, the display setting process is terminated as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. Then, in this case, various settings are made so that the demo effect is started again as described above by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the voice lamp control device 113 Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demo effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The simple display setting process (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 59 (b)) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the variation image at power-on is completed, one of the variation images at power-on according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time. The process of setting the display data table that specifies that the image of the above is stopped and displayed in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 68 and 69, the details of the transfer setting process (S6305) described above, which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 68A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the resident image transfer setting The process is executed (S7502), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 68 (b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, is off as a result of the processing of S7501 (S7501: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is the resident video from the character ROM 234. It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7503), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 69.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S7502), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 68 (b). FIG. 68B is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S7502).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the untransferred image data (S7601), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S7601: Yes). ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S7602). In the process of S7602, when the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data and then the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. When it is determined by the process of S7602 that the transfer process has not been completed (S7602: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S7602: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S7603. Further, as a result of the processing of S7601, even if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7601: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S7603.

In the process of S7603, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S7603), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S7603: No), the non-resident image data has not been transferred. A transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7604), and this process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the resident video RAM 235 (area provided in the resident video RAM 235) for storing the resident target image data) is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 235. Transfers to the specified address of the resident video RAM 235. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

If all the resident target image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S7603 (S7603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to off (S7605), and this process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 59 (b)), the command is not a simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 59 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 59 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 60 to 64) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 65 to 67) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 69) (see S7501: No in FIG. 68 (a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 is resident in all resident video RAM 235 except for the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is continuously held without being overwritten during the power-on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed with. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 includes image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, a main control device 110, an audio lamp control device 113, and a display control device 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is resident immediately after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timings can be performed. , The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S7503), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 69. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S7503).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7205) of the display setting process (S6303) executed earlier is used. Acquire the information described in the indicated address (S7701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is the transfer data information (S7702), and if it is the transfer data information (S7702: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored is obtained from the transfer data information. The start address (storage source start address), the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S7703) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S7704), and the process proceeds to S7705.

Further, in the process of S7702, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but the Null data (S7702: No), the processes of S7703 and S7704 are skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S7705. In the process of S7705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S7705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S7705: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S7706).

In the process of S7706, after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. Then, when it is determined by the process of S7706 that the transfer process has not been completed (S7706: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S7706: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S7707. Further, as a result of the processing of S7705, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S7705: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S7707.

In the process of S7707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7707), and if the transfer start flag is on (S7707: Yes), the image data to be transferred exists, so that the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S7708), the image data of the sprite indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S7703 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to the process of S7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S7707: No), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag 233w is on (S7709). If the rear image change flag 233w is not on but off (S7709: No), the image data to be transferred does not exist, so the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the rear image change flag 233w is on (S7709: Yes), it means that the rear image is changed. Therefore, after the rear image change flag 233w is set to off (S7710), it is provided for each rear image type. Among the rear image discrimination flags 233x, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag 233x in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S7711). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag 233x in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination (transfer destination). The start address of the normal video RAM 236) is acquired (S7712), and the process proceeds to S7713.

In the process of S7713, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713). The discrimination in the processing of S7713 is performed by referring to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

Then, as a result of the processing of S7713, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , Ends the normal image transfer setting process as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load on each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S7713 (S7713: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S7714). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 displays the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the sub-area) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Forward to the given address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the process of S7714, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S7715), and this normal transfer setting process is terminated. To update the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, as described above, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is set to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are supposed to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination process, and as a result, the display stop type command is used. When it is determined that the stop type information shown is the stop type of the jackpot, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, among the image data used in the rear image, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 is used. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed as the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with the setting of. Then, the MPU 231 performs the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the image storage area 236a so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When drawing the sprite, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 70, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information). , Color information, filter designation information), and a drawing list (not shown) is generated from the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305) (S7801). That is, in the processing of S7801, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S6304). Then, the parameters required for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, and then the details for each sprite are arranged in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which the sprite image data is stored and the parameters required for drawing the sprite as various drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 has a fixed area. , The storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified according to the sprite type, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws an image in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231 and expands the image by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the start address of the storage source to the final address of the storage source is read out from the character ROM 234 in order and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list subsequently transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can display the expanded image in the frame buffer. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be processed in parallel at the same time. Can be done.

The drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233j after the process of S7802 (S7803). Then, the drawing process is finished, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and to "0" when it is "1". Will be done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the drawing list is transmitted by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It will be performed every time the drawing process of the inclusion process (see FIG. 59 (b)) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is configured to shift to the chance mode A, which is more advantageous than the normal mode, based on a small hit in the lottery of the special symbol. In chance mode A, the fluctuation time of the 2nd special symbol becomes shorter (3 seconds), which is more advantageous than the lottery of the 1st special symbol (it is easy to set the consecutive villa mode when it becomes a big hit). Since the lottery of the symbols is easily executed, the player can be made to play the game with a strong expectation that it will be a big hit. Further, in the normal mode, it is possible to shift to the chance mode A without going through the jackpot, so that the game can be intonation even if the jackpot has not been won for a long period of time. Therefore, even if a so-called big addiction occurs, the motivation of the player for the game can be maintained by sandwiching the chance mode A in between. Further, the length (number of lottery) of the chance mode A to be given is configured to be different for each small hit type. As a result, the player who senses that the hit has been made can be made to play the game with the expectation that the chance mode A is a small hit type that is set for a longer period of time. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Further, in the first embodiment, as the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display of the special symbol, the super reach mode in which the fluctuation time is 60 seconds is determined only in the case of a big hit or a small hit. .. That is, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the super reach is not set. With this configuration, the player is made to recognize that the variable display being executed is a super reach (when the variable time exceeds 30 seconds), the player recognizes that the hit is a small hit or a big hit. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game. In addition, in the present embodiment, the special reach with a fluctuation time of 90 seconds can be determined only when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the special symbol. With this configuration, the player can be made to recognize that the jackpot will be a big hit when it is found that the variable display being executed is a special reach (the variable time exceeds 60 seconds). Therefore, since the player can be made to detect that the jackpot will be a big hit before the fluctuation display ends, the result of the production can be watched with confidence in the remaining fluctuation time.

Further, in the present embodiment, a special super reach is provided as a kind of effect mode when the super reach is determined. The production mode of this special super reach is configured so that it can be determined only when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit D or a small hit C. Since the jackpot D has a small number of prize balls and is not given a probability change state or a time saving state after the jackpot, the degree of advantage for the player is low. On the other hand, when the small hit C is reached, the chance mode A in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed is set over a maximum of 100 variable displays after the small hit C is completed, so that the player is 100. You can receive almost the same profit as the time reduction period is set. Therefore, when the special super reach is executed, the game can be performed in the hope that it will be a small hit C rather than a big hit D.

In a general pachinko machine, when the variable display is executed, the game is played with the expectation that the third symbols with the same numbers will be aligned (that is, it will be a big hit). In the machine 10, when a special super reach occurs, it is possible to confirm the effect result in the hope that the third symbols with the same numbers will not be aligned. That is, it is possible to provide a novel game property that the game can be performed with the expectation that the hit will be a deviation (small hit C) having a high degree of advantage rather than a big hit (big hit D) having a low degree of advantage.

In the first embodiment, the value of the chance mode counter 203x is subtracted each time the special symbol lottery is executed, regardless of whether the lottery is the first special symbol or the second special symbol lottery. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the value of the chance mode counter 203x may be subtracted only when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed. With this configuration, when the chance mode A is set, the lottery of the advantageous special symbol 2 can be reliably performed a predetermined number of times regardless of the number of reserved balls in the lottery of the first special symbol. can. Therefore, the expectation for the chance mode A can be further increased.

In the first embodiment, the chance mode A is always set when a small hit is made in the lottery of the first special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the chance mode A is not set. It may be configured to provide a hit type. As a result, even if super reach occurs, it is possible to provide a case where the chance mode A is not set. Therefore, when super reach occurs, it is possible to draw more attention to the effect result.

In the first embodiment, the jackpot D, which is the most disadvantageous to the player among the jackpot types (that is, the time saving state is not given and the prize ball is the least), or the jackpot D, which is the most advantageous to the player among the small hit types. The configuration is such that a special super reach is provided in a mode that is selected only when a small hit C is obtained, but the conditions for generating the special super reach are not limited to this. For example, the special super reach is configured to be executed only when the most advantageous jackpot A or the most advantageous small hit C among the jackpot types won in the lottery of the first special symbol is obtained. You may. With this configuration, the player can be made aware that the most advantageous big hit or the most advantageous small hit will be before the symbol stops, so that the player can feel reassured. Can be done.

In the first embodiment, after the lottery of the special symbol is executed, the winning flag 203s is referred to, and when the winning flag 203s is on, the lottery result is overwritten. is not it. For example, the winning flag 203s may be referred to before the lottery of the special symbol is executed, and if it is on, the lottery result may be determined to be out of order and the lottery of the special symbol may be skipped. With this configuration, the processing load can be reduced when the hit flag 203s is on.

In the first embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is common (3 seconds) between the normal (low probability) state of the normal symbol and the time saving (high probability) state of the normal symbol, and further, the hit probability of the normal symbol is set. There is no big difference in the opening period of the electric accessory 640a when it hits a normal symbol, but it is not limited to this. When the chance mode A is set, it may be arbitrarily determined as long as it is more advantageous to hit right than to hit left (it becomes easier to execute a lottery of special symbols). More specifically, for example, in order to ensure that the number of balls held is reduced when hitting right in the normal mode, for example, the probability of hitting a normal symbol is lowered (for example, to 1/3), or an electric role is used. The opening period of the object 640a may be shorter (for example, 0.7 seconds × 1 time), or the fluctuation time of the normal symbol may be longer (for example, 10 seconds). In this way, by making a difference in control between the normal low state of the normal symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol, it is possible to reliably reduce the number of balls held when right-handed in the normal mode. Therefore, by always hitting the right side even in the normal mode, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which only the advantageous second special symbol lottery is performed without reducing the number of balls held.

In the present embodiment, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the chance mode A, the short variation (3 seconds) is selected, but when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed, it is the same as the normal mode. The configuration was such that control was executed. On the other hand, when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed, the chance A table may be changed so that the fluctuation time becomes long (for example, always 120 seconds). With this configuration, if a left-handed ball is accidentally hit in chance mode A, or a part of the ball hit by a right-handed ball enters the first entry port 64, the entry is made. Since the fluctuation time of the first special symbol based on the sphere becomes long, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol can be performed a plurality of times during the long fluctuation time. Therefore, when a right-handed hit is made in the chance mode A, more advantageous second special symbol lottery can be executed.

In the first embodiment, on the condition that a small hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, the chance A table 202d3 is referred to as the variable pattern table over the lottery of the special symbol a specific number of times (chance). The configuration was such that the mode A is shifted to), but the conditions for setting the chance mode A are not limited to this. For example, the variation pattern table to be referred to may be varied according to the time information. Specifically, a known RTC (Real-Time Clock) capable of measuring the time is connected to the input / output port 205 of the main control device 110 so that the main control device 110 can grasp the current time. Then, in a predetermined time zone (for example, from 10:00 AM to 11:00 AM), if the game state is the normal state, the chance A table 202d3 is referred to when the special symbol lottery is executed, and other than the above. If the game state is the normal state in the time zone of the above, the normal table 202d1 may be referred to when the lottery of the special symbol is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to improve the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 in the time zone in which the chance mode A is referred to.

In the first embodiment, when the chance mode A is set, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is shortened, and the frequency of lottery of the advantageous second special symbol is increased, so that the configuration becomes more advantageous than the normal mode. However, it is not limited to this. In the chance mode A, the lottery of the first special symbol may also be advantageous. Specifically, while the chance mode A is set, the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1 that easily passes through the V winning switch 65e3 even when the jackpots C and D are obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol (FIG. (Refer to the lower part of 7) may be set. That is, in the chance mode A, an opening / closing pattern that easily passes through the V winning switch 65e3 may be set for all jackpot types. With this configuration, an advantageous opening / closing pattern can be obtained even when the chance mode A is set in the presence of the holding ball of the first special symbol and there are holding balls that are jackpots C and D in the holding. Can be set. In addition, even if the ball enters the first entry port 64 and becomes either jackpot C or D despite hitting right in chance mode A, an advantageous opening / closing pattern is provided. Can be set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the absurdity that an unfavorable opening / closing pattern is set even though the game is played according to the instruction (launching direction) on the screen in the chance mode A and a big hit is obtained.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot type that is more advantageous in the lottery of the second special symbol is likely to be the advantageous jackpot type, but the special symbol that is easier to select the advantageous jackpot type depending on the state may be switched. .. Specifically, for example, when the rate at which an advantageous opening / closing pattern is set when a big hit is made in the second special symbol is reduced (for example, 70%), and when a big hit is made in the first special symbol, for example. The proportion to which the advantageous opening / closing pattern is given may be higher (for example, 100%) or lower (for example, 50%) than the second special symbol depending on the situation. More specifically, for example, in the chance mode A, when the lottery of the first special symbol started in the presence of the reserved ball of the second special symbol is a big hit, the lottery of the second special symbol is a big hit. The opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1 which is advantageous is set at a higher ratio (for example, 100%) than the above, and in other cases, the ratio is lower than the jackpot in the second special symbol lottery (for example). For example, the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1 which is advantageous at 50%) may be set. With this configuration, when a right-handed ball is hit in chance mode A and the ball happens to enter the first ball entry port 64 and the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the player is notified. It is possible to have a sense of expectation for the probabilistic state. Also, in chance mode A, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is short (in 3 seconds), so it is difficult to collect the reserved balls of the second special symbol (it is full to store one hold). Even if you change to left-handed after confirming that the hold has been accumulated, it is possible to increase the possibility that the hold of the second special symbol will be exhausted before the ball enters the first entry port 64. can. Therefore, in the chance mode A, the irregular game method of hitting the left after the second special symbol is held is suppressed, and the right hit is continued in the chance mode A, and it happens to go to the first entrance 64. You can only benefit if the ball enters.

<Modified example of the first embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described modification of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 75. In the first embodiment described above, in the normal mode, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is determined to be an extremely long fluctuation pattern (the fluctuation time is an ultra-long fluctuation of 10 minutes) as compared with the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. Will be done. As a result, the game efficiency when right-handed is performed in the normal mode is lowered, and the irregular game method in which right-handed is always performed in the normal mode is suppressed.

However, since the simultaneous fluctuation method (a method in which the fluctuation display of the first special symbol and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel) is adopted, for example, the reserved ball of the second special symbol is 4 There is a possibility that some players will perform irregular game methods such as hitting right until the number of balls is accumulated and returning to left-handing when the reserved balls are accumulated to execute the lottery of the first special symbol.

On the other hand, in this modified example, in the normal mode, when the reserved balls of the second special symbol are accumulated (one or more), the ball is returned to the left-handed and the lottery of the first special symbol is executed. As the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, the same ultra-long fluctuation (10 minutes) as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set. As a result, when a right-handed ball is hit in the normal mode and the ball is returned to the left-handed ball with the reserved balls of the second special symbol accumulated, both the first special symbol and the second special symbol have a super long fluctuation of 10 minutes. Therefore, it is possible to form an extremely disadvantageous state in which the lottery of the special symbol is executed only about every 10 minutes, so that the player can more reliably continue to strike left in the normal mode.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the first embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that the contents of the variation pattern table 202d of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 are partly different. This is a change, and a part of the processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the first It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical configuration in a modified example of the first embodiment>
First, the configuration of the variation pattern table 202d provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 and 72. Similar to the first embodiment, the fluctuation pattern table 202d is a data table referred to for determining a fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a fluctuation display indicating the lottery result when a lottery for a special symbol is executed. Is.

As shown in FIG. 71 (a), the fluctuation pattern table 202d in the present modification includes a normal (special figure 2 when no hold) table 202d11 as a table used for determining the fluctuation pattern in the normal mode, and a normal table 202d11. A table 202d12 for (when special figure 2 is on hold) is provided. The normal (when there is no special figure 2 hold) table 202d11 is a table that is referred to when there is no (0) holding balls of the second special symbol, and the normal (when special figure 2 hold is not held) table 202d12 is. , A table that is referred to when there are (one or more) reserved balls with the second special symbol.

Further, the fluctuation pattern table 202d includes a table 202d21 for the consecutive villa / chance B (first half) as a table used for determining the fluctuation pattern in the consecutive villa mode (probability change state) and the chance mode B (time saving state). A table 202d22 for the villa / chance B (second half) is provided. The table 202d21 for the consecutive villa / chance B (first half) is a data table that is referred to when the remaining number of lottery is 6 times or more in the consecutive villa mode or the chance mode B. The table 202d22 for the consecutive villa / chance B (second half) is a data table that is referred to when the number of remaining lottery is 5 or less.

Further, the variation pattern table 202d is provided with a chance A (first half) table 202d31 and a chance A (second half) table 202d32 as tables used for determining the variation pattern in the chance mode A. The chance A (first half) table 202d31 is a data table that is referred to when the remaining number of lottery is 6 or more in the chance mode A. The chance A (second half) table 202d32 is a data table that is referred to when the number of remaining lottery is 5 or less.

First, the table referenced in the normal mode will be described. Since the normal table 202d11 (when the special figure 2 is not held) is the same as the normal table 202d1 of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 15B), detailed description thereof will be omitted. When the normal (when special figure 2 is on hold) table 202d12 is referred to, as shown in FIG. 71 (b), the type of special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) and lottery of special symbol Regardless of the result (stop type), an ultra-long fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 600 seconds (10 minutes) is determined.

When the holding ball of the second special symbol exists, 10 minutes is determined not only for the fluctuation time of the second special symbol but also for the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, so that the normal mode can be determined. It is possible to increase the penalty for continuing to hit right in. That is, in the normal mode, the holding ball is generated in the second special symbol, which is unlikely to occur unless the game method of intentionally launching the ball aiming at the second entrance 640 is continued. Therefore, as a penalty for a player who intentionally executes an irregular game method, as long as the reserved ball of the second special symbol remains, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are displayed. Is also configured so that ultra-long fluctuations are set. As a result, even if the player quits the irregular game method and returns to left-handed, the special symbol lottery is held only about every 10 minutes (it is difficult to execute the first special symbol lottery), which is a disadvantage. A state can be formed. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the deterrent effect on the player performing an irregular game method.

Next, the tables referred to in the consecutive villa mode and the chance mode B will be described. Since the table 202d21 for the consecutive villa / chance B (first half) is the same as the table 202d2 for the consecutive villa / chance B (see FIG. 16A) of the first embodiment described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted. .. As shown in FIG. 72 (a), when the table 202d22 for the consecutive villa / chance B (second half) is referred to, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is uniformly 0 regardless of the lottery time of the second special symbol. A 7 second ultra-short variation is determined. On the other hand, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is the same as the table 202d21 for the consecutive villa / chance B (first half) (table 202d2 for the consecutive villa / chance B in the first embodiment).

In the consecutive villa mode and chance mode B, it is the correct game method to play the game by hitting right, but when the number of fluctuations set as the consecutive villa mode or chance mode B is within 5 times remaining, the consecutive villa / When the table 202d21 for chance B (first half) is referred to, a long fluctuation time is set just before the end of the consecutive villa mode or chance mode B, and many reserved balls are accumulated during the fluctuation display of the long fluctuation time. It may end up. That is, at the end of the consecutive villa mode or the chance mode B, there may be a state in which two or more reserved balls of the second special symbol exist. In this case, even if the player returns to the normal mode and returns to left-handed according to the correct game method, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes 1 or more when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed, and a penalty occurs. (The fluctuation time of the first special symbol becomes 10 minutes). In this way, if the player is penalized even though the player is executing the correct game method, the player may be dissatisfied.

Therefore, in this modified example, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is extremely short (0.7 seconds) over the fluctuation of the special symbol five times in the final stage of the consecutive villa mode and the chance mode B in which the game is played by right-handed. It is configured so that it is difficult for a new ball to enter the second ball opening 640 during the fluctuation. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol will be 1 or more at the end of the consecutive villa mode or the chance mode B. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the absurdity that a penalty is incurred for a player who performs the correct game method.

Next, the table referred to in the chance mode A will be described. Since the chance A (first half) table 202d31 is the same as the chance A table 202d3 (see FIG. 16B) of the first embodiment described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted. As shown in FIG. 72 (b), when the chance A (second half) table 202d32 is referred to, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is 0.7 seconds uniformly regardless of the lottery time of the second special symbol. The ultra-short fluctuation of is determined. On the other hand, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is the same as the chance A (first half) table 202d31 (chance A table 202d3 in the first embodiment).

In the chance mode A, as in the consecutive villa mode and the chance mode B, it is the correct game method to play the game by hitting right. Therefore, when the chance A (first half) table 202d31 is referred to when the number of fluctuations set as the chance mode A is within 5 times remaining, a long fluctuation time is set just before the end of the chance mode A, and the fluctuation time is long. A lot of reserved balls may be accumulated during the fluctuation display of the fluctuation time. That is, even if the chance mode A ends and the player shifts to the normal mode and returns to left-handed, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes 1 or more when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed, and the penalty is incurred. There is a possibility that it will occur (the fluctuation time of the first special symbol will be 10 minutes).

Therefore, as for the chance A (second half) table 202d32, as in the case of the above-mentioned consecutive villa / chance B (second half) table 202d22, it is difficult for new balls to enter the second entrance 640 during fluctuations. The configuration is such that ultra-short fluctuations are set in. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol will be 1 or more at the end of the chance mode A. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the absurdity that a penalty is incurred for a player who performs the correct game method.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the modified example of the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 73 to 75, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the modified example of the first embodiment will be described. First, FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (S311) executed in place of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 32) of the first embodiment. The first special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (S311), like the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment, creates a variation pattern based on the lottery result of the first special symbol. This is the process to select.

Of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (S311) in the modified example of the first embodiment, in each of the processes S601 to S603, S605, and S608 to S610, the first special symbol variation in the first embodiment, respectively. Among the pattern selection processes (see FIG. 32), the same processes as those of S601 to S603, S605, and S608 to S610 are executed.

Further, in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (see FIG. 73) in the modified example of the first embodiment, the value of the chance mode counter 203x is larger than 0 (that is, the chance mode A) in the process of S603. When it is determined (S603: Yes), the chance A time selection process for selecting the variation pattern for the lottery of the first special symbol executed in the chance mode A is executed (S611), and the process proceeds to S608. Transition. The details of the chance A time selection process (S611) will be described later with reference to FIG. 74 (a).

Further, in the processing of S605, when it is determined that the values of the probability variation counter 203g and the time saving / medium counter 203r are both 0 (that is, the normal mode) (S605: Yes), the first execution is performed in the normal mode. The normal time selection process for selecting the variation pattern for the special symbol lottery is executed (S612), and the process shifts to S608. The details of this normal time selection process (S612) will be described later with reference to FIG. 74 (b). On the other hand, in the processing of S605, when it is determined that either the probability variation counter 203g or the time saving / medium-time counter 203r has a value of 1 or more (that is, the consecutive villa mode or the chance mode B) (S605: No). , The consecutive villa time selection process for selecting the variation pattern for the lottery of the first special symbol executed in the consecutive villa mode or the chance mode B is executed (S613), and the process shifts to S608. The details of the continuous villa selection process (S613) will be described later with reference to FIG. 75.

Next, with reference to FIG. 74 (a), the details of the above-mentioned chance A time selection process (S611) will be described. As described above, the chance A time selection process (S611) is a process for selecting a variation pattern for the special symbol lottery executed in the chance mode A.

When this chance A time selection process (S611) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the chance mode counter 203x is larger than 5 (S2601), and if it is determined to be larger than 5, (S2601: Yes). , The chance A (first half) table 202d31 is read out from the fluctuation pattern table 202d as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern of the current fluctuation display (S2602), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S2601 that the value of the chance mode counter 203x is 5 or less (S2601: No), there is a chance as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern of the current fluctuation display from the fluctuation pattern table 202d. The A (second half) table 202d32 is read out (S2603), and this process ends.

By executing this chance A selection process (see FIG. 74 (a)), when a special symbol lottery is executed at the end of chance mode A (the number of remaining lottery is 5 or less), chance A (see FIG. 74 (a)). The fluctuation pattern can be determined with reference to the table 202d32 for the latter half). That is, as described above, the ultra-short fluctuation is set so that a new ball entering the second ball opening 640 is unlikely to occur during the fluctuation. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol will be 1 or more at the end of the chance mode A. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the absurdity that a penalty is incurred for a player who performs the correct game method.

Next, the details of the normal time selection process (S612) will be described with reference to FIG. 74 (b). As described above, this normal time selection process (S612) is a process for selecting a variation pattern for the special symbol lottery executed in the normal mode.

When this normal time selection process (S612) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S2701), and if it is determined to be 0 (S2701). S2701: Yes), the normal table 202d11 (when there is no special figure 2 hold) is read from the fluctuation pattern table 202d as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern of the current fluctuation display (S2702), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S2701 that the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S2701: No), the fluctuation pattern table 202d shows the current fluctuation. As a table for determining the display fluctuation pattern, the normal table 202d12 (when special figure 2 is on hold) is read out (S2703), and this process is terminated.

By executing this normal time selection process (see FIG. 74 (b)), when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 1 or more in the normal mode, it is super long. Fluctuation (600 seconds) can be set. When the holding ball of the second special symbol is present in the normal mode, 10 minutes is determined not only for the fluctuation time of the second special symbol but also for the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. , The penalty for continuing to hit right in the normal mode can be increased. That is, in the normal mode, the holding ball is generated in the second special symbol, which is unlikely to occur unless the game method of intentionally launching the ball aiming at the second entrance 640 is continued. Therefore, as a penalty for a player who intentionally executes an irregular game method, as long as the reserved ball of the second special symbol remains, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are displayed. Is also configured so that ultra-long fluctuations are set. As a result, even if the player quits the irregular game method and returns to left-handed, the special symbol lottery is held only about every 10 minutes (it is difficult to execute the first special symbol lottery), which is a disadvantage. A state can be formed. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the deterrent effect on the player performing an irregular game method.

Next, with reference to FIG. 75, the details of the above-mentioned consecutive villa selection process (S613) will be described. As described above, the consecutive villa selection process (S613) is a process for selecting a variation pattern for the special symbol lottery executed in the consecutive villa mode and the chance mode B.

When this continuous villa selection process (S613) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation counter 203g is within the range of 1 or more and 5 or less (S2801), and it is out of the range of 1 to 5 (S2801). When it is determined that the value is 0 or 6 or more (S2801: No), then it is determined whether the value of the time saving / medium counter 203r is within the range of 1 or more and 5 or less (S2802). In the process of S2802, when it is determined that the value of the time saving / medium counter 203r is out of the range of 1 to 5 (value is 0 or 6 or more) (S2802: No), the remaining number of times of the probability change state remains 6 times or more. Since it is either in the state where the remaining number of times in the time saving state remains 6 times or more, the fluctuation pattern table 202d is used as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display this time. ) Table 202d21 is read out (S2803), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2801, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203g is within the range of 1 or more and 5 or less (S2801: Yes), or when the value of the time saving / medium counter 203r is within the range of 1 or more and 5 or less. If it is determined that there is (S2802: Yes), the table 202d22 for consecutive villa / chance B (second half) is read out as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display this time (S2804), and this process is terminated.

By executing this continuous villa selection process (see FIG. 75), the fluctuation pattern table can be switched according to the remaining number of times in the probability change state or the time saving state. As a result, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol can be made extremely short (0.7 seconds) over the fluctuation of the special symbol five times in the final stage of the consecutive villa mode and the chance mode B in which the game is played by right-handed. That is, it is possible to make it difficult for a new ball to enter the second ball opening 640 during the fluctuation. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol will be 1 or more at the end of the consecutive villa mode or the chance mode B. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the absurdity that a penalty is incurred for a player who performs the correct game method.

Although not shown, in this modification, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 is executed instead of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment. The second special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 is the same as the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (see FIG. 73) described above, and is in the current state (whether it is the consecutive villa mode or the chance mode A). Depending on the chance mode B or the normal mode), the above-mentioned chance A selection process (see FIG. 74 (a)), normal time selection process (see FIG. 74 (b)), and consecutive villa selection. By executing any of the processes (see FIG. 75), a process of selecting any of the tables specified in the variation pattern table 202d is executed. Since the content of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 is the same as that of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (see FIG. 73) described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 75, detailed description thereof will be omitted. do.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the first embodiment, in the normal mode, the holding balls of the second special symbol are accumulated (one or more) and then returned to the left-handed state, and the first special symbol is returned. When the lottery is executed, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to the same ultra-long fluctuation (600 seconds) as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol. As a result, when a right-handed ball is hit in the normal mode and the ball is returned to the left-handed ball with the reserved balls of the second special symbol accumulated, both the first special symbol and the second special symbol have a super long fluctuation of 10 minutes. Therefore, it is possible to form an extremely disadvantageous state in which the lottery of the special symbol is executed only about every 10 minutes, so that the player can more reliably continue to strike left in the normal mode.

Further, in this modified example, in the consecutive villa mode, the chance mode A, and the chance mode B in which the game is played by right-handed, the remaining number of lottery is 5 times or less (the lottery of the special symbol within 5 times is executed). When the mode shifts to the normal mode), the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is extremely short (0.7 seconds). As a result, it becomes difficult for new balls to enter the second entrance 640 during fluctuations, so that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol can be 1 or more at the end of the consecutive villa mode or chance mode B. The sex can be lowered. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the absurdity that a penalty is incurred for a player who performs the correct game method.

In this modified example, the ultra-short variation (0.7 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol because the remaining number of lottery in the consecutive villa mode, chance mode A, or chance mode B is 5. It was supposed to be within the number of times, but it is not limited to this. For example, the ultra-short fluctuation (0.7 seconds) may be selected only once, or in the state of the game method in which right-handed is correct, the ultra-short fluctuation (0.7 seconds) is selected regardless of the number of lottery. It may be the configuration of choice.

In this modification, in the normal mode, when the holding ball of the second special symbol is present, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is extremely long (10 minutes), but the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set. The conditions for switching to ultra-long fluctuation (600 seconds) are not limited to this. For example, when a reserved ball with a normal symbol is present, an ultra-long variation (600 seconds) may be selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol.

In this modification, an effect of notifying the player to return to left-handed at the timing when the chance mode A ends (the timing when the last variation display of the chance mode A ends) is executed (see FIG. 10B). Although it was configured, the execution timing of this production is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to execute an effect (see FIG. 10B) to notify the player to return to left-handed at the start of the change of the last fluctuation display in the chance mode A, or during the chance mode A, the chance may be executed. At the timing when it is determined that the reserved ball for the end of the mode A is held, the player may be notified to return to the left-handed hit (see FIG. 10B). With this configuration, it is possible to more reliably prevent (suppress) the occurrence of a state in which a plurality of reserved balls of the second special symbol exist at the end of the chance mode A.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 80. In the first embodiment and the modified example of the first embodiment described above, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit in the normal mode, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is short (lottery of the second special symbol). It is configured to shift to chance mode A (which is easy to execute), and it is possible to add intonation to the game even if it is not a big hit in a disadvantageous normal state.

On the other hand, in the second embodiment, when the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol) is set after the big hit, the lottery of the special symbol executed during the normal state is set. The configuration is such that the normal mode and the chance mode A are switched according to the number of times. As a result, the chance mode A is set periodically, and it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous in the normal state, which is the most disadvantageous to the player.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that the contents of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 are partially changed. The contents of the RAM 203 provided in the control device 110 have been partially changed, and the partial processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has been changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. be. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the first It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
First, the electrical configuration in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 and 77. FIG. 76A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 according to the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 76A, in the ROM 202 in the second embodiment, the small hit type selection table 202e is deleted from the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in the first embodiment. At the same time, the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202f is newly added. The details of the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202f will be described with reference to FIG. 76 (b).

FIG. 76B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202f. The fluctuation pattern scenario table 202f is a data table that defines the correspondence between the number of lottery of special symbols and the fluctuation pattern table used for selecting the fluctuation pattern (variation pattern scenario) for each of the previous jackpot types. .. At the end of the jackpot, among the fluctuation pattern scenarios specified in the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202f, the scenario corresponding to the jackpot type is set, and at the start of the fluctuation, the fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the fluctuation pattern table specified in the scenario. NS.

First, when the previous jackpot type is other than jackpot D (that is, jackpots A to C, jackpots E, F) (if the ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3 during the jackpot, the probability change state is given 100 times, and the V winning switch (In the case of a jackpot where the time saving state is given 100 times if it does not pass through 65e3) will be described. As shown in FIG. 76 (b), among the variable pattern scenarios set when the previous jackpot type is other than the jackpot D, the range in which the number of lottery of special symbols is 1 to 100 is continuous as a variable pattern table. A table 202d2 for Zhuang / Chance B (see FIG. 16A) is associated with the table 202d2. As a result, even if the probability change state (ream villa mode) is set after the big hit, or the time saving state (chance mode B) is set, the player can aim at the second entrance 640 by hitting right. It is possible to form a state in which it is easy to discriminate the advantageous second special symbol.

Further, a normal table 202d1 (see FIG. 15B) is associated with the variable pattern table in the range where the number of lottery of special symbols is 101 to 150. Therefore, if the consecutive villa mode or chance mode B is set after the big hit and the lottery of the special symbol exceeds 100 times without winning the big hit, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is a super long fluctuation (600). Only seconds) are selected. Therefore, if the lottery of the first special symbol is not executed by left-handed, the game efficiency is extremely deteriorated (when right-handed, the lottery of the special symbol is executed only once every 10 minutes) can be formed. ..

Further, a chance A table 202d3 (see FIG. 16B) is associated with the variation pattern table in the range where the number of lottery of special symbols is 151 to 160. Therefore, when the lottery of the special symbol is executed 50 times after exiting the consecutive villa mode or the chance mode B, it is possible to shift to the chance mode A over the 10 times of the special symbol lottery thereafter. Therefore, even if the consecutive villa mode (probability change state) or chance mode B (time saving state) that is advantageous for the player ends and the mode shifts to the most disadvantageous normal mode, the game is played until chance mode A is set. Can remind the player to continue. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player's motivation for the game from being lowered in the normal mode, which is disadvantageous to the player.

A normal table 202d1 (see FIG. 15B) is associated with the variation pattern table in the range in which the number of lottery of special symbols is 161 to 200. That is, the normal mode continues over the lottery of 40 special symbols. Although not shown, the configuration is such that the chance mode A 10 times and the normal mode 40 times are alternately repeated thereafter. That is, the number of special symbol lottery is in the range of 201-210, 251-260, 301-310, ... (Every time the special symbol lottery is executed 40 times in the normal mode, 10 special symbol lottery is performed. The chance A table 202d3 (see FIG. 16B) is referenced. On the other hand, the number of special symbol lottery is in the range of 211-250, 261-300, 31-13-50, ... (For every 10 special symbol lottery executed in chance mode A, 40 special symbols are drawn. (Through the lottery), the normal table 202d1 (see FIG. 15B) is referenced.

In this way, every time the lottery of 40 special symbols is executed in the normal mode, the game is shifted to the chance mode A, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal mode, so that the game can be played until the next chance mode A. Can make you want to continue. Therefore, the motivation of the player for the game can be improved, and the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

On the other hand, when the previous jackpot type was jackpot D (when the time saving state of the normal symbol is not given after the jackpot), the number of lottery of the special symbol is in the range of 1 to 25, and the normal table 202d1 as the variable pattern table ( (See FIG. 15 (b)) is associated. Therefore, after the end of the jackpot D, only the ultra-long fluctuation (600 seconds) is selected when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed over the lottery of the special symbol 25 times. Therefore, if the lottery of the first special symbol is not executed by left-handed, the game efficiency is extremely deteriorated (when right-handed, the lottery of the special symbol is executed only once every 10 minutes).

Further, a chance A table 202d3 (see FIG. 16B) is associated with the variation pattern table in the range where the number of lottery of special symbols is 26 to 50. Therefore, when the lottery of the special symbol is executed 25 times after the jackpot D is completed, the chance mode A can be shifted to the lottery of the special symbol 25 times thereafter.

After that, the normal mode over the lottery of 25 special symbols and the chance mode A over the lottery of 25 special symbols are alternately repeated. Therefore, the number of lottery of special symbols in one chance mode A is larger than that after exiting the consecutive villa mode or chance mode B (10 times → 25 times), which is another jackpot type, and once. The number of lottery of special symbols in the normal mode of is reduced (40 times → 25 times). That is, an opening / closing pattern (see the middle part of FIG. 7) that makes it difficult for the ball to pass through the V winning switch 65e3 is set, and the normal state after the big hit is set as a relief for the most disadvantageous big hit that the time saving state of the normal symbol is not given. , It can be more advantageous than other jackpot types (increasing the ratio of chance mode A). Therefore, even if the jackpot D is the most unfavorable, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player's motivation for the game from being lowered.

As described above, in the second embodiment, in the most disadvantageous normal state (low probability state of the special symbol and normal state of the normal symbol), the normal mode and the chance mode A are set according to the number of lottery of the special symbol. It is configured to be switched and periodically shifts to chance mode A. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game from becoming monotonous in the most unfavorable normal state.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 77. As shown in FIG. 77, in the RAM 203 of the second embodiment, the small hit medium flag 203w and the chance mode counter 203x are deleted from the configuration of the RAM 203 of the first embodiment, and the fluctuation number counter is countered. 203ab and scenario storage area 203ac are newly added.

The fluctuation number counter 203ab is a counter for counting the number of lottery of special symbols executed after the jackpot is completed. Based on the value of the fluctuation count counter 203ab and the fluctuation pattern scenario set at the end of the previous jackpot, a fluctuation pattern table for determining the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is selected from the scenario storage area 203ac (FIG. See S622 of 79). The value of the fluctuation count counter 203ab is incremented by 1 each time the game state update process 3 is executed (see S411 in FIG. 78). Unless the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, the value of the fluctuation number counter 203ab is retained even when the power is cut off, and is reset to 0 at the end of the jackpot (see S2213 in FIG. 80).

The scenario storage area 203ac is a storage area for storing the fluctuation pattern scenario according to the previous jackpot type. When the special symbol lottery is executed, the fluctuation pattern table for determining the fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern scenario stored in the scenario storage area 203ac and the value of the fluctuation count counter 203ab described above. Will be done. At the end of the jackpot, the scenario storage area 203ab stores the variation pattern scenario corresponding to the jackpot type (see S2212 in FIG. 80).

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the second embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 80. First, the game state update process 3 (S321) executed in the first special symbol change start process (see FIG. 29) instead of the game state update process (see FIG. 30) in the first embodiment will be described. The game state update process 3 (S321) is a process for updating a counter or the like related to the state of the pachinko machine 10 as in the game state update process (see FIG. 30) in the first embodiment.

FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the game state update process 3 (S321). Of the game state update process 3 (S321) in the second embodiment, in each of the processes S401 to S404, S407, and S408, S401 to S404 of the game state update process (see FIG. 30) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same processing as each processing of S407 and S408 is executed.

Further, in the game state update process 3 (see FIG. 78) in the second embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S407 that the game state has not been changed (S407: No), or the game state is in the normal state. When it is determined that the change has been made to (S407: Yes) and a state command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the changed gaming state (normal state) is set (S408), the value of the fluctuation count counter 203ab is set. 1 is added and updated (S411), and this process ends. By updating the fluctuation count counter 203ab in the game state update process 3 (see FIG. 78), when the fluctuation pattern is subsequently determined, the fluctuation pattern table is created based on the exact number of lottery of special symbols. You can choose.

Next, with reference to FIG. 79, in the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29), the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment is executed instead of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 32). 1 The special symbol variation pattern selection process 3 (S322) will be described. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 3 (S322). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process 3 (S322) performs the variation pattern according to the lottery result of the first special symbol, similarly to the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment. This is a process for selecting.

In each of the first special symbol variation pattern selection processes 3 (see FIG. 79), S601, S602, and S608 to S610, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 32), respectively. The same processes as those of S601, S602, and S608 to S610 are executed.

Further, in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 3 (see FIG. 79) in the second embodiment, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit (S601), and when it is a big hit. When the jackpot type selection process (S602) in the above is completed, the value of the fluctuation count counter 203ab is read out.

Next, the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the value of the read fluctuation count counter 203ab is specified based on the fluctuation pattern scenario stored in the scenario storage area 203ac (S622), and the process shifts to S608. As a result, in the processing of S608, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the current lottery result is selected by referring to the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the number of fluctuations after the jackpot and the fluctuation pattern scenario set at the end of the jackpot. Can be done. That is, when selecting the variable pattern table, the degree of advantage can be changed according to the number of lottery by switching the variable pattern table to be referred to according to the number of lottery of the special symbol. In particular, in the most disadvantageous normal state for the player (low probability state of the special symbol and normal state of the normal symbol), the game can be periodically shifted to the advantageous chance mode A, so that the game in the normal state can be played. It is possible to prevent (suppress) becoming monotonous.

Although the illustration is omitted, in the second embodiment, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 3 is executed instead of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment. NS. The second special symbol variation pattern selection process 3 corresponds to the value of the variation count counter 203ab and the set variation pattern scenario, similarly to the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 3 (see FIG. 79) described above. Then, the process of selecting the variation pattern according to the lottery result of the second special symbol this time is executed. Since the content of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 3 is the same as that of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 3 (see FIG. 79) described with reference to FIG. 79, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 80, the jackpot end process 3 (S2121) executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 47) instead of the jackpot end process (see FIG. 48) in the first embodiment will be described. .. The jackpot end process 3 (S2121) is a process for setting the game state after the jackpot ends, similar to the jackpot end process (see FIG. 48) in the first embodiment.

FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process 3 (see FIG. 80). Of the jackpot end processing 3 (see FIG. 80) in the second embodiment, each of the processes S2201 to S2206 is the same as each process of the jackpot end processing (see FIG. 48) S2201 to S2206 in the first embodiment. The process is executed.

Further, in the jackpot end processing 3 (see FIG. 80) in the second embodiment, when the processing of S2206 is completed, the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202f (see FIG. 76B) is used to correspond to the current jackpot type. The variation pattern scenario is read out (S2211), and the read variation pattern scenario is stored in the scenario storage area 203ac (S2212).

More specifically, if the jackpot type this time is other than jackpot D (big hits A to C, E, F), the table 202d2 for consecutive villas / chance B will be drawn for 100 special symbols after the jackpot ends. Is referred to, and in 101 to 150 times, the normal table 202d1 is referred to, and thereafter, the chance A table 202d3 is referred to over 10 special symbol lottery (chance mode A), and 40 times. A scenario is set in which the state in which the normal table 202d1 is referred to (normal mode) is alternately repeated over the lottery of the special symbol. On the other hand, if the jackpot this time is jackpot D, the table 202d3 for chance A is referred to over 25 special symbol lottery (chance mode A), and it is normal over 25 special symbol lottery. A scenario is set in which the state in which the table 202d1 is referenced (normal mode) is alternately repeated.

When the process of S2212 is completed, the value of the fluctuation count counter 203ab is then reset (S2213), and this process is terminated. By executing this jackpot end processing 3 (see FIG. 80), it is possible to set a variation pattern scenario according to the jackpot type, so that the variation pattern scenario can be diversified.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, in the normal state, a fluctuation pattern table referred to for selecting a fluctuation pattern according to the number of lottery of special symbols after the jackpot is completed is displayed. It is configured to switch, and in the normal state, it is configured to periodically shift to the chance mode A, which is more advantageous than the normal mode. As a result, in the normal state, which is the most disadvantageous to the player, the degree of advantage can be changed periodically, so that it is possible to suppress the game from becoming monotonous.

Further, in the second embodiment, the fluctuation pattern scenario set after the jackpot is different depending on the jackpot type, and when the jackpot type (big hit D) becomes unfavorable, an advantageous fluctuation pattern scenario is set. It has a structure. That is, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol until the end of one chance mode A is large, and the number of lottery of the special symbol from the end of one chance mode A to the next setting of chance mode A is The configuration is such that a small number of scenarios are set. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player's willingness to play in the event of an unfavorable jackpot, and to allow the player to continue playing for a longer period of time. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

In the second embodiment, the variable pattern table to be referred to is switched according to the number of lottery of special symbols executed after the jackpot is completed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized (the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed), the variable pattern table to be referred to may be switched according to the number of lottery of special symbols. .. That is, even when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202f may be referred to, and for example, the scenario set at the end of the jackpot D may be stored in the scenario storage area 203ac. With this configuration, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, it is easy to shift to the chance mode A, and it is possible to make it an advantageous state in which the number of lottery of special symbols in one chance mode A is long. Therefore, the player can be made to play the game with the pachinko machine 10 when the hall is opened, expecting that the pachinko machine 10 has been initialized. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. In addition, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the pachinko machine 10 that has never won a big hit from being shunned by the player, and improve the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10.

In the second embodiment, the configuration is such that the mode A is periodically shifted to the chance mode A in the normal state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the lottery of the special symbol of the first predetermined number of times (for example, 500 times) is executed after the game state becomes the normal state, the chance mode A sets the predetermined second number of times (for example, for example). , 1000 times) may be configured to be set over a lottery of special symbols. Then, after the second number of times has elapsed, the normal mode may be continued until the next big hit. With this configuration, when the first number of times (500 times) is consecutively disengaged in the normal state, an advantageous state is set over the second number of times, so that a so-called big addiction occurs. It is possible to provide relief (provide a so-called ceiling) in case of such a situation. Therefore, even if the deviations occur many times in the normal state, it is possible to make the player think that the state is approaching an advantageous state, so that the player's motivation for the game can be maintained.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 to 87. In the second embodiment described above, when the V winning switch 65e3 is passed during the jackpot, the gaming state is the normal state on the premise of the pachinko machine 10 in which the probability variation state of the special symbol is given 100 times after the jackpot ends. The configuration was such that the disadvantageous normal mode and the advantageous chance mode A were switched according to the number of lottery of special symbols executed after that.

On the other hand, in the third embodiment, the variable winning device 65b for small hits is provided, which has the same structure as the variable winning device 65 of each of the above embodiments and is opened during the small hit game. Then, in addition to the case where the special symbol lottery is a big hit, the special symbol lottery is a small hit, and the big hit is started when the ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3 in the small winning variable winning device 65b. It is premised on the pachinko machine 10 (so-called type-two type mixer) of the specifications. More specifically, there are only two types of game states, a time-saving state and a normal state, and the probability of winning a small hit when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed rather than the lottery of the first special symbol is determined. By keeping the height high, the ball can easily pass through the V winning switch 65e3 during the time saving state (it is easy to become a big hit). Further, as compared with the normal state, when a big hit occurs during the time saving state, the setting ratio of the time saving state after the end of the big hit is increased. In this specification, in the third embodiment, when the time saving state is not set (the normal state is set) after the big hit won during the time saving state, the normal mode and the chance mode A are switched. There is. As a result, even if the advantageous time saving state ends, the chance mode A is set in the normal state set after that, so the chance mode is expected to pull back the jackpot during the chance mode A. The game can be continued until the end of.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment is that the game board 13 is provided with a variable winning device 65b for small hits instead of the variable winning device 65. The point is that the second variable winning device 650 is provided at the lower left of the front view with respect to the first ball opening 64, and the contents of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 are partially changed. The point, the content of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 is partially changed, and the partial processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. That is the point. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the first It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the second embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 81. As shown in FIG. 81, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a variable winning device 65b for small hits is arranged at the upper right of the front view with respect to the second entrance 640. The variable winning device 65b is opened when a small hit is obtained in a special symbol lottery. The structure of the variable winning device 65b for small hits is the same as that of the variable winning device 65 in the first embodiment, and a normal discharge flow path 65e1 and a special discharge flow path 65e2 are provided therein. In the present embodiment, by passing through the V winning switch 65e3 provided in the special discharge flow path 65e2 during the small hit, the big hit is started after the small hit is completed. That is, in addition to the case where the big hit is won by the lottery of the special symbol, the chance of becoming a big hit is given even if the small hit is made, so that the player's interest can be improved when the small hit is made.

In the game board 13, the second variable winning device 650 is arranged at the lower left of the front view with respect to the first entry port 64. In the case of a big hit, the second variable winning device 650 allows a ball to enter by opening the second specific winning opening 650a, which is normally closed, and each time one ball enters. It is a winning slot that pays out 15 prize balls. That is, in the third embodiment, the second specific winning opening 650a is opened instead of the specific winning opening 65a when a big hit is made. The second specific winning opening 650a is configured to be opened according to an opening / closing pattern determined according to the small hit type when a small hit is made. As a result, in the case of a big hit, it is possible to make a left-handed hit aiming at the second specific winning opening 650a. It is possible to prevent the ball from entering the 640 (the lottery of the second special symbol is suspended).

<About the electrical configuration in the third embodiment>
Next, the configurations of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84. FIG. 82A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 82 (a), the ROM 202 in the third embodiment is different in that the small hit type selection table 202e is added to the configuration of the ROM 202 in the second embodiment. Further, although the details will be described later, the contents of the first random number table 202a, the first hit type selection table 202b, and the variation pattern scenario table 202f are changed from the second embodiment.

First, the details of the first random number table 202a in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 82 (b). As shown in FIG. 82 (b), in the first hit random number table 202a in the present embodiment, only "0" is defined as the determination value (random number value) determined to be the jackpot of the special symbol. Of the 300 counter values that the first random number counter C1 can take, one is a jackpot counter value (random number value), so the probability of a jackpot in a special symbol lottery is 1/300. As described above, in the third embodiment, only the time saving state and the normal state are provided as the gaming state, and the jackpot is always drawn with a constant lottery probability (1/300).

Further, in the first random number table 202a, "1 to 299" is defined as a determination value (random number value) determined to be a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol. Therefore, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, it becomes a big hit (1/300) or a small hit (299/300). In the small hit, when a ball enters the small hit winning opening 65c and the ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3 provided downstream of the special discharge flow path 65e2, the big hit is started after the small hit is completed. That is, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the lottery result of the big hit is directly obtained, or the small hit is a chance to pass the V winning switch 65e3. It is advantageous for the player compared to.

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, an opening / closing pattern that makes it easy for the ball to enter the special discharge flow path 65e2 when the “small hit E” selected at 5% of the small hit is reached. Set.

Next, the details of the first type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 82 (c). FIG. 82 (c) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first type selection table 202b in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 82 (c), the first hit type selection table 202b of the present embodiment includes three types of jackpot types (big hits GI) that can be determined when a jackpot is obtained in a special symbol lottery. , Three types of big hit types (big hits J to L) that can be started after the small hit are provided based on the fact that the V winning switch 65e3 is passed during the small hit.

As shown in FIG. 82 (c), among the three types of jackpots that can be determined when a jackpot is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is ". A "big hit G" is associated with the range of "0 to 49". This "big hit G" is a big hit type (time saving big hit) in which the number of rounds is 16 and the time saving state is given 100 times after the big hit is completed. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 50 are random values (counter values) corresponding to the "big hit G", so if a big hit is achieved by a special symbol lottery. The rate at which "big hit G" is determined is 50% (50/100). When the time is shortened, the lottery of the advantageous second special symbol is easily executed, so that the "big hit G" is advantageous for the player.

Further, "big hit H" is associated with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "50 to 79". This "big hit H" is a big hit type (normal big hit) in which the number of rounds is 16 and the normal state is set after the big hit ends (the time saving state is not given). Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 30 are random values (counter values) corresponding to "big hit H", so if a big hit is made in a special symbol lottery. The rate at which "big hit H" is determined is 30% (30/100). Since a normal state that is more disadvantageous than the time saving state is set after the jackpot, "big hit H" is a jackpot type that is more disadvantageous than "big hit G".

A "big hit I" is associated with a range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "80 to 99". This "big hit I" is a big hit type (special big hit) in which the number of rounds is four and the game state set after the big hit ends is variable according to the game state at the time of winning the big hit. More specifically, if the game state at the time of winning the "big hit I" is the normal state, the normal state is set even after the end of the big hit, and the game state at the time of winning the "big hit I" is the time saving state. For example, a time saving state of 100 times is set after the jackpot ends. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 20 are random values (counter values) corresponding to "big hit I", so if a big hit is achieved by a special symbol lottery. The rate at which "big hit I" is determined is 20% (20/100). In the normal state, when it becomes "big hit I", the time saving state is not given and the number of rounds is the smallest among all the big hit types, which is the most disadvantageous for the player. On the other hand, if it becomes "Big hit I" during the time saving state, although the number of rounds is small, there is a high possibility that it will be a big hit again during the time saving state, so "Big hit H" (and "Big hit K") that is not given the time saving state. It is advantageous for the player compared to.

On the other hand, among the three types of jackpots that can be determined when the ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3 during the small hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", that is, "big hit J". "Is associated with it. This "big hit J" is a big hit type (time saving big hit) in which the number of rounds is 16 and the time saving state is given 100 times after the big hit is completed. Of the 100 random values (counter values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 50 are random values (counter values) corresponding to the "big hit J", so the V winning switch 65e3 is pressed while the ball is a small hit. The rate at which "big hit J" is determined when passing is 50% (50/100). This "big hit J" is the most advantageous jackpot type for the player because the number of rounds is the largest and an advantageous time saving state is given.

Further, "big hit K" is associated with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "50 to 79". This "big hit K" is a big hit type (normal big hit) in which the number of rounds is 16 and the normal state is set after the big hit ends (the time saving state is not given). Of the 100 random values (counter values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 30 are random values (counter values) corresponding to the "big hit K", so the V winning switch 65e3 is pressed while the sphere is a small hit. The rate at which "big hit K" is determined when passing is 30% (30/100). The number of rounds is large, which is the most advantageous for the prize sphere, but since the normal state is set after the big hit, the state after the big hit is disadvantageous.

A "big hit L" is associated with a range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "80 to 99". This "big hit L" is a jackpot type (special jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 4 and the gaming state set after the jackpot ends is variable according to the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. The correspondence between the game state at the time of winning and the game state after the big hit is the same as the above-mentioned "big hit I". Of the 100 random values (counter values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 20 are random values (counter values) corresponding to the "big hit L", so the V winning switch 65e3 is pressed while the ball is a small hit. The rate at which "big hit L" is determined when passing is 20% (20/100). In the normal state, when it becomes "big hit I", the time saving state is not given and the number of rounds is the smallest among all the big hit types, which is the most disadvantageous for the player. On the other hand, if it becomes "Big hit I" during the time saving state, although the number of rounds is small, there is a high possibility that it will be a big hit again during the time saving state, so compared to "Big hit H" and "Big hit K" that are not given the time saving state. It is advantageous for the player.

It should be noted that the ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3 basically only in the time saving state. That is, it is only when a small hit is made in the lottery of the second special symbol executed based on the ball entering the second entrance 640 by right-handed. Therefore, when a big hit is obtained by passing the ball through the V winning switch 65e3, the time saving state is given after the big hit by basically becoming "big hit J, L". That is, when the V winning switch 65e3 is passed during the time saving state, the time saving state is entered again at a rate of 70%. Therefore, once the time saving state is entered, the jackpot and the time saving state are likely to be repeated, which is extremely advantageous for the player.

Further, in the normal state, basically, the ball does not pass through the V winning switch 65e3 and become a big hit. However, it is possible to perform an irregular game method in which the second special symbol is drawn by intentionally right-handing in the normal state and the ball is expected to pass through the V winning switch 65e3 during the small hit. There is sex. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the "big hit L" is obtained in the normal state, the time saving state is not given, so that the ratio of the time saving state being given in the case of the big hit is 50% ( In the normal state, it is the same as when a big hit is made by lottery of special symbols). With this configuration, even if a big hit is achieved by hitting right, the expectation that the time saving state is given is the same as when hitting left, so that the merit of hitting right in the normal state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which right-handed hitting is performed even in a normal state.

In the present embodiment, only the "big hit L" is configured as a special jackpot that changes whether or not the time saving state is given according to the game state, but the "big hit J" may also be a special jackpot. That is, when a big hit is obtained by passing through the V winning switch 65e3 in the normal state, the normal state may be set after the big hit. With such a configuration, it is possible to further enhance the deterrent effect on the irregular game method in which the player always strikes right.

As described above, in the third embodiment, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the special symbol executed in the normal state, an advantageous time saving state is given only in the case of "big hit G", and "big hit H". , Or "Big hit I", the normal state is set. Therefore, when a big hit is made in the normal state, the ratio of the time saving state being given is 50%. In the time saving state, the lottery of the second special symbol becomes easier to be executed, and in the lottery of the second special symbol, there is a probability of about 1/20 that the ball easily enters the special discharge flow path 65e2. It becomes the set small hit type (small hit E). Therefore, if the ball is launched aiming at the second entrance 640 by right-handed during the time saving state of 100 times, it is possible to form an extremely advantageous state in which the jackpot is hit again with high probability.

In addition, if a big hit is obtained in a special symbol lottery executed in a time-saving state, a time-saving state is given after the end of the big hit even if a "big hit I" is obtained in addition to the "big hit G". That is, if a big hit is obtained by lottery of a special symbol during the time saving state, the time saving state is given at a rate of 70%. That is, in the time saving state, the time saving state is given at a rate of 70% even if the big hit is obtained by the lottery of the special symbol or the big hit is obtained by passing through the V winning switch 65e3. Therefore, once the time saving state is reached, the jackpot and the time saving state are repeated with a high probability (about 70%), which is extremely advantageous for the player.

Next, the details of the small hit type selection table 202e in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 83 (a). In the small hit type selection table 202e in the third embodiment, the small hit type is associated with each value range of the small hit type counter C5.

More specifically, "small hit D" is associated with the range in which the value of the small hit type counter C5 is "0 to 94". This "small hit D" has a short time (0.2 seconds) for the small hit winning opening 65c, as in the first round of "big hits C and D" in the first embodiment (see the middle part of FIG. 7). Since the opening / closing pattern is set so that only the ball is opened, it is difficult to enter the small hit winning opening 65c (it is difficult for the ball to pass through the V winning switch 65e3), which is a disadvantageous small hit type. Since the flow path solenoid 65k also performs the same operation as the first round of the big hit in the first embodiment (see the upper part of FIG. 7), the ball is hit by the small hit winning opening 65c during the opening period of 0.2 seconds. If the ball can enter the special discharge flow path 65e2, the ball can flow down into the special discharge flow path 65e2. That is, when the ball passes through the V winning switch 65e, the big hit is started after the small hit. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the value of the small hit type counter C5 can take, 95 are random values (counter values) corresponding to "small hit D", so a small hit in the second special symbol lottery. In the case of, the ratio of "small hit D" is 95% (95/100).

"Small hit E" is associated with the range in which the value of the small hit type counter C5 is "95 to 99". This "small hit E" is the same as in the first round (see the lower part of FIG. 7) such as "big hit A" in the first embodiment, the opening period of the small hit winning opening 65c and the on of the flow path solenoid 65k. Since the opening / closing pattern that matches the period (opening period of the special discharge flow path 65e2) is set, it is easy to enter the small hit winning opening 65c (the ball easily passes through the V winning switch 65e3). It is a hit type. When the ball passes through the V winning switch 65e during the small hit, the big hit is started after the small hit. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the value of the small hit type counter C5 can take, 5 are the random values (counter values) corresponding to "small hit E", so a small hit in the second special symbol lottery. In the case of, the ratio of "small hit E" is 5% (5/100).

When the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, there is a probability of 299/300 that a small hit will be made. Then, at 5% (1/20) of the case of a small hit, the ball becomes a "small hit E" that easily passes through the V winning switch 65e3. Therefore, if you hit right during the time saving state of 100 times, there is a 99% or more probability that you will win a big hit in the special symbol lottery, or you will get a "small hit E" at least once within the time saving number (No. 1). 2 The probability of winning 100 consecutive "small hits D" in the lottery of special symbols is 0.42%). Therefore, when the time is shortened, there is a 99% or higher probability of a big hit. Therefore, once the time is shortened, a special symbol lottery will result in a "big hit H" (30% distribution), or when the V winning switch 65e3 is passed. It becomes "big hit K" (distribution 30%), and the big hit and the time saving state are repeated until the normal state is set after the big hit. That is, it becomes an extremely advantageous state in which the jackpot and the time saving state are repeated with a probability of about 70%.

Next, the details of the variation pattern scenario table 202f will be described with reference to FIG. 83 (b). FIG. 83B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the variation pattern scenario table 202f in the third embodiment. The fluctuation pattern scenario table 202f is a data table that defines the fluctuation pattern scenario for each of the previous jackpot types, similarly to the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202f in the second embodiment.

First, a fluctuation pattern scenario set when the previous jackpot type is jackpot K (16 rounds normal jackpot) will be described. As described above, this jackpot K is one of the jackpot types started after the end of the jackpot based on the ball passing through the V winning switch 65e3 during the jackpot, and the normal state is set after the jackpot. .. As described above, it is basically in a time saving state that the ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3 and becomes a big hit. Therefore, the jackpot K is a jackpot that triggers the end of the advantageous state in which the jackpot and the time saving state are likely to be repeated and returns to the disadvantageous normal state.

As shown in FIG. 83 (b), when the jackpot type is jackpot K, among the variable pattern scenarios set at the end of the jackpot K, the number of lottery of special symbols is in the range of 1 to 25 times. A normal table 202d1 (see FIG. 15B) is associated with the fluctuation pattern table. As a result, immediately after the jackpot K is completed, a disadvantageous state (normal mode) in which the lottery of the second special symbol is difficult to be executed is set.

Further, the chance A table 202d3 (see FIG. 16B) is associated with the variation pattern table in the range where the number of lottery of the special symbol is 26 to 35 times. For this reason, after the jackpot K is completed, if the lottery of 25 special symbols is lost in succession, the lottery of the second special symbol is likely to be executed over the subsequent 10 special symbol lottery. (The fluctuation time of the second special symbol is shorter than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol) (chance mode A is set). Therefore, while the chance mode A is set, it becomes easier to win a small hit by playing a game aiming at the second entrance 640 by hitting right. Therefore, in the chance mode A, there is a high possibility that the ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3 during the small hit, which is an advantageous state in which a big hit is likely to occur. As described above, the small hit E in which the opening / closing pattern in which the ball easily flows down into the special discharge flow path 65e2 is set is selected at a rate of 5% (1/20) when the small hit occurs. Therefore, in the chance mode A, the jackpot will be a big hit with a probability of about 1/20 just by continuing to execute the right-handed hit. The ratio of the maximum 10 special symbol lottery executed in chance mode A to all small hits D (small hit type in which the ball does not easily flow down to the special discharge flow path 65e2) is the small hit in the special symbol lottery. It is the 10th power of the value obtained by multiplying the probability of becoming (1/300) by the probability of becoming a small hit D (19/20) (about 57.9%). Therefore, the ratio (expectation degree) of a big hit in one chance mode A is about 42.1%, so that when the player shifts to the chance mode A, the player is expected to have a big hit. Can be done. Since the chance mode A is a kind of normal state as a game state, when a special big hit (big hit I, L) occurs, the normal state is set after the big hit. That is, the expectation of a big hit is high, but the expectation that a time saving state is given when a big hit is made is 50%, which is the same as in the normal mode.

After the number of lottery of the special symbol is 31 times or later, the normal table 202d1 (see FIG. 15B) is associated with the variable pattern table. Therefore, when the chance mode A ends, the normal mode is disadvantageous for the player until a big hit is obtained thereafter.

In this way, when the jackpot K, which is the main opportunity for the player to end the extremely advantageous time saving state, the expectation of the jackpot is high because the lottery of the special symbol is executed 25 times after the end of the jackpot K. It is configured to shift to chance mode A. With this configuration, even if the time saving state that is advantageous to the player ends and shifts to the normal state, it will be a big hit in the chance mode A that is set after that, and the time saving state will be set again. The game can be continued at least until the chance mode A ends. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from quitting the game immediately after the advantageous time saving state ends, so that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

On the other hand, when the jackpot type is other than the jackpot K (big hit G to J, L) and the time saving state is set as the game state after the jackpot (when the time saving jackpot is reached or during the time saving state, a special jackpot is achieved. In the case where the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is in the range of 1 to 100 times (that is, the number of lottery that shortens the time of the normal symbol), the variation pattern table is the table 202d2 for consecutive villas / chance B (Fig.). 16 (a)) is associated with it. As a result, during the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol becomes shorter than that in the normal mode, and the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed, which is advantageous for the player.

Further, when the number of lottery of the special symbol exceeds 100 times, the time saving state returns to the normal state. Therefore, for the number of lottery of the special symbol after 100 times, the normal table 202d1 (FIG. 15 (b)) )) Is associated. As a result, after the transition to the normal state, the lottery of the second special symbol becomes extremely difficult to be executed (the fluctuation time becomes a super long fluctuation of 10 minutes), so the lottery of the first special symbol is executed by left-handed. be able to.

When the jackpot type is other than jackpot K (big hit G to J, L) and the normal state is set as the game state after the jackpot (when the time saving state is not given) (when the jackpot is H, or In the case of a special jackpot during the normal state), the normal table 202d1 (see FIG. 15B) is associated as the variable pattern table regardless of the number of lottery of the special symbol. Therefore, after the big hit, it becomes difficult to execute the lottery of the second special symbol regardless of the number of lottery of the special symbol, so that the lottery of the first special symbol can be executed by left-handed.

As described above, in the third embodiment, when the jackpot K is obtained in the time saving state that is advantageous to the player and the game shifts to the normal state that is disadvantageous to the player, a lottery of a specific number of special symbols is drawn. Is executed to shift to the chance mode A, which is relatively advantageous to the player. In this chance mode A, the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed, and the small hit is easily won and the ball is easily flowed down to the special discharge flow path 65e2, so that the expectation of a big hit is high. Therefore, even if the advantageous time saving state ends, the player can be reminded to continue the game at least until the chance mode A ends. That is, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player's willingness to play when the most advantageous state ends.

In the third embodiment, when a special jackpot is obtained in the chance mode A, the gaming state after the special jackpot is set to the normal state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a special jackpot is obtained in the normal mode, a normal state may be set, and when a special jackpot is obtained in the chance mode A, a time saving state may be set. With this configuration, the expectation of the time-saving state in the case of a big hit in the chance mode A can be made equal to the jackpot in the time-saving state, so that the player's expectation for the chance mode A is further increased. be able to. Therefore, the player's willingness to play can be further improved.

In the third embodiment, when a small hit is made in the lottery of the second special symbol, the ball easily passes through the V winning switch 65e3 at a rate of 5% regardless of the game state or mode. It is not limited to this. For example, in the normal mode, it may be configured so that an opening / closing pattern that is difficult to pass through the V winning switch 65e when a small hit is made can be easily set. More specifically, for example, when a small hit is made in the normal mode, only the small hit D may be determined, or when the small hit E is obtained without changing the distribution of the small hit type. The opening / closing pattern of the small hit winning opening 65c may be the same as that of the small hit D (opening / closing pattern that is difficult to pass through the V winning switch 65e3) in the normal mode. With such a configuration, even if the right-handed hit is always executed in the normal mode, it becomes difficult to pass the ball through the V winning switch 65e3, so that the merit of executing the right-handed hit in the normal mode is reduced. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) an irregular game method of hitting right in the normal mode.

In the third embodiment, when the number of lottery of the special symbol is in the range of 26 to 35 after the end of the jackpot K, the chance mode A is set. However, the number of lottery to shift to the chance mode A and the chance The number of lottery for which mode A continues may be arbitrarily determined. Specifically, for example, the chance mode A may be set when the number of lottery of special symbols is in the range of 91 to 100 times. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player want to continue the game from the end of the jackpot K until the end of the special symbol lottery 100 times. Further, the chance mode A may be set when the number of lottery of the special symbol is in the range of 26 to 30 times. By reducing the number of times in the chance mode A, it becomes a big hit in the chance mode A after the time saving state ends, and the rate of pulling back the time saving state can be reduced, so that the gambling of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. Further, conversely, the number of lottery times in which the chance mode A is set may be increased. As the number of lottery in chance mode A increases, the expectation of a big hit in chance mode A also increases, so when the time saving state ends, it is possible to continue the game more reliably until chance mode A ends. can.

In the third embodiment, the configuration is such that the transition to the chance mode A is performed only after the jackpot K is completed, but the transition to the chance mode A may be made even when another jackpot is achieved. For example, even if the jackpot H is obtained, the configuration may be such that the mode shifts to the chance mode A. With this configuration, it becomes a normal jackpot (big hit H, K) in the time saving state, and when the normal state is set, a chance mode is executed when a special symbol lottery of a specific number of times (for example, 25 times) is executed. Since the transition to A is performed, it is possible to more reliably prevent (suppress) the decrease in the player's willingness to play when the time saving state ends and the mode shifts to the normal mode. In this case, if the jackpot H is obtained in the normal state, the chance mode A is given only when the jackpot H is given during the time saving state without setting the fluctuation pattern scenario in which the chance mode A is given. It may be configured to set a fluctuation pattern scenario. As a result, only the normal state after the time saving state ends can be advantageous without changing the degree of advantage of the normal state other than the normal state set after the time saving state ends.

In the third embodiment, the variation pattern scenario in which the chance mode A is set is set regardless of the game state at the time when the jackpot K is reached, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the jackpot K is used. The scenario set according to the game state and mode at the time of winning may be different. More specifically, for example, when the jackpot K is won by hitting right in the normal mode, a fluctuation pattern scenario in which the normal table 202d1 is referred to is set regardless of the number of times, and the jackpot is set in the time saving state or the chance mode A. When it becomes K, the variation pattern scenario in which the chance mode A is set may be set. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the merit of hitting right in the normal mode, so that it is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which hitting right is always performed.

In the present embodiment, only one lottery number for shifting to chance mode A after a big hit is provided, but the number of lottery shifts to chance mode A is not limited to this, and a plurality of types of variation patterns in which the number of lottery transitions to chance mode A is different. It may be configured to provide a scenario. More specifically, as a jackpot type that is started when the ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3, a plurality of normal jackpots (big hits K1, K2, ...) Are provided, and chances are provided for each type of normal jackpot. A variable pattern scenario in which the number of lottery shifts to the mode A is different may be set. More specifically, the number of lottery to shift to the chance mode A may be different by 25 times, for example, the jackpot K1 is 25 times, the jackpot K2 is 50 times, the jackpot K3 is 75 times, and so on. .. With this configuration, it is difficult for the player to identify when to shift to the chance mode A.

In the present embodiment, when the fluctuation pattern scenario in which the chance mode A is set after the big hit is set, the chance mode A is set only once, but as the configuration in which the chance mode A is set a plurality of times. May be good. Specifically, for example, after the jackpot K is completed, the chance mode A may be set in the range of 26 to 35 times, the range of 101 to 105 times, and the range of 1000 to 2000 times. good. As a result, even after the first chance mode A ends without winning the jackpot, it is possible to make the player think that the game will continue until the second chance mode A is reached. In addition, even if a big addiction occurs, it is possible to make the player think that the game will be continued until the third chance mode A is reached. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

Next, the details of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 84. FIG. 84 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 according to the third embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 84, the RAM 203 in the third embodiment has a probability variation counter 203g, a probability variation setting flag 203h, a probability variation passing counter 203i, and a probability variation effective flag with respect to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the second embodiment (see FIG. 77). The 203o and the probabilistic valid timer 203p have been deleted, and the jackpot start flag 203ad, the V pass counter 203ae, the V pass valid flag 203af, the V pass valid timer 203ag, and the winning state storage area 203ah have been added.

The jackpot start flag 203ad is a flag indicating whether or not the jackpot starts after the small hit. If the jackpot start flag 203ad is on, the jackpot start is set at the end of the jackpot (see S2512 in FIG. 87), and if it is off, the jackpot ends as it is. The jackpot start flag 203ad is set to ON when the ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3 during the small hit. It is also set to off at the end of the small hit (see S2510 in FIG. 87).

The V-pass counter 203ae, the V-pass valid flag 203af, and the V-pass valid timer 203ag correspond to the probabilistic pass counter 203i, the probabilistic valid flag 203o, and the probabilistic valid timer 203p, respectively, in the second embodiment. These contents are the same as the probability variation pass counter 203i, the probability variation effective flag 203o, and the probability variation effective timer 203p in the second embodiment, except that they are referred to or updated during the small hit. That is, the number of balls that have passed through the V winning switch 65e3 during the small hit is counted by the V passing counter 203ae. Further, the V passage valid flag 203af is used to determine whether or not the passage of the V winning switch 65e3 is valid. Further, the V passage effective timer 203ag sets a period during which the passage of the V winning switch 65e3 is valid after the flow path solenoid 203k is set to off.

The winning state storage area 203ah is a storage area for storing information indicating whether or not the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the time saving state. Specifically, if the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the time saving state (if the value of the time saving medium counter 203r is 1 or more), the information indicating the time saving state is set to the winning state storage area 203ah. 01H ”is stored. On the other hand, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal state (if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203r is 0), "00H" is stored in the winning state storage area 203ah as information indicating the normal state. Will be done. The information stored in the winning state storage area 203ah is retained until the end of the jackpot, and is referred to when setting the gaming state after the end of the special jackpot (see S2223 in FIG. 86). That is, at the end of the special jackpot, if "01H" indicating that the gaming state at the time of winning is the reduced working hours state is stored in the storage area 203ah at the time of winning, the reduced working hours state is set as the gaming state after the end of the jackpot. If "00H" indicating that the game state at the time of winning is the normal state is stored in the storage area 203ah at the time of winning, the normal state is set as the game state after the jackpot ends.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the third embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 to 87. First, FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 4 (S2021) executed in place of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 47) in the second embodiment (and the first embodiment).

The jackpot control process 4 in the third embodiment is a process for opening or closing the second specific winning opening 650a for each round of jackpots. In each of the jackpot control processes 4 (S2021), S2101, S2102, S2104 to S2111, S2101, S2102, S2104 of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 47) in the second embodiment (and the first embodiment), respectively. The same process as each process of ~ S2111 is executed. On the other hand, in the jackpot control process 4 (S2021), the processes S2103, S2112, and S2113 of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 47) in the second embodiment (and the first embodiment) are deleted. These processes are for executing the operation of the flow path solenoid 65k in the small hit variable winning device 65b, the monitoring of the V winning switch 65e3, and the like, and the second variable winning device 650 operates during the big hit. This is because in the third embodiment, it is an unnecessary process.

Further, in the jackpot control process 4 (see FIG. 85) in the third embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S2111 that it is the end timing of the jackpot (S211: Yes), the jackpot end process in the second embodiment Instead of 3 (see FIG. 80), the jackpot end process 4 is executed (S2131), and this process is terminated. The details of the jackpot end processing 4 (S2131) will be described with reference to FIG. 86.

FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end processing 4 (S2131). The jackpot end process 4 (S2131) is a process for setting the game state after the jackpot ends, similar to the jackpot end process 3 (see FIG. 80) in the second embodiment.

Of the jackpot end processing 4 (see FIG. 86) in the third embodiment, in each of the processes S2204 and S2211 to S2213, S2204 and S2211- of the jackpot end processing 3 (see FIG. 80) in the second embodiment, respectively. The same process as each process of S2213 is executed.

Further, when the jackpot end processing 4 (see FIG. 86) in the third embodiment is started, it is first determined whether the jackpot type this time is a time-saving jackpot (that is, jackpot G, J) (S2221). If it is a time-saving jackpot (S2221: Yes), the process is shifted to S2204 and the value of the time-saving medium counter 203r is set to 101, so that the time is shortened until just before the 101st special symbol lottery is executed after the jackpot. The state is set to be given (S2204). On the other hand, in the process of S2221 when it is determined that the time saving jackpot is not (S2221: No), then it is determined whether the jackpot type this time is a special jackpot (big hit I, L) (S2222). In the process of S2222, when it is determined that the current jackpot is a special jackpot (S2222: Yes), the information corresponding to the game state at the time when the jackpot is won is read out from the winning state storage area 203ah (S2223). It is determined whether the gaming state at the time of winning was the time saving state (S2224).

In the process of S2224, when it is determined that the game state at the time of winning is the time saving state (S2224: Yes), the process shifts to S2204 in order to set the game state after the big hit to the time saving state. On the other hand, in the process of S2224, if it is determined that the gaming state at the time of winning is not the time saving state (that is, the normal state) (S2224: No), the processing shifts to S2225 without setting the time saving state. .. Further, in the processing of S2222, even when it is determined that the current jackpot type is not a special jackpot (S2222: No), the current jackpot is a normal jackpot and it is not necessary to set the value of the time reduction / medium counter, so the processing is performed. To S2225.

In the process of S2225, a state command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the game state according to the value of the time saving / medium counter 203r is set (S2225), and the jackpot medium flag 203v is set to off (S2226). The process proceeds to S2211. By executing this jackpot control process 4 (see FIG. 86), it is possible to accurately set the game state at the time when the jackpot is won and the time saving state according to the jackpot type.

Next, with reference to FIG. 87, the details of the small hit control process 4 (S2022) executed in place of the small hit control process (see FIG. 51) in the second embodiment (and the first embodiment) will be described. .. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the small hit control process 4 (S2022).

In each of the small hit control processes 4 (see FIG. 87), S2501 to S2510, each of S2501 to S2510 of the small hit control process (see FIG. 51) in the second embodiment (and the first embodiment), respectively. The same process as the process is executed.

Further, in the small hit control process 4 (see FIG. 87) in the third embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S2509 that it is the end timing of the small hit (S2509: Yes), the big hit start flag 203ad is turned on. If it is determined whether it is present (S2511), and if it is determined that it is on (S2511: Yes), the start of the jackpot is set (S2512). At the time of this setting, the information corresponding to the gaming state at the time of winning is stored in the winning state storage area 203ah from the value of the time saving / medium counter 203r. Next, the value of the time saving / medium counter 203r is reset to 0 (S2513), and the process shifts to S2510.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2511, when it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203ad is not on (that is, is off), the processing of S2512 and S2513 is skipped and the processing is shifted to S2510. ..

Further, in the small hit control process 4 (see FIG. 87) in the third embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S2509 that it is not the end timing of the small hit (S2509: No), the winning process (S2514) and the abnormal process are performed. (S2515) are executed respectively. Each of these processes is the same as the winning process (see FIG. 49) and the abnormal process (see FIG. 50) in the second embodiment (and the first embodiment), and thus will be briefly described, but the winning process will be performed. When the process is executed (S2514), whether or not the ball has passed the valid period and whether or not the ball has passed through the V winning switch 65e3 is monitored, and when it is determined that the ball has passed through the V winning switch 65e3 during the valid period. , The jackpot start flag 203ad is set to on. Thereby, the start of the big hit can be set only when it is on by referring to the state of the big hit start flag 203ad at the end of the small hit.

Further, in the abnormal processing (S2515), the number of balls that have entered the small hit winning opening 65c and the number of balls that have been discharged to the outside through the normal discharge flow path 65e1 and the special discharge flow path 65e3. Is executed, and a process of determining whether all the balls that have entered the inside of the variable winning device 65b for small hits are normally ejected is executed, and an error is notified when the number of balls entered and the number of ejected balls do not match. Will be done. As a result, when a problem such as ball clogging occurs inside the variable winning device 65b for small hits, the problem can be notified to the clerk of the hall at an early stage.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment is premised on the pachinko machine 10 provided with only two types, a normal state which is disadvantageous as a gaming state and an advantageous time saving state. In the third embodiment, when it is confirmed that the jackpot K is obtained in the advantageous time saving state and the transition to the disadvantageous normal state is determined, the lottery of the special symbol of the first number of times (25 times) is executed. , It is configured to shift from the normal mode to the relatively advantageous chance mode A. This chance mode A continues over the second (10 times) special symbol lottery, and if the jackpot is not obtained during the second number of special symbol lottery, it is again. It is configured to shift to the disadvantageous normal mode. As a result, even if the advantageous time saving state is changed to the disadvantageous normal state, the game can be continued in anticipation of the chance mode A to be changed after that. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation for the game from being lowered at the end of the advantageous time saving state, and to maintain the player's motivation to play at least until the chance mode A ends.

In the third embodiment, when a special jackpot is obtained in the chance mode A, the gaming state after the special jackpot is set to the normal state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a special jackpot is obtained in the normal mode, a normal state may be set, and when a special jackpot is obtained in the chance mode A, a time saving state may be set. With this configuration, the expectation of the time-saving state in the case of a big hit in the chance mode A can be made equal to the jackpot in the time-saving state, so that the player's expectation for the chance mode A is further increased. be able to. Therefore, the player's willingness to play can be further improved.

In the third embodiment, when a small hit is made in the lottery of the second special symbol, the ball easily passes through the V winning switch 65e3 at a rate of 5% regardless of the game state or mode. It is not limited to this. For example, in the normal mode, it may be configured so that an opening / closing pattern that is difficult to pass through the V winning switch 65e when a small hit is made can be easily set. More specifically, for example, when a small hit is made in the normal mode, only the small hit D may be determined, or when the small hit E is obtained without changing the distribution of the small hit type. The opening / closing pattern of the small hit winning opening 65c may be the same as that of the small hit D (opening / closing pattern that is difficult to pass through the V winning switch 65e3) in the normal mode. With such a configuration, even if the right-handed hit is always executed in the normal mode, it becomes difficult to pass the ball through the V winning switch 65e3, so that the merit of executing the right-handed hit in the normal mode is reduced. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) an irregular game method of hitting right in the normal mode.

In the third embodiment, when the number of lottery of the special symbol is in the range of 26 to 35 after the end of the jackpot K, the chance mode A is set. However, the number of lottery to shift to the chance mode A and the chance The number of lottery for which mode A continues may be arbitrarily determined. Specifically, for example, the chance mode A may be set when the number of lottery of special symbols is in the range of 91 to 100 times. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player want to continue the game from the end of the jackpot K until the end of the special symbol lottery 100 times. Further, the chance mode A may be set when the number of lottery of the special symbol is in the range of 26 to 30 times. By reducing the number of times in the chance mode A, it becomes a big hit in the chance mode A after the time saving state ends, and the rate of pulling back the time saving state can be reduced, so that the gambling of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. Further, conversely, the number of lottery times in which the chance mode A is set may be increased. As the number of lottery in chance mode A increases, the expectation of a big hit in chance mode A also increases, so when the time saving state ends, it is possible to continue the game more reliably until chance mode A ends. can.

In the third embodiment, the configuration is such that the transition to the chance mode A is performed only after the jackpot K is completed, but the transition to the chance mode A may be made even when another jackpot is achieved. For example, even if the jackpot H is obtained, the configuration may be such that the mode shifts to the chance mode A. With this configuration, it becomes a normal jackpot (big hit H, K) in the time saving state, and when the normal state is set, a chance mode is executed when a special symbol lottery of a specific number of times (for example, 25 times) is executed. Since the transition to A is performed, it is possible to more reliably prevent (suppress) the decrease in the player's willingness to play when the time saving state ends and the mode shifts to the normal mode. In this case, if the jackpot H is obtained in the normal state, the chance mode A is given only when the jackpot H is given during the time saving state without setting the fluctuation pattern scenario in which the chance mode A is given. It may be configured to set a fluctuation pattern scenario. As a result, only the normal state after the time saving state ends can be advantageous without changing the degree of advantage of the normal state other than the normal state set after the time saving state ends.

In the third embodiment, the variation pattern scenario in which the chance mode A is set is set regardless of the game state at the time when the jackpot K is reached, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the jackpot K is used. The scenario set according to the game state and mode at the time of winning may be different. More specifically, for example, when the jackpot K is won by hitting right in the normal mode, a fluctuation pattern scenario in which the normal table 202d1 is referred to is set regardless of the number of times, and the jackpot is set in the time saving state or the chance mode A. When it becomes K, the variation pattern scenario in which the chance mode A is set may be set. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the merit of hitting right in the normal mode, so that it is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which hitting right is always performed.

In the present embodiment, only one lottery number for shifting to chance mode A after a big hit is provided, but the number of lottery shifts to chance mode A is not limited to this, and a plurality of types of variation patterns in which the number of lottery transitions to chance mode A is different. It may be configured to provide a scenario. More specifically, as a jackpot type that is started when the ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3, a plurality of normal jackpots (big hits K1, K2, ...) Are provided, and chances are provided for each type of normal jackpot. A variable pattern scenario in which the number of lottery shifts to the mode A is different may be set. More specifically, the number of lottery to shift to the chance mode A may be different by 25 times, for example, the jackpot K1 is 25 times, the jackpot K2 is 50 times, the jackpot K3 is 75 times, and so on. .. With this configuration, it is difficult for the player to identify when to shift to the chance mode A.

In the present embodiment, when the fluctuation pattern scenario in which the chance mode A is set after the big hit is set, the chance mode A is set only once, but as the configuration in which the chance mode A is set a plurality of times. May be good. Specifically, for example, as in the second embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the normal table 202d1 (normal mode) and the chance A table 202d3. The state (chance mode A) may be periodically switched. More specifically, for example, as a fluctuation pattern scenario set at the end of the jackpot K, the normal table 202d1 is associated with a range of 1 to 25 times of lottery of special symbols (value of fluctuation count counter 203ab). The chance A table 202d3 is associated with the range of 26 to 35 times, the normal table 202d1 is associated with the range of 36 to 60 times, and thereafter, for 10 special symbol lottery. The chance A table 202d3 and the normal table 202d1 for 25 special symbol lottery may be repeated. Further, as another example of shifting to the chance mode A multiple times, for example, after the jackpot K is completed, in the range of 26 to 35 times, the range of 101 to 105 times, and the range of 1000 to 2000 times. The chance mode A may be set. As a result, even after the first chance mode A ends without winning the jackpot, it is possible to make the player think that the game will continue until the second chance mode A is reached. In addition, even if a big addiction occurs, it is possible to make the player think that the game will be continued until the third chance mode A is reached. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 102. In the second embodiment described above, the first ball entry port 64, which makes it easy for the ball to enter by hitting the left side, and the second ball entry port 640, which makes it easy for the ball to enter the ball by hitting the right side, are provided, and the second ball entry port is provided. The person who wins the big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol executed based on the ball entering the mouth 640 wins the big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol based on the entry of the ball into the first entrance 64. It was configured to be more advantageous to the player than to be (it is easier to give a probability change state after a big hit). Then, in the normal state, the disadvantageous normal mode in which the lottery of the second special symbol is difficult to be executed and the advantageous chance mode A in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed are switched according to the number of lottery of the special symbol. Was supposed to be.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment, both the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol are easily executed by left-handed, and the lottery of the second special symbol is executed by right-handed. The board surface is configured so that it can be easily played. In addition, it is premised on the pachinko machine 10 having a control specification that executes a lottery for whether or not to fall from the probabilistic state to the normal state each time the lottery condition for the special symbol is satisfied in the probabilistic state of the special symbol. Based on these premise, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment, the degree of advantage (easiness of executing the lottery of the second special symbol) is determined according to the timing (number of lottery) of falling from the probabilistic state to the normal state. It is configured to be different. More specifically, it is specified by setting a scenario that refers to a variation pattern table in which the lottery of the first special symbol is difficult to be executed from the transition to the probabilistic state until the lottery of the special symbol is executed a specific number of times. If the player falls into the normal state before the lottery of the number of special symbols is executed, even if the player returns to the left-handed strike, the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide relief in the case of an early fall from the probabilistic state to the normal state, so that the player's motivation for the game can be maintained.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment is that the game board 13 is provided with a distribution unit 660 instead of the first ball slot 64. The point, the content of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 has been partially changed, the content of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 has been partially changed, and the content of the main control device 110 The point is that the partial processing executed by the MPU 201 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the first It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the second embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 88. FIG. 88 is a front view of the board surface 13 in the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 88, in the fourth embodiment, the distribution unit 660 is arranged at the position (below the variable display device unit 80) where the first ball entry port 640 was arranged in the second embodiment. It is different in that it is. Although the details will be described later, the distribution unit 660 is configured so that a ball can enter through a passage port provided above the distribution unit 660. Inside the distribution unit 660, a first special symbol lottery is executed when a ball enters, and a second special symbol lottery is executed when a ball enters. A central second entry port 640c is provided, and a ball that has entered the inside of the distribution unit 660 through the passage port is distributed to any of these entry ports. Therefore, the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed by launching the ball aiming at the distribution unit 660 by left-handed striking.

Here, the configuration of the distribution unit 660 will be described with reference to FIG. 89. FIGS. 89 (a) and 89 (b) are views showing the internal structure of the distribution unit 660. In reality, a cover body is arranged on the front side, and the cover body is composed of a member whose inside can be seen through, and a spiral handle is colored on the surface so that the inside cannot be seen through or is difficult to see through. It is configured so that the inside is difficult to see.

As shown in FIGS. 89 (a) and 89 (b), a passage port through which the ball can enter is provided in the upper part of the distribution unit 660, and the transparency that can detect that the ball has passed through the passage port is provided. A mold entry sensor 660a is arranged. Below the passage port, a distribution member 900 for distributing the ball to the first ball entry port 64 or the central second ball entry port 640c is provided. The first ball entry port 64 is arranged in the lower left direction of the front view of the distribution member 900, and the central second ball entry port 640c is arranged in the lower left direction of the front view of the distribution member 900. The ball that has passed through the passage port is alternately distributed to the first ball entry port 64 and the central second ball entry port 640c by the distribution member 900.

The distribution member 900 is configured to be capable of receiving a ball that has entered the distribution unit 660 by the accommodating portion 900a or 900c. When the ball is received by the accommodating portion 900a, the entire distribution member 900 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front due to the weight of the ball. As a result, the accommodating portion 900a is in a state of being inclined downward in the lower left direction (see FIG. 89B), and as a result, the first insertion portion 900a is arranged in the lower left direction in the front view with respect to the distribution member 900. The ball falls toward the ball opening 64a (the ball is guided to the first ball opening 64). Here, the sorting member 900 is configured to be rotatable about 45 degrees clockwise and counterclockwise, respectively, and a magnet 900b is provided on the boundary wall between the accommodating portion 900a and the accommodating portion 900b. There is.

On the other hand, on the base body provided on the back side of the sorting unit 660, the back side (passing port) of the position where the magnet 900b is arranged in a state where the sorting member 900 is not rotated clockwise or counterclockwise. The base side magnet 901 is arranged at the position (on the center line of the above). The magnet 900b of the sorting member 900 and the base side magnet 901 are configured to have polarities that repel each other. Specifically, the base-side magnet 901 is composed of a rod-shaped magnet fixed to the base body, and is configured so that a magnetic pole (S pole or N pole) is generated at the tip end portion. The base side magnet 901 is arranged and fixed so that the tip end portion faces the distribution member 900 side.

Like the base side magnet 901, the magnet 900b is also composed of a rod-shaped magnet, and is fixed to the distribution member 900 so that the tip portion faces the base side magnet 901 side. The base side magnet 901 is at a position where the distribution member 900 rotates and the boundary wall between the accommodating portion 900a and the accommodating portion 900b is directly above (on the center line of the interval at which the game ball of the passing port can enter about one ball). And the magnet 900b of the sorting member 900 are at the closest positions (the tips of the sorting members 900 face each other). Here, since the magnets are arranged so as to have the same polarity (for example, N pole and N pole), they do not stop at a position where the boundary wall of the sorting member 900 faces directly upward due to repulsion. , It will be maintained in the position rotated to the left or right.

As a result, when the magnet 900b reaches a position (upward position) on the center line of the passage port, the distribution member 900 repels the magnet 900b and the base side magnet 901, so that the distribution member 900 is moved to the left or right. As it rotates, either the accommodating portion 900a or the accommodating portion 900b faces the side (upper side of the gaming machine) that receives the ball entering the distribution unit 660. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the ball that has entered the ball from coming into contact with the boundary wall between the accommodating portion 900a and the accommodating portion 900b and causing ball clogging.

Further, when the magnet 900b and the base side magnet 901 repel each other, for example, the accommodating portion 900a receives the ball and rotates about 90 degrees to the left to guide the ball to the first entry port 64a, and then the distribution member. It is possible to prevent the 900 from rotating clockwise (the accommodating portion 900a faces upward). As a result, after guiding the ball to the first entry port 64, the accommodating portion 900c is in a state of facing upward, and then the accommodating portion 900c receives the ball that has entered the distribution unit 660. When the accommodating portion 90c receives the ball, the distribution member 900 rotates clockwise by about 90 degrees due to the weight of the received ball, and the accommodating portion 900c is tilted in a direction of inclining in the lower right direction in the front view. Therefore, the ball falls from the accommodating portion 900c and enters the central second entry port 640c (the ball is guided to the central second entry port 640c). In this way, the distribution member 900 can alternately guide the ball entering the distribution unit 660 to the first ball entry port 64 and the central second ball entry port 640c. Balls can be evenly distributed to the central second entrance 640c to win a prize. As a result, the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel at the same time.

<About the electrical configuration in the fourth embodiment>
Next, the configurations of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 93. First, FIG. 90A is a block diagram showing a configuration of a ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 according to the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 90A, the ROM 202 of the fourth embodiment is different in that the fall lottery table 202g is added to the configuration of the ROM 202 of the second embodiment. Further, the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b, the second hit random number table 202c, the fluctuation pattern table 202d, and the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202f are changed from the ROM 202 of the second embodiment.

The fall lottery table 202g is a table that is referred to when determining whether or not to fall from the probabilistic state to the normal state (fall lottery) in the probabilistic state of the special symbol, and is a random value value (random value) that is determined to be a fall. Counter value) is stored. In the probabilistic state of the special symbol, every time the lottery of the special symbol is executed, the fall lottery table 202g is referred to, and it is determined whether or not to fall to the normal state. Details of the fall lottery table 202g will be described later with reference to FIG. 93 (a).

Next, with reference to FIG. 90 (b), the details of the first type selection table 202b in the fourth embodiment will be described. The first hit type selection table 202b is a data table in which the jackpot type is defined in association with each value that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, as in the second embodiment.

In this fourth embodiment, four jackpot types are provided. That is, "big hit M" and "big hit N" that can be determined when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, and "big hit O" which can be determined when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol. "Big hit P" is provided.

As shown in FIG. 90 (b), when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is within the range of "0 to 69", the big hit type is "big hit". "M" is determined. This "big hit M" has 16 rounds, and as an opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1 in the first round, the ball flows down to the special discharge flow path 65e2 (passes through the V winning switch 65e3). This is a jackpot type in which a difficult opening / closing pattern (see the middle row of FIG. 7) is set. Since the number of rounds is the largest among the jackpots, it is advantageous for the player in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained, but since it is unlikely that a probability change state will be set after the jackpot, it is disadvantageous as a game state after the jackpot. Become.

Further, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is within the range of "70 to 99", "big hit N" is determined as the jackpot type. This "big hit N" has four rounds, and as an opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1 in the first round, the ball flows down to the special discharge flow path 65e2 (passes through the V winning switch 65e3). This is a jackpot type in which a difficult opening / closing pattern (see the middle row of FIG. 7) is set. Since the number of rounds is the smallest and the probability that a probability change state is set after the jackpot is low, "big hit N" is the most disadvantageous jackpot type.

Further, as shown in FIG. 90 (b), when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is within the range of "0 to 69", the big hit type is selected. "Big hit O" is decided. This "big hit O" has 16 rounds, and as an opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1 in the first round, the ball flows down to the special discharge flow path 65e2 (passes through the V winning switch 65e3). This is a jackpot type in which an easy opening / closing pattern (see the lower part of FIG. 7) is set. Since the number of rounds is the largest and the probability change state is likely to be set after the jackpot, "big hit O" is the most advantageous jackpot type.

Further, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is within the range of "70 to 99", "big hit P" is determined as the jackpot type. This "big hit P" has four rounds, and as an opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1 in the first round, the ball flows down to the special discharge flow path 65e2 (passes through the V winning switch 65e3). This is a jackpot type in which an easy opening / closing pattern (see the lower part of FIG. 7) is set. Although the number of rounds is the smallest, there is a high possibility that the probability change state will be set after the jackpot, so the "big hit P" is a game after the jackpot than the jackpot (big hit M, N) determined by the lottery of the first special symbol. The condition becomes advantageous.

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, only the big hit type is determined, in which the probability change state is hard to be given (the ball is hard to pass through the V winning switch 65e3). It has a structure. On the other hand, when a big hit is made in the lottery of the second special symbol, only the big hit type is easily given (the ball easily passes through the V winning switch 65e3). As a result, the degree of advantage when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed can be further increased.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the ball is easily inserted into the sorting member 900 when the ball is hit to the left. The distribution member 900 has a configuration in which each time a ball enters, the ball is alternately distributed to the first ball entry port 64 provided inside and the central second ball entry port 640c. Therefore, even in a normal state that is disadvantageous to the player, by hitting left, the lottery of the disadvantageous first special symbol and the lottery of the advantageous second special symbol can be performed in about half and half. Therefore, the player can be made to play the game in the normal state with the expectation that the lottery of the advantageous second special symbol will be a big hit.

Next, the details of the second random number table 202c in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 90 (c). In each of the above embodiments (first to third embodiments), the normal state of the normal symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol are the hit probability of the normal symbol, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and the hit of the normal symbol. The configuration was such that there was no significant difference in the opening period of the electric accessory 640a in the case. On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, in the normal state (low probability state) of the normal symbol, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is significantly lower than that in the time saving state (high probability state) of the normal symbol. ing.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 90 (c), only "0" is defined as the value of the second hit random number counter C4, which is the hit of the normal symbol in the normal state (low probability state) of the normal symbol. ing. On the other hand, in the time saving state (high probability state) of the ordinary symbol, the same random number value (counter value) as in each of the above embodiments is defined. Therefore, in the normal state of the normal symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol is 1/240, so even if the right-handed hit is executed in the normal state, the hit of the normal symbol is rare.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the normal state of the normal symbol is 30 seconds (3 seconds in the time saving state), and the opening period of the electric accessory 640a when the normal symbol hits. Is 0.2 seconds x 1 time (1 second x 2 times during the time saving state). Therefore, in the normal state (low probability state) of the normal symbol, it takes time from passing through the through gate 67 until the lottery result of the normal symbol is obtained, and the probability of winning the normal symbol is extremely low, and the normal symbol is normal. Even if the symbol hits, an opening period is set in which it is difficult for the ball to enter during the opening period of the electric accessory 640a. Therefore, in the normal state, it is possible to enhance the deterrent effect on the irregular game method in which the player always strikes right in anticipation that the lottery of the second special symbol will be executed and a big hit will be obtained.

Next, the configuration of the variation pattern table 202d in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 91 (a). As shown in FIG. 91 (a), the variation pattern table 202d of the fourth embodiment is provided with two types of variation pattern tables. Specifically, a normal table 202d1 and a probability variation granting table 202d4 are provided.

The normal table 202d1 is referred to mainly when determining the fluctuation pattern in the normal state, as in each of the above embodiments. In the present embodiment, the normal table 202d1 is referred to when determining the fluctuation pattern even in the time saving state or a part of the probability variation state.

The table 202d4 for probabilistic change gives a specific number of times (20 times or 50 times) after the end of the big hit when the game state after the big hit becomes the probable change state due to the ball passing through the V winning switch 65e3 during the big hit. ) Is a table that is referred to throughout the lottery of special symbols. Details will be described later, but during the period when this probability variation granting table 202d4 is referred to (within 20 times or 50 times after the end of the jackpot), the lottery of the first special symbol will be a long fluctuation, so left-handed. And, while the first special symbol is fluctuating for a long time, the lottery of the second special symbol can be performed a plurality of times. That is, when a left-handed player is hit, the lottery of the second special symbol, which is advantageous, can be biased. In the probabilistic state, only the lottery of the second special symbol, which is more advantageous for right-handed hitting, can be performed, so there is no merit to execute left-handed hitting. For this reason, the benefit of the table 202d4 for giving the probability change is that the ball falls from the probability change state to the normal state where it is difficult to enter the ball into the second entry port 640 even if the ball is hit right-handed within a specific number of times. This is the case.

Next, the details of the normal table 202d1 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 91 (b). As shown in FIG. 91 (b), in the present embodiment, the same fluctuation pattern is used in both the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol as long as the values of the stop type and the variation type counter CS1 are the same. Is selected. The correspondence between the value (counter value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation pattern is the same as the correspondence with the first special symbol in the normal table 202d1 in each of the above embodiments (see FIG. 15B). Since there is, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the details of the table 202d4 for probabilistic variation will be described with reference to FIG. 92 (a). As shown in FIG. 92 (a), a long fluctuation (120 seconds) is associated with the lottery of the first special symbol regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. On the other hand, for the lottery of the second special symbol, the same correspondence as the correspondence defined in the above-mentioned normal table 202d1 is defined. Therefore, the probability change state is given after the big hit, and the table 202d4 at the time of this probability change grant falls to the normal state within the period (the period until the lottery of the special symbol is completed 20 times or 50 times), and the left When it is returned to hitting, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol becomes long. Therefore, by continuing to hit left, the lottery of the second special symbol can be performed multiple times while the first special symbol is fluctuating for a long time, so that the lottery of the special symbol is advantageous for the second special symbol. Can be overemphasized in the lottery. Therefore, if the player falls from the probabilistic state to the normal state at an early stage, the player can be in a relatively advantageous state, and the motivation of the player to play after the fall to the normal state is reduced. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the storage.

Next, the variation pattern scenario table 202f in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 92 (b). The fluctuation pattern scenario table 202f is a data table that defines fluctuation pattern scenarios for each jackpot type, as in the second embodiment and the like.

As shown in FIG. 92 (b), when the jackpot M, O (16 round jackpot) is obtained and the probability variation state is given after the jackpot (when the ball passes the V winning switch 65e3 during the jackpot), it fluctuates. As a pattern scenario, the table 202d4 for probabilistic variation is associated with the number of times of lottery of special symbols is in the range of 1 to 20 times. In addition, the normal table 202d1 is associated with the 21st and subsequent times. Therefore, if the jackpot is M, O, the ball can be passed through the V winning switch 65e3, and the ball falls from the probabilistic state to the normal state within 20 times, the first special symbol is made when hitting left. Only the fluctuation of is a long fluctuation (120 seconds). Therefore, during the long fluctuation of the first special symbol, it is possible to form a relatively advantageous state in which the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed a plurality of times. Even if the special symbol lottery falls to the normal state (within 20 times), it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player's motivation for the game from being lowered. When the player falls into the normal state after exceeding 20 times, the normal table 202d1 is referred to, so that the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol are executed in about half and half.

Further, as shown in FIG. 92 (b), when the jackpot is N, P (4 round jackpot) and the probability change state is given after the jackpot (when the ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3 during the jackpot). As a variation pattern scenario, the table 202d4 for probabilistic variation is associated with the number of lottery of special symbols in the range of 1 to 50 times. Further, the normal table 202d1 is associated with the 51st time and thereafter. Therefore, if the jackpot is N, P, the ball can be passed through the V winning switch 65e3, and the ball falls from the probabilistic state to the normal state within 50 times, the first special symbol is made when hitting left. Only the fluctuation of is a long fluctuation (120 seconds). Therefore, during the long fluctuation of the first special symbol, it is possible to form a relatively advantageous state in which the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed a plurality of times. Even if the special symbol lottery falls to the normal state (within 20 times), it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player's motivation for the game from being lowered. In addition, in the case of a probability change state after a 4-round jackpot, the number of lottery that the table 202d4 for granting the probability change is referred to is larger than that of the 16-round jackpot, so that the relief against the disadvantageous jackpot on the prize sphere is relieved. Can be planned. If the player falls into the normal state after exceeding 50 times, the normal table 202d1 is referred to, so that the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol are executed in about half and half.

Further, as shown in FIG. 92 (b), when the probability change state is not given after the big hit (when the ball does not pass through the V winning switch 65e3 during the big hit), the number of lottery of special symbols is set as the fluctuation pattern scenario. The normal table 202d1 is associated with the normal table 202d1 regardless of. Therefore, the disadvantageous state in which the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol are executed in half and half continues at least until the next big hit.

As described above, in the variation pattern scenario of the fourth embodiment, when the gaming state after the big hit becomes the probability variation state, the probability variation is given over a specific number of times (20 times or 50 times) of special symbol lottery. The table 202d4 is referenced. When the probability variation granting table 202d4 is referred to, a long variation (120 seconds) is selected when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed. Therefore, if the player falls from the probabilistic state to the normal state within a specific number of times (20 times or 50 times) and then returns from right-handed to left-handed, the second special symbol will be moved multiple times during the fluctuation of the first special symbol. The lottery can be executed. That is, from the end of the jackpot to the execution of the special symbol lottery for a specific number of times (20 times or 50 times), the lottery of the second special symbol is executed more than the lottery of the first special symbol. It becomes an easy and advantageous state. Therefore, even if the player falls from the probabilistic state to the normal state at an early stage (within a specific number of times) after the big hit, the player's motivation for the game can be maintained.

Next, with reference to FIG. 93 (a), the details of the fall lottery table 202 g will be described. As described above, the fall lottery table 202g stores a random number value (counter value) determined to be a fall in the fall lottery.

As shown in FIG. 93 (a), in the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol, two judgment values of "100, 101" correspond to the fall to the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol). A random value (counter value) is specified. When the special symbol lottery is executed in the probabilistic state of the special symbol, the value of the fall lottery counter (not shown) is compared with the random number value (counter value) corresponding to the fall specified in the fall lottery table 202g. , When the values match, it falls to the normal state. The fall lottery counter (not shown) is composed of a loop counter that is updated periodically (for example, every time the main process (see FIG. 53) is executed) in the range of "0 to 299". Of the 300 random values (counter values) that can be taken by the fall lottery counter, two random values that are determined to be a fall are specified, so the probability that a fall will be determined in one fall lottery is 1/150. Is. The random number values determined to be jackpots in the probability variation state (values of the first random number counter C1) are four "1 to 4" (see FIG. 13B), and the jackpot is determined during the probability variation state. Since the probability is 1/75, it is set so that the probability of winning a jackpot is higher than the probability of being determined to fall in the fall lottery during the probability change state. Therefore, once the player shifts to the probabilistic state, the player can be expected to win multiple jackpots before falling to the normal state, so that the player's interest in playing the game during the probabilistic state can be improved. can.

Next, the details of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 93 (b). FIG. 93B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203. As shown in FIG. 93 (b), in the RAM 203 of the fourth embodiment, the probability variation counter 203 g is deleted with respect to the configuration of the RAM 203 of the second embodiment (see FIG. 77), and the variation of the special figure 1 The difference is that the stop flag 203ai, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203aj, and the probability change flag 203ak are added.

The special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ai is a flag indicating that the jackpot of the second special symbol is started to be executed while the first special symbol is variablely displayed. When the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ai is turned on, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped. The temporary stop indicates a display mode in which the combination of the third symbols corresponding to the detachment is stopped as a temporary stop symbol, and the third symbol is displayed as if it is vibrating without being completely stopped. .. In this way, when the jackpot of the second special symbol is started, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped by turning on the special diagram 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ai, so that the first special symbol can be hit during the jackpot. It is possible to prevent a problem that the lottery result is confirmed and displayed as a big hit (a big hit by the lottery of the first special symbol is started during the big hit by the lottery of the second special symbol). The special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ai is set to on when it is determined in the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 5 (see FIG. 100) that the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit (see FIG. 100). See S1214 in FIG. 100). Further, after the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ai is turned on and the jackpot by the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the process of S712 of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 5 (see FIG. 97) is executed first. Is set to off. When the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ai is set from on to off, the temporary stop is canceled and the fluctuation display according to the remaining fluctuation time is restarted.

The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203aj is a flag indicating that the jackpot of the first special symbol is executed while the second special symbol is variablely displayed. When the second fluctuation stop flag 203aj is turned on, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is temporarily stopped, and when it is turned off, the temporary stop is canceled and the fluctuation display is restarted. The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203aj is set to on when it is determined in the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 5 (see FIG. 97) that the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit (FIG. FIG. (See S714 of 97), after the jackpot by the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, it is set to off in the process of S1212 of the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 5 (see FIG. 100) that is executed first.

In the fourth embodiment, even if one special symbol is displayed in a variable manner corresponding to a big hit, the lottery result of the other special symbol is not rewritten to the outside, and the lottery result is held as it is. Then, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display corresponding to the jackpot elapses and the jackpot is started, the corresponding flag is turned on among the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ai or special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203aj. By doing so, the other variable display is temporarily stopped during the jackpot. Then, after the big hit, the temporary stop is released and the variable display is restarted. With this configuration, if one special symbol lottery is a big hit and the other special symbol lottery is a big hit during the variable display, the other is during the big hit based on the one special symbol lottery. It is possible to prevent the jackpot based on the special symbol lottery from being started, and to start the jackpot based on the lottery of both special symbols at different timings. Therefore, it can be advantageous for the player with respect to the configuration of each of the above-described embodiments, which may be rewritten as a big hit.

The probability variation flag 203ak is provided in place of the probability variation counter 203g in each of the above embodiments. In the present embodiment, the probabilistic state continues until the lottery result corresponding to the fall is obtained by the fall lottery. That is, the number of lottery of special symbols until the probability change state ends is indefinite. Therefore, it is configured to indicate whether or not it is in the probability change state depending on whether or not the probability change flag 203ak is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 94, a specific example will be described of the correspondence between the game state and the scenario in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 94 is a diagram showing the game state after the end of the jackpot and the transition of the reference fluctuation pattern table when the ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3 during the jackpot P (4 round jackpot).

As shown in FIG. 94, when the ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3 during the jackpot P, the gaming state after the jackpot ends is set to the probability change state. In the probabilistic state, in addition to increasing the probability of winning a big hit in the special symbol lottery, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol becomes shorter (30 seconds → 3 seconds), and the winning probability of the normal symbol increases (1/240 → 1 / 1.2), the opening period of the electric accessory 640a in the case of hitting a normal symbol becomes longer (0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times). Therefore, by hitting right, it becomes easier to enter the second ball entry port 640, so that the advantageous lottery of the second special symbol can be efficiently executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 94, when the game state after the jackpot P is set to the probabilistic state (the probabilistic state is given), as a variation pattern scenario, a lottery of special symbols 1 to 50 times after the jackpot P is drawn. A variation pattern scenario (see FIG. 92B) is set in which the table 202d4 for probabilistic variation is referred to.

When the lottery result corresponding to the fall is obtained when the lottery of the special symbol is executed 30 times, the normal state is thereafter shifted to. As shown in FIG. 94, since the set fluctuation pattern scenario does not change even if the normal state is entered, the probability variation granting table 202d4 is referred to until the lottery of the special symbol is completed 50 times. That is, the long variation (120 seconds) is selected when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed over the lottery of the special symbol 20 times after the fall. As described above, in the normal state, even if the right-handed strike is performed, the lottery of the second special symbol is hardly executed, and the left-handed strike is more advantageous. Then, as described above, each time a ball enters the distribution unit 660 that can be entered when a left-handed ball is hit, the distribution member 900 provided inside the ball enters the first entry port 64 and the central first ball. 2 The ball is alternately distributed to the entry port 640c (see FIGS. 89 (a) and 89 (b)). In this case, when the table 202d4 for probabilistic variation is referred to, while the long variation is set for the first special symbol, the variation display of the second special symbol is performed a plurality of times by the simultaneous variation method (the second special symbol). Lottery) can be executed. That is, since it is possible to focus on the lottery of the two special symbols, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the probable change state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 94, when the number of lottery of the special symbol executed after the jackpot P ends exceeds 50 times, the normal table 202d1 is referred to according to the set fluctuation pattern scenario. Switch. That is, in the case of left-handed hitting, the lottery of the disadvantageous first special symbol and the lottery of the advantageous second special symbol are equally performed, which is a disadvantageous state.

In this way, if you fall into the normal state (a state where left-handedness is advantageous) 30 times after the big hit where the probability change state is given, even if you are left-handed, a lottery of special symbols is advantageous. 2 It is possible to focus on the lottery of special symbols. Therefore, if the player falls to the normal state within 50 times of the fall lottery after the probability change state is set, the game should be played in a relatively advantageous state until the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times. Therefore, even if the player falls from the probabilistic state to the normal state at an early stage, the player's motivation for the game can be maintained.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the fourth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 to 102. First, the first special symbol variation start process 5 (S211) executed in place of the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29) in the second embodiment (and the first embodiment) will be described. The first special symbol change start process 5 (S211) is based on the lottery result of the first special symbol, similarly to the first special symbol change start process (see FIG. 29) in the second embodiment (and the first embodiment). This is a process for setting a corresponding fluctuation pattern.

Of the first special symbol variation start processing 5 (see FIG. 95) in the fourth embodiment, in each of the processes S301 to S304 and S322, S301 to S304 of the first special symbol variation start process in the second embodiment, respectively. , And the same processing as each processing of S322 is executed. Further, in the first special symbol fluctuation start processing 5 (see FIG. 95) in the fourth embodiment, after the processing of S304 is completed, 1 is added to the value of the fluctuation count counter 203ab (S331), and the first special symbol is added. The first special symbol jackpot determination process 5 for determining whether or not a jackpot is achieved in the lottery is executed (S332), and the process shifts to S322.

Next, with reference to FIG. 96, the details of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 5 (S332) described above will be described. The first special symbol jackpot determination process 5 (S332) is a process executed in place of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 31) in the second embodiment (and the first embodiment).

Of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 5 (see FIG. 96) in the fourth embodiment, in each of the processes S501 to S504 and S510, the first special symbol jackpot determination process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 31), respectively. ), The same processes as those of S501 to S504 and S510 are executed.

Further, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process 5 (see FIG. 96) in the fourth embodiment, when it is determined that the probability change is in progress (the probability change flag 203ak is on) in the process of S502 (S502: Yes). The value of the fall lottery counter was compared with the random number value (counter value) corresponding to the fall specified in the fall lottery table 202g (S511), and whether the value of the fall lottery counter matched the random number value corresponding to the fall (S511). Whether the lottery result corresponds to the fall) is determined (S512).

In the process of S512, when it is determined that the lottery result corresponding to the fall is obtained (S512: Yes), the game state is dropped to the normal state by setting the probability change flag 203ak to off (S513), and the player has fallen (S512). A state command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 that the game state has been changed to the normal state) is set (S514). Next, the lottery result of whether or not it is a big hit is acquired by referring to the first random number table 202a for the low probability time (S504), and the process shifts to S516. On the other hand, in the processing of S512, if the lottery result corresponding to the fall is not obtained (S512: No), the processing is shifted to S503, and the first hit random number table 202a for high probability is referred to and a big hit. The lottery result of whether or not is acquired (S503), and the process shifts to S516.

In the process of S516, it is determined whether or not the acquired lottery result is a big hit (S515), and if it is determined to be a big hit (S515: Yes), the lottery result of the first special symbol is set as a big hit (S515). S516), a jackpot symbol is set as a symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 (S517), and this process is completed. On the other hand, in the process of S515, if it is determined that the acquired lottery result is not a big hit (S515: No), the process shifts to S510.

By executing the first special symbol jackpot determination process 5 (see FIG. 96) in this way, it is possible to execute the determination of whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot in consideration of the result of the fall lottery.

Next, with reference to FIG. 97, the details of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 5 (S212) in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 5 (S212). The first special symbol variation stop process 5 (S212) is a process executed in place of the first special symbol variation stop process (see FIG. 33) in the second embodiment (and the first embodiment), and is the first process. This is a process for stopping and displaying the changing symbol when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed.

Of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 5 (see FIG. 97) in the fourth embodiment, each of the processes S701 to S703, S706, S709, and S710 is in the second embodiment (and the first embodiment), respectively. The same processes as those of S701 to S703, S706, S709, and S710 of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 33) are executed.

Further, when the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 5 (see FIG. 97) in the fourth embodiment is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ai is on (S711), and then it is on. (S711: Yes), the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 5 (see FIG. 97) this time is the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 5 (see FIG. 97) executed first after the big hit. Yes, and it means that the variable display of the first special symbol was temporarily stopped during the jackpot. Therefore, in this case, the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ai is set to off (S712), and the special figure 1 for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 that the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ai is set to off. The fluctuation stop command is set (S713), and this process ends. By executing the processes of S712 and S713, the first symbol and the third symbol temporarily stopped in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 can be displayed in a variable manner again. .. In addition, this fluctuation display is variablely displayed by the remaining fluctuation time obtained by subtracting the time elapsed before the start of the jackpot from the set fluctuation time.

In the process of S711, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ai is off (S711: No), each process of S701 to S703 is executed. Then, in the process of S703, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit (S703: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203aj is set to on (S714), and the special figure 2 fluctuation A special figure 2 variable stop command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 that the stop flag 203aj is set to ON is set (S715). As a result, while the jackpot won in the lottery of the first special symbol is being executed, the first symbol and the first symbol showing the lottery result of the second special symbol in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and The third symbol can be temporarily stopped. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the fluctuation time of the second special symbol from ending during the jackpot, the symbol indicating the lottery of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed during the jackpot, and the player cannot concentrate on the jackpot. It can be prevented from being lost.

After the processing of S715, the start of the jackpot is set (S706), the values of the probability change flag 203ak and the time saving / medium counter 203r are reset (S716), and the processing shifts to S709.

Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the details of the second special symbol change start processing 5 (S213) in the fourth embodiment will be described. The second special symbol variation start process 5 (S213) is a process executed in place of the second special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 35) in the second embodiment (and the first embodiment), and is the second. Similar to the second special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 35) in the embodiment (and the first embodiment), this is a process for setting a variation pattern according to the lottery result of the second special symbol.

Of the second special symbol variation start processing 5 (see FIG. 98) in the fourth embodiment, in each of the processes S901 to S904 and S922, S901 to S904 of the second special symbol variation start process in the second embodiment, respectively. , And the same processing as each processing of S924 is executed. Further, in the second special symbol fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 98) in the fourth embodiment, after the processing of S904 is completed, 1 is added to the value of the fluctuation count counter 203ab (S931), and the second special symbol The second special symbol jackpot determination process 5 for determining whether or not the lottery is a jackpot is executed (S932), and the process shifts to S924.

Next, with reference to FIG. 99, the details of the second special symbol jackpot determination process 5 (S932) described above will be described. The second special symbol jackpot determination process 5 (S932) is a process executed in place of the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 36) in the second embodiment (and the first embodiment).

Of the second special symbol jackpot determination process 5 (see FIG. 99) in the fourth embodiment, in each of the processes S1001 to S1004 and S1006 to SS1010, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 36) The same processes as those of S1001 to S1004 and S1006 to S1010 are executed.

Further, in the second special symbol jackpot determination process 5 (see FIG. 99) in the fourth embodiment, when it is determined that the probability change is in progress (the probability change flag 203ak is on) in the process of S1002 (S1002: Yes), The value of the fall lottery counter was compared with the random number value (counter value) corresponding to the fall specified in the fall lottery table 202g (S1011), and whether the value of the fall lottery counter matched the random number value corresponding to the fall (S1011). Whether the lottery result corresponds to the fall) is determined (S1012).

In the process of S1012, when it is determined that the lottery result corresponding to the fall has been obtained (S1012: Yes), the game state is caused to fall to the normal state by setting the probability change flag 203ak to off (S1013), and the player has fallen (S1013). A state command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 that the game state has been changed to the normal state) is set (S1014). Next, the lottery result of whether or not it is a big hit is acquired by referring to the first random number table 202a for the low probability time (S1004), and the process shifts to S1006. On the other hand, in the processing of S1012, if the lottery result corresponding to the fall is not obtained (S1012: No), the processing is shifted to S1003, and the first hit random number table 202a for high probability is referred to and a big hit. The lottery result of whether or not is acquired (S1003), and the process shifts to S1006.

By executing the second special symbol jackpot determination process 5 (see FIG. 99) in this way, it is possible to execute the determination of whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot in consideration of the result of the fall lottery.

Next, with reference to FIG. 100, the details of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 5 (S214) in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 5 (S214). The second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 5 (S214) is a process executed in place of the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 38) in the second embodiment (and the first embodiment), and is the second. This is a process for stopping and displaying the changing symbol when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed.

Of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 5 (see FIG. 100) in the fourth embodiment, the processes S1201 to S1203, S1206, S1208, and S1209 are in the second embodiment (and the first embodiment), respectively. The same processes as those of S1201 to S1203, S1206, S1208, and S1209 of the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 38) are executed.

Further, when the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 5 (see FIG. 100) in the fourth embodiment is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203aj is on (S1211), and it is on. When it is determined (S1211: Yes), the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 5 (see FIG. 100) this time is the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 5 (see FIG. 100) that is executed first after the big hit. Yes, and it means that the variable display of the second special symbol was temporarily stopped during the jackpot. Therefore, in this case, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203aj is set to off (S1212), and the special figure 2 for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203aj is set to off. The fluctuation stop command is set (S1213), and this process ends. By executing the processes of S1212 and S1213, the first symbol and the third symbol temporarily stopped in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 can be displayed in a variable manner again. .. In addition, this fluctuation display is variablely displayed by the remaining fluctuation time obtained by subtracting the time elapsed before the start of the jackpot from the set fluctuation time.

In the process of S1211, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203aj is off (S1211: No), each process of S1201 to S1203 is executed. Then, in the process of S1203, when it is determined that the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit (S1203: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ai is set to on (S1214), and the special figure 1 fluctuation A special figure 2 variable stop command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 that the stop flag 203ai is set to ON is set (S1215). As a result, while the jackpot won in the lottery of the second special symbol is being executed, the first symbol and the first symbol showing the lottery result of the first special symbol in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and The third symbol can be temporarily stopped. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the fluctuation time of the first special symbol from ending during the jackpot, the symbol indicating the lottery of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed during the jackpot, and the player cannot concentrate on the jackpot. It can be prevented from being lost.

After the processing of S1215, the start of the jackpot is set (S1206), the values of the probability change flag 203ak and the time saving / medium counter 203r are reset (S1216), and the processing is shifted to S1208.

Next, with reference to FIG. 101, the details of the normal symbol variation processing 5 (S121) in the fourth embodiment will be described. This ordinary symbol variation process 5 (S121) is a process executed in place of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 40) in the second embodiment (and the first embodiment), and the ball enters the ordinary ball entrance 67. This is a process for determining whether or not a normal symbol is correct when it has passed, and for setting a variable display of the normal symbol.

Of the ordinary symbol variation processing 5 (see FIG. 101) in the fourth embodiment, in each of the processes S1401 to S1416 and S1418 to S1423, the ordinary symbol variation processing (and the first embodiment) in the second embodiment (and the first embodiment), respectively, The same processes as those of S1401 to S1416 and S1418 to S1423 of (see FIG. 40) are executed. Further, in the normal symbol variation processing 5 (see FIG. 101) in the fourth embodiment, in the processing of S1414 and S1415, is the current time saving state (S1414: No), or is in the time saving state and is in the jackpot? (S1414: Yes, and S1415: Yes), the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is set to 0.2 seconds × 1 time, and the process is performed. It shifts to S1432.

In the process of S1432, it is determined whether or not the time saving state is in progress (whether or not the value of the time saving and medium counter 203r is 1 or more, or whether or not the probability variation flag 203ak is on) (S1432), and during the time saving. If it is determined that there is (S1432: Yes), the process of S1419 is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S1432, when it is determined that the time is not shortened (S1432: No), 30 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (S1433), and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, in the normal state of the normal symbol, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is significantly reduced, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is significantly lengthened, and the hit of the normal symbol is achieved. The opening time of the electric accessory 640a in the case of becomes extremely short. As a result, even if an irregular game method of constantly hitting the right is executed in an attempt to execute an advantageous lottery of the second special symbol in the normal state, the ball is allowed to enter the second entrance 640. Is extremely difficult, so it is possible to increase the possibility of loss. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the deterrent effect on the irregular game method in which the player always strikes right.

Next, with reference to FIG. 102, the details of the jackpot end process 5 (S2141) executed in place of the jackpot end process 3 (see FIG. 80) in the second embodiment will be described. The jackpot end process 5 (S2141) is a process for setting the game state after the jackpot ends, similar to the jackpot end process 3 (see FIG. 80) in the second embodiment.

Of the jackpot end processing 5 (see FIG. 102), the processes S2201, S2204, and S2206 are the same as the processes S2201, S2204, and S2206 of the jackpot end process 3 (see FIG. 80) in the second embodiment, respectively. The same process is executed.

Further, in the jackpot end processing 5 (S2141) in the fourth embodiment, when it is determined in the processing of S2201 that the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S2201: Yes), the probability variation flag 203ak is set to on. (S2231) Next, based on the respective values of the probability change flag 2003ak and the time saving / medium counter 203r, a state command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the game state after the end of the jackpot is set (S2322), and processing is performed. It shifts to S2206.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, when the gaming state after the big hit becomes the probabilistic state, the probabilistic change is given over a specific number of times (20 times or 50 times) of special symbol lottery. The time table 202d4 is referenced. When the probability variation granting table 202d4 is referred to, a long variation (120 seconds) is selected when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed. Therefore, if the player falls from the probabilistic state to the normal state within a specific number of times (20 times or 50 times) and then returns from right-handed to left-handed, the second special symbol will be moved multiple times during the fluctuation of the first special symbol. The lottery can be executed. That is, from the end of the jackpot to the execution of the special symbol lottery for a specific number of times (20 times or 50 times), the lottery of the second special symbol is executed more than the lottery of the first special symbol. It becomes an easy and advantageous state. Therefore, even if the player falls from the probabilistic state to the normal state at an early stage (within a specific number of times) after the big hit, the player's motivation for the game can be maintained.

In the fourth embodiment, a variation pattern scenario in which the number of lottery of special symbols and the reference variation pattern table are associated with each other is set at the end of the jackpot, and is related to the timing of falling from the probability variation state to the normal state. However, the table 202d4 for probabilistic change is referred to only in the lottery of a specific number of special symbols after the end of the big hit, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the table 202d4 for probabilistic change may be referred to during a lottery of a special symbol a specific number of times (for example, 10 times) when the player falls from the probabilistic state to the normal state. In this case, only when the number of lottery of special symbols executed from the probabilistic state to the normal state is, for example, 20 times or less, after the fall, a specific number of special symbol lottery (for example, 10 times) is drawn. The table 202d4 for probabilistic variation may be referred to. With this configuration, when the probability change state ends with a small number of lottery (for example, within 20 times), it is possible to give an advantageous state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed. Therefore, the motivation of the player can be maintained even after the probability change state ends. Also, regardless of whether you fall in the first fall lottery or the 20th fall lottery, you can give an advantageous state the same number of times, so if you fall within a specified number of times (for example, 20 times) In addition, the degree of advantage after that can be made equal.

In the fourth embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the table 202d4 for probabilistic change only in the lottery of the special symbol a specific number of times (20 times or 50 times) after the probabilistic change state is given. , Not limited to this. For example, as in the first embodiment, when a small hit is made in the normal state, the number of special symbols is drawn for a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) after the small hit is completed, and the probability change is given. The variation pattern table may be determined with reference to the table 202d4. As a result, it is possible to form an advantageous state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed while continuing the left-handed striking, so that it is possible to reduce the trouble of changing between the right-handed striking and the left-handed striking during the normal state. Further, for example, as in the second embodiment, there is a disadvantageous state in which the variation pattern table is determined by referring to the normal table 202d1 according to the number of lottery of special symbols executed in the normal state, and for when probabilistic variation is given. The configuration may be such that the advantageous state in which the fluctuation pattern is determined is repeatedly switched with reference to the table 202d4. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game in the normal state from becoming monotonous.

In the fourth embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the table 202d4 for probabilistic change only in the lottery of the special symbol a specific number of times (20 times or 50 times) after the probabilistic change state is given. , Not limited to this. For example, this control may be applied to a normal state. Specifically, when the time saving state is set after the big hit, a specific number of special symbols (for example, 10 times) are executed after the lottery of, for example, 50 times of special symbols is executed after the time saving state ends. The variation pattern scenario table 202f may be configured so that the probability variation granting table 202d4 is referred to throughout the lottery. As a result, even if the time saving state ends without winning the jackpot, the game can be continued at least until the state in which the lottery of the second special symbol set after that is easy to be executed ends. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. Further, for example, as in the first embodiment, a small hit can be selected in the lottery of the first special symbol, and after the small hit, the lottery of the special symbol a specific number of times (for example, 10 times) is carried out. The table 202d4 for probabilistic change may be referred to. As a result, in the normal state in which the lottery of the first special symbol is easily executed, it is possible to shift to an advantageous state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed without changing the gaming state, triggered by a small hit. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game from becoming monotonous in the normal state.

In the fourth embodiment, by referring to the table 202d4 for probabilistic variation, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to be longer than the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, and the table is left-handed to be continuous. When the ball enters the distribution unit 660, the frequency at which the lottery of the first special symbol is executed is reduced, but the configuration for reducing the frequency at which the lottery of the first special symbol is executed is reduced. Is not limited to this. For example, the operation of the distribution unit 900 of the distribution unit 660 may be controlled by a motor or the like, and then the direction may be electrically switched by the motor according to the number of balls entering the distribution unit 660. Then, in the normal state, each time one ball enters, the motor is controlled so as to guide the ball in a direction different from the direction in which the ball is guided. On the other hand, within a specific number of times (for example, 20 times or 50 times) after being set to the probabilistic state, the ball is distributed (guided) to the central second entry port 640c as the arrangement of the distribution unit 900. Is set to be higher than the frequency of distribution to the first entry port 64 (for example, every time the ball is set to guide the ball to the central second entry port 640c five times in a row, the ball is assigned to the first entry port 64. The motor may be controlled so as to set the arrangement to guide the motor once. With this configuration, the same effect as that of the fourth embodiment can be obtained.

In the present embodiment, a distribution unit 660 for alternately distributing the ball to the first ball entry port 64 and the central second ball entry port 640c is provided. It may be applied to (see FIG. 2). That is, a game in which the first ball entry port 64 is provided at a position where a ball can easily enter when a left-handed hit is made, and the second ball entry port 640 is provided at a position where a ball can easily enter when a right-handed hit is made. It may be applied to the board 13. In this case, as in the first embodiment, when the normal table 202d1 is selected, only the ultra-long fluctuation (600 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, and the probability variation is given. After that, the table 202d4 for probabilistic change may be referred to within a specific number of times (for example, 20 times or 50 times), during the time saving state, and during the probable change state. With this configuration, if the player falls within a specific number of times from the probabilistic state, the lottery for the first special symbol will be executed less frequently, and the lottery for the second special symbol can be performed more frequently. It is possible to provide relief to the player who has fallen into.

In the first, second, fourth embodiment, and the modified example of the first embodiment, the normal discharge flow path 65e1 and the special discharge flow path 65e2 are provided inside the variable winning device 65, and the special discharge flow path 65e2 is provided during the jackpot. By passing the ball through the V winning switch 65e3 provided downstream of the discharge flow path 65e2, the gaming state after the big hit is set to the probabilistic state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, depending on the type of jackpot, it may be a specification in which whether or not the gaming state after the jackpot is set to the probabilistic state is predetermined. With such a configuration, the configuration of the variable winning device 65 can be simplified, so that the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

In each of the above embodiments, when a right-handed hit is made and a big hit is made in the lottery of the second special symbol, it is easy to win a big hit type in which an advantageous game state is easily set. The method that is more advantageous than this is not limited to this. For example, if a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol executed by right-handed, the configuration may be such that it is easy to win the big hit type having a large number of rounds.

In each of the above embodiments, the probability variation counter 203g and the time saving medium counter 203r are updated at a stage prior to the determination of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit, but the present invention is limited to this. is not it. For example, it may be configured to update various counters after first determining whether or not it is a big hit. As a result, it is not necessary to set a value obtained by adding 1 to the number of lottery of special symbols with respect to the counter value, so that it is possible to set parameters that are easier to understand.

In each of the above embodiments, the variable display of the first special symbol executed based on the lottery of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol executed based on the lottery of the second special symbol are simultaneously performed. The simultaneous fluctuation method that can be executed in parallel was adopted, but it is not limited to this. For example, it may be adopted as a method of executing only one variable display at a time. In this case, the variation display may be executed one by one in the order in which the start winning prize is detected, or when the variation display of the second special symbol is suspended, the variation display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed. It may be a method of executing. With such a configuration, the control of the pachinko machine 10 can be simplified.

In the first embodiment, chance mode A is always set (see table 202d3 for chance A) when a small hit is made in a special symbol lottery, and in the second and third embodiments, the chance mode A is set. , Chance mode A is always set when the number of lottery defined in the fluctuation pattern scenario is reached. In the fourth embodiment, when a probability change state is given after a big hit, a specific number of times (20 times) is always set. , Or 50 times), but the table 202d4 for probabilistic change is referred to, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to determine by lottery whether or not to refer to the chance A table 202d3 and the probability variation granting table 202d4. More specifically, for example, when a small hit is obtained in the first embodiment, or when the number of lottery is predetermined in the variable pattern scenario in the second and third embodiments (transition to chance mode A). When the conditions are met), a lottery to decide whether or not to shift to chance mode A (for example, a lottery to shift to chance mode A with a probability of 2/3) is performed, and only when the lottery is won. It may be configured to shift to the chance mode A. Further, in the fourth embodiment, when it is determined that the probability change state is given after the big hit, a lottery for whether or not to refer to the probability change granting table 202d4 is executed, and only when the lottery is won. After the big hit, the table 202d4 for probabilistic change may be referred to over a specified number of times (20 times or 50 times) of special symbol lottery. With this configuration, when the conditions for transition to the chance mode A are satisfied, the lottery result can be confirmed with interest, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. Further, when the lottery is performed, for example, the lottery probability may be changed depending on the time zone. Specifically, an RTC (Real-Time Clock) for measuring the time is electrically connected to the input / output port 205 of the main control device 110, and the connected RTC is accessed to access the main control device 110. The current time can be grasped by the MPU 201 of. Then, for example, when the time zone is in the morning (for example, 10:00 am to 12:00 am) or in the evening time zone (for example, from 5:00 pm to 7:00 pm), the lottery is performed more than other time zones. The configuration may be such that the probability is high (2/3 → 9/10). With this configuration, it is possible to improve the operation of the time zone where the lottery probability is high. Therefore, set the time zone where the number of players tends to be small in the hall as the time zone where the lottery probability is high. For example, it is possible to increase the number of players who visit the hall. Therefore, the operating rate of the hall can be improved.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted to determine the symbol effective line, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the stop is stopped. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is specific". In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence composed of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

Each of the above-described embodiments may be configured in whole or in combination thereof.

The concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown below.

<Characteristic A group> (The degree of advantage of the fluctuation pattern of the other is changed according to the result of one lottery)
The first discrimination means that executes the first determination based on the establishment of the first condition, the second determination means that executes the second determination based on the establishment of the second condition, and the first determination means by the first determination means. Based on the determination or the determination result obtained by the second determination by the second determination means, the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game advantageous to the player and the establishment of the specific condition are the first. Identification in a gaming machine provided with a gaming state setting means for setting one gaming state from a plurality of gaming states including one gaming state and a second gaming state that is more favorable to the player than the first gaming state. The display means capable of displaying information and the display means include the first dynamic display executing means and the display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information indicating the determination result of the first determination by the first determination means. Of the second dynamic display executing means for dynamically displaying the second identification information indicating the discrimination result of the second discrimination by the second discriminating means and the second identification information executed by the second dynamic display executing means. As the dynamic display period in the dynamic display, a plurality of predetermined dynamic display periods including at least a first dynamic display period and a second dynamic display period in which the first dynamic display period has a different degree of advantage for the player. Based on the period selection means for selecting one dynamic display period from the period and the game state setting means setting the first game state, the period selection means sets the second dynamic display period. When the first selection state is set by the first setting means for setting the first selection state in which the selection ratio is lower than the selection ratio of the first dynamic display period and the first setting means thereof, the first selection state is set. The ratio of the period setting means selecting the second dynamic display period based on the fact that the determination result of the first determination by the first determination means is a special determination result different from the specific determination result. The gaming machine A1 is provided with a second setting means capable of setting a second selection state higher than the first selection state.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a winning result. Some of these gaming machines are either a normal state in which the hit state is drawn with a normal probability or a probability fluctuation state in which the hit state is drawn with a higher probability than the normal state. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-000392).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the normal state is set when the winning state ends, the disadvantageous state in which the winning state is drawn with a lottery probability lower than the probability fluctuation state is at least the next winning state. Therefore, there is a problem that it is not possible to improve the interest of the player in the game when the normal state is reached.

Further, some of the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines have a plurality of starting ports, and can display variations in the symbol for each starting port in parallel at the same time. Furthermore, by making the degree of advantage in the case of a hit different for each start opening where the start winning is generated, it is expected that the player will win first with the variable display corresponding to the advantageous start opening. Some are trying to improve the taste. In this conventional gaming machine, for example, when a hit is made, a start prize is given to a start port having a low degree of advantage rather than a fluctuation time of a fluctuation display based on a start prize to a start port having a high degree of advantage. Some are configured so that the variation time of the variation display based on the basis is long, and the variation display with a high degree of advantage can be executed a larger number of times during the long variation time.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, since the fluctuation time is changed with a hit as an opportunity, if the fluctuation time is not hit, a lot of fluctuation displays having a low degree of advantage are executed, which is a disadvantageous state. Therefore, there is a problem that the game until it becomes a hit becomes monotonous.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine A1, the first identification information indicating the determination result of the first determination by the first determination means is dynamically applied to the display means configured to display the identification information by the first dynamic display execution means. The second identification information that is displayed and indicates the determination result of the second determination by the second determination means is dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display execution means. As the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the second identification information executed by the second dynamic display execution means, the first dynamic display period and the first dynamic display period have a degree of advantage for the player. One dynamic display period is selected by the period selection means from a plurality of predetermined periods including at least a different second dynamic display period. Based on the fact that the first game state is set by the game state setting means, the ratio of selecting the second dynamic display period by the period selection means is lower than the ratio of selecting the first dynamic display period. Is set by the first setting means. When the first selection state is set by the first setting means, the period is set based on the fact that the judgment result of the first judgment by the first judgment means is a special judgment result different from the specific judgment result. The second setting means sets a second selection state in which the ratio of the means selecting the second dynamic display period is higher than that of the first selection state.

As a result, at least in the first selection state, even if the first determination does not result in a specific determination result, a special determination result can be obtained, so that the degree of advantage when the second determination is executed can be different. can. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous at least in the first game state.

The gaming machine A1 includes a selection means for selecting a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the first identification information executed by the first dynamic display execution means from a plurality of periods, and the selection means is the first. The gaming machine A2 is characterized in that the ratio of selecting each of the plurality of periods is the same in the selected state and the second selected state.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the first identification information executed by the first dynamic display execution means is selected from a plurality of periods by the selection means. In the first selection state and the second selection state, each of the plurality of periods is selected at the same ratio by the selection means.

As a result, when the special lottery result is obtained by the first determination, the advantage degree when the second determination is executed is different without changing the advantage degree when the first determination is executed. Can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game in the first game state from becoming monotonous.

The gaming machine A3 in the gaming machine A1 or A2, wherein the second dynamic display period is more advantageous to the player than the first dynamic display period.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A1 or A2, the second dynamic display period is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the first dynamic display period. In the state, the game can be performed with the expectation that the first determination will result in a special determination result. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game in the first game state from becoming monotonous.

As the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means in any of the game machines A1 to A3, at least the first privilege game and the second privilege game which is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game are at least. The type selection means for selecting one type of the privileged game from a plurality of types including the above type selection means is compared with the first determination, and the second determination is performed with the specific determination result. The gaming machine A4 is characterized in that the ratio of selecting the second privileged game is increased in such a case, and the second dynamic display period is shorter than the first dynamic display period.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, the type is selected from a plurality of types including at least the first privilege game and the second privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game. One type is selected by means. Compared with the first determination, when a specific determination result is obtained in the second determination, the second privilege game is selected at a higher rate by the type selection means. The second dynamic display period is composed of a shorter period than the first dynamic display period.

As a result, when the second selection state is set because the special discrimination result is obtained by the first discrimination, the dynamic display period of the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the second discrimination is shortened. It is possible to shorten the execution interval of the determination. Therefore, it becomes easy to execute the second determination in which the second privilege game, which is advantageous when a specific determination result is obtained, is easily selected. Therefore, it is expected that the player will be in the second selection state. It is possible to play a game in a game state. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

The second setting means includes a timekeeping means for measuring the timekeeping information in any of the game machines A1 to A4, and the timekeeping information measured by the timekeeping means is within a predetermined range, and the determination result of the first determination is the special. The gaming machine A5, characterized in that the second selection state is set based on the determination result.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A1 to A4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the timekeeping information is timed by the timekeeping means. The second selection state is set by the second setting means based on the fact that the timing information measured by the timing means is within a predetermined range and the determination result of the first determination is the special determination result.

This has the effect that the degree of advantage of the first gaming state can be changed according to the timekeeping information measured by the timekeeping means.

A launching means capable of launching a game ball into a gaming area based on a player's operation in any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, a first path through which the game ball launched by the launching means can pass, and the first path thereof. A second path different from the above, a first entry means arranged on the first path and capable of entering a game ball, and a second entry means arranged on the second path and capable of entering a game ball. The first condition is satisfied based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entry means, and the second condition is that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means. The gaming machine A6, which is characterized in that it is established based on the above.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a first path in which the game ball is launched into the game area by the launching means based on the operation of the player and the game ball launched by the launching means can pass through, and a second path different from the first path. Is provided in the game area. The first condition is satisfied based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entry means, and the second condition is satisfied based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means.

As a result, when the dynamic display period having a high degree of advantage is easily selected by the period selection means, the game ball is launched into the second path, and conversely, the dynamic display period having a high degree of advantage is selected by the period selection means. In a difficult state, the game ball can be launched into the first path. Therefore, since it is possible to give the player the pleasure of changing the launch direction of the game ball, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

As the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the first identification information executed by the first dynamic display execution means in any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, a normal dynamic display period and the normal dynamic display period thereof The second dynamic display period includes a selection means for selecting one dynamic display period from a plurality of periods including at least a special dynamic display period different from the first dynamic display period. The normal dynamic display period is advantageous to the person, and when the specific discrimination result is obtained by the first discrimination, or when the specific discrimination result and the special discrimination result are different from each other, the discriminant result is different. In this case, the special dynamic display period can be selected by the selection means, and the special dynamic display period can be selected by the selection means when the specific determination result or the special determination result is obtained by the first determination. The gaming machine A7, which is characterized in that it becomes.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the first identification information executed by the first dynamic display execution means, a normal dynamic display period and a special dynamic display period different from the normal dynamic display period are used. One dynamic display period is selected by the selection means from a plurality of periods including at least. The second dynamic display period is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the first dynamic display period. When a specific discrimination result is obtained by the first discrimination, or when a deviation discrimination result different from the specific discrimination result and the special discrimination result is obtained, the normal dynamic display period can be selected by the selection means. .. On the other hand, when a specific determination result or a special determination result is obtained by the first determination, the special dynamic display period can be selected by the selection means.

As a result, when the special dynamic display period is selected, the special dynamic display period is selected because the privilege game is executed or the second dynamic display period that is advantageous by the period selection means is easily selected. There is an effect that the player can be pleased when the player recognizes that.

As the types of the privilege games executed by the privilege game execution means in the gaming machine A7, a plurality of types including at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game. As the type of the second selection state set by the type selection means for selecting the type of the privilege game and the second setting means, the second determination is performed over the first number of times of the second determination. At least a small selection state in which the selection state is set and a multi-selection state in which the second selection state is set over the second determination of the second number of times more than the first number of times can be selected. Based on the state type selection means and the selection means selecting the dynamic display period, the effect execution means for executing a predetermined effect within the dynamic display period and the special effect execution means executed by the effect execution means. As the predetermined effect corresponding to the dynamic display period, the normal effect and an effect selection means capable of selecting at least a special effect different from the normal effect are provided, and the special effect is specified by the first determination. The first privilege game is determined by the type selection means, and the special determination result is obtained by the first determination, and the multi-selection state is selected by the state type selection means. The gaming machine A8, characterized in that it is selected only in either case of being played.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, one is selected from a plurality of types including at least the first privilege game and the second privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game. The type of award game is selected by the type selection means. As the types of the second selection state set by the second setting means, a small selection state in which the second selection state is set over the second determination of the first number of times and a second state in which the second selection state is set more than the first number of times. The multi-selection state in which the second selection state is set over the second determination of the number of times is configured to be selectable by at least the state type selection means. Based on the fact that the dynamic display period is selected by the period selection means, a predetermined effect is executed by the effect execution means within the dynamic display period, and the special dynamic display period executed by the effect execution means is supported. As a predetermined effect to be performed, a normal effect and a special effect different from the normal effect can be selected at least by the effect selection means. The second privilege game is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game. A specific determination result is obtained by the first determination, and a special determination result is obtained by the first determination when the first privilege game is determined by the type selection means, and a multi-selection state is selected by the state type selection means. The special effect is selected by the effect selection means only in either case of the above.

As a result, in the dynamic display of the first identification information for which the special dynamic display period is set, the first privilege game is executed when the player recognizes that the special effect has been executed, or multiple selections are made. There is an effect that the player can be made to recognize that the state is set.

In the gaming machine A8, the second number of times is larger than the number of times of the first determination executed when the game is played using the game ball that the player can acquire in the first privilege game. The gaming machine A9 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A8, the second number of times is executed when the player plays a game using a gaming ball that can be acquired by the player in the first privilege game. Since the number of determinations is larger than the number of determinations, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a novel playability that makes it expected that the first identification information indicating a specific determination result is not displayed when the special effect is executed.

<Characteristic B group> (Chance zone after falling with 1 type and 2 types)
Discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of discrimination conditions, display means that displays identification information indicating the discrimination result of discrimination by the discrimination means, and dynamic display that executes dynamic display of the identification information in the display means. Execution means and its dynamic display As a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the execution means, a period determination means for determining one of the plurality of predetermined periods. A ball-entry means on which a game ball can enter, a first position where the game ball can enter the ball-entry means, and a game ball from the first position to the ball-entry means. A variable means that can be changed to a second position where it is difficult to enter a ball and a variable control means that changes the variable means in a predetermined variable pattern based on the specific determination result obtained by the determination by the determination means. A privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the game ball entering the ball entry means entering a specific area provided inside the ball entry means and the privilege game execution means thereof. As a game state after the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means is completed, from a plurality of game states including a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. Counting means for counting the number of determinations executed by the determination means after the first game state is set by the game state setting means for setting the game state of 1 and the game state setting means, and the counting means. As the dynamic display period determined by the period determination means, the determination of an advantageous period that is more advantageous to the player than the other dynamic display periods is determined based on the number of times that the number of times has reached a predetermined specific number. The gaming machine B1 comprising: an advantageous state setting means for setting an advantageous state in which the ratio is high.

Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the lottery result executed based on the starting prize is a hit, a winning state advantageous to the player is given (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-000392). Gazette). In such a conventional gaming machine, it is possible to set either a normal state in which a starting prize is unlikely to occur or a time-saving state in which a starting prize is more likely to occur than in the normal state, as a game state after hitting. There is. In addition, there are some that have a ball entry port in which the entry rate of the game ball is high during the time saving state. Inside the ball entry port, a specific area is provided that triggers a hit state when the game ball can enter the ball. That is, during the time saving state, a winning state is given depending on whether the ball is won by a lottery based on the starting prize or when the ball enters a specific area, which is an advantageous state as compared with the normal state. It becomes.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, it is general that only the above-mentioned two types of gaming states (normal state and time saving state) are provided (so-called probabilistic state is not provided), which is an advantageous time saving state. There was a problem that the most unfavorable normal state was set when the game was completed. That is, when the most advantageous state ends, there is a risk that the motivation of the player for the game will be significantly reduced.

On the other hand, in the game machine B1, the open position at which the game ball can enter the ball entry means and the second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter the ball entry means than the first position are variable. The means are variably configured. The variable means is varied by the variable control means in a predetermined variable pattern based on the fact that the discrimination by the discriminant means results in a specific discriminant result. Based on the fact that the game ball that has entered the ball entry means enters a specific area provided inside the ball entry means, the privilege game execution means executes the privilege game that is advantageous to the player. As a game state after the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means is completed, one from a plurality of game states including a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. The game state of is set by the game state setting means. The number of determinations executed by the determination means after the first game state is set by the game state setting means is counted by the counting means, and the number of times counted by the counting means becomes a predetermined specific number. Based on this, as the dynamic display period determined by the period determination means, an advantageous state in which the determination ratio of the advantageous period advantageous to the player is higher than that of other dynamic display periods is set by the advantageous state setting means.

As a result, when the first game state, which has a lower degree of advantage than the second game state, is set after the privilege game is completed, the determination of a specific number of times is executed with the aim of shifting to the advantageous state. At least the game can be continued until. Therefore, when the first gaming state is set, there is an effect that the motivation of the player for the game can be improved.

Based on the setting of the first gaming state in the gaming machine B1, the first disadvantage state setting means for setting the disadvantageous state in which the determination ratio of the advantageous period is lower than the advantageous state and the advantageous state setting means are used. Based on the fact that the first number of discriminations by the discriminating means are executed after the advantageous state is set, the disadvantageous state is set by the second disadvantageous state setting means for setting the disadvantageous state and the second disadvantageous state setting means. The gaming machine B2 is characterized by comprising a second advantageous state setting means for setting the advantageous state based on the second determination of the number of times being executed by the determining means after the setting.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the fact that the first gaming state is set, the disadvantageous state in which the determination ratio of the advantageous period is lower than the advantageous state is set by the first disadvantageous state setting means. The disadvantageous state is set by the second disadvantageous state setting means based on the fact that the determination by the first number of times of the determination means is executed after the advantageous state is set by the advantageous state setting means. The advantageous state is set by the second advantageous state setting means based on the fact that the determination means executes the determination of the second number of times after the disadvantageous state is set by the second disadvantageous state setting means.

As a result, even if the advantageous state set by the advantageous state setting means ends, the game can be continued aiming at the advantageous state set by the second advantageous state setting means thereafter. Therefore, there is an effect that the motivation for the superiority of the player can be improved.

In the gaming machine B2, the second disadvantageous state setting means is executed by the discriminating means for the first number of times after the advantageous state is set by the advantageous state setting means or the second advantageous state setting means. The gaming machine B3, characterized in that the disadvantageous state is set based on the above.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B2, the determination by the first number of times after the advantageous state is set by the advantageous state setting means or the second advantageous state setting means is executed. Since the disadvantageous state is set by the second disadvantageous state setting means based on the above, the gaming state over the determination of the first number of times and the disadvantageous state over the determination of the second number of times can be alternately repeated. .. Therefore, even if the advantageous state of 1 is completed, the player can be made to think that the game is to be continued until the next advantageous state, so that the motivation of the player for the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the advantageous period is shorter than the disadvantage period in which the ratio determined by the period determining means is high when the number of times counted by the counting means is less than a predetermined specific number. A gaming machine B4 characterized by a length period.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines B1 to B3, when the number of times counted by the counting means is less than a predetermined number of times, the ratio determined by the period determining means is higher than the disadvantageous period. However, since the advantageous period is configured to have a short length, the discrimination by the discriminating means can be executed at short intervals during the advantageous period. Therefore, there is an effect that the game efficiency can be improved when the advantageous state is set.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the privilege game executing means can execute the privilege game based on the fact that the discrimination by the discrimination means results in a special discrimination result different from the specific discrimination result. A gaming machine B5 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the award game is performed by the award game execution means based on the fact that the discrimination by the discriminating means results in a special discriminating result different from the specific discriminating result. Is executed, there is an effect that the game can be played with the expectation that a special discrimination result will be obtained.

A launching means capable of launching a game ball based on a player's operation in the gaming machine B5, a first path through which the game ball launched by the launching means can pass, a second path different from the first path, and the above. The discriminating means includes a first ball-entry means provided on the first path and capable of entering a game ball and a second ball-entry means provided on the second path and capable of entering a game ball. The first determination means for executing the first determination based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry means and the second determination based on the entry of the game ball into the second entry means. The gaming machine B6, characterized in that it includes a second discriminating means for executing the above.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game ball is launched by the launching means based on the operation of the player. A first path through which the game ball launched by the launching means can pass and a second path different from the first path are provided. The first path is provided with a first ball entry means on which a game ball can enter, and the second path is provided with a second ball entry means on which a game ball can enter. In the determination means, the first determination is executed by the first determination means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first entry means, and the game ball has entered the second entry means. The second determination is executed by the second determination means.

As a result, the player can be made to select whether to launch the game ball on the first path or the game ball on the second path, so that it is possible to provide the playability that suits the taste of each player. can.

In the gaming machine B6, the period determining means determines the advantageous period as the dynamic display period when the determination by the second determining means is executed in the advantageous state, and the advantageous state is set. When the determination by the second determination means is executed in the state where the determination is not performed, the ratio of determining the disadvantageous display period which is disadvantageous is higher than when the determination by the first determination means is executed. The gaming machine B7 is characterized in that the first determination has a lower probability of producing the specific determination result than the second determination.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the advantageous state, when the determination by the second determination means is executed, the ratio of the advantageous period being determined by the period determination means increases. On the other hand, when the advantageous state is not set, when the determination by the second determination means is executed, the disadvantageous display period, which is more disadvantageous than the case where the determination by the first determination means is executed, is the period determination means. The percentage determined by is higher. The first determination is configured to have a lower probability of producing a specific determination result than the second determination.

Thereby, in the advantageous state, the game ball can be launched aiming at the second path, and in the state other than the advantageous state, the game ball can be launched aiming at the first path. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be given the pleasure of changing the launch direction of the game ball according to the state.

The gaming machine B8 is characterized in that the probability that the first determination results in the special determination result is the same as the probability that the second determination results in the special determination result.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B7, the probability that the first discrimination results in the special discrimination result is the same as the probability that the second discrimination results in the special discrimination result. Therefore, when the gaming ball is launched aiming at the first path, there is an effect that the gaming can be performed with the expectation that a special discrimination result will be obtained.

<Characteristic C group> (Simultaneous fluctuation, the fluctuation time is variable according to the holding of the other special figure under specific conditions)
The first entry means on which the game ball can enter, the second entry means different from the first entry means, and the first entry based on the entry of the game ball into the first entry means. The ball entry information acquisition means for acquiring ball information and acquiring the second ball entry information based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means, and the ball entry information acquisition means acquired before the ball entry information acquisition means. A first discriminating means that executes a first determination based on the first ball entry information and a second determination that executes a second determination based on the second ball entry information acquired before the ball entry information acquisition means. The display means capable of displaying the second identification means, the first identification information indicating the determination result of the first determination, and the second identification information indicating the determination result of the second determination, and the display means for the first identification. The first dynamic display executing means for executing the dynamic display of information, the second dynamic display executing means for executing the dynamic display of the second identification information by the display means, and the second dynamic display executing means thereof. While the dynamic display of the second identification information is being executed, the second entry acquired by the entry information acquisition means based on the fact that the game ball newly enters the second entry means. The ball information is stored in the second discriminating information storage means that can at least store the ball information until the second discriminating by the second discriminating means is executed, and the first identification information executed by the first dynamic display executing means. As the dynamic display period in the dynamic display, one of a plurality of predetermined periods is dynamically based on at least the number of stored second ball entry information stored in the second ball entry information storage means. A game machine C1 comprising a period selection means for selecting a display period.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when the lottery result executed based on the winning (starting winning) to the starting port provided on the game board is a winning, a winning state advantageous to the player is given. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-000392). In this conventional gaming machine, a plurality of starting ports are provided, and the starting port in which a ball can easily enter is variable depending on the gaming state. In addition, a gaming machine having a plurality of starting ports is subject to a penalty such that the fluctuation time becomes extremely longer than usual when an irregular game is performed aiming at the starting opening where the ball is difficult to enter. There are also things that can be done.

However, there is a problem that the conventional gaming machine that hangs has insufficient deterrent effect on irregular gaming methods.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine C1, the first ball entry information is acquired by the ball entry information acquisition means based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means, while the second ball entry means The second ball entry information is acquired based on the ball entry of the game ball. Based on the first ball entry information acquired by the ball entry information acquisition means, the first discrimination is executed by the first discrimination means by the first discrimination means, and the second discrimination means is executed based on the second ball entry information. The second determination is performed. The first identification information indicating the determination result of the first determination and the second identification information indicating the determination result of the second determination are displayed on the display means. In the display means, the dynamic display of the first identification information is executed by the first dynamic display execution means, and the dynamic display of the second identification information is executed by the second dynamic display execution means. While the second dynamic display of the identification information is being executed by the second dynamic low display executing means, it is acquired by the ball entry information acquisition means based on the fact that the game ball newly enters the second ball entry means. The second ball entry information is stored at least until the second ball entry information storage means executes the second determination by the second determination means. The dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the first identification information executed by the first dynamic display execution means is based on at least the number of stored second ball entry information stored in the second ball entry information storage means. , One dynamic display period is selected from a plurality of predetermined periods by the period selection means.

As a result, the frequency of the first discrimination by the first discrimination means changes according to the number of stored second ball entry information, so that only the dynamic display of the first identification information and the dynamic display of the second identification information Instead, the game can be played by paying attention to the number of stored second ball entry information. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine C1, the first dynamic display executing means, when the dynamic display of the second identification information is executed, causes the dynamic display of the second identification information to be executed while the first identification information is executed. The gaming machine C2, which is capable of executing the dynamic display of.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1, when the dynamic display of the second identification information is executed, the first dynamic while the dynamic display of the second identification information is executed. Since the display executing means is configured to execute the dynamic display of the first identification information, it is possible to more efficiently execute the first discrimination by the first discrimination means and the second discrimination by the second discrimination means. effective.

In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the period selection means is described in the second ball entry information storage means as compared with the case where at least one second ball entry information is stored in the second ball entry information storage means. The gaming machine C3 is characterized in that, when the second ball entry information is not stored, the ratio of selecting an advantageous dynamic display period that is advantageous to the player is high.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1 or C2, the second ball entry information storage is more than the case where at least one second ball entry information is stored in the second ball entry information storage means. When the second ball entry information is not stored in the means, the ratio of selecting the advantageous dynamic display period advantageous to the player by the period selection means is high, so that the second ball entry information storage means is used for the second ball entry information storage means. There is an effect that the game can be performed so that the entry information of the ball is not stored.

The privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game advantageous to the player and the privilege game based on the result of the first determination or the specific determination result predetermined in the second determination in the gaming machine C3. As the type of the privilege game executed by the execution means, one of the above-mentioned privilege games from a plurality of types including the first privilege game and the second privilege game which is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game. The selection means is provided with a selection means capable of selecting a type, and the selection means is described when a specific determination result is obtained in the second determination rather than when the specific determination result is obtained in the first determination. The gaming machine C4 characterized in that the ratio of selecting the second privileged gaming is high.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the result of a specific determination predetermined in the first determination or the second determination, the privilege game execution means executes the privilege game advantageous to the player. As the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, one is selected from a plurality of types including the first privilege game and the second privilege game which is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game. The type of award game is selected. The rate at which the second privilege game is selected by the selection means is higher when the specific determination result is obtained in the second determination than when the specific determination result is obtained in the first determination.

As a result, the second discriminating means can be used to play the game with the expectation that a specific discriminating result will be obtained, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

As the gaming state after the privilege game is completed in the gaming machine C4, the first gaming state in which the first determination is more likely to be executed than the second determination and the second determination rather than the first gaming state. The period setting means is provided with a game state setting means capable of at least setting a second game state in which is easy to be executed. In the first game state, the second ball entry information is stored in the second ball entry information storage means. The gaming machine C5, characterized in that the setting ratio of the advantageous dynamic display period becomes high when it is not stored.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the game state after the privilege game is completed, the first game state in which the first determination is more likely to be executed than the second determination and the second determination in which the second determination is more likely to be executed than the first game state. The game state is configured to be configurable at least by the game state setting means. In the first game state, when the second ball entry information is not stored in the second ball entry information storage means, the ratio of setting the advantageous dynamic display period by the period setting means increases.

As a result, an irregular game method is executed in an attempt to execute the second determination in the first gaming state in which the first determination is easily executed, and the second entry information is stored in the second entry information storage means. If this is done, it becomes a disadvantageous state in which it is difficult to set the advantageous dynamic display period, so that there is an effect that it is possible to suppress an irregular game method.

As the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the second identification information executed by the second dynamic display execution means in the gaming machine C5, one dynamic display period is selected from a plurality of predetermined periods. The second period selection means is provided with a second period selection means, and the second period selection means selects a disadvantageous display period that is disadvantageous to the player when the first game state is set rather than the second game state. The gaming machine C6, which is characterized in that the value is high.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the second identification information executed by the second dynamic display execution means, one dynamic display period is selected from a plurality of periods predetermined by the second period selection means. Be selected. When the first gaming state is set, the ratio of selecting the disadvantageous display period disadvantageous to the player by the second period selecting means is higher than that of the second gaming state.

This has the effect of suppressing an irregular gaming method that attempts to execute the second determination in the first gaming state.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, a launching means capable of launching the gaming ball into the gaming area based on the operation of the player and the first ball entering means are provided, and the first path through which the gaming ball can pass and the first path. The gaming machine C7 is characterized in that it is provided with two ball-entry means and includes a second path different from the first path.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game ball is launched into the game area by the launching means based on the operation of the player. A first path through which the game ball can pass is provided with a first ball entry means, and a second path different from the first path is provided in the game area with a second ball entry means.

As a result, the firing direction can be changed according to the type of ball-entry means that the player wants to enter, so that there is an effect that the game can be prevented from becoming monotonous.

<Characteristic D group> (It makes it difficult to execute the lottery of one of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2)
The first ball is based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entry means capable of entering the game ball, the second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, and the first ball entry means. The first discrimination means for executing the discrimination, the second discrimination means for executing the second discrimination based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means, and the first discrimination by the first discrimination means. Alternatively, the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game advantageous to the player and the privilege executed by the privilege game execution means based on the specific determination result obtained by the second determination by the second determination means. As the gaming state after the game is completed, the first gaming state in which the probability of the specific determination result is set to the first probability and the second gaming state in which the probability of the specific determination result is set to a second probability higher than the first probability are set. Based on the establishment of the determination condition when the second game state is set by the game state setting means capable of setting one game state from a plurality of game states including at least and the game state setting means and the game state setting means. A game state changing means for changing the gaming state from the second gaming state to the first gaming state based on the determination result obtained by the third discriminating means for executing the discrimination and the third discriminating means. The second determination determines the frequency with which the first determination means is executed by the first determination means when the game state changing means changes to the first gaming state while a specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine D1 is provided with a frequency suppressing means for suppressing the frequency at which the second determination is executed by the means.

Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a winning is achieved in a lottery executed based on a starting ball, the winning state is advantageous to the player. In some of such conventional gaming machines, after a hit, a probability variation state in which the winning lottery probability is higher than usual is set. Further, there is known a gaming machine that executes a lottery (falling lottery) as to whether or not to shift from a probabilistic state to a normal state together with a lottery as to whether or not to win. In such a gaming machine, it is difficult for the player to predict how long the probabilistic state will continue, so that the player can play the game hoping that the probabilistic state will continue for a longer period of time.

However, the conventional gaming machine has a problem that if the probabilistic state is terminated early (with a small number of lottery), the motivation of the player for the game may be lowered.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine D1, the first determination is executed by the first determination means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first entry means, and the game ball enters the second entry means. The second determination is executed by the second determination means based on the sphere. Based on the result of a specific determination in the first determination by the first determination means or the second determination by the second determination means, the privilege game execution means executes the privilege game advantageous to the player. As a game state after the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means is completed, a first game state in which the probability of a specific determination result is set as the first probability and a second probability higher than the first probability thereof. One of the plurality of gaming states including at least the second gaming state set in is configured to be settable by the gaming state setting means. Based on the fact that when the second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, the discrimination is executed by the third discriminating means based on the establishment of the discriminating condition, and the predetermined discriminating result is obtained by the third discriminating means. Then, the game state is changed from the second game state to the first game state by the game state changing means. When the game state changing means changes to the first gaming state while the specific condition is satisfied, the frequency at which the first determination is executed by the first determining means is determined by the frequency suppressing means. Means suppresses the frequency with which the second determination is performed.

As a result, the frequency with which the first determination is executed can be changed according to whether or not the specific condition is satisfied when the state is changed to the first gaming state. It has the effect of being able to improve.

In the gaming machine D1, the first discriminating means executes the first discriminating when a predetermined first discriminating condition is satisfied after the game ball enters the first ball entering means. The second discriminating means executes the first discriminant when a predetermined second discriminating condition is satisfied after the game ball enters the second ball entering means, and the frequency suppressing means is a frequency suppressing means. The gaming machine D2 is characterized in that the predetermined first determination condition is controlled so as to be less likely to be satisfied than the predetermined second determination condition.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, after the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the first determination is executed by the first determination means when a predetermined first determination condition is satisfied. After the game ball enters the second ball entry means, the second determination is executed by the second determination means when a predetermined second determination condition is satisfied. The predetermined first determination condition is controlled by the frequency suppressing means so as to be less likely to be satisfied than the predetermined second determination condition.

As a result, the frequency with which the first determination is executed can be changed by changing the ease with which the predetermined first determination condition is satisfied, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine D1 or D2, when the specific determination result is obtained by the second determination rather than the first determination, the game after the executed privilege game is completed. The gaming machine D3, characterized in that the ratio of setting the second gaming state as the state is high.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D1 or D2, when a specific determination result is obtained by the second determination rather than the first determination, after the executed privilege game is completed. Since the rate at which the second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means as the gaming state is increased, the frequency at which the first determination is executed is suppressed by the frequency suppressing means, so that the player It will be advantageous for. Therefore, there is an effect that the motivation of the player for the game can be improved when the state is changed to the first game state when the specific condition is satisfied.

Dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the determination result of the first determination and the second determination with respect to the display means capable of displaying the identification information on any of the gaming machines D1 to D3 and the display means thereof. The gaming machine D4 is characterized by comprising a dynamic display executing means capable of dynamically displaying the second identification information indicating the determination result of the above.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the identification information is configured to be displayable on the display means. The dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the determination result of the first determination and the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the determination result of the second determination to the display means are performed by the dynamic display execution means, respectively. Will be executed.

As a result, even if the dynamic display of one of the identification information is being executed, the dynamic display of the other identification information can be executed, so that the dynamic display of the identification information can be performed more efficiently. There is an effect.

In the gaming machine D4, the frequency suppressing means increases the start interval from the start of the dynamic display of the first identification information of 1 to the start of the next dynamic display of the first identification information. The gaming machine D5, which is characterized in that it is controlled by.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the frequency suppressing means is controlled so that the start interval from the start of the dynamic display of the first identification information of 1 to the start of the dynamic display of the first identification information is long.

As a result, the frequency with which the first identification information is dynamically displayed can be reduced, which has the effect of improving the player's interest in the game.

A period for setting the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the first identification information or the second identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means in the gaming machine D4 or D5 from a plurality of predetermined periods. The plurality of predetermined periods provided with the setting means include at least a first dynamic display period and a second dynamic display period longer than the first dynamic display period, and the frequency thereof. In the suppressing means, the ratio of the second dynamic display period being set by the period setting means as the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the first identification information is higher than that of the first dynamic display period, and As the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the second identification information, a state in which the rate at which the first dynamic display period is selected by the period setting means is set higher than that of the second dynamic display period is set. A gaming machine D6 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D4 or D5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the first identification information or the second identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means is set from a plurality of periods predetermined by the period setting means. The plurality of predetermined periods include at least a first dynamic display period and a second dynamic display period longer than the first dynamic display period. The ratio of the second dynamic display period set by the period selection means as the dynamic display period of the first identification information is higher than that of the first dynamic display period, and the dynamic display in the dynamic display of the second identification information. As the period, the frequency suppressing means sets a state in which the ratio of the first dynamic display period being selected by the period selection means is higher than that of the second dynamic display period.

As a result, the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the second identification information tends to be shorter than the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the first identification information, so that the dynamic display of the second identification information can be performed. It has the effect of increasing the frequency of execution.

A launching means capable of launching a game ball into a gaming area based on a player's operation in any of the gaming machines D1 to D6, a first path through which the game ball launched by the launching means can pass, and the first path thereof. A second path different from the above and a game ball passing through the second path are provided at a position where the ball can enter, and the second determination is executed by the second determination means based on the entry of the game ball. The first ball-entry means and the second ball-entry means are arranged at positions where a game ball that has passed through the first path can enter. In the first gaming state, it is more difficult for a gaming ball that has passed through the second path to enter the third ball entry means as compared with the second gaming state, and the gaming state setting means is the first. When the specific determination result is obtained by the second determination, the ratio of setting the second gaming state as the gaming state after the executed privileged game is completed is higher than the determination of. A game machine D7 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a first path in which the game ball is launched into the game area by the launching means based on the operation of the player and the game ball launched by the launching means can pass through, and a second path different from the first path. Is provided. At a position where the game ball that has passed through the second path can enter, a third ball entry means is provided in which the second determination is executed by the second determination means based on the entry of the game ball. .. The first ball entry means and the second ball entry means are arranged at positions where the game ball that has passed through the first path can enter. The first game state is configured so that the game ball that has passed through the second path is less likely to enter the third ball entry means as compared with the second game state. When a specific determination result is obtained by the second determination rather than the first determination, the ratio at which the second game state is set by the game state setting means as the game state after the executed privilege game is completed is It is configured to be high.

As a result, when the second game state is set, it becomes easier to execute an advantageous second determination by firing the game ball to the second path, so that the game state is set after the privilege game is completed. There is an effect that the game can be performed with the expectation that the second game state is set.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D7, a passing means through which the game ball can pass, a first guiding state in which the gaming ball passing through the passing means is guided to the first ball entering means, and a first guiding state in which the game ball is guided to the second entering means. Based on the guidance means that can be changed to the second guidance state and the guidance means that guides the game ball to the first ball entry means, the guidance means is changed to the second guidance state, and the game ball is moved to the second guidance state. The gaming machine D8 is provided with a variable means for changing the guiding means to the first guiding state based on being guided by the second ball entering means.

According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a passing means through which the game ball can pass is provided. The guiding means is variably configured into a first guiding state in which the game ball that has passed through the passing means is guided to the first entering means and a second guiding state in which the game ball is guided to the second entering means. Based on the fact that the game ball is guided to the first ball entry means by the guiding means, the guiding means is changed to the second guiding state by the variable means. On the other hand, the guiding means is changed to the first guiding state by the variable means based on the fact that the game ball is guided to the second entering means.

As a result, each time the game ball passes through the passing means, the game ball can be alternately entered into the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means, so that the first determination is executed by the frequency suppressing means. When the frequency of the first determination is not suppressed, there is an effect that the frequency of the first determination and the frequency of the second determination can be easily equalized.

The specific condition includes the counting means for counting the total of the number of times the first determination is executed and the number of times the second determination is executed in any of the gaming machines D1 to D8, and the specific condition is the second game. The gaming machine D9 is characterized in that it is established when the counting value counted by the counting means after the state is set is in the range of a specific counting value or less.

According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the total of the number of times the first determination is executed and the number of times the second determination is executed is counted by the counting means. It is configured so that a specific condition is satisfied when the count value counted by the counting means after the second game state is set is in the range of the specific count value or less.

As a result, the game can be performed by paying attention to the number of times of the first determination and the second determination executed until the state is changed to the first game state, so that the player's interest in the game is improved. It has the effect of being able to make it.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B8, C1 to C7, and D1 to D9, the gaming machine Z1 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of a slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information is provided for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. A gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

A gaming machine Z2, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B8, C1 to C7, and D1 to D9. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

A gaming machine Z3 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B8, C1 to C7, and D1 to D9, the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "
<Others>
For gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a ball entering the starting port installed in the game area is detected, a variable display of a special symbol is executed on the display device, which is advantageous when a predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed. Some are given a hit state. Some of these conventional gaming machines are provided with a plurality of starting ports in the gaming area, and the starting ports that are easy to enter are different depending on the launching direction of the ball to improve the interest (for example). Patent Document 1: Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2005-304932).
However, further improvement of interest is required.
The technical idea has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present technical idea is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's interest in playing a game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 includes a first ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, a second entry means different from the first entry means, and the first entry means. The first ball entry information is acquired based on the game ball entering the ball means, and the second entry information is acquired based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means. Obtained by the ball information acquisition means, the first determination means that executes the first determination based on the first ball entry information acquired before the ball entry information acquisition means, and the ball entry information acquisition means. The second discrimination means for executing the second discrimination based on the second ball entry information, the first identification information indicating the discrimination result of the first discrimination, and the discrimination result of the second discrimination are shown. A display means capable of displaying the second identification information, a first dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying the first identification information by the display means, and a dynamic display means for the second identification information. While the second dynamic display executing means for executing the display and the second dynamic display executing means are executing the dynamic display of the second identification information, a game ball is newly sent to the second entering means. The second entry information acquired by the entry information acquisition means based on the entry of the ball has been stored at least until the second determination by the second determination means is executed. The second ball information storage means stored in the second ball information storage means as a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the ball information storage means and the first identification information executed by the first dynamic display execution means. A period selection means for selecting one dynamic display period from a plurality of predetermined periods based on at least the number of stored ball entry information is provided.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, and the first dynamic display executing means is the second identification when the dynamic display of the second identification information is executed. It is possible to execute the dynamic display of the first identification information while executing the dynamic display of the information.
The game machine of the technical idea 3 is the game machine according to the technical idea 1 or 2, and the period selection means stores at least one second ball entry information in the second ball entry information storage means. When the second ball entry information is not stored in the second ball entry information storage means, the ratio of selecting the advantageous dynamic display period advantageous to the player is higher than the case where the second ball entry information is stored. ..
The gaming machine of the technical idea 4 is based on the fact that the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3 has a specific determination result predetermined in the first determination or the second determination. As a type of the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game advantageous to the player and the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, the first privilege game and the second privilege game more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game. A selection means capable of selecting one type of the privilege game from a plurality of types including the privilege game is provided, and the selection means is more than a case where the specific determination result is obtained in the first determination. Also, when a specific determination result is obtained in the second determination, the ratio of selecting the second privilege game is high.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 5 is the first determination in which the first determination is more likely to be executed than the second determination as the gaming state after the privileged game is completed in the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4. A gaming state setting means capable of setting at least a gaming state and a second gaming state in which the second determination is more likely to be executed than the first gaming state is provided, and the period setting means is provided in the first gaming state. When the second ball entry information is not stored in the second ball entry information storage means, the setting ratio of the advantageous dynamic display period becomes high.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1, the first entry information is acquired by the entry information acquisition means based on the entry of the game ball into the first entry means, while the second entry is obtained. The second ball entry information is acquired based on the ball entry of the game ball into the ball means. Based on the first ball entry information acquired by the ball entry information acquisition means, the first discrimination is executed by the first discrimination means by the first discrimination means, and the second discrimination means is executed based on the second ball entry information. The second determination is performed. The first identification information indicating the determination result of the first determination and the second identification information indicating the determination result of the second determination are displayed on the display means. In the display means, the dynamic display of the first identification information is executed by the first dynamic display execution means, and the dynamic display of the second identification information is executed by the second dynamic display execution means. While the second dynamic display of the identification information is being executed by the second dynamic low display executing means, it is acquired by the ball entry information acquisition means based on the fact that the game ball newly enters the second ball entry means. The second ball entry information is stored at least until the second ball entry information storage means executes the second determination by the second determination means. The dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the first identification information executed by the first dynamic display execution means is based on at least the number of stored second ball entry information stored in the second ball entry information storage means. , One dynamic display period is selected from a plurality of predetermined periods by the period selection means.
This has the effect of improving the interest of the player in the game.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, when the dynamic display of the second identification information is executed, the movement of the second identification information is performed. Since the dynamic display of the first identification information can be executed by the first dynamic display executing means while the target display is being executed, the first discrimination by the first discriminating means and the second discriminating by the second discriminating means are performed. There is an effect that the discrimination of 2 can be executed more efficiently.
According to the game machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect of the game machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, at least one second ball entry information is stored in the second ball entry information storage means. When the second ball entry information is not stored in the second ball entry information storage means, the ratio of selecting the advantageous dynamic display period advantageous to the player by the period selection means is higher than in the case where the second ball entry information is stored. , There is an effect that the game can be performed so that the second ball entry information storage means does not store the second ball entry information.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 3. That is, based on the result of a specific determination predetermined in the first determination or the second determination, the privilege game execution means executes the privilege game advantageous to the player. As the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, one is selected from a plurality of types including the first privilege game and the second privilege game which is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game. The type of award game is selected. The rate at which the second privilege game is selected by the selection means is higher when the specific determination result is obtained in the second determination than when the specific determination result is obtained in the first determination.
As a result, the second discriminating means can be used to play the game with the expectation that a specific discriminating result will be obtained, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 4. That is, as the game state after the privilege game is completed, the first game state in which the first determination is more likely to be executed than the second determination and the second determination in which the second determination is more likely to be executed than the first game state. The game state is configured to be configurable at least by the game state setting means. In the first game state, when the second ball entry information is not stored in the second ball entry information storage means, the ratio of setting the advantageous dynamic display period by the period setting means increases.
This has the effect of suppressing anomalous gaming methods that intentionally attempt to execute the second determination in the first gaming state in which the first determination is likely to be executed.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
64 First ball entry port (first ball entry means in the fourth embodiment)
81 Third symbol display device (display means)
640c Central second ball entry port (second ball entry means in the fourth embodiment)
S503, S504 First discriminating means in the fourth embodiment
S511, S1012 Third discriminating means in the fourth embodiment
S513, S1013 fourth game state changing means in Embodiment S608 period selection unit S609 first dynamic display execution means S706, S1206 benefits game executing hand stage S1003 in the fourth embodiment, S1004 second determining means in the fourth embodiment S1109 Second dynamic display execution means S21 41 Game state setting means according to the fourth embodiment

Claims (5)

A first ball entry means on which a game ball can enter, a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, and
The first ball entry information is acquired based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entry means, and the second ball entry information is based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means. The means of acquiring ball entry information and
The first determination means that executes the first determination based on the first entry information acquired before the entry information acquisition means, and the first determination means.
A second determination means that executes a second determination based on the second entry information acquired before the entry information acquisition means, and
A display means capable of displaying the first identification information indicating the determination result of the first determination and the second identification information indicating the determination result of the second determination.
A first dynamic display executing means for executing the dynamic display of the first identification information by the display means, and
A second dynamic display executing means that executes the dynamic display of the second identification information by the display means, and
While the second dynamic display executing means is executing the dynamic display of the second identification information, the ball entering information is acquired based on the fact that the game ball newly enters the second ball entering means. A second ball entry information storage means that can at least store the second ball entry information acquired by the means until the second determination by the second discrimination means is executed.
The number of stored second ball entry information stored in the second ball entry information storage means as the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the first identification information executed by the first dynamic display execution means. A gaming machine comprising a period selection means for selecting one dynamic display period from a plurality of predetermined periods based on at least one of the above. When the dynamic display of the second identification information is executed, the first dynamic display executing means dynamically displays the first identification information while executing the dynamic display of the second identification information. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is capable of performing the above. The period selection means has the second ball entry information stored in the second ball entry information storage means as compared with the case where at least one second ball entry information is stored in the second ball entry information storage means. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein when is not stored, the ratio of selecting an advantageous dynamic display period that is advantageous to the player is high. A privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on a specific determination result predetermined in the first determination or the second determination.
As the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, one of the above-mentioned one from a plurality of types including the first privilege game and the second privilege game which is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game. Equipped with a selection method that allows you to select the type of award game,
The selection means has a higher ratio of selecting the second privilege game when the specific determination result is obtained in the second determination than in the case where the specific determination result is obtained in the first determination. The gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein the gaming machine is a machine. As the gaming state after the privilege game is completed, the first gaming state in which the first determination is more likely to be executed than the second determination and the second determination are more likely to be executed than the first gaming state. A game state setting means capable of setting at least a second game state is provided.
In the first gaming state, the period setting means increases the setting ratio of the advantageous dynamic display period when the second ball entry information is not stored in the second ball entry information storage means. The gaming machine according to claim 4, wherein the gaming machine is characterized by being present.

Images